SERENA 

StarTool FDM 7.7.1 ®

Command Reference
Serena Proprietary and Confidential Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2001-2011 Serena Software, Inc. All rights reserved.
This document, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may
be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. Except as permitted
by such license, no part of this publication may be reproduced, photocopied, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Serena. Any reproduction
of such software product user documentation, regardless of whether the documentation
is reproduced in whole or in part, must be accompanied by this copyright statement in its
entirety, without modification.
This document contains proprietary and confidential information, and no reproduction or
dissemination of any information contained herein is allowed without the express
permission of Serena Software.
The content of this document is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change
without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Serena. Serena
assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this
document.

Trademarks
Serena, TeamTrack, StarTool, PVCS, Collage, Comparex, and ChangeMan are registered
trademarks of Serena Software, Inc. The Serena logo, Dimensions, RTM, Professional,
Version Manager, Builder, Meritage, Change Governance, Profit From Change, Command
Center, Composer, Reviewer, and Mover are trademarks of Serena Software, Inc.
All other products or company names are used for identification purposes only, and may
be trademarks of their respective owners.

U.S. Government Rights

Any Software product acquired by Licensee under this Agreement for or on behalf of the
U.S. Government, its agencies and instrumentalities is "commercial software" as defined
by the FAR. Use, duplication, and disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to the
restrictions set forth in the license under which the Software was acquired. The
manufacturer is Serena Software, Inc., 1900 Seaport Boulevard, 2nd Floor, Redwood City,
California 94063.

Publication date: January 2011

Table of Contents

Welcome To StarTool FDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Related Publications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Accessing the Electronic Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using the PDF Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Chapter 1 TSO Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Starting StarTool FDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
ISPMODE Startup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Member Names in Subcommands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Hexadecimal Member Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Default Member Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Member Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
TSO Subcommands and Functions Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Common Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
All Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Chapter 3 Commands — A to C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Subcommands and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ABE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ACFCOMP Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Command Reference 3
 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
ALIAS Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
ATTRIB Subcommand (for source members) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Operands — source members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Remarks — Source Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ATTRIB Subcommand (for load members) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Operands — Load Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Remarks — Load Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
BLK3380 Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
BLK3390 Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
BLK9345 Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

4 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
BROWSE Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
CALC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
CAX Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Operand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
CHANGE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
CMDTBL Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
COMBINE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Command Reference 5
 COMPARE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
COMPDIR Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
COMPRESS Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
CONDEND Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
CONTROL Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
COPY Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

6 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
CREATE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
CSECTS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

DCF Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
DDNAME Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
DECODE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
DELETE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Command Reference 7
 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
DELINK Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
DIRENTRY Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
DISASM Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
DISPLAY Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
DSAT Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
DSNAME Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
DUP Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

8 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
DVOL Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
EDIT Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
EDREC Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
ENCODE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
END Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
EXCLUDE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Command Reference 9
 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
EXEC Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

FILTER Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
FIND Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
FINDMOD Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
FIXPDS Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
FSE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

10 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 190
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 190
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 190
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 190
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 190
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 191
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 191
GO Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 192
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 192
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 192
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 192
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 192
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 192
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 193
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 193
HELP Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 194
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 194
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 194
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 194
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 194
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 194
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 194
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 194
HEX Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 195
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 195
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 195
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 195
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 195
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 195
HISTORY Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 196
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 197
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 197
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 197
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 197
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 198
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 199
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 205
IDCAMS Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 208
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 209
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 209
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 209
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 209
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 209
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 209
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 209
IF Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 211
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 212
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 212

Command Reference 11
 Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
ISPF Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
ISPMODE Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
ISPXEQ Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

LIST Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
LISTA Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
LISTC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

12 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
LISTF Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
LISTGRP Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
LISTV Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
LLA Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
LLA and Deleted Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
LOG Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
General LOG Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
MAP Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Command Reference 13
 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
MASK Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
MEMBERS Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
MEMLIST Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
MEMLIST and Deleted Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
NUCMAP Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

OPTIONS Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
OUTCOPY Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

14 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
PATTERN Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
PBROWSE Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
PEDIT Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Abbreviations and Synonyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
PVIEW Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
PGMDOC Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
PRINT Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Command Reference 15
 Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
PROFMAN Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
QUIT Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
READOBJ Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
RECALL Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
RENAME Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
REPLACE Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

16 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
REPRO Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
RESTORE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
REVIEW Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

SEPARATE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
SMPGEN Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
SUBLIST Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Command Reference 17
 Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
SUBMIT Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
STATUS Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
SVCMAP Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
TSO Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
TSOEDIT Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
TSOLIST Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

18 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
USAGE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

VERIFY Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
VMAP Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
VPRINT Subcommand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
VSAM Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
VTOC Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
VUSE Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Command Reference 19
 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
WHOHAS Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
WORKPAD Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
XREF Subcommand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
ZAP Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

20 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Appendix A Formatting Member Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Appendix B Update Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Appendix C Dialog Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Appendix D Attention Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Appendix E ABEND Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Command Reference 21
22 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1
Welcome To StarTool FDM

About This Book 23

Before You Begin 23
Conventions 23
Documentation 25

About This Book

This document describes StarTool® FDM (File and Data Manager) Version 7.7.1, a product
of Serena® Software, Inc. It provides reference information about the TSO command-line
syntax and parameters supported by StarTool FDM primary commands, subcommands,
and function-specific commands. For reference purposes, this document is organized
alphabetically by command name.

The separately licensed StarBat Option, DB2 Option, IMS Option, and Extended Compare
Option are described elsewhere.

StarTool FDM StarTool FDM is a multi-purpose file and data management utility for IBM mainframe
systems. It provides an ISPF-based, menu-driven, integrated interface to a variety of file
editors and data management tools for PDS, PDSE, VSAM, direct-access, IMS, and DB2
files. A TSO command-line interface is supported concurrently, and bulk file updates in
batch mode are also supported. Separately licensed product options allow users to
purchase only the capabilities they need.

Audience The intended audience for this document is IBM mainframe systems programmers and
application specialists who are already familiar with StarTool FDM commands and want a
reference organized by name for look-up of command syntax and function details.

Before You Begin

New Change bars in the left margin (shown at left) identify substantive changes to this
Information publication since StarTool FDM Version 7.6.3.

Corrections The Readme file on the product media contains updates and corrections to this manual
and Technical issued after the publication date. It also provides contact information for Serena
Support Customer Support.

Conventions
Terminology Throughout this document:
 z/OS refers to the z/OS™ and OS/390® IBM® operating systems.
 StarTool FDM may also be referenced as StarTool or FDM.

Command Reference 23
Welcome To StarTool FDM

 somnode is the high-level qualifier you specify for StarTool FDM installation libraries.
 vrm is the version, release, and modification level of StarTool FDM without
punctuation; for example, for StarTool FDM Version7.7.1, the value of vrm is 770.

Typographic The following textual conventions are used throughout this document to highlight special
Conventions information:

Convention Meaning
Bold Panel title or field name.
Italics Introduces new terms, sets off important information, or
marks document titles.
UPPERCASE Indicates keys or key combinations; for example, the
ENTER key.
Bright blue Clickable cross-reference or active hyperlink.
Monospaced JCL, source code, or message text. Also used for member
names, file names, and commands if these are not clear
from context.
MONOSPACED Required value or literal in code or JCL parameter.
UPPERCASE
monospaced Pattern for a field value or parameter you specify. Number
lowercase of characters is significant. Upper-case characters are
literals. Lower-case characters are placeholders that
indicate data type, where:
y = year
m = month
d = day
a = alphanumeric
n = numeric
x = other or mixed
? = one-character wild card
* = n-character wild card
Punctuation other than wild cards must be reproduced in
the position shown.
Examples: Examples:
 yyyy/mm/dd  International calendar date with four-character year, two-
character month, and two-character day separated by
required slashes, such as 2010/01/01.
 Alphanumeric character string in user-readable form, two
 C’aa’ characters long, such as C’K9’
 Binary number, two digits long, where n = 0 to 1, such
as B’10’
 B’nn’
 Decimal number, two digits long, where n = 0 to 9, such
as D’10’
 D’nn’
 Hexadecimal number, two digits long, where n = 0 to F,
such as X’C1’
 X’nn’
monospaced Descriptive placeholder for value or parameter you specify,
italics but not a pattern; for example, filename.
Square braces [ ] Optional parameter or choice of values. May be nested.

24 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Welcome To StarTool FDM

Convention Meaning
Vertical bar | Inside braces, a vertical bar separates mutually exclusive
parameter choices or values.
Ellipsis ... Optional repetitions of a pattern in a list.
Greater-than symbol > Separates items in a chain of menu or command selections
on a GUI client. For example, Start > All Programs >
Serena > product_name.

Documentation
A complete set of electronic product documentation for StarTool FDM is available on the
product distribution media. You can also download the complete documentation suite from
the Serena Customer Support Web site at http://www.serena.com/support/.

Printed installation guides and Quick Reference documents are shipped with the physical
product media.

Related Publications
Available StarTool FDM publications include:

Title Description
Serena StarTool FDM System requirements, installation instructions, and
Installation Guide configuration information for StarTool FDM.
Serena SER10TY Installation information for SER10TY licensing software and
User’s Guide instructions on how to apply license key SERtificates.
Serena StarTool FDM Overview of StarTool FDM commands, with syntax details for
Quick Reference frequently used functions. Includes PEDIT and StarBat
subcommands.
Serena StarTool FDM StarTool FDM concepts and facilities, with instructions for
User’s Guide using the ISPF-based menu-driven interface.
Serena StarTool FDM TSO command-line syntax and parameter reference,
Command Reference organized alphabetically. Interactive subcommands included
for major functions.
Serena StarTool FDM Advanced reference to operating system calls used by
System Services StarTool FDM.
Serena StarTool FDM Batch-mode interface for bulk changes to data sets.
StarTool FDM StarBat StarTool FDM functions invoked by JCL procedures.
Option
Serena StarTool FDM StarTool FDM data management functions for DB2 relational
DB2 Option database tables, columns, and rows, with SQL processing
support.
Serena StarTool FDM StarTool FDM data management functions for IMS
IMS Option hierarchical database files and structures.

Command Reference 25
Welcome To StarTool FDM

Title Description
Serena StarTool FDM Integrated file comparison utility based on Serena
Extended Compare Comparex. Data file versus text file comparison logic.
Option
Serena StarTool FDM Consolidated message reference for base product and all
Messages licensed product options, with error recovery
recommendations.

Accessing the Electronic Documentation

Electronic documentation is stored two different locations on the product distribution
media. The Readme file, the Master License and Services Agreement (MLSA), and the
StarTool FDM Installation Guide are located in the Documentation folder in the root
directory. They can be accessed without installing the product.

The PC client installer unloads the full document set from the binary product files to the
location you designate on your client PC during installation. The Readme file is an HTML
document that displays in your Web browser. All other documentation is provided in
Adobe’s Portable Document Format (PDF).

Using the PDF Documentation

To view PDF files, use Adobe® Reader®, which is freely available from Adobe on the
World Wide Web at http://www.adobe.com. Reader Version 7.0.5 or higher is
recommended.

TIP Be sure to download the full version of Reader. The more basic version does not
include the cross-document search feature.

This section highlights some of the main Reader features. For more detailed information,
see the Adobe Reader online help system.

The PDF manuals include the following features:

 Bookmarks. All of the online manuals contain predefined bookmarks that make it
easy for you to quickly jump to a specific topic. By default, the bookmarks appear to
the left of each online manual.
 Links. Cross-reference links within an online manual enable you to jump to other
sections within the manual and to other manuals with a single mouse click. These
links appear in blue.
 Printing. While viewing a manual, you can print the current page, a range of pages,
or the entire manual.
 Advanced search. Starting with Version 6, Adobe Reader includes an advanced
search feature that enables you to search across multiple PDF files in a specified
directory. (This is in addition to using any search index created by Adobe Catalog—see
step 3 below.)

To search across multiple PDF documents at once, perform the following steps (requires
Adobe Reader Version 6 or higher):

1 In Adobe Reader, select Edit > Search (or press CTRL+F).

26 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Welcome To StarTool FDM

2 In the text box, enter the word or phrase for which you want to search.

3 Select the All PDF Documents in option, and browse to select the folder in which
you want to search. (If you have a document open that has an Adobe Catalog index
attached, you can leave the In the index named... option selected to search across
all the manuals in the index.)

4 Optionally, select one or more of the additional search options, such as Whole words
only and Case-Sensitive.

5 Click the Search button.

NOTE Optionally, you can click the Use Advanced Search Options link near the
lower right corner of the application window to enable additional, more powerful
search options. (If this link says Use Basic Search Options instead, the advanced
options are already enabled.) For details, see Adobe Reader's online help.

Command Reference 27
Welcome To StarTool FDM

28 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Chapter 1
TSO Command Summary

Starting StarTool FDM

Issue the STARTOOL command at the TSO command line to start StarTool FDM. If you are
already in an ISPF session when you issue the command, StarTool FDM defaults to the
ISPF-mode interface (ISPMODE) on startup. Otherwise, the product executes in a TSO
session and invokes ISPF menus externally (XISPMODE).

Examples
STARTOOL lib.cntl
TSO STARTOOL lib.cntl

Syntax
STARTOOL
{dsn [VOLUME(vser)/VOLSET(vdef)][SHR/OLD]|
*|
FILE(ddname) [NUMBER(num)]}
[ISPMODE|XISPMODE|ISPXEQ command|subcommand|MEMLIST memgroup]

Aliases
PDS, PDSE

Defaults
ISPMODE if in an ISPF session, otherwise XISPMODE; SHR

Required
dsn or FILE(ddname)

Operands
dsn Identifies the data set name. If you fail to enter the data set
name in quotes (‘), your TSO PREFIX is appended to the start
of the entered data set name. If you enter * in this position,
the system assumes FILE(ISPPROF). If this is a migrated data
set, StarTool FDM changes to your ISPF profile data set to avoid
startup delays. If your system has password security, enter
your data set password after the data set name and a slash /.
The syntax is dsn/password.

Command Reference 29
Chapter 1 TSO Command Summary

VOLUME(vser) Specifies the volume name on which the data set resides. If
you enter a volume name, SYSALLDA is assumed as the unit
name; otherwise, StarTool FDM uses the unit name from the
catalog. Use this parameter if the data set is not cataloged or if
the catalog entry is not to be used. To use the catalog for the
STARTOOL command, even if VOLSET is in effect, enter
VOLUME(*).
VOLSET(vdef) Specifies a default volume name for data set references. If you
enter VOLSET(NEWRES), subsequent CHANGE subcommands
with a data set name and no VOLUME parameter assume
VOLUME(NEWRES). Use this parameter if you want a default
volume. To nullify the effect of VOLSET, enter VOLSET(*) on a
subsequent CHANGE subcommand.
SHR Allocate the data set with a disposition of SHR (share). Allow
simultaneous use of this data set by others.
OLD Allocate the data set with a disposition of OLD. Do not allow
simultaneous use of this data set by others. The use of SHR is
recommended.
FILE(ddname) Identifies the DDNAME of a pre-allocated data set. Only disk
data sets (including VIO) are supported. If you use the FILE
keyword, then do not use dsn, SHR/OLD, VOLSET, and
VOLUME. If the data set is concatenated, the data set is
reallocated so you can use SHR or OLD.
NUMBER(num) Specifies the concatenation number for the DDNAME allocation
for the FILE keyword. num defaults to 1 but if num is larger
than the number of concatenated data sets, the last data set in
the sequence is used.
ISPMODE Requests that StarTool FDM initialize in ISPMODE. This is the
initial mode only; you can suspend ISPMODE and MEMLIST
with a later subcommand.
XISPMODE Requests that StarTool FDM initialize in line mode (independent
of ISPF). This is the initial mode only; at a later time, you can
enter an ISPMODE or MEMLIST subcommand.
MEMLIST memgroup Requests that StarTool FDM initialize with a member list set to
the named member group. This is the initial mode only; you
can suspend MEMLIST and ISPMODE with a later subcommand.
ISPXEQ command Requests that StarTool FDM initialize with the ISPMODE service
(usually DDNAME, LISTA, LISTC, LISTF or LISTV) named. This
is the initial mode only; you can enter other STARTOOL
subcommands after the initial display.
subcommand Requests that StarTool FDM perform the single subcommand
and terminate. This is a special subcommand mode for
performing only a single subcommand. In this mode, ISPF
services are not available and StarTool FDM operates in line
mode only. Also, there is no YES/NO prompting; instead, YES
responses are assumed.
When you invoke StarTool FDM in single subcommand mode,
the return code is set to the numeric value of the first warning
or error message encountered.

30 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 1 TSO Command Summary

ISPMODE Startup Panel

The following panel displays when you start StarTool FDM from ISPF.

------------------------------ ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 --------------- ROW 1 TO

13 OF 13
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===>CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=PDS100I StarTool/SuperEdit -- Version v.r.m

Proprietary software product of SERENA Software Inc.

LICENSED TO: your corporate name/trial offer expires ...
your city, state, zip/agent to contact for license ...
All other rights reserved - use of this software
product by unauthorized persons is prohibited.

PDS200I DISP UNIT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3390 FB 80 13680 1X 100 19 50 TRK 17

PDS300A ENTER OPTION -- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=

********************************* BOTTOM OF DATA **********************************

Member Names in Subcommands

Hexadecimal Member Names

Enter member names in hexadecimal for any of the subcommands that accept member
names (or partial member names) as input. For these subcommands, x'd7c4e2c5' and
PDSE are equivalent. Also, x'333' and x'0333' are equivalent.

Default Member Names

If you enter * in the member group position for an ABE, ACFCOMP, BROWSE, COMBINE,
COMPDIR, COPY, DCF, DELETE, DELINK, DIRENTRY, DISASM, DUP, EDIT, EXCLUDE, FIND,
FSE, HISTORY, IF, LIST, LLA, MAP, MEMBERS, MEMLIST, OUTCOPY, PGMDOC, PRINT,
READOBJ, REPLACE, REPRO, REVIEW, SMPGEN, SPFEDIT, SUBLIST, SUBMIT, TSOEDIT,
TSOLIST, VERIFY, VPRINT or XREF subcommand, the STARTOOL command uses the last
member name or member group entered for any of these subcommands.

When you specify a default member name or group by one of the above subcommands,
the member name or group becomes the “current member group” or the “default member
name or group” (the ALIAS, RENAME, and RESTORE subcommands also modify the
default member group but do not process member groups). The current member group
can be referred to by this set of subcommands until it is again redefined.

Member Groups
Subcommands that allow default member names also accept member groups as member
names. A member group can be a single member name, a range of member names, a
member name pattern, or a lists of member names or other valid member group
specifications. See Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names", for more information.

1 Enter a single asterisk (*) to refer to the currently defined member group.

Command Reference 31
Chapter 1 TSO Command Summary

2 A member name range is of the form name1:name2, which selects members based on
character string ranges in their names.

3 A pattern member name is of the form name1/name2, which selects members based
on character string matches in their names.

4 A combination member name is of the form name1*name2, which selects members

based on the range name1:name1 and on the pattern name2 in the remainder of the
member name.

5 A placeholder is allowed in a simple member name, a pattern member name or in a

combination member name. Specify a placeholder by using a ? or % anywhere in the
member name. It acts as a single-character wildcard.

6 A member name list is a parenthesized list of member name specifications. It contains

normal member names as well as the member group forms described above. When
you use a member list, the subcommand receives control separately for each member
specification in the list.

7 Enter a single equal symbol (=) to refer to the list of members in the current
MEMLIST. If a MEMLIST is not active, the equal symbol is equivalent to an asterisk
(the current member group).

TSO Subcommands and Functions Table

StarTool FDM supports about 100 different subcommands that you can invoke at the TSO
command line. Most of these have multiple operands.

When executing a subcommand from the TSO command line, you can abbreviate
subcommand names to the first few characters. You can also abbreviate any keyword
operands for these subcommands. The general rule is that you abbreviate by dropping
ending characters of a keyword name as long as the abbreviated keyword remains unique
for the subcommand.

A summary of StarTool FDM subcommands appears below. Subsequent chapters provide

detailed syntax and parameter information. Subcommands are listed in alphabetical order.

Subcommand Short Function Heading Source Load

ABE AB Edits data “ABE yes yes
Subcommand”
ACFCOMP ACF Compiles source “ACFCOMP yes no
CA-ACF2 rules Subcommand”
ALIAS AL Adds an alias “ALIAS yes yes
name for a Subcommand”
member
A Lists and “ATTRIB yes yes
modifies Subcommand (for
member source members)”
attributes and “ATTRIB
Subcommand (for
load members)”

32 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 1 TSO Command Summary

Subcommand Short Function Heading Source Load

BLK3380 BLK338 Optimizes 3380 “BLK3380 yes yes
disk utilization Subcommand”
BLK3390 BLK339 Optimizes 3390 “BLK3390 yes yes
disk utilization Subcommand”
BLK9345 BLK9 Optimizes 9345 “BLK9345 yes yes
disk utilization Subcommand”
BROWSE B Browses data “BROWSE yes yes
Subcommand”
CALC CAL Floating point “CALC Function” yes yes
calculator
(ISPMODE only)
CAX CAX Lists active “CAX Function” yes yes
system catalogs
(ISPMODE only)
CHANGE C Switches to a “CHANGE yes yes
different data Subcommand”
set
CMDTBL CMD Manages ISPF “CMDTBL Function” yes yes
command tables
COMBINE COMB Joins several “COMBINE yes no
members Subcommand”
together
COMPARE CO Displays data “COMPARE yes yes
differences Subcommand”
COMPDIR COMPD Compares “COMPDIR yes yes
member Subcommand”
directory entries
COMPRESS COMPR Compresses “COMPRESS yes yes
data sets Subcommand”
CONDEND COND Conditionally “CONDEND yes yes
terminates Subcommand”
StarTool FDM
CONTROL CON Controls “CONTROL yes yes
StarTool FDM Subcommand”
global options
COPY COP Copies data “COPY yes yes
selectively Subcommand”
CREATE CR Creates a data “CREATE yes yes
set based on Subcommand”
the current data
set
CSECTS CS Maps module “CSECTS Function” no yes
CSECTs
(ISPMODE only)
DCF DC Scripts a data “DCF yes no
set Subcommand”

Command Reference 33
Chapter 1 TSO Command Summary

Subcommand Short Function Heading Source Load

DDNAME DD Lists TSO “DDNAME yes yes
session Function”
allocations
(ISPMODE only)
DECODE DEC Decrypts a “DECODE yes no
member Subcommand”
DELETE DEL Deletes “DELETE yes yes
members Subcommand”
DELINK DELI Produces object “DELINK no yes
code from a Subcommand”
load module
DIRENTRY DIR Interprets “DIRENTRY yes yes
member Subcommand”
directory entries
DISASM DISA Disassembles “DISASM no yes
load modules Subcommand”
DISPLAY D Lists member “DISPLAY yes yes
names from the Subcommand”
directory
DSAT DSA Displays data “DSAT yes yes
set attributes Subcommand”
DSNAME DS Displays data “DSNAME yes yes
set allocation Subcommand”
information
DUP DU Copies data “DUP yes yes
selectively Subcommand”
DVOL DV Displays volume “DVOL yes yes
attributes and Subcommand”
statistics
EDIT E Edits data “EDIT yes no
Subcommand”
EDREC EDR Invokes ISPF “EDREC yes no
edit recovery Subcommand”
ENCODE ENC Encrypts a “ENCODE yes no
member Subcommand”
END EN Terminates the “END yes yes
current function Subcommand”
of StarTool FDM
EXCLUDE EXC Drops members “EXCLUDE yes yes
from MEMLIST Subcommand”
EXEC EX Executes a “EXEC yes yes
CLIST with Subcommand”
subcommands
FILTER FIL Filters data sets “FILTER Function” yes yes
for LISTC/LISTF
and MASK

34 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 1 TSO Command Summary

Subcommand Short Function Heading Source Load

FIND FI Searches for a “FIND yes yes
string Subcommand”
FINDMOD FINDM Locates system “FINDMOD yes yes
modules Subcommand”
FIXPDS FIX Modifies a data “FIXPDS yes yes
set Subcommand”
FSE FS Edits data “FSE yes no
Subcommand”
GO GO Switches “GO Function” yes yes
StarTool FDM
sessions
(ISPMODE only)
HELP H Provides “HELP yes yes
information on Subcommand”
using StarTool
FDM
HEX HEX Hexadecimal “HEX Function” yes yes
calculator
(ISPMODE only)
HISTORY HI Displays CSECT “HISTORY no yes
IDR data from a Subcommand”
module
IDCAMS IDC Invokes an “IDCAMS no no
IDCAMS Subcommand”
command
IF IF Searches for “IF Subcommand” yes yes
members with
desired
attributes
ISPF ISPF Stacks an ISPF “ISPF yes yes
session Subcommand”
ISPMODE ISPM Switches “ISPMODE yes yes
StarTool FDM to Function”
an ISPF display
mode
ISPXEQ ISPX Invokes “ISPXEQ Function” yes yes
StarTool FDM
with an
ISPMODE option
LIST LI Displays data “LIST yes yes
Subcommand”
LISTA LA Lists TSO “LISTA Function” yes yes
session
allocations
(ISPMODE only)
LISTC LC Lists data sets “LISTC Function” yes yes
from a catalog
(ISPMODE only)

Command Reference 35
Chapter 1 TSO Command Summary

Subcommand Short Function Heading Source Load

LISTF LF Lists data sets “LISTF Function” yes yes
from a volume
(ISPMODE only)
LISTGRP LISTG Displays the “LISTGRP yes yes
member group Subcommand”
names
LISTV LV Lists disk “LISTV Function” yes yes
volumes
(ISPMODE only)
LLA LLA Refreshes LLA “LLA yes yes
directory entries Subcommand” and
“LLA and Deleted
Members”
LOG LO Selects one of 9 “LOG Function” yes yes
session logs
(ISPMODE only)
MAP MA Displays the “MAP no yes
CSECT structure Subcommand”
of a module
MASK MAS Front-end LISTC “MASK Function” yes yes
and LISTF
(ISPMODE only)
MEMBERS ME Lists member “MEMBERS yes yes
names in a Subcommand”
member group
MEMLIST ML Builds a “MEMLIST yes yes
member list Function” and
table (ISPMODE “MEMLIST and
only) Deleted Members”
NUCMAP NUC Maps nucleus “NUCMAP Function” yes yes
(ISPMODE only)
OPTIONS O Provides a “OPTIONS yes yes
directory of Subcommand”
subcommands
OUTCOPY OUTC Formats utility “OUTCOPY yes yes
control Subcommand”
statements
PATTERN P Displays “PATTERN yes yes
member names Subcommand”
from the
directory
PBROWSE PB Browses data “PBROWSE yes yes
(ISPMODE only) Function”
PEDIT PE Edits data “PEDIT Function” yes yes
(ISPMODE only)
PVIEW PV Edits data in “PVIEW Function” yes yes
VIEW mode
(ISPMODE only)

36 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 1 TSO Command Summary

Subcommand Short Function Heading Source Load

PGMDOC PGM Lists module “PGMDOC no yes
descriptions Subcommand”
PRINT PR Prints a “PRINT yes yes
hardcopy listing Subcommand”
PROFMAN PRO Manages saved “PROFMAN yes yes
tables Function”
(ISPMODE only)
QUIT Q Terminates “QUIT yes yes
StarTool FDM Subcommand”
READOBJ READ Disassembles “READOBJ yes no
object code Subcommand”
RECALL R Displays the “RECALL yes yes
previous Subcommand”
subcommand
RENAME REN Changes a “RENAME yes yes
member’s name Subcommand”
REPLACE REPL Changes “REPLACE yes yes
member Subcommand”
contents
REPRO REPR Rebuilds or “REPRO yes yes
creates Subcommand”
members
RESTORE RES Resurrects “RESTORE yes yes
deleted Subcommand”
members
REVIEW REV Browses a “REVIEW yes yes
member without Subcommand”
ISPF
SEPARATE SEP Splits into “SEPARATE yes no
members Subcommand”
SMPGEN SM Generates SMP/ “SMPGEN yes yes
E sysmods Subcommand”
SUBLIST SUBL Creates a “SUBLIST yes yes
member subset Subcommand”
SUBMIT SUB Submits data “SUBMIT yes no
for background Subcommand”
processing
STATUS ST Displays the “STATUS Function” yes yes
status of
ISPMODE
functions
SVCMAP SVC Investigates “SVCMAP yes yes
SVC routines Subcommand”
TSO T Invokes a TSO “TSO yes yes
command Subcommand”
processor or
CLIST

Command Reference 37
Chapter 1 TSO Command Summary

Subcommand Short Function Heading Source Load

TSOEDIT TSOE Edits data “TSOEDIT yes no
Subcommand”
TSOLIST TSOL Lists data “TSOLIST yes yes
Subcommand”
USAGE U Displays data “USAGE yes yes
set statistics Subcommand”
VERIFY V Validates “VERIFY yes yes
members or a Subcommand”
data set
VMAP VM Displays a disk “VMAP Function” yes yes
volume map
(ISPMODE only)
VPRINT VP Prints on a “VPRINT yes yes
VTAM printer Subcommand”
VSAM Invokes VSAM “VSAM
Services Subcommand”
VTOC VT Displays data “VTOC yes yes
sets on disk Subcommand”
volumes
VUSE VU Displays disk “VUSE yes yes
usage and Subcommand”
statistics
WHOHAS WH Checks “WHOHAS yes yes
allocation status Subcommand”
of a data set
WORKPAD W Stores or “WORKPAD yes yes
executes Function”
commands
(ISPMODE only)
XREF XR Displays intra- “XREF no yes
module Subcommand”
references
ZAP Z Modifies load “ZAP Function” no yes
module
(ISPMODE only)

38 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Chapter 2
ISPF Interface Commands

This section lists all interactive StarTool FDM commands in alphabetical order. Defaults are
underlined and the shortest valid abbreviation for a command name is shown before the
[brackets]. For example, a command shown as COMM[ENT] could be specified as COMM,
COMME, COMMEN, or COMMENT.

Common Commands
This section documents ISPMODE-only commands that you can enter in any ISPMODE
function. <Xref>“All Commands” documents all ISPMODE only commands that can be
entered (including commands specific to a single function).

The following commands are supported by StarTool FDM anywhere in ISPMODE:

* Merges current member group members into the MEMLIST table.

*cm ERR- t=”Command,*”>

? Provides extended help on up to five warning or error messages

from the last subcommand.
/* Allows any following information to be entered as comments.
*cm ERR- t=”Command,/*”>

ALIASCHK Alias check. Checks aliases and adds all associated members to
the MEMLIST display.
ALL MEMLIST all. Adds all members in the data set to the MEMLIST
display.
ALLOC[ERR] Goes to a tutorial explaining dynamic allocation error codes.
ALTC[MD] Executes a subcommand (previously saved by SETALT) on the
current data set.
ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the current table.
APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and
executes each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

BLK[SIZE] Provides information on disk track utilization for optimal blocking.

CAN[CEL] Cancels pending line commands for the function specified.
Syntax CAN CSE/CAX/LA/LF/LV/ML/W/ALL

CI[SIZE] Provides information on optimal control interval sizes for VSAM

data sets.
COMM[ENT] Allows following information to be entered as comments.
DEF[INE] Provides the equivalent of IDCAMS; DEFINE

Command Reference 39
Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

DR[OP] Terminates an active GO session by number.

Syntax DROP [*/n] [PROMPT]

(where n defaults to the current GO session)

DUA[L] Displays a double or triple line view of the current table.
EDITL[OG] Enters an edit session on the output from the last subcommand.
(or EL[OG])
EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on data from the current function table.
(or ET[BL])
EQ[UATE] SUBLIST =. Resets the current member group to the members in
the current MEMLIST.
EXPA[ND] Prompts for FIXPDS operands that add directory blocks and disk
space.
GR[OUP] Provides a prompt panel for specifying a member group followed
by a prompt for a subcommand.
IN[DEX] Goes to the StarTool FDM tutorial index.
LAS[TCMDS] Presents the last 32 primary commands for selection by number
for modification and reuse.
LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the current data. PF keys 10
and 22 are normally set to LEFT.
MC[OPY] Interfaces with the extended copy feature using a default data set
name as set in MODEL.
M[ENU] Provides menu system command and operand entry assistance.
Also use MENU to switch between the StarTool FDM primary
option panel and the primary panels for licensed options. You can
chain items as in M.3.3 (or its equivalent, 3.3). You can invoke
entry assist panels for most subcommands as in M.FIND (or its
equivalent, FIND).
Syntax MENU [ON/OFF]

MODEL Provides a prompt panel (with initial data set values) for the
CREATE or IDCAMS subcommand.
MON[TH] Merges members updated or created this month into the
MEMLIST.
NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the current table.
O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the current function and
operand syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the current function table to print or to a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

PAN[EL] Selects a panel using ISPF display services (normally used for
panel testing).
Syntax PANEL member

PEND Checks for pending line commands and selects the next one. If no
line commands are pending, the command is ignored or the
primary MENU is selected if MENU mode is enabled.
PRIM[ER] Goes to a StarTool FDM introductory tutorial.

40 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

R[ECALL] Displays the last StarTool FDM subcommand for modification and
(or RC) rentry. RECALL also retrieves subcommands from the log.
REL[EASE] Prompts for FIXPDS operands that release excess disk space.
RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find). In the log, it resets the display start
location and positions the cursor over the string; otherwise, it just
positions the display start location. PF keys 5 and 17 are normally
set to RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the current data. PF keys 11
and 23 are normally set to RIGHT.
SET Prompts for one of the following SET services.
SETA[LL] Controls StarTool FDM combined defaults
SETALT Recalls and saves a subcommand for repeated use later by
ALTCMD.
SETC[OLOR] Controls screen colors and highlighting.
SETD[SN] Sets data set controls.
SETK[EYS] Controls PF keys for StarTool FDM panels (for ISPF 4.x users, the
KEYS command can be used for the same effect as SETKEYS).
SETP[ANEL] Controls optional panels and panel defaults.
SETSEEK Specifies the default member name for the SEEK line command.
SETSEL Specifies alias names for S (or SELECT) by function.
SETU[SER] Controls dynamic primary commands. Specify command names
and their actions.
SUS[PEND] Terminates ISPMODE temporarily and enters line mode
processing. Restart ISPMODE with the same log table by entering
an ISPMODE, ISPXEQ, or MEMLIST subcommand. While ISPMODE
is suspended, IND$FILE is supported for PC SEND and RECEIVE.
TAG Forms a member group containing only members marked with
*TAG* in the DATA/MSG field for MEMLIST. Otherwise, applies the
specified line command to table entries marked with *TAG* in the
DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
TOD[AY] Merges members updated or created today into the MEMLIST.
TRANS Provides a translation service to convert a hex, decimal, or
EBCDIC character to the other forms.
Syntax TRANS 1-to-2-hex/1-to-3-decimal/char
[HEX/NUMBER/CHAR]

TRAP Interfaces with TSO commands to capture their output lines in the
log.
Syntax TRAP tsocommand [anyoperands]

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are

maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as
well as your installation. Several of these panels also allow
dynamic primary commands with which you specify command
names and their corresponding actions.
WE[EK] Merges members updated or created this week into the MEMLIST.
X Clears the current table relative to the cursor position.

Command Reference 41
Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the current table. This is equivalent to X ALL

XC[OPY] Interfaces with the extended copy feature.
XM[IT] Transmits the data set to another user.

All Commands
This section documents all ISPMODE-only commands that can be entered (including
commands specific to a single function).

Global commands are STARTOOL subcommands that apply to all data sets in a DDNAME/
LISTA, LISTC/LISTF or WORKPAD table. A command named GLOBAL is a general global
command. Follow GLOBAL with any STARTOOL subcommand. The subcommand is issued
against each data set in the table.

The FIND, REPLACE, COMPRESS, MODEL, SEEK and WHOHAS commands are also global
for these tables. In LISTC/LISTF tables, the FIND, REPLACE, COMPRESS and SEEK
commands skip over non-partitioned data sets. This happens because the FIND and
REPLACE subcommands use different subcommand syntax for partitioned data sets and
non-partitioned data sets. If you want to search or update non-partitioned data sets, type
GLOBAL followed by FIND or REPLACE and its operands.

The following commands are supported by StarTool FDM in ISPMODE. Several of these
commands are supported only in a single function:

* Merges current member group members into the MEMLIST table.

*cm ERR- t=”Command,*”>

? Provides extended help on up to five warning or error messages

from the last subcommand.
/* Allows any following information to be entered as comments.
*cm ERR- t=”Command,/*”>

ADD In WORKPAD, adds 5 blank table lines to the end of the WORKPAD
table.
In LISTV, adds data sets to the LISTF table for all volumes in the
LISTV table without prompting.
ALIASCHK Alias check. Checks aliases and adds all associated members to the
MEMLIST display.
ALL MEMLISTs all. Adds all members in the data set to the MEMLIST
display.
ALLOC[ERR] Goes to a tutorial explaining dynamic allocation error codes.
ALTC[MD] Executes a subcommand (previously saved by SETALT) on the
current data set.
ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the current table
APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

42 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

BA[SE] In ZAP, resets the base address for this CSECT (like an AMASPZAP
BASE statement).
Syntax BASE hexaddress

(1 to 6 hexadecimal digits)
BAT[CHJCL] In DDNAME, LISTA, LOG and MEMLIST builds batch JCL from
information in the table.
BLK[SIZE] Provides information on disk track utilization for optimal blocking.
BOU[NDS] In PEDIT, specifies default find column limits. BOUNDS OFF and
BOUNDS with no operand turn off bounds processing. BOUNDS LIST
shows current boundaries.
Syntax BOUNDS nn mm/ OFF / LIST

BU[ILD] In ZAP, outputs AMASPZAP format output without changing the data
set. Note that AMASPZAP backout controls are also formatted as
comments.
CAN[CEL] In LOG after a reply required for RESTORE, specifies that StarTool
FDM terminate RESTORE processing. A YES response allows the
restoration of the current deleted member and a NO response skips
the current deleted member for RESTORE processing.
Otherwise, cancels pending line commands for the function
specified.
Syntax CAN CSE/CAX/LA/LF/LV/ML/W/ALL

CAN[CEL] In PEDIT, terminates the edit session with no data updates.

CB In PEDIT, prompts for a COBOL, Assembler or PL/I copybook name
to overlay define edit records.
Syntax
CB [ON]/[OFF]/[NEW]/[FIRST]/[NEXT]/[PREV]
[ON] -- default, switches to copybook mode
[OFF] -- reverts to the previous PEDIT display
[NEW] -- prompts for a new copybook member
[FIRST]-- switches to the first copybook with matching values
[NEXT] -- switches to the next base copybook that matches
[PREV] -- switches to the previous base copybook that matches

CBMAP In PEDIT, prompts for a COBOL, Assembler or PL/I copybook name

to display independently of edit records. CBMAP also sets the default
copybook data set and member for the CB line command.
C[HANGE] In PEDIT, updates a character string or a hexadecimal string.
Syntax
CHANGE anystring newstring [nn mm] [ASIS] [ALL]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]

(where nn and mm are column numbers)

The two strings must be the same length.
CI[SIZE] Provides information on optimal control interval sizes for VSAM data
sets.
CLOSE In PEDIT, same as END, updates changed records and terminates
PEDIT.
COLS In LOG, provides a column ruler in the log for determining column
numbers.

Command Reference 43
Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

CO[LS] In PBROWSE, displays a columns line on the first line of the data
area. The columns line remain at the top of the data display. It is
useful in identifying columns to be used with the FIND command.
Syntax COLS [ON/OFF]

COMM[ENT] Allows any following information to be entered as comments.

COMPR[ESS] Global command in LISTA/DDNAME, LISTC/LISTF, and WORKPAD,
changes to each data set in the table and issues a COMPRESS
subcommand. In LISTC/LISTF tables, non-partitioned data sets are
skipped.
Syntax COMPRESS [LIST/NOLIST/SUMMARY]

CONT[INUE] In LOG after a checkpoint, specifies that StarTool FDM continue the
current interrupted process until the next checkpoint interval as
specified by SETALL. Use END to terminate the process.
COPYBOOK In PEDIT, prompts for a COBOL, Assembler or PL/I copybook name
to overlay define edit records. See CB for keyword details.
Syntax
COPYBOOK [ON]/[OFF]/[NEW]/[FIRST]/[NEXT]/[PREV]

CREATE In PEDIT, creates a new partitioned data set member from marked
copy or move data lines in an edit session.
Syntax CREATE [member]

(if a member name is not specified, extended CREATE is used)

CUT In PEDIT, places marked edit sessions lines into the StarTool FDM
clipboard. In a later PEDIT or ISPF edit session, use PASTE to place
these lines back into a session.
Syntax
CUT [mm] [ADD/REPL] [DEFAULTS]
mm -- two character table name
ADD -- add to the current clipboard
REPL -- replace clipboard contents
DEFAULTS -- display a panel to set defaults

DEF[INE] Provides the equivalent of IDCAMS; DEFINE.

DIS[PLAY] In PEDIT, displays operands and defaults for COPYBOOK, SCREEN,
VERTICAL, SHOW, and HIDE.
DR[OP] Terminates an active GO session by number.
Syntax DROP [*/n] [PROMPT]

(where n defaults to the current GO session)

DUA[L] Displays a double or triple line view of the current table.
EDITL[OG] Enters an edit session on the output from the last subcommand.
(or EL[OG])
EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on data from the current function table.
(or ET[BL])
END In PEDIT, same as CLOSE, updates changed records and terminates
PEDIT.
EQ[UATE] SUBLIST =. Resets the current member group to the members in
the current MEMLIST.

44 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

ER[ASE] In LISTC/LISTF and WORKPAD, deletes the current table in memory

and disk.
EXPA[ND] Prompts for FIXPDS operands that add directory blocks and disk
space.
EXPR[ESS] In CAX, CSECTS, LISTA/DDNAME, LISTC/LISTF, LISTV, MEMLIST,
NUCMAP, WORKPAD, and ZAP executes all entered line commands
without pauses between individual commands.
F Finds a string. In LOG, it resets the display start location and
positions the cursor over the string; otherwise, it just positions the
display start location.
Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]

FI[ND] Global command in LISTA/DDNAME, LISTC/LISTF, and WORKPAD,

changes to each data set in the table and issues a FIND
subcommand. In LISTC/LISTF tables, non-partitioned data sets are
skipped. In other tables, do not attempt to search mixed partitioned
and non-partitioned data sets with a single FIND global command.
Syntax FIND memgroup 'anystring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]

F[IND] In PEDIT, finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax
FIND anystring [nn mm] [ASIS] [ALL]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[CHECK] -for copybook, searches for invalid packed decimal
[NAME] -for copybook, positions to a copybook variable name
[SAME] - for copybook, searches only the current record

(where nn and mm are column numbers)

F[IND] In PBROWSE, finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax FIND anystring [nn mm] [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]

(where nn and mm are column numbers)

GL[OBAL] Global command in LISTA/DDNAME, LISTC/LISTF, and WORKPAD
changes to each data set in the table and issues any StarTool FDM
subcommand.
Syntax GLOBAL anysubcommand [anyoperands]

GR[OUP] Provides a prompt panel for specifying a member group followed by

a prompt for a subcommand.
HEX In PBROWSE and PEDIT, sets HEX display mode on or off.
Syntax HEX [ON/OFF]

HIDE In PEDIT, for copybook display or VERTICAL display, excludes named

or numbered elements from the current display.

Command Reference 45
Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

Syntax
HIDE {ALL/varnam/gennam/n1 [TO] n2} GROUP
ALL -- all variables are to be hidden
varnam -- exact variable name from the copybook
gennam -- partial variable name like FORM-DETAIL*
n1 -- entry number for a variable from SCREEN NUMBER
TO -- used with n2 to indicate a range
n2 -- a second entry number to specify a range end with TO
GROUP -- hides all variables from a given copybook level
ID In LISTC/LISTF and WORKPAD, changes the table ID name.
Syntax ID name

(where name is a 1- to 6-character alphanumeric name).

IDR[DATA] In ZAP, supplies the IDRDATA for the current ZAP.
Syntax IDRDATA idrname

IN[DEX] Goes to the StarTool FDM tutorial index.

INS[ERT] In WORKPAD, adds blank WORKPAD table lines.
Syntax INSERT [nn] [TOP/BOTTOM/HERE]

(where nn defaults to 5)
KEY In PEDIT, positions directly to the record with the corresponding
record key.
Syntax KEY 'record key' / x'hexkey'

LAS[TCMDS] Presents the last 32 primary commands for selection by number, for
modification and reuse.
LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the current data. PF keys 10 and
22 are normally set to LEFT.
LISTVT[OC] In LISTV, adds data sets to the LISTF table for all volumes in the
LISTV table after a prompt.
LO[AD] In LISTC/LISTF and WORKPAD, loads data set names from operating
system control blocks.
Syntax LOAD APFLST/LNKLST/LPALST [RESET]

L[OCATE] In CAX, CSECTS, LISTC/LISTF, LISTV, MEMLIST, NUCMAP, and ZAP

positions to a data line in sorted tables by searching the current
sorted column for the specified data. Type LOCATE without operands
to go to a prompting panel.
Syntax LOCATE datavalue

L[OCATE] In PBROWSE, positions directly to the specified record number.

Syntax LOCATE recnumber

L[OCATE] In PEDIT, positions directly to a record number or duplicate record

(by key).
Syntax LOCATE recnumber [DUP] [FIRST]

MC[OPY] Interfaces with the extended copy feature using a default data set
name as set in MODEL.

46 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

M[ENU] Provides menu system command and operand entry assistance. Also
use MENU to switch between the StarTool FDM primary option panel
and the primary panels for other licensed options. Items can be
chained as in M.3.3 (or its equivalent, 3.3). In addition, entry assist
panels for most subcommands can be invoked as in M.FIND (or its
equivalent, FIND).
Syntax MENU [ON/OFF]

MER[GE] In MEMLIST, LISTC/LISTF and WORKPAD, merges data from a

different table into the current table.
Syntax MERGE name [GROUP/SAMPLE] [RESET]

(where name is 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters)

Syntax [TOP/BOTTOM/HERE]

(for WORKPAD only)

MINE In MEMLIST, builds a member list of members with ISPF statistics
that were saved by the current USERID.
MODE In WORKPAD, specifies whether or not modified WORKPAD lines are
to be executed automatically.
Syntax MODE [EXEC/NOEXEC]

MODEL global command in LISTA/DDNAME, LISTC/LISTF and WORKPAD,

changes to each data set in the table and issues a MODEL command.
Otherwise, provides an entry assist panel (with initial data set
values) for the CREATE or IDCAMS subcommand.
MON[TH] Merges members updated or created this month into the MEMLIST.
NEXT In PEDIT, positions to a following logical record. Use SET to change
the default number of records to move forward if no operands are
entered. NEXT 1 SET is the default. SET changes the default and
causes a new record to display.
Syntax NEXT [num SET]/[MAX]

NO In LOG after a required reply, specifies that StarTool FDM not

complete the current action. A YES response allows the process to
continue. For a RESTORE subcommand, type CAN to terminate
RESTORE processing.
NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the current table.
NOS[AVE] In LISTC/LISTF and WORKPAD, specifies that the current table not
be saved on disk regardless of the setting of “Automatic save” in
SETALL for LISTC/LISTF or WORKPAD.
NOZ[AP] In ZAP, exits the ZAP function without changing additional data on
disk.
O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the current function and
operand syntax assistance.
OFF[SET] In ZAP, resets the beginning offset for CSECT displays. Lower offsets
are not displayed.
Syntax OFFSET hexaddress

(1 to 6 hexadecimal digits)
OUT[PUT] Outputs the current function table to print or to a data set.

Command Reference 47
Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

PAN[EL] Selects a panel using ISPF display services (normally used for panel
testing).
Syntax PANEL member

PASTE In PEDIT, places lines from the StarTool FDM clipboard into the
active edit session. Use the PEDIT or ISPF edit CUT macro to put
lines into the clipboard.
Syntax
PASTE [mm] [ZERO/KEEP] [DEFAULTS]
mm -- Two character table name
ZERO -- Insert clipboard contents and clear clipboard
KEEP -- Insert clipboard contents and keep clipboard
DEFAULTS -- Display a panel to set defaults

PAD In PBROWSE and PEDIT, changes the padding character and

specifies the number of pad characters desired.
Syntax PAD character/'character'/x'hex' [column]

Example: PAD a 45
PEND Checks for pending line commands and selects the next one. If no
line commands are pending, the command is ignored or the primary
MENU is selected if MENU mode is enabled.
PREV[IOUS] For PEDIT copybook, positions to a previous logical record. Use SET
to change the default number of records to move backward if no
operands are entered. PREV 1 SET is the default. SET changes the
default and causes a new record to display.
Syntax PREVIOUS [num SET]/[MAX]

PRIM[ER] Goes to a StarTool FDM introductory tutorial.

RCH[ANGE] In LOG, captures the command or data set name under the cursor in
the log for modification and/or reuse. PF keys 6 and 18 are set to
RCHANGE.
RCH[ANGE] In PEDIT, changes a string (repeat change) and positions the display
start location. PF keys 6 and 18 are set to RCHANGE.
R[ECALL] Displays the last StarTool FDM subcommand for modification and
(or RC) reentry. RECALL can also retrieve subcommands from the log.
REF[RESH] Global command in LISTC/LISTF and LISTV, updates information
and status for all lines in the table.
REL[EASE] Prompts for FIXPDS operands that release excess disk space.
REM[OVE] In CAX, CSECTS, LISTA/DDNAME, LISTC/LISTF, LISTV, MEMLIST,
NUCMAP, and WORKPAD, trims a dialog table based on a string
match.
Syntax REMOVE anystring [columname/ALL]
[PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]

REPL[ACE] Global command in LISTA/DDNAME, LISTC/LISTF and WORKPAD

changes to each data set in the table and issues a REPLACE
subcommand. In LISTC/LISTF tables, non-partitioned data sets are
skipped. In other tables, do not attempt to update mixed partitioned
and non-partitioned data sets with a single REPLACE global
command.

48 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

Syntax
REPLACE memgroup 'fromstring' 'tostring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]
[WRITE/NOWRITE]

REPL[ACE] In PEDIT, replaces a data set or member from marked copy or

moves data lines in an edit session.
Syntax REPLACE [member]

b (if a member name is not specified, extended REPLACE is used)

RESET In PEDIT, clears all pending line commands without letting them
execute.
RESET In DDNAME, LISTA, LISTC, LISTF, and WORKPAD, often used with
data set tagging to clear the DATA/MSG field in all table entries.
RF[IND] In PBROWSE and PEDIT, finds a string (repeat find) and positions
the display start location. PF keys 5 and 17 are set to RFIND.
RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find). In the log, it resets the display start
location and positions the cursor over the string; otherwise, it just
positions the display start location. PF keys 5 and 17 are set to
RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the current data. PF keys 11 and
23 are normally set to RIGHT.
SAM[PLE] In WORKPAD, merges table number 99 from the installation table
library (usually ISPTLIB) into the current WORKPAD table. Table 99
is an index to other sample WORKPAD tables. Include the additional
sample tables by using the MERGE command.
SAVE In MEMLIST, LISTC/LISTF and WORKPAD, creates a permanent table
for use in a later StarTool FDM session.
Syntax SAVE [name] [REPLACE/NOREPL]

(where name is 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters)

SCREEN For PEDIT copybook only, changes the display to show different
types of data in the data type field and the displayed data field as
shown in the table below.
Syntax
SCREEN [TYPE/PICTURE/OFFSET/COLUMN/NUMBER]
[DATA/NODATA]

This table contains the copybook screen part, the header, and an example:
COBOL level and name LEVEL AND NAME 02 SAMPLE-FIRST
data type=TYPE LENGTH TYP 1 PAC
data type=PICTURE PICTURE S99V9
data type=OFFSET OFFSET 62
data type=COLUMN COLUMN 63
data type=NUMBER NUMBER 4
displayed data=DATA DATA 2.1
displayed data=NODATA OFFSET 62
SEEK Global command in LISTA/DDNAME, LISTC/LISTF and WORKPAD
changes to each data set in the table and looks for a member. In
LISTC/LISTF, non-partitioned data sets are skipped.
Syntax SEEK member

Command Reference 49
Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

S[ELECT] In MEMLIST and LOG, BROWSEs load members and EDITs source
members. The value used for the command is set in SETSEL.
Syntax SELECT member

SET Prompts for one of the following SET services.

SETA[LL] Controls StarTool FDM combined defaults.
SETALT Recalls and saves a subcommand for repeated use later by ALTCMD.
SETC[OLOR] Controls screen colors and highlighting.
SETD[SN] Sets data set controls.
SETK[EYS] Controls PF keys for StarTool FDM panels (for ISPF 4.x users, you
can use the KEYS command for the same effect as SETKEYS).
SETP[ANEL] Controls optional panels and panel defaults.
SETSEEK The default member name for the SEEK line command.
SETSEL Alias names for S (or SELECT) by function.
SETU[SER] Controls dynamic primary commands. You specify command names
and actions.
SHOW In PEDIT, for copybook display or VERTICAL display, includes named
or numbered elements in the current display.
Syntax
SHOW {ALL/varnam/gennam/n1 [TO] n2} GROUP ONLY
ALL -- All variables are to be shown
varnam -- Exact variable name from the copybook
gennam -- Partial variable name like FORM-DETAIL*
n1 -- Entry number for a variable from SCREEN NUMBER
TO -- Used with n2 to indicate a range
n2 -- A second entry number to specify a range end with TO
GROUP -- Selects all variables in a given copybook level
ONLY -- Hides all variables except those identified
SO[RT] In CAX, CSECTS, LISTC/LISTF, LISTV, MEMLIST, or NUCMAP, sorts
function tables into an alternate order. SORT with no operands sorts
the table in default order, while SORT with a field name sorts the
table in that order. If you enter an invalid sort command such as
SORT xx, a prompt shows the valid sort fields for that function.
Syntax SORT [name] [ASCEND/DESCEND]

SORT In PEDIT for a VSAM KSDS data set, sorts records in ascending
order by key.
Syntax SORT

SPA[CE] In LISTV, updates volume space statistics for each volume in the
table.
STATS In LISTV, updates volume attributes for each volume in the table.
SUS[PEND] Terminates ISPMODE temporarily and enters line mode processing.
ISPMODE can be restarted with the same log table by entering an
ISPMODE, ISPXEQ or MEMLIST subcommand. While ISPMODE is
suspended, IND$FILE is supported for PC SEND and RECEIVE.

50 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

TAG In MEMLIST, forms a member group containing only members

marked with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field. Otherwise, applies the
specified line command to table entries marked with *TAG* in the
DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

TOD[AY] Merges members updated or created today into the MEMLIST.

TRANS Provides a translation service to convert a hex, decimal or EBCDIC
characters.
Syntax TRANS {1-to-2-hex/1-to-3-decimal/char}
[HEX/NUMBER/CHAR]

TRAP Interfaces with TSO commands to capture their output lines in the
log.
Syntax TRAP tsocommand [anyoperands]

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are

maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well
as your installation. Several of these panels also allow dynamic
primary commands with which you specify command names and
their corresponding actions.
VERT[ICAL] In PEDIT, prompts for a COBOL, Assembler or PL/I copybook name
to display records in a tabular copybook format Copybook elements
to display can be selected or excluded with the SHOW and HIDE
commands.
Syntax
VERTICAL [ON/OFF/NEW] [DEFAULT] [NAME/NONAME]
[PICT/NOPICT] [COL/NOCOL] [NUM/NONUM] [ONLY]
[LEV1/NOLEV1] [LEV88/NOLEV88]
ON -- Turns on VERTICAL with the current copybook
OFF -- Turns off VERTICAL mode
NEW -- Requests a new copybook for VERTICAL display
DEFAULT -- Sets header to NAME, NOPICT, TYPE, COL, NUM
NAME/NONAME -- Controls display of variable name
PICT/NOPICT -- Controls display of variable picture
TYPE/NOTYPE -- Controls display of variable type
COL/NOCOL -- Controls display of variable start column
NUM/NONUM -- Controls display of variable reference number
ONLY -- Display only selected headers; otherwise, additive
LEV1/NOLEV1 -- Controls if the LEVEL 1 variable is displayed
LEV88/NOLEV88 -- Controls if LEVEL 88 items are displayed
WE[EK] Merges members updated or created this week into the MEMLIST.
WHO[HAS] Global command in LISTC/LISTF and WORKPAD, issues a WHOHAS
subcommand for each data set in the table.
X Clears the current table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the current table; this is equivalent to X ALL

XC[OPY] Interfaces with the extended copy feature.
XM[IT] Transmits the data set to another user.

Command Reference 51
Chapter 2 ISPF Interface Commands

Y[ES] In LOG, after a required reply, specifies that StarTool FDM continue
the current action. A NO response stops the current action. For a
RESTORE subcommand, type CAN to terminate RESTORE
processing.
ZAP In ZAP, updates data lines in *CHA (changed) status on disk
permanently.

52 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Chapter 3
Commands — A to C

Subcommands and Functions

Subcommands are requests for operations that are supported in all StarTool FDM
environments.

A function command is a request for an ISPMODE operation. Most functions support their
own set of commands. Function commands control ISPF tables that are available
throughout a StarTool FDM session in parallel mode.

While operating in a StarTool FDM session, commands are ISPMODE-only requests for an
operation.

Enter subcommands, function commands and commands, as primary commands; that is,
from the top command entry line of a panel. In most function tables, enter line commands
in the CMD column. A line command is a request for an ISPMODE-only operation that
affects only the table entry on which it is entered.

In each function that supports line commands, = and X are available as line commands.
Use an = line command to repeat the previously entered line command. Use X line
commands to drop table entries selectively. Follow these line commands by a number (for
example, =3 or X3) to operate on multiple table lines.

Use block line commands to operate on multiple table entries. For example, use the XX
block line command to mark table elements to drop from a table. XX operates on a range
of entries. The first table element with an XX command is considered the first entry in the
range. All following elements are dropped up to a paired entry with another XX block line
command. XX and == block line commands are available in each function that supports
line commands.

Commands, line commands, and block line commands are documented in this section but
only under the function in which they are supported. For a discussion of all ISPMODE
commands, see “All Commands”.

Descriptions of commands, subcommands, and functions A through C follow.

ABE Subcommand
The ABE subcommand edits data; use the TSO ABE command. ABE is an acronym for A
Better Editor. Add any operand after the member name.

Example
ABE mema:memb

Command Reference 53
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Syntax
ABE memgroup [operands]

Aliases
AB, ABE

Defaults
None

Required
None

Operands
memgroup Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
operands Optional. Can include any TSO ABE operands.

Remarks
ABE was written in PL/I and the PL/I Optimizing Compiler Transient Library is required for
its execution.

This interface is optional. Use it only if your installation installed the public domain ABE
command.

ACFCOMP Subcommand
The ACFCOMP subcommand compiles and stores a set of CA-ACF2 access or resource
rules.

Example
ACFCOMP acfrule* nostore

Syntax
ACFCOMP memgroup [FORCE/NOFORCE ]
[LIST/NOLIST ]
[MAXRULE(nnn) ]
[STORE/NOSTORE ]

54 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Aliases
ACF, ACFC, ACFCO, ACFCOM, ACFCOMP

Defaults
memgroup, FORCE, LIST, MAXRULE(250), STORE

Required
None

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be compiled.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges
and member name patterns are allowed. For more information,
see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
FORCE Access rule sets are stored, replacing any existing access rule
sets with the same keys.
NOFORCE Access rule sets are not stored or replace any existing access
rule sets if they exist with the same keys.
LIST The rules are listed at the terminal as they are read.
NOLIST Only compiler control and error messages are listed at the
terminal.
MAXRULE(nnn) Specifies a scaling factor that determines the maximum size of
the access rule set that the buffer can hold.
STORE Access rule sets are stored automatically after compilation.
NOSTORE Access rule sets are not stored after compilation; this is a test
compilation.

Remarks
This interface is optional; use it only if your installation uses CA-ACF2 for security.

ALIAS Subcommand
The ALIAS subcommand adds an alias name for a member.

Example
ALIAS mainmem aliasmem

Command Reference 55
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Syntax
ALIAS memname aliasname

Aliases
AL, ALI, ALIA, ALIAS

Defaults
None

Required
memname aliasname

Operands
memname Identifies the member to which an alias is to be assigned.
aliasname Specifies the alias name to be assigned. This alias name becomes the
default member name.

Remarks
If the data set is not a load library, use the alias name as an alternate name for the
identified member.

If the data set is a load library, and if the alias name is an imbedded external name within
the load module, that external name is used as the alias entry point; otherwise, the entry
point of the named member is used as the alias entry point.

56 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

The ATTRIB subcommand can adjust the entry point of an alias or main load member with
its ENTRY(name) keyword.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
---------------- ISPMODE Session Display ----------------------- ROW 128 OF 143
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=ZAPHELP ------------------------
>------>alias zap$ zaphelp
PDS010I The alias has been assigned
PDS103I Entry point at 004418 -- ZAPHELP
>----->map

** MAP ZAPHELP
ZAP 00000000 00003F06
PCL 00003F08 000000E5
CSOUT 00003FF0 00000428
ZAPHELP 00004418 00001B1C
ASMGASM 00005F38 000007E4
OACNOW 00006720 0000032E

PDS103I Entry point at 00004418 -- ZAPHELP

PDS104I Module length 00006A50 -- 27K
PDS066I Member is an alias for: ZAP$

NOTE A StarTool FDM ALIAS created for a PDSE object containing private CSECTs will
not execute, due to invalid object code that results from a limitation of the z/OS Binder
when handling private CSECTs. This appears to be a permanent restriction of the z/OS
Binder. Message PDS898E is issued to alert you of the existence of private CSECTs in
these objects.

CAUTION! The ALIAS subcommand modifies the data set. To ensure data set integrity,
allocate the data set as OLD or be aware of the data set update protection provided by
the StarTool FDM command for SHR allocations. For details, see Appendix B, "Update
Protection".

ATTRIB Subcommand (for source members)

The ATTRIB subcommand lists and modifies the attributes of a member. If the attributes
of a group of members is being updated, StarTool FDM identifies the members to be
updated and asks whether or not to continue with the update. Add or modify ISPF
statistics or SSI information. Since many of the operands apply either to load members or
source members only, ATTRIB is described separately with each set of operands.

Example
ATTRIB member1:member2 ID(userid)

Command Reference 57
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Syntax
ATTRIB memgroup [ALIASINFO|NOALIASINFO]
[ALIAS|NOALIAS]
[LASTREAD]
[ADDSTATS]
[ID(who)|USERID(who)]
[MOD(mm)]
[NONE]
[SSI(hexdata)|NOSSI]
[UNALIAS]
[VER(nn)]
[CREATED(yyyy/mm/dd)]
[MODIFIED(yyyy/mm/dd)]
[TIME(hhmm)]
[SIZE(nnnnn)/RESIZE]
[INIT(nnnnn)]
[MODI(nnnnn)]

Aliases
A, AT, ATT, ATTR, ATTRI

Defaults
Alias members: memgroup, ALIASINFO depending on the CONTROL setting, NOALIAS

Other members: memgroup, NOALIASINFO, NOALIAS.

Required
None

Operands — source members

memgroup Identifies the source members whose attributes are to be
displayed or updated.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed. For more information,
see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
ALIASINFO Provides names of alias or main members — this operand does
not change member attributes.
NOALIASINFO Does not provide alias information — this operand does not
change member attributes.
ALIAS Updates associated members (aliases, main members, or
apparent aliases).
NOALIAS Does not update associated members.
LASTREAD For members with ISPF statistics, formats last read date
information — does not change member attributes.
ADDSTATS Adds ISPF statistics for members with no ISPF or SSI information.

58 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

ID(who) Changes the last modifier’s user ID (for members with ISPF
statistics). Masking to retain current user ID characters may be
specified with a %.
USERID(who) Changes the last modifier’s user ID (for members with ISPF
statistics). Masking to retain current user ID characters can be
specified with a %.
MOD(mm) Changes the ISPF modification level (for members with ISPF
statistics).
NONE Removes ISPF statistics or SSI information.
SSI(hexdata) Adds or changes the SSI information for the member. If you enter
less than 8 hexadecimal digits, leading digits on the left are
assumed. Members with ISPF statistics cannot have SSI
information.
NOSSI Removes SSI information.
UNALIAS Converts entry to a main member.
NOTE If a main entry exists before this conversion, create an
“apparent alias”. You can detect this situation by a VERIFY
subcommand or ATTRIB with the ALIASINFO keyword.
VER(nn) Changes the ISPF version number (for members with ISPF
statistics).
CREATED Changes the ISPF creation date (for members with ISPF
(yyyy/mm/dd) statistics).
MODIFIED Changes the ISPF modification date (for members with ISPF
(yyyy/mm/dd) statistics).
TIME(hhmm) Changes the ISPF modification time (for members with ISPF
statistics).
SIZE(nnnnn) Changes the ISPF member size (for members with ISPF
statistics).
RESIZE Recalculates the member size (for members with ISPF statistics).
INIT(nnnnn) Changes the ISPF initial size (for members with ISPF statistics).
MODI(nnnnn) Changes the ISPF modified size (for members with ISPF
statistics).

Remarks — Source Members

If the member is an alias, -A displays after the member name. Convert an alias to a main
member with the UNALIAS keyword. If you specify the keyword ALIASINFO, the name of
any associated members (aliases, the main member, or any apparent aliases) displays for
each member. Otherwise, associated member information displays for alias members if
CONTROL ALIASINFO is in effect.

NOTE This subcommand modifies the data set if you specify any attribute modifications.
To ensure data set integrity, allocate the data set as OLD or be aware of the data set
update protection provided by the StarTool FDM command for SHR allocations. See
Appendix B, "Update Protection".

Command Reference 59
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

If the member has ISPF statistics or SSI information, this data is deleted with the NONE
keyword.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
----------------- ISPMODE Session Display ----------------------- ROW 673 OF 685
COMMAND ===> CROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR802 MEM=D:DEL ------------------------
>------>at d:del
PDS230I ISPF Stats: VER.MOD CREATED LAST MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD ID
PDS230I DAFJCL 01.00 02/06/15 02/06/15 10:09 25 25 0 C91147
PDS230I DAFTAL -A 01.00 02/06/15 02/06/15 10:09 25 25 0 C91147
PDS066I Member is an alias for: DAFJCL
PDS230I DELC 01.02 02/05/10 02/05/10 15:02 19 20 2 C91147
PDS230I DELINK SSI: CB296204
PDS230I DELINK0
PDS117I 2 members counted; cumulative size is 44 records

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
----------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log# 1 --------------------- ROW 847 TO 861 OF 861
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=(A --- -------------
>----->attrib = modified(02/04/20)
PDS167I ATTRIB will change the following members: A, ABLK, ADOC, LOADMARK, SAMPSECR, TRIAL601

PDS396A Should ATTRIB continue (Yes/No) ?

>----->y
PDS230I ISPF Stats: VER.MOD CREATED LAST MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD ID
PDS230I A 01.00 02/04/08 02/04/20 13:21 5 5 0 SER07
PDS230I ABLK 01.01 02/04/09 02/04/20 14:37 6 9 0 SER07
PDS230I ADOC
PDS230I LOADMARK 01.02 02/02/26 02/04/20 6:43 50 48 0 SER07
PDS230I SAMPSECR 01.26 02/03/27 02/04/20 5:57 197 220 140 SER07
PDS230I TRIAL601 01.00 02/04/14 02/04/20 15:16 123 123 0 SER07
PDS117I 5 members counted; cumulative size is 381 records

****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

ATTRIB Subcommand (for load members)

The ATTRIB subcommand lists and modifies the attributes of a member. If the attributes
of a group of members is being updated, StarTool FDM identifies the members to be
updated and asks whether or not to continue with the update. Since many of the operands
apply either to load members or source members only, ATTRIB is described separately
with each set of operands.

Example
ATTRIB member1:member2 RENT REUS REFR

Syntax
ATTRIB memgroup [ALIASINFO/NOALIASINFO]
[ALIAS/NOALIAS]
[LKEDDATE/NOLKEDDATE]
[SHORT]

60 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

[AMODE24/AMODE31/AMODE64/AMODEANY]
[AUTH/NOAUTH]
[DC/NODC]
[EDIT/NOEDIT]
[ENTRY(name)]
[EXEC/NOEXEC]
[LOADONLY/NOLOADONLY]
[NONE]
[PAGE/NOPAGE]
[REFR/NOREFR]
[RENT/NORENT]
[REUS/NOREUS]
[RLDFIX/NORLDFIX]
[RMODE24/RMODEANY]
[SSI(hexdata)/NOSSI]
[UNALIAS ]

Aliases
A, AT, ATT, ATTR, ATTRI

Defaults
memgroup, ALIAS, LKEDDATE (depending on the CONTROL setting), ALIASINFO (depending
on the CONTROL setting)

Required
None

Operands — Load Members

memgroup Identifies the load members whose attributes are to be displayed
or updated.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed. For more information,
see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
ALIASINFO Provides the names of alias or main members — this operand
does not change member attributes.
NOALIASINFO Does not provide alias information — this operand does not
change member attributes.
ALIAS Updates associated members (aliases, main members, or
apparent aliases).
NOALIAS Does not update associated members.
LKEDDATE Provides the date of the last linkage edit — does not change
member attributes.
NOLKEDDATE Does not provide the date of the last linkage edit — does not
change member attributes.

Command Reference 61
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

SHORT Provides output in an alternate short format — does not change

member attributes. This output format is used by default for
THEN(attrib) or ELSE(attrib). For an example, see the message
PDS232I in the STarTool FDM Messages Guide.
NOTE When the SHORT output format is in use, many standard
ATTRIB module checks are not performed. An incorrectly created
or modified load module may not be detected.
AMODE24 Changes addressing mode to 24.
AMODE31 Changes addressing mode to 31.
AMODE64 Changes addressing mode to 64.
AMODEANY Changes addressing mode to ANY.
AUTH Authorizes the module with APF (equivalent to AC=1 in a linkage
edit).
NOAUTH Removes APF authorization (equivalent to AC=0 in a linkage
edit).
DC The module is downward compatible with the level-E linkage
editor.
NODC The module is not downward compatible with the level-E linkage
editor.
EDIT Allows linkage editing of the module.
NOEDIT Disallows linkage editing of the module.
ENTRY(name) Changes the entry point address to the external symbol specified.
The symbol entered must be present in the load module.
EXEC Allows execution of the module.
NOEXEC Disallows execution of the module.
LOADONLY Disallows use of the module except by a LOAD MACRO.
NOLOADONLY Allows module use by any means.
NONE Changes attributes to the following: AMODE24, NOAUTH, NODC,
EDIT, EXEC, NOLOADONLY, NOPAGE, NOREFR, NORENT, NOREUS,
NOSSI, and RMODE24. If other parameters are coded with NONE,
they override any corresponding parameters.
PAGE Requires page alignment for the module.
NOPAGE Allows any alignment for the module.
REFR Adds the refreshable attribute.
NOREFR Removes the refreshable attribute.
RENT Adds the reentrant (and reusable) attribute.
NORENT Removes the reentrant attribute.
REUS Adds the reusable attribute.
NOREUS Removes the reusable attribute.
RLDFIX Changes the directory’s RLD/CONTROL count to match the value
in the first RLD entry (for modules linked since OS/VS).
NORLDFIX Does not modify the directory’s RLD/CONTROL count.

62 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

RMODE24 Changes residence mode to 24 (below the 16-Megabyte line).

RMODEANY Changes residence mode to ANY (above the 16-Megabyte line).
SSI(hexdata) Adds or changes the SSI information for the member. If you enter
less than 8 hexadecimal digits, leading digits on the left are
assumed.
NOSSI Removes any SSI information for the member.
UNALIAS Converts entry to a main member.
NOTE If a main entry exists before this conversion, create an
“apparent alias”. You can detect this situation by a VERIFY
subcommand or ATTRIB with the ALIASINFO keyword.

Remarks — Load Members

The following linkage editor attributes are identified if they are present for a member:

AMODE Addressing mode (if AMODE is not 24 or RMODE is not 24).

AUTH APF authorized (or AC=1).
DC Downward compatible (the module can be reprocessed by a Level-
E linkage editor).
LOAD ONLY Only Loadable (OL — the module can be brought into main storage
only with a LOAD MACRO).
NOT EDIT Not Editable (the module cannot be linkage edited).
NOT EXEC Not Executable (the linkage editor noted an error; LET processing
was not requested).
OVERLAY Overlays load module structure.
PAGE Page alignment required.
REFR Refreshable (replaceable by a new copy during execution).
RENT Reentrant (executable by several tasks simultaneously).
REUS Reusable (executable by several tasks in serial order).
RMODE Residence mode (if RMODE is not 24 or AMODE is not 24).
SCTR Scatters load module structure.
SSI SSI information in hexadecimal.
TEST Linked with the TEST option.

When the ATTRIB subcommand adds or deletes linkage attributes for a member it
performs some additional processing based on the member’s attributes and the keywords
specified.

1 If a changed member is reentrant, the reusable attribute is added (as does the
linkage editor).

2 If a main member is assigned an RMODE or AMODE value, any associated alias

directory entries are updated to reflect the same RMODE value and the AMODE value
of the main member.

Command Reference 63
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

3 Alias information is provided unless NOALIASINFO is specified or CONTROL

NOALIASINFO is in effect.
a If the member is an alias, the name of any corresponding main member displays if
it exists; otherwise, the member name from the alias directory entry (the main
member name at the time the alias was created) displays.
b If the member is not an alias, the name of any corresponding alias members and
any apparent aliases displays.

4 If there is a mismatch between the directory RLD/CONTROL field and the first RLD
entry of OS/VS linked modules, StarTool FDM displays an appropriate error message.

NOTE This subcommand modifies the data set if you specify attribute modifications. To
ensure data set integrity, allocate the data set as OLD or be aware of the data set update
protection provided by StarTool FDM for SHR allocations. For details, see Appendix B,
"Update Protection".

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------ ISPMODE Session Display --------------------- ROW 691 OF 733
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=PDS* ----------------------------
>----->at pds*
PDS020I PDSPGM Attributes are: RENT, REUS
PDS120I Residence Mode is ANY -- addressing mode is 31
PDS103I Entry point at 00000000 -- WHAT
PDS104I Module length 0006CFA8 -- 436K
PDS064I Last link-edited on 02/06/10 by LKED 566528408 V71 M00

PDS020I PDSRX Attributes are: RENT, REUS

PDS103I Entry point at 00000000 -- PDSRX
PDS104I Module length 00003D28 -- 16K
PDS064I Last link-edited on 02/05/10 by LKED 566528408 V71 M00

PDS118I 1 members RMODE24; size is 16K

PDS119I 1 members RMODEANY; size is 436K

64 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
-------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log# 1 --------------- ROW 868 TO 889 OF 889
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER007 MEM=(#OPCODE --------------------
>----->at = rent
PDS167I ATTRIB will change the following members: #OPCODE, #OPCODEM, #OPCODE2
PDS396A Should ATTRIB continue (Yes/No) ?
>----->y
PDS020I #OPCODE Attributes are: RENT, REUS, REFR
PDS103I Entry point at 00000000 -- OPTESTCD
PDS104I Module length 000008E0 -- 3K
PDS064I Last link-edited on 02/12/20 by LKED 566528408 V03 M01

PDS020I #OPCODEM Attributes are: RENT, REUS, REFR, NOT EXEC

PDS103I Entry point at 00000000 -- OPTESTCD
PDS104I Module length 00000E00 -- 4K
PDS064I Last link-edited on 02/12/20 by LKED 566528408 V03 M01

PDS020I #OPCODE2 Attributes are: RENT, REUS, REFR

PDS103I Entry point at 00000000 -- OPTESTCD
PDS104I Module length 000003B8 -- 1K
PDS064I Last link-edited on 02/12/20 by LKED 566528408 V03 M01

PDS118I 3 members RMODE24; size is 7K

***************************** BOTTOM OF DATA **********************************

In the screen display above, the LKED value in message PDS046I is replaced with a coded
value to represent the actual linkage editor or program binder used for the listed CSECT.
StarTool FDM determines this through inspection of the IBM component codes carried in
the load module. For more information about the IBM component codes, see message
PDS046I in the StarTool FDM Messages Guide.

BLK3380 Subcommand
The BLK3380 subcommand computes an optimal block size for placing a data set on a
3380 disk pack. The program output includes the following reports:

1 A summary block size report for the given LRECL and key length that includes the
recommended block size to use.

2 A recommended data set space allocation.

3 An optional track capacity report for the provided key length.

Example
BLK3380 133

Syntax
BLK3380 lrecl [KEYLENGTH(keylen) ]
[TRACKCAP / NOTRACKCAP ]
[BLKSIZE(blklen) ]

Command Reference 65
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

[NUMBER(#rec) / RECORDS(#rec) ]
[VERIFY ]

Aliases
BLK338, BLK3380

Defaults
KEYLENGTH(0), NOTRACKCAP, BLKSIZE(RECOMMENDED VALUE), NUMBER(100000)

Required
lrecl

Operands
lrecl The logical record length of the data that is to be placed in the
data set.
KEYLENGTH(kl) The key length, in bytes, of the keys to be used in the data set.
The maximum legal key length is 255.
TRACKCAP Specifies a track capacity report for the device using the
specified (or default) key length.
A track capacity report is provided if NOTRACKCAP is not
specified and lrecl exceeds the maximum block size for a track
or BLKSIZE exceeds the maximum block size for a track.
NOTRACKCAP Specifies that a track capacity report is not wanted.
BLKSIZE(blklen) The block size to use for the allocation computation. If you do
not enter blklen (or you enter zero), the program’s
recommended block size is used.
NUMBER(#rec) Number of logical records in the data set.
RECORDS(#rec) Number of logical records in the data set.
VERIFY Specifies that the TRKCALC routine is to be used to verify track
capacity calculations. If you use VERIFY, the number of calls to
TRKCALC is output at the end of the output. With VERIFY on,
you need a minimum of 34 calls for a track capacity table;
otherwise, you need a minimum of 17 calls for the track
capacity table.

Remarks
The recommended block size value is for data sets in which the predominant access is
sequential. For data sets where random access time is critical or the usual access is
random, use a small block size (500 - 2000 bytes).

The recommended block size tends to be near a half-track figure since this is the most
efficient in terms of the trade-offs among buffer size, secondary storage requirements,
channel use, number of input/outputs, and overall processing time. This figure is only a

66 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

general guide; for maximum efficiency considering other factors, study the generated
block size summary report or a track capacity report.

The program assumes a large amount of data is to be stored. Place data sets that occupy
a few tracks in partitioned data sets. If not possible, use a small block size (2400 - 4000
bytes).

This interface is optional. Use it if your installation installed the public domain BLK3380
subcommand.

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=(BATDELAY ---------------------------
>----->blk3380 80 tr
3380 BLOCKSIZE SUMMARY; LRECL=80 KEY LENGTH=0
BLOCKSIZE BLOCKS/TRACK LRECLS/TRACK UTILIZATION
--------- ------------ ------------ -----------
80 83 83 14.0%
2,480 16 496 83.6%
. . . .
7,440 6 558 94.0%
9,040 5 565 95.2%
11,440 4 572 96.4%
15,440 3 579 97.6%
RECOMMENDED-->23,440 2 586 98.7%
32,720 1 409 68.9%

FOR BLKSIZE 23,440 AND 100,000 RECORDS, ALLOCATE:

342 BLOCKS, 171 TRACKS, OR 12 CYLINDERS

3380 TRACK CAPACITY; KEY LENGTH=0

BLOCKS/TRACK BLKSIZE BYTES/TRACK UTILIZATION
------------ ------- ----------- -----------
1 47,476 47,476 100.0%
2 23,476 46,952 98.9%
3 15,476 46,428 97.8%
4 11,476 45,904 96.7%
5 9,076 45,380 95.6%
6 7,476 44,856 94.5%
. . . .
16 2,484 39,744 83.7%

DEVICE SUMMARY: MAX BLOCKSIZE=47,476 TRACKS=13,275 BYTES=630,243,900

********************************* BOTTOM OF DATA*******************************

BLK3390 Subcommand
The BLK3390 subcommand computes an optimal block size for placing a data set on a
3390 disk pack. The program output includes the following reports:

1 A summary block size report for the given LRECL and key length that includes the
recommended block size to use.

2 A recommended data set space allocation.

3 An optional track capacity report for the provided key length.

Command Reference 67
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Example
BLK3390 121

Syntax
BLK3390 lrecl [KEYLENGTH(keylen) ]
[TRACKCAP / NOTRACKCAP ]
[BLKSIZE(blklen) ]
[NUMBER(#rec) / RECORDS(#rec) ]
[VERIFY ]

Aliases
BLK339, BLK3390

Defaults
KEYLENGTH(0), NOTRACKCAP, BLKSIZE(RECOMMENDED VALUE), NUMBER(100000)

Required
lrecl

Operands
lrecl The logical record length of the data to be placed in the data
set.
KEYLENGTH(kl) The key length, in bytes, of the keys to be used in the data set.
The maximum legal key length is 255.
TRACKCAP A track capacity report for the device using the specified (or
default) key length.
A track capacity report is provided if NOTRACKCAP is not
specified and lrecl exceeds the maximum block size for a track
or BLKSIZE exceeds the maximum block size for a track.
NOTRACKCAP Do not provide a track capacity report.
BLKSIZE(blklen) The block size to use for the allocation computation. If you do
not enter blklen (or you enter zero), the program’s
recommended block size is used.
NUMBER(#rec) Number of logical records in the data set.
RECORDS(#rec) Number of logical records in the data set.
VERIFY Use the TRKCALC routine to verify track capacity calculations. If
you use VERIFY, the number of calls to TRKCALC is output at the
end of the output. With VERIFY on, you need a minimum of 34
calls for a track capacity table; otherwise, you need a minimum
of 17 calls for the track capacity table.

Remarks

68 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

The recommended block size value is for data sets in which the predominant access is
sequential. For data sets where random access time is critical or the access is random,
use a small block size (500 - 2000 bytes).

The recommended block size tends to be near a half-track since this is considered the
most efficient in terms of the trade-offs among buffer size, secondary storage
requirements, channel use, number of input/outputs, and overall processing time. This is
only a general guide; for maximum efficiency, considering other factors, study the
generated block size summary report or a track capacity report.

The program assumes a large amount of data to be stored. Place data sets that occupy
only a few tracks in partitioned data sets. If this is not possible, use a small block size
(2400 - 4000 bytes).

This interface is optional; use it if your installation installed the public domain BLK3390
subcommand.

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=(BATDELAY ---------------------------
>----->blk3390 80 tr
3390 BLOCKSIZE SUMMARY; LRECL=80 KEY LENGTH=0
BLOCKSIZE BLOCKS/TRACK LRECLS/TRACK UTILIZATION
--------- ------------ ------------ -----------
80 78 78 11.0%
2,880 16 576 81.3%
. . . .
8,880 6 666 94.0%
10,720 5 670 94.6%
13,680 4 684 96.6%
18,400 3 690 97.4%
RECOMMENDED-->27,920 2 698 98.5%
32,720 1 409 57.7%

FOR BLKSIZE 27,920 AND 100,000 RECORDS, ALLOCATE:

287 BLOCKS, 144 TRACKS, OR 10 CYLINDERS

3390 TRACK CAPACITY; KEY LENGTH=0

BLOCKS/TRACK BLKSIZE BYTES/TRACK UTILIZATION
------------ ------- ----------- -----------
1 56,664 56,664 100.0%
2 27,998 55,996 98.8%
3 18,452 55,356 97.7%
4 13,682 54,728 96.6%
5 10,796 53,980 95.3%
6 8,906 53,436 94.3%
. . . .
16 2,942 47,072 83.1%

DEVICE SUMMARY: MAX BLOCKSIZE=56,664 TRACKS=16,695 BYTES=946,005,480

NOCYLS=1,113 TRKS/CYL=15 TRKSIZE=58,786 DSCB/TRK=50 PDS/TRK=45
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************

BLK9345 Subcommand
The BLK9345 subcommand computes an optimal block size for placing a data set on a
9345 disk pack. The program output includes the following reports:

Command Reference 69
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

1 A summary block size report for the given LRECL and key length that includes the
recommended block size to use.

2 A recommended data set space allocation.

3 A optional track capacity report for the provided key length.

Example
BLK9345 80

Syntax
BLK9345 lrecl [KEYLENGTH(keylen) ]
[TRACKCAP / NOTRACKCAP ]
[BLKSIZE(blklen) ]
[NUMBER(#rec) / RECORDS(#rec) ]
[VERIFY ]

Aliases
BLK9, BLK93, BLK934, BLK9345

Defaults
KEYLENGTH(0), NOTRACKCAP, BLKSIZE(RECOMMENDED VALUE), NUMBER(100000)

Required
lrecl

Operands
lrecl The logical record length of the data that is placed in the
data set.
KEYLENGTH(kl) The key length, in bytes, of the keys used in the data set.
The maximum legal key length is 255.
TRACKCAP A track capacity report for the device using the specified (or
default) key length.
A track capacity report is provided if NOTRACKCAP is not
specified and lrecl exceeds the maximum block size for a
track or BLKSIZE exceeds the maximum block size for a
track.
NOTRACKCAP Do not provide a track capacity report.
BLKSIZE(blklen) The block size to use for the allocation computation. If you
do not enter blklen (or if you enter zero), the program’s
recommended block size is used.
NUMBER(#rec) Number of logical records in the data set.
RECORDS(#rec) Number of logical records in the data set.

70 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

VERIFY Use the TRKCALC routine to verify track capacity

calculations. If you use VERIFY, the number of calls to
TRKCALC for a track capacity table is output at the end of the
output. With VERIFY on, you need a minimum of 34 calls for
a track capacity table; otherwise, you need a minimum of 17
calls for the track capacity table.

Remarks
The recommended block size value is for data sets in which the predominant access is
sequential. For data sets where random access time is critical or the access is random,
use a small block size (500 - 2000 bytes).

The recommended block size tends to be near a half-track figure since this is considered
the most efficient in terms of the trade-offs among buffer size, secondary storage
requirements, channel use, number of input/outputs, and overall processing time. This is
only a general guide; for maximum efficiency considering other factors, study the
generated block size summary report or a track capacity report.

The program assumes that a large amount of data is to be stored. Place data sets that
occupy only a few tracks in partitioned data sets. If this is not possible, use a small block
size (2400 - 4000 bytes).

This interface is optional; use it if your installation installed the public domain BLK9345
subcommand.

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=(BATDELAY -------------------------
>----->blk9345 80 tr
9345 BLOCKSIZE SUMMARY; LRECL=80 KEY LENGTH=0
BLOCKSIZE BLOCKS/TRACK LRECLS/TRACK UTILIZATION
--------- ------------ ------------ --------
2,240 16 448 77.1%
. . . .
7,200 6 540 93.0%
8,800 5 550 94.7%
11,120 4 556 95.7%
15,040 3 564 97.1%
RECOMMENDED-->22,880 2 572 98.5%
32,720 1 409 70.4%

FOR BLKSIZE 22,880 AND 100,000 RECORDS, ALLOCATE:

350 BLOCKS, 175 TRACKS, OR 12 CYLINDERS

9345 TRACK CAPACITY; KEY LENGTH=0

BLOCKS/TRACK BLKSIZE BYTES/TRACK UTILIZATION
------------ ------- ----------- -----------
1 46,456 46,456 100.0%
2 22,928 45,856 98.7%
3 15,074 45,222 97.3%
4 11,158 44,632 96.1%
5 8,810 44,050 94.8%
6 7,214 43,284 93.2%
. . . .
16 2,314 37,024 79.7%

DEVICE SUMMARY: MAX BLOCKSIZE=46,456 TRACKS=21,600 BYTES=1,003,449,600

NOCYLS=1,440 TRKS/CYL=15 TRKSIZE=48,280 DSCB/TRK=45 PDS/TRK=40
***************************** BOTTOM OF DATA **********************************

Command Reference 71
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

BROWSE Subcommand
The BROWSE subcommand enters ISPF browse for a member.

Example
BROWSE mema:memb

Syntax
BROWSE memgroup
* [FROMKEY(key)/FROMADDRESS(add)/FROMNUMBER(num) ]
* [TOKEY(key)/TOADDRESS(add)/TONUMBER(num) ]

*NOTE: Lines with an asterisk are supported for VSAM with PBROWSE or
BRIF.

Aliases
B, BR, BRO, BROW, BROWS, BROWSE

Abbreviations
FKEY for FROMKEY, FADDR for FROMADDRESS, FNUM for FROMNUMBER, TKEY for TOKEY,
TADDR for TOADDRESS, and TNUM for TONUMBER

Defaults
memgroup

Required
None

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be browsed.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed; for more
information, see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
FROMKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, ky is the key of the first record to be
accessed. This is a generic key and can be coded as x’hexkey’.
Access begins at the first record whose key matches (or is
greater than) the portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with TOKEY. It can be specified only for an
alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.

72 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

FROMADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through 99999999

to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the first record to
be accessed. The RBA value must match the beginning of a
logical record. If you specify this parameter for key-sequenced
data, the records are accessed in physical sequential order
instead of key order. Use this parameter with TOADDRESS.
FROMADDRESS(address)
 Code only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or linear data
sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with spanned
records if the spanned records are to be accessed
FROMNUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative record number (RRN) of the first record
to be accessed. This record must be present in the data set.
Use this parameter with TONUMBER. It can be specified only
for a variable or fixed relative record data set.
TOKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, ky is the key of the last record to be
accessed. This is a generic key and can be coded as ‘hexkey’.
Access ends after the first record whose key matches the
portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with FROMKEY. It can be specified only for
an alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.
TOADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the last record to
be accessed. The RBA value does need not to match the
beginning of a logical record. If you specify this parameter for
key-sequenced data, the records are accessed in physical
sequential order instead of key order. Use this parameter with
FROMADDRESS.
TOADDRESS(address)
 Code only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or linear data
sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with spanned
records if the spanned records are to be accessed
TONUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative record number (RRN) of the last record
to be accessed. This record need not be present in the data
set.
Use this parameter with FROMNUMBER. It can be specified
only for a variable or fixed relative record data set.

Remarks
If you enter a : for the member name position, an ISPF member selection list displays.

Display VSAM data sets with PBROWSE. You may have chosen a different interface during
StarTool FDM installation. Of the other interfaces, only BRIF supports the positioning
keywords such as FROMKEY. To determine the interface, type a CONTROL DEFAULT

Command Reference 73
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

subcommand and look for an output line beginning BROWSE calls with one of the
following values:
 BRIF – uses the ISPF BRIF interface which is up to 32760 characters wide
 PBROWSE – uses PBROWSE services
 REVIEW – uses the REVIEW command (a non-ISPF full screen public domain program)
 %VSAMMBR – uses the MacKinney System VSAM Utility Browse

If the ISPF BRIF interface is in use, StarTool FDM keeps the records of a data set in high
region storage if the data set size does not exceed two megabytes or the data set is a
path (since a path cannot have unique keys). Records are provided to the BRIF service as
requested. If you “max down” to the end of the data set, this could take a considerable
amount of time. If the data set is in storage, subsequent positioning in the browse is
much faster.

CALC Function
The CALC command performs floating point calculations.

Example
CALC

Syntax
CALC

Aliases
CAL, CALC

Operands
No operands are supported for the CALC subcommand.

Remarks
The CALC ISPF table displays in response to a CALC command. When you are in a CALC
display, you have many options. Delete a part of the table, find data in the table, print a
part of the table, store a part of the table in a data set, and so on. For assistance with the
different options available, use the HELP command, CUA functions, or type an O command
as a primary command.

The CALC table displays the calculator tape for your calculator. Enter new calculations
from the CALC display.

74 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

The following primary commands are supported directly for the CALC function. For
information on ISPMODE commands available anywhere in StarTool FDM, see “Common
Commands” in Chapter 2, "ISPF Interface Commands".

EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on CALC table data.

(or ET[BL])
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]

OUT[PUT] Outputs the CALC table to print or a data set.

Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REM[OVE] Trims the CALC table based on a string match.

Syntax REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD][NOT]

RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location. PF
keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
X Clears the CALC table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]
XA[LL] Clears the CALC table; this is equivalent to X ALL

CAX Function
The CAX command displays the names and attributes of active system catalogs in an ISPF
table.

Example
CAX

Syntax
CAX

Aliases
CAX, CAXW, CAXWA

Operand
No operands are supported for the CAX command.

Remarks
The CAX ISPF table displays in response to a CAX command. When you are in a CAX
display, you have many options. Delete a part of the table, sort the table in different
directions, find data in the table, print a part of the table, store a part of the table in a

Command Reference 75
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

data set, and so on. For assistance with the different options available, use the HELP
command, CUA functions, or enter an O command as a primary command or as a line
command.

The CAX table displays the names of all active catalogs for your system and allows you to
enter LISTCAT-type line commands against them.

The catalogs are open at the time of the list. Use the information to fix suspected broken
catalogs. StarTool FDM does not fix catalogs, but the display of information on the open
catalogs aid in the diagnosis of the problems.

The results of line commands against the CAX list are captured in the StarTool FDM log.
Save them for later sessions in an alternate log.

The CAX table displays the active system catalogs and information about each catalog on
a line level: Type, Status, CAXWA address, relative entry number, volume name, and data
set name.

Type Catalog type:

 ICF - Integrated Catalog Facility type catalog
 VSAM - old type VSAM catalog
 RECV - old type VSAM recoverable catalog
 MSTR - master catalog
Status Catalog status:
 ACTIVE - usual catalog status
 DELETE - a catalog delete occurred but the catalog is still allocated; it
will be deleted when freed by all users
 DISCON - a catalog DISCONNECT occurred but the catalog is still
allocated; it will be disconnected when freed by all of its users
 HUNG - a hung flag was set for this catalog
 -IOE - a permanent I/O error was detected for this catalog
 -NOM - no memory was available for catalog processing
Address Address of the CAXWA control block.
Entry Relative entry number of each CAX entry.
Volume Volume on which the catalog resides.
Dsname Data set name of the catalog.
The following primary commands are supported directly for the CAX
function; for documentation on ISPMODE commands available
anywhere in StarTool FDM, see “Common Commands” in Chapter 2,
"ISPF Interface Commands".
APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

CAX Rebuilds the CAX table after you empty it with the XALL command).
EDITT[BL] (or Enters an edit session on CAX table data.
ET[BL])
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses between individual
commands.

76 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

F Finds a string and positions the display start location.

Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[ANY/DSNAME/VOLUME]

L[OCATE] Positions to a data line in sorted tables by searching the current sorted
column for the specified data.
Syntax LOCATE number/dsname/volume

O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for CAX and operand syntax
assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the CAX table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REM[OVE] Trims the CAX table based on a string match.

Syntax REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/DSNAME/VOLUME]

RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location. PF
keys 5 and 17 are set to RFIND.
SO[RT] Sorts function tables into an alternate order. SORT with no operands
sorts the table in default order, while SORT with a field name sorts the
table in that order.
Syntax SORT [NUMBER/DSNAME/VOLUME]
[ASCEND/DESCEND]

TAG Applies the specified line command to table entries marked with *TAG*
in the DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are maintained

in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well as by your
installation.
X Clears the CAX table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the CAX table; this is equivalent to X ALL

The CAX function supports following line commands:

+ Provides an extension panel for command entry.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>
= Repeats the previous line command.
*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>
IDC Issues an IDCAMS LISTC and directs the output to the log.
K Kills and clears all following line commands.
LOG Copies the line into the log.
M Provides line command selection and entry assistance.
O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
S Selects line command (normally UT, it is set by SETSEL).
TAG Marks this table entry with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.

Command Reference 77
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

UT Selects the extended user line command panel.

X Drops the table line.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The CAX function supports the following block line
commands:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR- t=”Block line command,==”>
LL LOG command. Copies the range of lines into the log.
OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.
SS S command. Selects each line in the range of table lines.
XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------- Active Catalog Display ----------------------- ROW 1 OF 20
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=: ---------------------------------
CMD DATA/MSG TYPE STATUS -ADDR- NUM VOLUME ---------DATA SET NAME ------
ICF ACTIVE A5B058 1 SPD801 CATALOG.ISPD801.CNA730
ICF ACTIVE A6E118 2 TESS05 CATALOG.ITESS05.CN3307
ICF ACTIVE A80100 3 STR502 CATALOG.ISTR502.CNA800
ICF ACTIVE A8F030 4 IBNK80 CATALOG.IIBNK80
ICF ACTIVE A95058 5 TES806 CATALOG.ITES806.CN3196
ICF ACTIVE AC1990 6 DDA500 CATALOG.IDDA500.CN3440
ICF ACTIVE AC8DB8 7 AION81 CATALOG.IAION81.CN3871
ICF ACTIVE AC8628 8 TES802 CATALOG.ITES802.TEMP
ICF ACTIVE AC86E0 9 ACCT01 CATALOG.IACCT01.CNA900
ICF ACTIVE AF6AD8 10 GLD800 CATALOG.IGLD800.CN3881
ICF ACTIVE AC8968 11 STR516 CATALOG.ISTR516.CNA800
ICF ACTIVE AC1030 12 FICO80 CATALOG.IFICO80.CN9100
ICF ACTIVE AD8280 13 STR501 CATALOG.ISTR501.CNA800
ICF ACTIVE AC83C8 14 STR504 CATALOG.ISTR504.CNA800
ICF ACTIVE AC8218 15 IAC800 CATALOG.IIAC800.CN2650
ICF ACTIVE AC8A80 16 STR503 CATALOG.ISTR503.CNA800
ICF ACTIVE AF68E0 17 STR505 CATALOG.ISTR505.CNA800
ICF ACTIVE AF7118 18 STR803 CATALOG.ISTR803.CNA850

CHANGE Subcommand
The CHANGE subcommand switches StarTool FDM to a different data set.

Example
CHANGE lib.cntl

Syntax
CHANGE {dsn [VOLUME(vser)/VOLSET(vdef)] [SHR/OLD] /
* / FILE(ddname) [NUMBER(num)]}

78 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Aliases
STAR, START, STARTO, STARTOO, STARTOOL, C, CH, CHA, CHAN, CHANG, CHANGE

Defaults
SHR or previously used data set name and volume if no operand or * is entered.

Required
None

Operands
dsn Identifies the data set name. If the data set name is not entered
in single quotes (‘), your TSO PREFIX is appended to the start of
the entered data set name.
If you enter * in the data set name position, the previous set
name is assumed (you are switched from the current data set to
the previous data set with the * operand; another CHANGE *
switches data sets back again).
If your system has password security, type your data set
password after the data set name followed by a slash (/). The
syntax is dsn/password.
VOLUME(vser) Specifies the volume name on which the data set resides. If you
type a volume name, SYSALLDA is assumed as the unit name;
otherwise, use the unit name from the catalog.
Use this parameter if the data set is not cataloged or if the
catalog entry is not to be used. To use the catalog for a CHANGE
subcommand even if VOLSET is in effect, type VOLUME(*).
VOLSET(vdef) Specifies a default volume name for data set references. For
example, if you type VOLSET(NEWRES), subsequent CHANGE
subcommands with a data set name and no VOLUME parameter
assume a VOLUME(NEWRES) parameter.
Use this parameter if you want a default volume. To nullify the
effect of VOLSET, type VOLSET(*) on a subsequent CHANGE
subcommand.
SHR Allocates the data set with a disposition of SHR; allows
simultaneous use of this data set by others. SHR is
recommended.
OLD Allocates the data set with a disposition of OLD; does not allow
simultaneous use of this data set by others. SHR is
recommended.
FILE(ddname) Identifies the DDNAME of a pre-allocated data set. Only disk data
sets (including VIO) are supported. If you use the FILE keyword,
do not use dsn, SHR/OLD, VOLSET, and VOLUME. However, if the
data set is concatenated, use the SHR or OLD keyword since
StarTool FDM reallocates the data set.
NUMBER(num) Specifies the concatenation number for the DDNAME allocation
for the FILE keyword. num defaults to 1 but if num is larger than
the number of concatenated data sets, the last data set in the
sequence is used.

Command Reference 79
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 430 OF 434
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WESTERN.RGN.LINK,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=: ---------------
>----->c ‘western.rgn.link’
PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3380 C FB 80 9040 1X 47 10 40 TRK 2

PDS223I This is a linklist data set; all linklist libraries are authorized
PDS189I This data set is managed by LLA
PDS224I This data set is APF authorized
PDS226I This data set has 2 free directory blocks
PDS298I There are 4 users allocated to this data set

PDS300A ENTER OPTION -- DSN=WESTERN.RGN.LINK,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=:

********************************** BOTTOM OF DATA ****************************

CMDTBL Function
The CMDTBL function manages ISPF command tables. CMDTBL displays command tables
(by default, the current ISP command table is selected from the copy in memory) and
manipulates command table entries. Move, modify, and test Individual command table
entries in the CMDTBL function before saving the table.

The CMDTBL function builds, merges, or changes the edit mode of the command table.
After the CMDTBL function begins, shift left or right to see a double-line view of the
command table entries.

A command table contains the specifications of general commands that you can enter
from any panel during the execution of an application. Command table entries are
identified by an application ID. They are maintained in the ISPF table input library
(ISPTLIB).

Example
CMDTBL isp edit

Syntax
CMDTBL [appl / ISP / ISR / APPLTBL / SITETBL / USERTBL ]
[EDIT / NOEDIT ]
[NEW / TOP / BOTTOM / INSERT ]
[LIB(ddname) ]

Aliases
CMD, CMDT, CMDTB, CMDTBL

80 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Defaults
ISP, NOEDIT, INSERT, LIB(ISPTLIB)

Required
None

Operands
appl A 1- to 4-character application name. ISP, ISR, APPLTBL, SITETBL,
and USERTBL applications are handled as special cases. The
associated table is retrieved from memory if it is active.
ISP Invokes CMDTBL with the ISP application.
ISR Invokes CMDTBL with the ISR application.
APPLTBL Invokes CMDTBL with the active application (normally, ISP or ISR).
SITETBL For ISPF 4.2 or above, invokes CMDTBL with the site-defined
application.
USERTBL For ISPF 4.2 or above, invokes CMDTBL with the user-defined
application.
EDIT Edits the command table.
NOEDIT Displays the command table.
NEW Creates a new command table.
TOP Adds a command table to the top of the current command table.
BOTTOM Adds a command table after the end of the current command table.
INSERT Inserts a command table after the top line being displayed of the
current command table.
LIB(ddname) ddname to use for reading the table library (this defaults to
ISPTLIB).

Remarks
If CMDTBL is already active, the default APPL name is the current name and no merge is
done. Use with EDIT or NOEDIT to change the mode. For ISP, ISR, APPLTBL, SITETBL, or
USERTBL, LIB is ignored and the in-memory copy is used.

Type an ISPF command using any of the following methods:

 In a COMMAND field followed by Enter
 Press a PF key
 Select an attention field with a light pen or cursor select key

After entering a command, ISPF searches the application command table (if one exists)
and then the system command table (ISP or ISR). If it finds the command, ISPF takes the
proper action immediately; otherwise, ISPF passes the command through to the dialog
without changes in the COMMAND field.

Command Reference 81
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

The CMDTBL function supports the following table entries:

CMD Specifies line commands that affect this table entry.

DATA/MSG Provides feedback on commands.
VERB Specifies the name of the command table entry (can contain 2
to 8 characters).
T (for Truncation) Specifies the minimum number of characters that you must
enter to find a match with the command verb (0 means that no
truncation is allowed and 1 is not supported).
ACTION Specifies the ISPF action to be performed when the command is
entered (can contain up to 60 characters). The following actions
are supported:
 SELECT - followed by SELECT keywords, causes a dialog
(command, program, or panel) to be given control. Check this
type of entry with the TEST line command. The &ZPARM
parameter is often used in a SELECT entry. &ZPARM is replaced
by any parameters entered with the command.
 ALIAS - followed by the name of another command and an
optional parameters, specifies a command alias.
 PASSTHRU - causes the command to be passed through to the
dialog (as if it were not in the table).
 SETVERB - causes the command to be passed through to the
dialog with the command verb stored separately from the
parameters.
 NOP - causes the command to be inactivated. An inactive
command message displays for this type of command.
 blank - causes the command table entry to be ignored and
continues scanning to search for additional entries with the same
command verb.
 &name - allows dynamic specification of a command table entry.
Specify any ISPF variable, but a leading & is required.
DESCRIPTION Contains a brief description of a command (can contain up to 57
characters).

The following primary commands are supported directly for the CMDTBL function; for
documentation on ISPMODE commands available anywhere in StarTool FDM, see
“Common Commands” in Chapter 2, "ISPF Interface Commands".

APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and
executes each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

CL[OSE] Closes the command table application with no changes.

EDITT[BL] (or ET[BL]) Enters an edit session on the command table data.
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses
between individual commands.
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[ANY/VERB/ACTION/DESCRIPT]

82 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

IN[SERT] Adds 10 blank lines to the current command table after the
current row displayed at the top of the screen.
O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the CMDTBL
function and operand syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the command table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REM[OVE] Trims the command table based on a string match.

Syntax REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/VERB/ACTION/DESCRIPT]

RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start
location. PF keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
SA[VE] Updates the table to a data set or in memory.
Syntax SAVE appl / ISP / ISR
[REPLACE] [NOCHECK] [LIB(ddname)]

Defaults: current appl, LIB(ISPTABL)

For ISP or ISR and REPLACE, the in-memory copy is always
updated; NOCHECK avoids command table validity
checking.
NOS[SAVE] Closes the command table without making any command
table updates.
TAG Applies the specified line command to table entries marked
with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

X Clears the command table relative to the cursor position.

Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the command table; this is equivalent to X ALL

The following line commands are supported in the CMDTBL function:

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>
A After this entry.
B Before this entry.
C Copies line.
DEL Deletes line.
In Inserts line with an optional count.
K Kills and clears any following line commands.
LOG Copies the line into the log.
M Moves line.
O Provides line command selection assistance.
Rn Repros line with an optional count.
TAG Marks this table entry with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.
TEST Tests the command table entry with prompting if required.

Command Reference 83
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Xn Drops the command table entry with an optional count.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in the
CSECTS function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR- t=”Block line command,==”>
CC C command. Copies block.
DD D command. Deletes block.
MM M command. Moves block.
RR R command. Repros block.
XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.

------------- ISPF Command table display of ISP ------------ ROW 10 TO 28 OF 57

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command or PDSTOOL command
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD DATA/MSG Verb Description
LISTC PDS/USER CONTROLLED PASSTHRU
PLIST StarTool PLIST facility
TOP SCROLL TO TOP
BACKWARD SCROLL UP
UP SCROLL UP
BOTTOM SCROLL TO BOTTOM
TRYPAN SELECT A PANEL
DOWN SCROLL DOWN
LEFT SCROLL LEFT
RIGHT SCROLL RIGHT
RETURN RETURN

--------------- ISPF Command table display of ISP ------------OW 10 TO 17 OF 57

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command or STARTOOL command, Enter SAVE to save the table
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD VERB T ACTION
DATA/MSG DESCRIPTION

LISTC 0 &PDSPASS
---- PDS/USER CONTROLLED PASSTHRU
PLIST 2 SELECT CMD(STARTOOL F(ISPPROF) ISPXEQS LISTC 20 PROMPT
---- StarTool PLIST facility
TOP 0 ALIAS UP MAX
---- SCROLL TO TOP
BACKWARD 0 ALIAS UP
---- SCROLL UP
UP 0 SETVERB
---- SCROLL UP
BOTTOM 0 ALIAS DOWN MAX
---- SCROLL TO BOTTOM
TRYPAN 0 SELECT PANEL(&ZPARM)
---- SELECT A PANEL

84 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

COMBINE Subcommand
The COMBINE subcommand joins members together in an IEBUPDTE format. Any ISPF
statistics are preserved and a ./ in the input members is translated to >< in the output.
COMBINE supports record lengths beyond 256 characters.

Example
COMBINE pep* output.data(savmemb)

Syntax
COMBINE memgroup
dsname [VOLUME(volser)]
[IEBUPDTE/TITLE/NOSEP ]
[SEPCHAR(dd) ]
[TRANSFROM(ab) ]
[TRANSTO(cd) ]
[CALL/NOCALL ]
[SUMMARY/LIST/NOLIST ]
[OLD/SHR / MOD / NEW [BLK/TRK/CYL]
[DIR(num)] [SPACE sec)]]
[ROUND] [EXPDT(yyddd)/RETPD(nnnn)]
[RLSE]
[STORCLAS(sclass)] [MGMTCLAS(mclass)]
[DATACLAS(dclass)] [DSNTYPE(LIBRARY/PDS)]

Aliases
COMB, COMBI, COMBIN, COMBINE

Defaults
memgroup, SHR, IEBUPDTE, SEPCHAR(./)

If NEW is specified, BLK/TRK/CYL, DIR, SPACE, ROUND, EXPDT, STORCLAS, MGMTCLAS,

DATACLAS, and DSNTYPE default to values used for the input data set.

Required
memgroup, dsname

Operands
memgroup Identifies the group of members to be joined together.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed; for more
information, see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
dsname Specifies the output data set (and member if partitioned)
using standard TSO syntax.

Command Reference 85
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

VOLUME(volser) For NEW data sets, specifies the output volume name; for
existing data sets, use this parameter if the output data set is
not cataloged. For new data sets, code VOLUME(*) to mean
the volume parameter is to be copied.
IEBUPDTE Records output in IEBUPDTE format (add a “./ ADD NAME=”
statement before each output member and preserve ISPF
statistics).
TITLE Places a title line between output members giving the member
and data set name.
NOSEP Places no separators between output members.
SEPCHAR(dd) Names the IEBUPDTE type separator to place between
members (usually ./).
TRANSFROM(ab) Defaults to ./. A character string is translated to the TRANSTO
string if found in column one of the input stream.
TRANSTO(ab) Defaults to <>. A character string is substituted for the
TRANSFROM string if found in column one of the input stream.
CALL Invokes the copy program.
NOCALL Do not invoke the copy program; member checking and data
set allocations are still performed.
SUMMARY Display only summary and error messages.
LIST Display all messages.
NOLIST Display no messages.
SHR Allows shared use of the output data set; StarTool FDM
provides output data set protection. See Appendix E Appendix
B, "Update Protection".
OLD Obtains exclusive use of the output data set.
MOD For sequential output, obtains exclusive use and adds to the
end of the data set.
NEW Creates the output data set. When you specify NEW, specify
BLK/TRK/CYL, DIR, SPACE, ROUND, EXPDT (or RETPD), RLSE,
STORCLAS, MGMTCLAS, DATACLAS, and DSNTYPE keywords.
DIR(num) The number of directory blocks for the output data set. If you
do not enter DIR, the default is taken from the input data set.
SPACE(prim,sec) The primary and secondary quantities for the output data set
in track or cylinder units.
If you do not enter BLK, TRK, or CYL but you enter SPACE,
space allocation units are assumed the same as the current
allocation.
BLK Allocates the output data set in blocks. If you enter BLK
without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken from the
current allocation and converted to equivalent block units.
TRK Allocates the output data set in tracks. If you enter TRK
without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken from the
current allocation and converted to equivalent track units.
CYL Allocates the output data set in cylinder units. If you enter CYL
without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken from the
current allocation and converted to equivalent cylinder units.

86 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

ROUND Used with BLK to specify that the data set allocation be
rounded up to cylinder boundaries.
EXPDT(yyddd) The expiration date for the data set. On and after the
expiration date, delete or write over the data set. Use
EXPDT(yyyyddd).
RETPD(nnnn) Number of days (0 to 9999) for your data center to keep the
data set.
RLSE Release unused space in the data set after the copy.
STORCLAS(sc) Storage class for the data set. Use this parameter to identify
performance and availability requirements for data sets. Use it
instead of UNIT and VOLUME keywords for SMS managed data
sets to determine where the data set is allocated. To nullify
this parameter, type STORCLAS(*).
MGMTCLAS(mc) The management class for the data set. It establishes the
migration, backup, and space release characteristics for SMS-
managed data sets. To nullify this parameter, type
MGMTCLAS(*).
DATACLAS(dc) The data class for the data set. It provides data attributes
such as RECFM, KEYLEN, SPACE, EXPDT or RETPD, DSORG,
LRECL, and some VSAM SHR options for SMS-managed-data
sets. To nullify this parameter, type DATACLAS(*). Use
DATACLAS for data sets that are not SMS managed.
DSNTYPE(typ) Specify typ as LIBRARY for a PDSE or PDS for a partitioned
data set. A PDSE must be a SMS-managed data set.

Remarks
Use the COMBINE subcommand to consolidate members into a single data set or member.
ISPF statistics are preserved, if possible, and IEBUPDTE controls in a member are
converted to >< control statements.

COMBINE and SEPARATE are paired subcommands. To join members into a combined
member or data set, use the COMBINE subcommand. To split the members apart again,
use the SEPARATE subcommand or IEBUPDTE if the logical record length is 80.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
----------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ------------- Row 531 to 541 of 541
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.PDSE,VOL=SER=SER003 MEM=(#MDSECT --------------------------
>------>combine * lib.cntl(download)
PDS290I COMBINE is in progress
PDS051I #MDSECT was combined; input=1,656; output=1,657
PDS051I @FILEXID was combined; input=5,852; output=5,853
PDS051I @FILEPAR was combined; input=2,264; output=2,265
PDS051I @SERVICE was combined; input=5,685; output=5,686
PDS051I @VERIFY was combined; input=1,953; output=1,954
PDS051I PDS0520 was combined; input=472; output=473

PDS054I Totals -- Members=6; Input=17,882; Characters=1,430,560

******************************* Bottom of data *******************************

Command Reference 87
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

COMPARE Subcommand
The COMPARE subcommand displays differences between two members. Use the TSO
COMPARE command. Add COMPARE operands after the member names.

If the current data set is not partitioned, code an * in the data set name position to
compare the current data set to a different data set.

To compare directory entries between two libraries, use the COMPDIR subcommand. See
the “COMPDIR Subcommand”.

Example
COMPARE oldmem other.lib(newmem)

Syntax
COMPARE oldmemb newmemb [DELTA ]
[OVSUM ]
[CHNG ]
[SEQ/NOSEQ ]
[COBOL ]
[OVOL(volname)]
[NVOL(volname)]

Note: these parameters are for SuperC.

Aliases
CO, COM, COMP, COMPA, COMPAR, COMPARE

Defaults
DELTA

Required
oldmemb, newmemb

Operands
oldmemb Base member to be compared with newmemb. oldmemb can be a
data set and member name if a member from a different data set
is used.
newmemb New member to be compared with oldmemb. newmemb can be a
data set and member name if a member from a different data set
is used.
If you code this operand as the name of a partitioned data set
with no member name, the base member name is used. Use this
to compare two different levels of the same module.

88 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

other operands Optional. May include any COMPARE operands.

Remarks
Use the TSO COMPAREW (preprocessor to COMPAREX), COMPAREC (pre-processor to
SuperC), or COMPARE$ (the Yale compare command). This choice is made during StarTool
FDM installation. To determine which program is used, type a CONTROL DEFAULT
subcommand and look for an output line beginning COMPARE calls.

This interface is optional. Use it if COMPAREX, SuperC, or the Yale compare program is
installed at your installation.

COMPDIR Subcommand
The COMPDIR subcommand creates a sublist based on differences or similarities between
data sets.

Example
COMPDIR pep* file(ispplib)
DEL *

Syntax
COMPDIR memgroup
{/ or dsname [VOLUME(volser)] / * / FILE(ddname) [NUMBER(numb)]}
[ALIAS/NOALIAS ]
[AS(pname) / TO(pname) ]
[SUBSTITUTE(oldstring/newstring)]
[SEQ/NOSEQ ]
[EXIST/NOEXIST/CHANGED/NOCHANGED/DIRCHANGE/NODIRCHANGE]
[MEMBERS/MEMLIST/ML/NEWML/SUBLIST]

Aliases
COMPD, COMPDI, COMPDIR

Defaults
memgroup, NOALIAS, EXIST, SUBLIST

Required
memgroup, dsname, or * or FILE(ddname)

Command Reference 89
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Operands
memgroup Group of members to be compared to those in the other
data set.
Default member names, member lists, member name
ranges, and member name patterns are allowed. For more
information, see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
dsname Comparison data set. Use standard TSO dsname syntax. If
you enter * in the dsname field, the previously used data
set name used for a COPY or COMPDIR subcommand is
used.
As an alternative to the AS or TO keywords, enter partial
member names in parentheses following the data set
name, as in this example: the.dsn(pname)
VOLUME(volser) For uncataloged data sets, identifies the output data set
volume name.
FILE(ddname) The output data set is already allocated with the provided
ddname. Only disk data sets are supported.
NUMBER(numb) Concatenation number for the DDNAME identified. numb
defaults to 1. If numb is larger than the number of
concatenated data sets, the last data set in the
concatenation sequence is used.
ALIAS Adds associated members (aliases, apparent aliases, and
associated main members) to the list of names to check.
NOALIAS Adds only specifically identified member names to the
sublist of members.
AS(pname) pname defines the name of any comparison members. For
example, with AS(new) and the input members AA, ABBA,
and IBM04, members named NEW, NEWA, and NEW04 are
compared. AS and TO are equivalent keywords.
If only a single member is entered and the ALIAS keyword
is not entered, the resulting member name is taken only
from the AS or TO keyword.
TO(pname) pname defines the name of any comparison members. For
example, with TO(new) and the input members AA, ABBA,
and IBM04, members named NEW, NEWA, and NEW04 are
compared. TO and AS are equivalent keywords.
If only a single member is entered and the ALIAS keyword
is not entered, the resulting member name is taken only
from the AS or TO keyword.
SUBSTITUTE(old,new) Used with a forward slash (/) to represent the current data
set name. Use SUBSTITUTE to replace a string of
characters in the source data set name to create a target
data set name.
For example, if the current data set is PDSEXXX.MSGS, the
following two subcommands are equivalent:
COMPDIR ABC* PDSEYYYY.MSGS
COMPDIR ABC* / SUBSTITUTE(XXX/YYYY)
EXIST Searches for members from the current member group
that are also present in the compare data set.

90 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

NOEXIST Searches for members from the current member group

that are not present in the compare data set.
SEQ Can use with CHANGED or NOCHANGED to ignore
sequence numbers in source member compares.
NOSEQ Default. Can use with CHANGED or NOCHANGED to
compare sequence numbers in source member compares.
CHANGED Searches for members from the current member group
that are not present in the compare data set or those
members that do not contain identical data.
Actual member data is compared for this operand and if the
members are in load data sets, you can get unequal
compares if CSECTS are re-blocked or re-ordered in load
modules being compared.
NOCHANGED Searches for members from the current member group
that are present in the compare data set and whose
members contain identical data.
Actual member data is compared for this operand and if the
members are in load data sets, you can get unequal
compares if CSECTS are re-blocked or re-ordered in load
modules being compared.
DIRCHANGE Searches for members from the current member group
that are not present in the compare data set or those
members whose directory entry is not identical to the
corresponding member in the current data set.
NODIRCHANGE Searches for members from the current member group
that are present in the compare data set and whose
directory entries are identical to the corresponding member
in the current data set.
MEMBERS Displays the names of members that satisfy the COMPDIR
search condition without changing the current member
group.
MEMLIST Same as ML. Specifies that any member selected by
COMPDIR displays in a MEMLIST display. If no members
are selected, a null sublist is the result of the comparison.
ML Same as MEMLIST. Specifies that any member selected by
COMPDIR displays in a MEMLIST display. If no members
are selected, a null supplest is the result of the comparison.
NEWML Same as MEMLIST and ML except that the current MEMLIST
is reset.
SUBLIST Specifies that any members displayed by the COMPDIR
subcommunity are selected for inclusion in a new SUBLIST.
If no members are selected, a null sublist is the result of
the comparison.

Remarks
The COMPDIR subcommand compares two libraries that contain members with a known
relationship (for example, a library containing a new level of a software product or a new
‘SYS1.PARMLIB’ for a system in test mode).

If the result of a COMPDIR subcommand is a sublist of members, the next subcommand

should be one that performs an operation on all of the members in the sublist.

Command Reference 91
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
---------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# ----------- ROW 990 TO 1,007 OF 1,033
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CLIST,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=(COMPR -------------------
>----->compdir : lib.clistv noexist
PDS175I The member names have been compared
PDS176I 63 members initially; 33 members dropped

PDS165I Members are: COMPR, DSP, MIGR8, NOMG8DSN, NOMIGR8, NULL, NULL2,
PCLIST1, PDSABEND, PDSCALL, PDSCLIS, PDSN, PDSNN, PDSSE, PDSTR, QW,
QWO, SCPASMCL, SPIFFY, SPZAP, SSCT, SSUS, SSVT, SYNTAX, TESTCLS,
TESTJUMP, TESTPDST, TESTPRIM, TRYREX, VOLUME

PDS193I This group contains 30 members

>----->at
PDS230I ISPF Stats: VER.MOD CREATED LAST MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD ID
PDS230I COMPR 01.00 00/05/07 00/05/07 8:31 31 31 0 SER07
PDS230I DSP 01.03 02/12/19 02/10/08 9:07 2 2 1 SER07
PDS230I MIGR8 01.02 93/05/21 93/05/21 11:07 9 4 9 #G146
PDS230I NOMG8DSN
PDS230I NOMIGR8
PDS230I NULL 01.00 91/02/08 91/02/08 10:26 0 0 0 SER07

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log# 1 -------------- ROW 584 TO 595 OF 595
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.PDSE310,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=(PDSZA@C ------------------------
>----->compdir pdsz* lib.pdse221 changed
PDS175I The data has been compared
PDS176I 84 members initially; 47 members dropped

PDS165I Members are: PDSZA@C, PDSZA@P, PDSZABA, PDSZAID, PDSZALLO, PDSZALOC,

PDSZAOF, PDSZATB, PDSZATTR, PDSZAUTH, PDSZAZA, PDSZCHAN, PDSZCOMA,
PDSZCONT, PDSZCOPS, PDSZCOPY, PDSZCREA, PDSZDUP, PDSZEXCL, PDSZFIND,
PDSZFINM, PDSZFIXE, PDSZFIXP, PDSZFSTR, PDSZHIST, PDSZINIT, PDSZINST,
PDSZMAP, PDSZPDSE, PDSZPDST, PDSZPRIN, PDSZREPL, PDSZRST1, PDSZRST2,
PDSZSVCM, PDSZVERI, PDSZXREF

PDS193I This group contains 37 members

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

92 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

FUNCTIONS CONTROL A-M LINE CMDS A-M DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M FEATURES
CONTROL N-Z LINE CMDS N-Z MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS
--------------- Source MEMLIST 1, Session# 1 --------------- Row 1 to 25 of 37
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.PDSE310,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=(PDSZA@C ------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG VER.MOD CREATED LAST MODIFIED SIZE INIT ID
PDSZA@C
PDSZA@P
PDSZABA
PDSZAID
PDSZALLO
PDSZALOC
PDSZAOF
PDSZATB
PDSZATTR
PDSZAUTH
PDSZAZA
PDSZCHAN
PDSZCOMA
PDSZCONT

COMPRESS Subcommand
The COMPRESS subcommand invokes IEBCOPY (or a compatible program) to compress a
partitioned data set.

NOTE If a COMPRESS operation does not complete because of a software or hardware

error, your data set may be destroyed since data sets are updated in place.

For a PDSE data set, the COMPRESS subcommand invokes the COPY subcommand to
reorganize the data set as follows:

1 If you have proper access authority for the source data set, a COPY subcommand is
issued with the COPYBACK keyword.

2 A new temporary PDSE similar to the source data set is allocated.

3 All members are copied into the new temporary target data set.

4 The source PDSE is reset to NEW status (all members are deleted).

5 All members are copied back into the source data set.

6 If TRIM is requested, all unused tracks are released.

Example
COMPRESS summary

Syntax
COMPRESS [SUMMARY / LIST / NOLIST TRIM]

Command Reference 93
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Aliases
COMPR, COMPRE, COMPRES, COMPRESS

Defaults
SUMMARY

Required
None

Operands
SUMMARY Displays only compress summary and error messages.
LIST Displays all compress messages.
NOLIST Displays no compress messages.
TRIM After the compress operation, trim the data set as follows:
 For a PDS data set, release any unused extents as for FIXPDS RELEXT
 For a PDSE data set, release all unused tracks as for FIXPDS RELEASE

Remarks
You may have chosen any one of several interfaces during StarTool FDM installation. To
determine which interface you selected, type a CONTROL DEFAULT subcommand and look
for an output line beginning COMPRESS calls. Any of the following are supported:

IEBCOPY Invokes IEBCOPY (or PDSFAST if IEBCOPY is renamed) directly.

PDSFAST Invokes PDSFAST directly.
IKJEFTSR Uses the TSO/E parallel terminal monitor program interface to
authorized tasks.
NOTE Using interface causes a session lock-up if you invoke PDSFAST
and use SHR allocation.
anyother Uses the TSO/E parallel terminal monitor program interface with
potential lock-up problems if you invoke PDSFAST.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ------------ ROW 14 OF 19
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=(CPX623 -------------------------
>----->compress
IEB144I THERE ARE 0000124 UNUSED TRACKS IN OUTPUT DATA SET
IEB149I THERE ARE 0000025 UNUSED DIRECTORY BLOCKS IN OUTPUT DIRECTORY
IEB147I END OF JOB -00 WAS HIGHEST SEVERITY CODE

94 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

---------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ---------------- ROW 28 TO 47 OF 63

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand or a special control code:
- DSN=WSER07.SMSLIB.PDSEXTN2,VOL=SER=STG003 MEM=: -------------------------
>------> C SMSLIB.PDSEXTN2
PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3390 C FB 80 32720 26X 63 1 1 TRK NOLIMIT

PDS300A ENTER OPTION -- DSN=WSER07.SMSLIB.PDSEXTN2,VOL=SER=STG003 MEM=CUS420

>----->compress
PDS041I this data set is a PDSE; it will be reorganized

Copy : '&&TEMP' NEW NOBLDL NODUP COPYBACK SUMMARY

PDS174I '&&TEMP' has been created on volume STG009
IEB1135I IEBCOPY FOR JDZ1110 SERVICE LEVEL UY97739 DATED 08/26/93
IEB1035I WSER07 $SERPDSE $SERPDSE 06:33:21 WED 02 AUG 1995 PARM='' A0
IEB1064I STANDARD DD NAMES- SYSIN SYSPRINT SYSUT1 SYSUT2 SYSUT3 SYS
IEB1065I OVERRIDING DD NAMES- SYS00011 SYS00013 SYS00008 SYS00010 SYS00015 SY
IEB1057I VL GETMAIN REQUESTED 250K TO 1M BYTES. OBTAINED 1M. WILL RELEASE 8K
COPY O=SYS00010,LIST=NO,I=SYS00008
IEB1058I ALLOCATED 2 CONTIGUOUS BUFFERS EACH 111K BYTES. WORK AREA HAS 790K
IEB1013I COPYING FROM PDSE INDD=SYS00008 VOL=STG003 DSN=WSER07.SMSLIB.PDSEXT
IEB1014I TO PDSE OUTDD=SYS00010 VOL=STG009 DSN=SYS95214.T063320.RA0
IGW01550I 154 OF 154 MEMBERS WERE COPIED
IEB1016I RETURN CODE IS 0
IEB1056I RELEASED 1016K ADDITIONAL BYTES.
IEB147I END OF JOB - 0 WAS HIGHEST SEVERITY CODE

IEB1135I IEBCOPY FOR JDZ1110 SERVICE LEVEL UY97739 DATED 08/26/93

IEB1035I WSER07 $SERPDSE $SERPDSE 06:33:27 WED 02 AUG 1995 PARM='' A0
IEB1064I STANDARD DD NAMES- SYSIN SYSPRINT SYSUT1 SYSUT2 SYSUT3 SYS
IEB1065I OVERRIDING DD NAMES- SYS00011 SYS00013 SYS00010 SYS00008 SYS00015 SY
IEB1057I VL GETMAIN REQUESTED 250K TO 1M BYTES. OBTAINED 1M. WILL RELEASE 8K
COPY O=SYS00008,LIST=NO,I=SYS00010
IEB1058I ALLOCATED 2 CONTIGUOUS BUFFERS EACH 111K BYTES. WORK AREA HAS 790K
IEB1013I COPYING FROM PDSE INDD=SYS00010 VOL=STG009 DSN=SYS95214.T063320.RA0
IEB1014I TO PDSE OUTDD=SYS00008 VOL=STG003 DSN=WSER07.SMSLIB.PDSEXT
IGW01550I 154 OF 154 MEMBERS WERE COPIED
IEB1016I RETURN CODE IS 0
IEB1056I RELEASED 1016K ADDITIONAL BYTES.
IEB147I END OF JOB - 0 WAS HIGHEST SEVERITY CODE

PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3390 C FB 80 32720 26X 63 33 1 TRK NOLIMIT

CONDEND Subcommand
Use the CONDEND subcommand to terminate StarTool FDM if the previous subcommand
has one or more warning or error level messages. The return code is set to the numeric
value of the message that terminated StarTool FDM. After StarTool FDM terminates by
CONDEND, the return code is in the range of 400 to 999; however, if RC is entered, it is
translated to 4 or 8.

Command Reference 95
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Example
CONDEND exit(450)

Syntax
CONDEND [WARNINGS/ERRORS/EXIT(n1,n2, ...)/NOEXIT(n1,n2, ...)]
RC

Aliases
COND, CONDE, CONDEND

Defaults
WARNINGS

Required
None

Operands
WARNINGS Exit if any message issued by the last subcommand was in the range
PDS400W through PDS999E (warning or error messages).
ERRORS Exit if any message issued by the last subcommand was in the range
PDS600E through PDS999E (error messages).
EXIT Exit if a named warning or error message was issued by the last
subcommand. For example, to exit for a PDS450W, PDS715E, or
PDS823E message, type CONDEND EXIT(450,715,823)
NOEXIT Exit for any warning or error message except for those messages in
an exemption list. For example, to exit for any warning or error
message except PDS460W, PDS958E or PDS609E, type
CONDEND NOEXIT(460,958,609)
RC Translates the return code to four if the terminating message was
between PDS400W through PDS599W or eight if the terminating
message was between PDS600E and PDS999E.

Remarks
Use this subcommand to check that a critical subcommand in a CLIST is working as
expected. StarTool FDM CLIST continues to execute after receiving program warning or
error messages. With this facility, terminate a StarTool FDM CLIST process when it is not
functioning properly. You can detect this problem from a driving CLIST by examining
&LASTCC.

Put CONDEND statements in your CLIST just after any critical subcommands.

96 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

CONTROL Subcommand
The CONTROL subcommand specifies global and immediate processing options.

Example
CONTROL DSNAME(lib.cntl(pdsdata)) OLD

Syntax
CONTROL [ALIASINFO|NOALIASINFO]
[LKEDDATE|NOLKEDDATE]
[PROMPT|NOPROMPT]
[RECOVER|NORECOVER]
[TRANSLATOR|NOTRANSLATOR]
[SINGLE|DOUBLE|MULTIPLE|RETAIN(ntrk)]
[INFO|NOINFO]
[PUTLINE|NOPUTLINE]
[COMMAND|NOCOMMAND]

[SYSOUT(c)
{FORM(ffff)|NOFORM|DEST(destination)|NODEST}|
DSNAME(memb) {OLD|MOD|NEW|SHR}|
NODSN|
NOSYSOUT]

[DEFAULTS|IOSTATS|LISTENV|RESTRICTED|TESTABEND|TESTMSGS|
TESTOUTLOOP|TESTPARSE|TESTREAD|TESTSYNTAX]

Aliases
CON, CONT, CONTR, CONTRO

Defaults
Initially in TSO: ALIASINFO, LKEDDATE, PROMPT, RECOVER, TRANSLATOR, RETAIN(9)
Initially in the background: ALIASINFO, LKEDDATE, NOPROMPT, NORECOVER,
TRANSLATOR, RETAIN(9)

Required
None

Operands
ALIASINFO Provides alias information for ATTRIB subcommands. Also
provides alias information for MAP subcommands with alias
members if MAP has no CSECT-limiting parameters.
NOALIASINFO Provides no alias or main member identification for ATTRIB
and MAP subcommands.

Command Reference 97
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

LKEDDATE The date of the linkage edit on ATTRIB subcommands.

NOLKEDDATE Does not provide the date of the linkage edit on ATTRIB
subcommands.
PROMPT Solicits YES/NO responses from the terminal operator unless
StarTool FDM is executing in the background, from CLIST
input or from a storage stack.
YES/NO prompting occurs at the following decision points:
 RENAME - before renaming a group of members
 DELETE - before deleting a default member. Avoid this by
tying DELETE * to delete the default member (a single
member)
 DELETE - before deleting a list or a group of members
 FIXPDS - before modifying a data set
 SUBMIT - before submitting a group of members
 RESTORE - before restoring a member found in scan mode. A
CAN reply is also acceptable
NOPROMPT Does not solicit YES/NO responses; assumes a YES response
in each case.
RECOVER Attempts ESTAE recovery after a program ABEND.
NORECOVER Does not attempt ESTAE recovery after a program ABEND.
Subcommands that specifically test for ABEND conditions
(such as IF with LOADERR or VERIFY with LOAD) recover
from ABEND situations regardless of RECOVER/NORECOVER.
TRANSLATOR Outputs assembler/compiler TRANSLATOR information from
HISTORY subcommands.
NOTRANSLATOR Does not output assembler/compiler TRANSLATOR
information from HISTORY subcommands.
SINGLE Uses single buffering for input operations. This operand is
ignored for PDSE data sets.
DOUBLE Uses double buffering for input operations wherever
possible. This operand is ignored for PDSE data sets.
MULTIPLE Uses multiple buffering for input operations wherever
possible. This mode reads an entire disk track with each
input operation. This operand is ignored for PDSE data sets.
RETAIN(ntrk) The number of disk track images (one through nine) to keep
in storage buffers. Each new member read operation
searches these buffers before performing a read multiple
EXCP operation. EXCP operations are saved during the
execution of a single subcommand.
Each additional buffer requires about 58K of storage. If you
later enter RETAIN(n) with a lower number, extra buffers are
not returned to the system. A default number of RETAIN
buffers are allocated during StarTool FDM initialization.
SYSOUT(c) Starts a session log output to the SYSOUT class specified.
Enter DEST and FORM keywords as additional SYSOUT
specifications. The SYSOUT output continues until the end of
the program or until you enter CONTROL SYSOUT /
NOSYSOUT / DSNAME / NODSN.

98 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

NOSYSOUT Terminates any SYSOUT or DSNAME session log output.

DEST(destination) The destination for SYSOUT data (used only with the
SYSOUT keyword). Enter dst as a 1- to 8-character JES
destination or a name of the form nodename.userid
NODEST Uses the default destination for routing SYSOUT data.
FORM(ffff) The forms name for SYSOUT (used only with the SYSOUT
keyword). Enter ffff as a 1- to 4-character JES form name.
NOFORM Uses the default forms name for SYSOUT data.
DSNAME(member) Starts a session log output to the named data set. The
DSNAME output continues until the end of the program or
until you enter CONTROL SYSOUT / NOSYSOUT / DSNAME /
NODSN.
In addition:
 Enter a member name for session log output to a partitioned
data set
 Enter a data set password
 Enter a data set disposition (OLD/MOD/SHR/NEW)
 If you enter a data set disposition of NEW, the output data set
is created by the CONTROL subcommand with space
parameters as follows: SPACE=(TRK,(1,4))
NODSN Terminates any SYSOUT or DSNAME session log output.
OLD Obtains exclusive use on the session log data set; it may not
be shared with other users.
MOD Adds to the end of any existing session log output data set.
If the data set does not exist, it is created with
DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=80,BLKSIZE=3120),
SPACE=(TRK,(1,4))
SHR Shares the session log data set with other users. Since the
data set is modified, minimize the use of this parameter.
NEW Creates a session log data set with DCB=(RECFM=FB,
LRECL=80, BLKSIZE=3120), SPACE=(TRK,(1,4))
INFO Resumes output of StarTool FDM informational messages.
NOINFO Suppresses StarTool FDM informational messages. This is
intended for use in background sessions or in any situation
where the normal informational messages are not required.
PUTLINE Resumes output of PUTLINE data from StarTool FDM.
NOPUTLINE Suppresses StarTool FDM PUTLINE output (except error
messages). This is intended for use in CLISTs where the
amount of StarTool FDM output is to be minimized.
COMMAND Resumes log recording of StarTool FDM commands.
NOCOMMAND Suppresses log recording of StarTool FDM commands. This is
intended for use when SYSOUT/DSN recording is being
performed and recording of commands and prompting
messages is not wanted.
DEFAULTS Displays a list of StarTool FDM defaults set by the installation
default module. This list includes external programs called,
global defaults, and a security summary.

Command Reference 99
Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

IOSTATS Displays statistics relating to input buffering. Only non-zero

quantities display and statistics are set to zero after each
display.
LISTENV Displays information on the hardware and software
environment. This includes information on the last IPL and
the system catalog.
RESTRICTED Displays a list of restricted use subcommand names. Users
can restrict subcommands at StarTool FDM installation. This
message lists subcommand and operand combinations that
your installation chose to restrict. This operand may be not
be available for your use since it can also be restricted.
TESTABEND Provides a S0C1 ABEND (or some other ABEND) for program
testing.
TESTMSGS Displays all StarTool FDM numbered messages for program
testing.
TESTOUTLOOP Enters an intentional output message loop for program
testing.
TESTPARSE Switches the parse processor. When CONTROL TESTPARSE is
first issued, the StarTool FDM parser is disabled in favor of
IKJPARS. The next use of TESTPARSE toggles the StarTool
FDM parser back again. When the StarTool FDM parser is
disabled, a global message with NOPARSE generates as
feedback. This facility is for program testing.
TESTREAD Tests the input EXCP routine using an initial TTR of 000001
for each of the following cases:
 BPAM - reads using a BPAM DCB for PDSE data sets or a BSAM
DCB for striped data sets. Other tests are not performed for
these data sets. The return code is 00 and NEXT TTR
ADDRESS is 000001
 SINGLE - reads single (each read obtains one physical block).
The return code is 00 and NEXT TTR ADDRESS is 000002 if
sufficient data is available
 DOUBLE - reads double (each read obtains two physical
blocks). The return code is 00 and NEXT TTR ADDRESS is
000003 if sufficient data is available
 MULTIPLE - reads multiple (each read obtains an entire track).
If the disk unit supports the READ MULTIPLE CCW, the return
code is 00 and NEXT TTR ADDRESS is 000101 if sufficient
data is available
If the disk unit does not support the READ MULTIPLE CCW,
you get a PDS892E message. The return code is 00, and
NEXT TTR ADDRESS is 000003 (double buffering is used).
TESTSYNTAX Tests subcommand syntax only. After CONTROL
TESTSYNTAX is issued, StarTool FDM subcommands are
syntax checked (except for CHANGE, CONTROL, END, GO,
QUIT, and ISPMODE commands). TESTSYNTAX toggles
StarTool FDM subcommands again. When the StarTool FDM
subcommand syntax is disabled, a global message with
TESTSYNTAX generates as feedback. This facility tests the
syntax of subcommands before using them in another
process.

100 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Remarks
Most CONTROL subcommand operands (such as ALIASINFO, SINGLE, and TESTPARSE)
are global in that they remain in effect until reset by another CONTROL subcommand. The
other operands (such as TESTABEND and IOSTATS) are immediate and take effect for only
a single CONTROL subcommand.

CONTROL does not use ISPF services; however, if StarTool FDM is invoked from READY
mode, StarTool FDM attempts to establish an ISPF environment for the first CONTROL
subcommand containing a SYSOUT or DSN keyword so that subsequent subcommands
can use ISPF services.

The input buffering type (BPAM, SINGLE, DOUBLE, MULTIPLE, or RETAIN) is reset for each
data set allocated according to the data set organization or the device type on which the
data set resides. RETAIN buffering is used for device types that support the READ
MULTIPLE CCW. DOUBLE is used otherwise. BPAM mode is selected automatically for PDSE
data sets and cannot be selected explicitly.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
---------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------------- ROW 447 OF 455
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST2,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=: -------------------------------
>----->control retain(9)

PDS100I STARTOOL/SuperEdit -- Version 6.2.0 2000.001

PDS030I Global operands: NOTRANSLATOR, ALIASINFO, LKEDDATE, PROMPT, RECOVER

PDS030I Global operands: NODSNAME, NOSYSOUT, NOFORM, NODEST
PDS031I Input buffering: RETAIN(9)
PDS036I Largest free storage area is 2364K
PDS046I Largest area above the line is 1905M
****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

Command Reference 101

Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ----- ROW 26 TO 44 OF 95

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR849 MEM= ----------------------------------
>----->cont defaults

PDS100I STARTOOL/SuperEdit -- Version 6.2.0 2000.001

PDS030I Global operands: ALIASINFO, LKEDDATE, PROMPT, RECOVER, TRANSLATOR

PDS030I Global operands: NODSNAME, NOSYSOUT, NOFORM, NODEST
PDS031I Input buffering: RETAIN(9)
PDS036I Largest free storage area is 1304K
PDS046I Largest area above the line is 1895M

PDS037I Installation defaults from PDS#OPT4 1999/06/08 07.34:

Access control method NONE
DSN default format MSG
COMPRESS SUMMARY/LIST SUMMARY
COPY SUMMARY/LIST LIST
COPY SHR/OLD allocation SHR
COPY temporary unit SYSDA
COPY permanent unit SYSALLDA
S line command - LISTC C
BLK3390 calls BLK3390
BLK9345 calls BLK9345
BROWSE calls PBROWSE
COMPARE calls COMPAREC
COMPRESS calls IKJEFTSR
COPY calls IKJEFTSR
EDIT calls PEDIT

102 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ----- ROW 33 TO 52 OF 77

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand or a special control code:
- DSN=WSER07.PRINT,VOL=SER=STR961 -----------------------------------------
>----->cont listenv

PDS100I PDSE/SuperEdit -- Version 6.2.0 2000.001

PDS030I Global operands: ALIASINFO, LKEDDATE, PROMPT, RECOVER, TRANSLATOR

PDS030I Global operands: NODSNAME, NOSYSOUT, NOFORM, NODEST
PDS031I Input buffering: RETAIN(8)
PDS036I Largest free storage area is 3020K
PDS046I Largest area above the line is 1891M

PDS280I System serial:05905; CPU type:5995

PDS281I Active CPUs:4 5 6 7
PDS282I SMF ID:SCU1; System mode:ESA/370
PDS283I Maintenance data:SP6.0.2 JBB6602
PDS284I IPL date:97/04/14 97.104; Time:06:11
PDS285I IPL type:CLPA; Volume:ES1RES; UNIT:54A
PDS286I Master catalog dsname:SYS1.SCU1S11.ICFMCAT; Volume:ES1CAT; UNIT:541
PDS287I OS/390 1.2.0; DFSMS 1.3.0; DFSMShsm; DFSMSdss; DFSMSrmm; ISPF 4.3;
PDS287I VTAM 4.3; TSO/E 2.05.0; RACF 2.02.0;
PDS288I Current NUCLEUS ID:1; I/O CONFIG ID:00

PDS052I Real storage is 472M; expanded storage is 512M

PDS053I LOAD parameter is '054100M '

PDS059I Storage map START END SIZE

PDS059I ----------- -------- -------- ----------
PDS059I E-PRIVATE 09100000 7FFFFFFF 1,948,672K
PDS059I E-CSA 042CB000 090FFFFF 80,084K
PDS059I E-MLPA 042CA000 042CAFFF 4K
PDS059I E-FLPA 042C7000 042C9FFF 12K
PDS059I E-PLPA 02837000 042C6FFF 27,200K
PDS059I E-SQA 01A9F000 028361DF 13,920K
PDS059I E-NUCLEUS (R/W) 012E3000 01A9EFFF 7,920K
PDS059I E-NUCLEUS (R/O) 01000000 012E24FF 2,956K
PDS059I --------- 16 Megabyte Boundary Line -----------
PDS059I NUCLEUS (R/O) 00FDD000 00FFFFFF 140K
PDS059I NUCLEUS (R/W) 00F94000 00FDCD8F 292K
PDS059I SQA 00E84000 00F93FFF 1,088K
PDS059I PLPA 00C87000 00E83FFF 2,036K
PDS059I MLPA 00C84000 00C86FFF 12K
PDS059I CSA 00800000 00C83FFF 4,624K
PDS059I PRIVATE 00005000 007FFFFF 8,172K
PDS059I V=R AREA 00005000 00024FFF 128K
PDS059I SYSTEM 00001000 00004FFF 16K
PDS059I PSA 00000000 00000FFF 4K
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ****************************

NOTE Be aware that values displayed for real and extended storage in message PDS052
on the CONTROL LISTENV panel may not be accurate when VARY STOR commands are in
progress.

Command Reference 103

Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

COPY Subcommand
The COPY subcommand builds copy control statements and invokes a copy program to
selectively copy members to another data set.

Example
COPY mem1:mem2 other.dataset new tra spa(5,5) dir(20)

Syntax
COPY memgroup
{/ or dsname [VOLUME(volser)] / * / FILE(ddname) [NUMBER(numb)]}
[OLD/SHR / NEW [BLK/TRK/CYL] [DIR(num)] [SPACE sec)]]
[ROUND] [EXPDT(yyddd)/RETPD(nnnn)] [RLSE]
[STORCLAS(sclass)] [MGMTCLAS(mclass)]
[DATACLAS(dclass)] [DSNTYPE(LIBRARY/PDS)]
[UNCTLG/NOCATLG]
[ALIAS/NOALIAS ]
[AS(pname) / TO(pname) ]
[CALL/NOCALL ]
[COPYBACK ]
[EXIST/NOEXIST/EXCLUDE/NOBLDL]
[MAXBLK(num) ]
[REPLACE/NOREPLACE ]
[SUMMARY/LIST/NOLIST ]
[UNIT(Unitname) ]
[CHANGE/GO/TRIM ]
[NODUP ]
[ADDZAP/ADDZAP(number) ]
[NONUM/SNUM ]
[CLIST/NOCLIST ]
[REXX ]
[MOVE ]
[SUBSTITUTE(oldstring/newstring)]
* [FROMKEY(key)/FROMADDRESS(add)/FROMNUMBER(num) ]
* [TOKEY(key)/TOADDRESS(add)/TONUMBER(num) ]

*NOTE: Lines with an asterisk are supported for VSAM only.

Aliases
COP, COPY

Abbreviations
FKEY for FROMKEY, FADDR for FROMADDRESS, FNUM for FROMNUMBER, TKEY for TOKEY,
TADDR for TOADDRESS, and TNUM for TONUMBER.

104 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Defaults
ALIAS if LOAD, NOALIAS otherwise; SHR, CALL, NOREPLACE, SUMMARY; if NEW is
specified, BLK/TRK/CYL, DIR, SPACE, ROUND, EXPDT, STORCLAS, MGMTCLAS, DATACLAS,
and DSNTYPE default to values used for the input data set.

Required
memgroup, dsname or * or FILE(ddname)

Operands
memgroup The members to be copied to the target data set.
Default member names, member lists, member name
ranges, and member name patterns are allowed; for more
information, see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
dsname The output data set. Use TSO dsname syntax or a
temporary data set name such as ‘&&TEMP’. If you enter *
in the dsname field, the previously used data set name (for
a COPY command) is used instead. As an alternative to the
AS or TO keywords, enter partial member names in
parentheses following the data set name, as in this
example: the.dsn(pname)
VOLUME(volser) For NEW data sets, specifies the output volume name. For
existing data sets, use this parameter if the output data set
is not cataloged. For new data sets, code VOLUME(*) to
mean the volume parameter is to be copied.
FILE(ddname) The output data set is already allocated with the provided
ddname. Only disk data sets are supported. If you use the
FILE format, then do not use dsname, OLD, SHR, NEW,
RLSE, and data set allocation keywords.
If the data set is concatenated, use the SHR or OLD
keyword since StarTool FDM reallocates the output data
set.
NUMBER(numb) The concatenation number for the DDNAME identified.
numb defaults to 1. If numb is larger than the number of
concatenated data sets, the last data set in the
concatenation sequence is used.
OLD Obtains exclusive use of the output data set.
SHR Allows shared use of the output data set. StarTool FDM
provides output data set protection. See Appendix B,
"Update Protection".
NEW Creates the output data set. When you specify NEW, also
specify BLK/TRK/CYL, DIR, SPACE, ROUND, EXPDT (or
RETPD), RLSE, STORCLAS, MGMTCLAS, DATACLAS, and
DSNTYPE keywords.
DIR(num) The number of directory blocks for the output data set. If
you do not enter DIR, the default is taken from the input
data set.

Command Reference 105

Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

SPACE(prim,sec) If you do not enter BLK, TRK, or CYL but you enter SPACE,
the space allocation units are assumed the same as the
current allocation.
BLK Allocates the output data set in blocks. If you enter BLK
without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken from
the current allocation and converted to equivalent block
units.
TRK Allocates the output data set in tracks. If you enter TRK
without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken from
the current allocation and converted to equivalent track
units.
CYL Allocates the output data set in cylinder units. If you enter
CYL without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken
from the current allocation and converted to equivalent
cylinder units.
ROUND Used with BLK to specify that the data set allocation be
rounded up to cylinder boundaries.
EXPDT(yyddd) The expiration date for the data set. On and after the
expiration date, delete or write over the data set. Also use
the format EXPDT(yyyyddd).
RETPD(nnnn) The number of days (0 to 9999) for your data center to
retain the data set.
RLSE Any unused space in the data set be released after the
copy operation.
STORCLAS(sc) The storage class for the data set. Use this parameter to
identify performance and availability requirements for data
sets. Use this parameter instead of UNIT and VOLUME
keywords for SMS managed data sets to determine where
the data set is allocated. To nullify this parameter, type
STORCLAS(*)
MGMTCLAS(mc) The management class for the data set. This parameter
establishes the migration, backup, and space release
characteristics for SMS managed data sets. To nullify this
parameter, type MGMTCLAS(*)
DATACLAS(dc) The data class for the data set. Use this parameter to
provide data attributes such as RECFM, KEYLEN, SPACE,
EXPDT or RETPD, DSORG, LRECL and some VSAM SHR
options for SMS managed data sets. To nullify this
parameter, type DATACLAS(*)
Use DATACLAS for data sets that are not SMS
managed.
DSNTYPE(typ) Specify typ as LIBRARY for a PDSE or PDS for a partitioned
data set. A PDSE must be a SMS managed data set.
UNCATLG Does not catalog the NEW data set.
NOCATLG Does not catalog the NEW data set.
ALIAS Copies any associated members (aliases, apparent aliases,
and associated main members).
NOALIAS Copies only the members specifically identified.

106 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

AS(pname) pname defines the name of any output members. For

example, with AS(new) and the input members AA, ABBA,
and IBM04, members named NEW, NEWA, and NEW04 are
created. AS and TO are equivalent keywords. If only a
single member is input and NOALIAS is in effect, the
resulting member name is taken only from the AS or TO
keyword.
TO(pname) pname defines the name of any output members. For
example, with TO(new) and the input members AA, ABBA,
and IBM04, members named NEW, NEWA, and NEW04 is
created. TO and AS are equivalent keywords. If only a
single member is input and NOALIAS is in effect, the
resulting member name is taken only from the AS or TO
keyword.
CALL Calls the copy program to perform the copy.
NOCALL Does not call the copy program. Member checking, control
card generation, and data set allocations are still
performed.
COPYBACK Used by the COMPRESS subcommand to reorganize PDSE
data sets with the COPY subcommand. After all data is
copied to the target data set, the source data set is reset to
NEW status (all members are deleted) and all members are
copied back into the source data set again.
EXIST Copies only the subset of memgroup that is also present in
the output data set (the REPLACE keyword is also used).
NOEXIST Copies only the subset of memgroup that is not present in
the output data set.
EXCLUDE Inverts the normal copy “select” statements to “exclude”
statements. This option also turns off BLDL (member
existence) checking for the target library.
NOBLDL Does not perform BLDL (member existence) checking in
the target library. Use this parameter when performance of
the COPY subcommand is very important and BLDL
checking (by StarTool FDM) for possible errors is not
important.
MAXBLK(num) The maximum member block size. For load members, a
COPYMOD operation is invoked for this keyword or if the
input and output data set block sizes differ.
REPLACE Replaces members in the output data set by any copied
members.
NOREPLACE Does not replace members in the output data set by copied
members. Warning messages are issued to document any
uncopied member names unless you enter EXIST,
NOEXIST, EXCLUDE, or NOBLDL.
SUMMARY Displays only copy summary and error messages.
LIST Displays all copy messages.
NOLIST Displays no copy messages.
UNIT(Uname) Specifies the allocation unit name. Use this parameter if
the default unit name is incorrect for this allocation.

Command Reference 107

Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

CHANGE StarTool FDM should CHANGE to the output data set at the
end of the COPY process.
GO StarTool FDM should initiate a GO session for the output
data set at the end of the COPY process.
TRIM After the copy operation, trim the source data set.
 For a PDS data set, release any unused extents as for
FIXPDS RELEXT
 For a PDSE data set, release all unused tracks as for FIXPDS
RELEASE
NODUP Does not use internal copy routines. Call an external copy
utility.
ADDZAP For load members only, specifies that a ZAP IDR record is
to be added (each ZAP IDR record contains space for 19
historical entries).
ADDZAP(n) For load members only, specifies that one or more ZAP IDR
records are to be added (each ZAP IDR record contains
space for 19 historical entries).
NONUM For source members only, specifies that the input members
are all data and no sequence numbers are to be formatted.
This keyword is ignored on a RECFM=F to RECFM=V CLIST
conversion.
SNUM For source members only, specifies that sequence numbers
in the input (the first eight columns for RECFM=V data
sets; otherwise the last 8 columns) are to be discarded
during the copy.
NOCLIST Do not perform CLIST conversion. CLIST conversion is
performed if RECFM=V, LRECL=255 data is copied to
RECFM=F, LRECL=80 or the reverse. CLIST conversion
entails assigning a new sequence number and breaking up
long lines into several short ones while maintaining normal
CLIST format rules.
CLIST Invokes an internal copy routine and converts CLISTs if
required.
REXX Specifies that RECFM=VB, LRECL=255 REXX members be
converted to RECFM=FB, LRECL=80 REXX members using
REXX continuation rules.
MOVE Specifies that if no errors are detected during the copy
process, delete all of the copied members.
SUBSTITUTE Used with a forward slash (/) to represent the current data
(old,new) set name. Use SUBSTITUTE to replace a string of
characters in the source data set name to create a target
data set name.
For example, if the current data set is PDSEXXX.MSGS, the
following two subcommands are equivalent:
COPY ABC* PDSEYYYY.MSGS
COPY ABC* / SUBSTITUTE(XXX/YYYY)

108 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

FROMKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, code ky as the key of the first
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be
coded as x’hexkey’. Access begins at the first record whose
key matches (or is greater than) the portion of the key
specified.
Can be used with TOKEY. It can be specified only for an
alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.
FROMADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, code ad as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the first record
to be accessed. The RBA value must match the beginning
of a logical record. If you specify this parameter for key-
sequenced data, the records are accessed in physical
sequential order instead of key order. Use this parameter
with TOADDRESS.
FROMADDRESS(address):
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through
a path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed
FROMNUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, code nm as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative record number (RRN) of the first
record to be accessed. This record must be present in the
data set.
Use this parameter with TONUMBER. It can be specified
only for a variable or fixed relative record data set.
TOKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, code ky as the key of the last
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be
coded as x’hexkey’. Access ends after the first record
whose key matches the portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with FROMKEY. It can be specified only
for an alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.
TOADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, code ad as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the last record
to be accessed. The RBA value does need not to match the
beginning of a logical record. If you specify this parameter
for key-sequenced data, the records are accessed in
physical sequential order instead of key order. Use this
parameter with FROMADDRESS.
TOADDRESS(address):
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through
a path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed

Command Reference 109

Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

TONUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, code nm as 0 through 99999999

to specify the relative record number (RRN) of the last
record to be accessed. This record need not be present in
the data set.
Use this parameter with FROMNUMBER. It can be specified
only for a variable or fixed relative record data set.

Required
memgroup, dsname or * or FILE(ddname)

Remarks
The COPY/DUP code switches dynamically to StarTool FDM internal copy routines if
requested for a given subcommand or if you require DUP internal support. COPY/DUP
switches to an internal copy routine for any of the following situations:
 The DUP subcommand name initiates a copy
 The input data set is VSAM or not partitioned
 The output data set is not partitioned
 An ADDZAP, CLIST, NOCLIST, NONUM, or SNUM keyword is used
 Source data set and the MAXBLK keyword is used
 Conversion of RECFM=FB to RECFM=VB or RECFM=VB to RECFM=FB.
 Output records requiring truncation
 RECFM=FB output records requiring blank padding at the end
 Members are copied back into the source data set

For a PDSE data set, invoke the COPY subcommand to support the COMPRESS
subcommand using the COPYBACK keyword as follows:
 Creates a new temporary PDSE similar to the source data set
 Copies all members into the new temporary target data set
 Resets the source PDSE to NEW status; deletes all members
 Copies back all members into the source data set

IEBCOPY (or a compatible PDS copy program) performs the data copy operation. Internal
StarTool FDM routines are used instead if the input data set is sequential or a single
member is copied to a sequential output data set. In the following cases, an external copy
program such as IEBCOPY or PDSFAST is required:
 Load library and the MAXBLK keyword is used
 Load library and the BLKSIZE is more than output BLKSIZE
 The new NODUP keyword is used

If the output data set is sequential and more than one input member is selected for copy,
the PDS copy program creates an output data set in IEBCOPY unload format.

110 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

If you use the TO (or the equivalent AS) keyword, each member is renamed in the copy in
a generic fashion. For example, if you enter TO(X12), each resulting member name is
formed by placing X12 over the first three characters of the original member name. An
exception to this rule is made when only a single member is to be copied and its aliases
are not also requested. In this case, the member name is taken directly from the TO
keyword.

If you do not specify the keywords EXIST, NOEXIST, EXCLUDE, or AS/TO and you enter
COPY : to copy all members, the normal IEBCOPY select statements are not generated.
However, if you want to build select statements for the entire library, specify a member
group name on the COPY subcommand which includes all members such as COPY :9.

Request an IEBCOPY COPY operation; however, if the data set contains load modules
(RECFM is U) and the input and output data set block sizes differ, a COPYMOD operation is
requested with a MAXBLK operand set to the output data set block size. Explicitly request
a COPYMOD operation for load module libraries by specifying MAXBLK and the desired
maximum member block size.

NOTE This subcommand modifies the output data set. To ensure data set integrity,
allocate the output data set as OLD or NEW, or be aware of the data set update
protection provided by the StarTool FDM command for SHR allocations. See Appendix B,
"Update Protection".

You may have chosen any one of several interfaces during StarTool FDM installation. To
determine which interface you chose, type a CONTROL DEFAULT subcommand and look
for an output line beginning COPY calls. For installations that use PDSFAST, also see the
COPY utility for program objects. The following are supported:

IEBCOPY Invokes IEBCOPY (or PDSFAST if IEBCOPY is renamed) directly.

PDSFAST Invokes PDSFAST directly.
IKJEFTSR Uses the TSO/E parallel terminal monitor program interface to
authorized tasks.
NOTE This interface causes a session lock-up if you invoke PDSFAST
and use SHR allocation.
anyother Uses the TSO/E parallel terminal monitor program interface with
potential lock-up problems if you invoke PDSFAST.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ------------- ROW 387 OF 429
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.PDS98TST,VOL=SER=STR811 MEM=: ----------------------------
>----->copy :9 lib.test new
PDS174I 'C911407.LIB.TEST' has been created on volume STR801
COPY O=SYS00111,I=SYS00102
S M=@DIACLIK,@DIAINIT,@DIALOG,@DIAPANL,@DIAPART,@DIASTAK,@DIATBL
S M=@DIAWRK,ALIAS1,ALLGLOB,ASMEXT2,CHECKOUT,CICS,COMPARE,COMPARES
S M=COMPA1,COMPA2,COMPA3,DAFABC,DAFJCLO,DISAMSM,DISAMXM,DISASME
S M=DISASMX,DISASM3,DISDAFD,DISDAFE,MAPXREF,PDS99,PDS99T1D,TESTMSG
IEB167I FOLLOWING MEMBER(S) COPIED FROM INPUT DATA SET REFERENCED BY SYS0010
IEB154I @DIACLIK HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY COPIED
IEB154I @DIAINIT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY COPIED
IEB154I @DIALOG HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY COPIED
IEB154I @DIAPANL HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY COPIED

Command Reference 111

Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
----------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ----------- ROW 31 OF 48
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=#* ------------------------------
>----->create link.test new tra spa(10,10) blk(6000)
PDS174I 'C911407.LINK.TEST' has been created on volume STR803
>----->copy * link.test
COPYMOD O=SYS00032,MAXBLK=06000,I=SYS00022
S M=#DISDF01,#DISXREF,#OPCODE,#OPCODEM,#OPCODE2,#PDSMAIN
IEB190I MAXIMUM BLOCK SIZE IS 6000, MINIMUM BLOCK SIZE IS 1024
IEB167I FOLLOWING MEMBER(S) COPIED FROM INPUT DATA SET REFERENCED BY SYS0002
IEB19AI MEMBER #DISDF01 COPIED AND REBLOCKED
IEB19AI MEMBER #DISXREF COPIED AND REBLOCKED
IEB19AI MEMBER #OPCODE COPIED AND REBLOCKED
IEB19AI MEMBER #OPCODEM COPIED AND REBLOCKED
IEB19AI MEMBER #OPCODE2 COPIED AND REBLOCKED
IEB19AI MEMBER #PDSMAIN COPIED AND REBLOCKED
IEB144I THERE ARE 0000001 UNUSED TRACKS IN OUTPUT DATA SET
IEB149I THERE ARE 0000079 UNUSED DIRECTORY BLOCKS IN OUTPUT DIRECTORY
IEB147I END OF JOB -00 WAS HIGHEST SEVERITY CODE

CREATE Subcommand
The CREATE subcommand allocates a new data set based on the current data set.

MODEL is also available as a full-screen front-end to CREATE as shown in an example

later.

Example
CREATE new.data space(10,10)

Syntax
CREATE / or dataset
[BLKSIZE(Bval) ]
[DIR(num)/NODIR ]
[LRECL(Lval) ]
[OPTCD(W/WC/WCZ/C/CZ/Z) ]
[SPACE(nprim,nsec) ]
[BLK/TRK/CYL ]
[ROUND ]
[RETPD(nnnn)/EXPDT(yyddd) ]
[STORCLAS(sclass) ]
[MGMTCLAS(mclass) ]
[DATACLAS(dclass) ]
[DSNTYPE(LIBRARY/PDS) ]
[UNIT(Unitname) ]
[VOLUME(volser) ]
[SUBSTITUTE(oldstring/newstring)]
[RECFM(F/FB/FA/FM/FBA/FBM/V/VB/VA/VM/VBA/VBM/U/UA/U)]

112 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Aliases
CR, CRE, CREA, CREAT, CREATE

Defaults
BLKSIZE, DIR, LRECL, OPTCD, SPACE, BLK/TRK/CYL, RECFM, ROUND, EXPDT/RETPD,
STORCLAS, MGMTCLAS, DATACLAS, and DSNTYPE as specified for the current data set.

Required
None

Operands
data set The new data set name. Use standard TSO dsname syntax.
BLKSIZE(Bval) A DCB BLKSIZE value for the new data set. Bval defaults to
its value for the current data set or can be entered as a
number from 0 through 32767.
DIR(num) The number of directory blocks for the output data set. If
you do not enter DIR, the default is taken from the current
data set.
NODIR Allocates the new data set as sequential regardless of the
current data set.
LRECL(Lval) A DCB LRECL value for the new data set. Lval defaults to its
value for the current data set or can be entered as a
number from 1 through 32767.
OPTCD(Newo) The desired OPTCD value for the data set. Newo defaults to
its value for the current data set or can be entered as W,
WC, WCZ, C, CZ, or Z.
SPACE(prim,sec) The primary and secondary space allocation quantities for
the new data set in block, track, or cylinder units.
If you do not enter BLK, TRK, or CYL but you do enter
SPACE, the space allocation units are assumed to be the
same as the current allocation.
BLK Allocates the output data set in blocks. If you enter BLK
without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken from
the current allocation and converted to equivalent block
units.
TRK Allocates the output data set in tracks. If you enter TRK
without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken from
the current allocation and converted to equivalent track
units.
CYL Allocates the output data set in cylinder units. If you enter
CYL without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken
from the current allocation and converted to equivalent
cylinder units.
ROUND Used with BLK to specify that the data set allocation be
rounded up to cylinder boundaries.

Command Reference 113

Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

EXPDT(yyddd) The expiration date for the data set. On and after the
expiration date, delete or write over the data set. Also use
the form EXPDT(yyyyddd).
RETPD(nnnn) The number of days (0 to 9999) that the data set be
retained by your data center.
STORCLAS(sc) The storage class for the data set. Use this parameter to
identify performance and availability requirements for data
sets. Use this parameter instead of UNIT and VOLUME
keywords for SMS managed data sets to determine where
the data set is allocated. To nullify this parameter, type
STORCLAS(*).
MGMTCLAS(mc) The management class for the data set. This parameter
establishes the migration, backup and space release
characteristics for SMS managed data sets. To nullify this
parameter, type MGMTCLAS(*).
DATACLAS(dc) The data class for the data set. Use this parameter to
provide data attributes such as RECFM, KEYLEN, SPACE,
EXPDT or RETPD, DSORG, LRECL, and some VSAM SHR
options for SMS managed data sets. To nullify this
parameter, type DATACLAS(*). Use DATACLAS for data sets
that are not SMS managed.
DSNTYPE(typ) typ is specified as LIBRARY for a PDSE or PDS for a
partitioned data set. A PDSE must be a SMS managed data
set.
UNIT(Uname) The allocation unit name. Use this parameter if the default
unit name is incorrect for this allocation.
RECFM(Newr) A DCB RECFM value for the new data set. Newr defaults to
its value for the current data set or can be entered as F, FB,
FA, FBA, FM, FBM, V, VB, VA, VBA, VM, VBM, U, UA, or UM.
VOLUME(volser) The output volume name. Use this parameter if the data
set should be allocated on a particular volume. Use the
form VOLUME(*) if you want to make another allocation on
the same volume used for the current data set.
SUBSTITUTE(old,new) Used with a forward slash (/) to represent the current data
set name. Use SUBSTITUTE to replace a string of
characters in the source data set name to create a target
data set name.
For example, if the current data set is PDSEXXX.MSGS, the
following two subcommands are equivalent:
CREATE PDSEYYYY.MSGS
CREATE / SUBSTITUTE(XXX/YYYY)

114 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
----------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display --------- ROW 440 OF 446
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST2,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=: -------------------------------
>----->c lib.test
PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3380 C FB 80 9040 3X 47 10 10 TRK 25

PDS300A ENTER OPTION -- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST,VOL=SER=STR801 MEM=:

>----->create lib.test2 spa(10,5)

PDS174I 'C911407.LIB.TEST2' has been created on volume STR815
>----->c lib.test2
PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3380 C FB 80 9040 1X 10 9 5 TRK 29

PDS300A ENTER OPTION -- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST2,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=:

****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

(Note: the parameters specified with the CREATE command will be determined by the
DFSMS environment, if one exists.)

------------------------------ MODEL entry panel ------------------------------

OPTION ===>

New DSNAME ===> 'WSER07.SMSLINK.LOAD'

on Volume ===> STG002 (optional)
or Unit ===> (optional)
Space units ===> CYL (BLK, TRK or CYL)
Round space ===> NO (YES or NO to round up to nearest CYL)
Primary space===> 44 CURRENT Allocated space: 660 TRKS
Secondary ===> 5 Unused space: 0 TRKS
Directory blk===> 4 Used directory blk: 4
RECFM ===> U DSORG: PE
LRECL ===> 80 Allocation type: CYL
BLKSIZE ===> 32760 Secondary quantity: 5
Expiration date=> (Julian) Number of extents: 1
Retention time => (number of days, this overrides EXPDT)
Data class ===> __________________________________
MGMT class ===> STRG |Press RCHANGE to save in PROFILE
Storage class ==> STANDARD |Press END to exit with no changes
DSNTYPE ===> LIBRARY (PDS/LIBRARY) |Press ENTER with non-blank DSNAME
| to create a new data set
|Enter B on the OPTION line to select
| BLKSIZE modeling service

CSECTS Function
The CSECTS command displays a map of a load module in an ISPF table.

Example
CSECTS idcams unres

Command Reference 115

Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

Syntax
CSECTS member [UNRESOLVED]

Aliases
CS, CSE, CSEC, CSECT, CSECTS

Operands
member The member whose CSECTs and ENTRYs are to be mapped.
UNRESOLVED Adds unresolved and weak unresolved references to the map.

Remarks
The CSECTS ISPF table displays in response to a CSECTS or NUCMAP command. When
you are in a CSECTS display, delete a part of the table, sort the table in different
directions, find data in the table, print a part of the table or store a part of the table in a
data set, and so on. For help with the different options, use the HELP command, CUA
functions, or enter an O command as a primary command or as a line command.

The CSECTS table displays the names of all CSECTs and ENTRYs for a load module. Enter
line commands against CSECT table lines that apply only to that particular CSECT. The
screen fields for each line are as follows:

CMD Command. Type a line command here.

TYPE Type of entry:
 CSECT - CSECT entry
 ENTRY - ENTRY within a CSECT
 COMMON - COMMON area
 PROCEED - private area. This is an unnamed CSECT.
 UNRESV - unresolved symbol. This symbol was required but was missing
when the module was last linked.
 WEAK-U - weak unresolved symbol. This symbol was not required and
was missing when the module was last linked
DATA/MSG Data field. Type up to eight bytes of operand information here. It is
used as a command feedback field — any information in this field that
is preceded by an asterisk (*) is ignored when you enter a line
command. This field is set to *ENTRY for the entry point of the
module.
SECTION CSECT name.
ENTRY ENTRY name or unresolved reference name.
ADDR Address of this symbol.
LENG Hexadecimal length of this CSECT.

116 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

MD/SG Mode or segment. A segment number is available for overlay modules.

For recently linked modules, an AMODE/RMODE indication is available,
as follows:
 R64 - RMODE of ANY and AMODE 64
 A64 - RMODE of 24 and AMODE 64
 RANY - RMODE of ANY and AMODE 31
 AANY - RMODE of 24 and AMODE ANY
 A31 - RMODE of 24 and AMODE 31
 A24 - RMODE of 24 and AMODE 24
MEM ADDR Memory address (this is for NUCMAP).

The following primary commands are supported directly for the CSECTS function. For
information on ISPMODE commands available anywhere in StarTool FDM, see “Common
Commands” in Chapter 2, "ISPF Interface Commands".

APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

CS[ECTS] Rebuilds the CSECTS table.

Syntax CSECTS member [UNRESOLVED]

EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on CSECT table data.

(or ET[BL])
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses between individual
commands.
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[ANY/ADDRESS/NAME/ENTRY/SEGMENT/MODE]
L[OCATE] Positions to a data line in sorted tables by searching the current sorted
column for the specified data.
Syntax LOCATE csectname/address

O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the CSECTS function and
operand syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the CSECTS table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REM[OVE] Trims the CSECTS table based on a string match.

Syntax REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/ADDRESS/NAME/ENTRY/SEGMENT/MODE]

RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location. PF
keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
SO[RT] Sorts function tables into an alternate order. SORT with no operands
sorts the table in default order, while SORT with a field name sorts the
table in that order.
Syntax SORT [ADDRESS/NAME]
[ASCEND/DESCEND]

Command Reference 117

Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

TAG Applies the specified line command to table entries marked with *TAG*
in the DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are maintained

in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well as your
installation. The CSECTS UT panel (the same panel as the log) allows
dynamic primary commands with which you specify command names
and their corresponding actions.
X Clears the CSECTS table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the CSECTS table; this is equivalent to X ALL

The following line commands are supported in the CSECTS function:

+ Provides an extension panel for command entry.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,+”>
= Repeats the previous line command.
*cm ERR- Tallinn command,=”>
BASE Assigns a base value at this CSECT for a ZAP line command on a later
CSECT.
DELI DELINK the CSECT.
DIS DISASM the CSECT.
F FIND data in the CSECT.
H HISTORY for the CSECT.
K Kills and clears all following line commands.
L LIST data from the CSECT.
LOG Copies the line into the log.
M Provides line command selection and entry assistance.
O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
R REPLACE data in the CSECT.
S Selects line command (normally LIST, it is set by SETSEL).
TAG Marks this table entry with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.
UT Selects the extended user line command panel.
X Drops the table line.
ZAP Invokes the ZAP function for this CSECT.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in the
CSECTS function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR- t=”Block line command,==”>
LL LIST command. Lists data from each CSECT.
OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.

118 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

SS S command. Selects each line in the range of table lines.

XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------- CSECT Display for STARTOOL ----------- ROW 1 OF 137
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ==> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=STARTOOL ---------------------------
CMD TYPE DATA/MSG SECTION ENTRY -ADDR- -LENG- MD/SG MEM ADDR
WEAK-U VTSOCMD
WEAK-U PDS#OPT4
WEAK-U PDS#SECI
CSECT PDSMAIN 000000 002E4C A24
ENTRY PDSKLEAR 000138 A24
ENTRY PDSNCMD 0006D0 A24
ENTRY PDSSCAN4 000B06 A24
ENTRY PDSCONVD 0011DC A24
ENTRY PDSLDATA 00144A A24
ENTRY PDSOPENX 0020CC A24
ENTRY PDSRETUR 002320 A24
CSECT PDSPDSIN 002E50 000D9F A24
CSECT PDSATTNX 003BF0 00015E A24
CSECT PDSSTAEX 003D50 0002EA A24
CSECT PDSALLOC 004040 00087D A24
CSECT PDSEXCP 0048C0 000BDE A24
CSECT PDSMSGS 0054A0 003412 A24
CSECT *ENTRY PDSMAINA 0088B8 0001A0 A24
CSECT *ENTRY TESTAM64 000000 00004C RANY

Command Reference 119

Chapter 3 Commands — A to C

120 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Chapter 4
Commands — D to E

DCF Subcommand
The DCF subcommand prints a hardcopy list of a member. Use the TSO SCRIPT command.
Add any SCRIPT operands after the member name.

Example
DCF mema:memb twopass index file(myfile)

Syntax
DCF memgroup
BIND(obind {ebind}) PAGE{({PROMPT}{{FROM} p {TO} q}
CHARS(font1..font4) {{FROM} p FOR n}{{FROM} p ON})}
CONTINUE/NOCONT PRINT{(copies,class,fcb,ucs)}
CTF PROFILE{(fileid)}/NOPROFILE
DDUT/NODDUT QUIET
DEST(station-id) SEARCH(libname)(opnum...)
DEVICE(devtype) SEGLIB/NOSEGLIB
FILE{(fileid)} SPELLCHK
FONTLIB({ftype}{fmodel}) STOP
FPASSES n SYON/SYOFF
INDEX SYSVAR(n value...)
LIB(libename...)(opnum...) TERM
MESSAGE({DELAY}{D}{TRACE}) TLIB
NOSPIE TWOPASS
NOWAIT UNFORMAT
NUMBER UPCASE
OPTIONS{(fileid)} @user-option

Aliases
DC, DCF

Defaults
memgroup

Required
none

Command Reference 121

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Operands
The members to be printed. Default member names, member lists,
member name ranges, and member name patterns are allowed. For
memgroup more information, see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
others Optional. May include any desired TSO SCRIPT operands.

Remarks
This interface is optional. Use it only if DCF Script is installed.

DDNAME Function
Use the DDNAME command to display a subset of your TSO session allocations in the
LISTA table. Maintain the DDNAME/LISTA table in DDNAME and concatenation order (the
SORT command is not supported).

Example
DDNAME isp*

Syntax
DDNAME namemask

Aliases
DD, DDN, DDNA, DDNAM, DDNAME

Defaults
none

Required
namemask

Operands
namemask This is a partial DDNAME that may contain masking characters (* for
combinations, / for patterns and : for ranges). For example,
ISP*LIB, PROC/SYS, and ISP:ISR.

Remarks

122 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

The DDNAME/LISTA ISPF table displays in response to a DDNAME command. When you
are in a DDNAME/LISTA display, delete a part of the table, find data in the table, print a
part of the table, store a part of the table in a data set, and so on. For help with the
different options available, use the HELP command, CUA functions, or enter an O
command as either a primary command or as a line command.

DDNAME has alternate panels, as do most of the ISPMODE tables in StarTool FDM, that
contain extra information about the listed data sets. The first DDNAME/LISTA panel shows
basic allocation information such as DDNAME, data set TYPE, Open count (under the
header O#), VOLUME allocated, MEMBER name, and DSNAME. Command error messages
are provided under the DATA/MSG header as follows:

*INVALID Line command is not supported.

*DD GONE File is not allocated.
*OPEN DD File is open.
*IN USE File is in use.
*NOT CON File is not concatenated.
*PERMCON File is permanently concatenated.
*NO DDN* File has a blank ddname.

TYPE is the data set DSORG or VIO, CTLG, VVDS, JES, or TERM depending on the type of
allocation.

The second DDNAME/LISTA panel is a double line panel that includes some additional
information: DISP for data set disposition and STAT for data set status. The STAT field is
TMP for temporary, PRM for permanent, or CNV for convertible.

The following primary commands are supported directly for the LISTA/DDNAME function.
For information on ISPMODE commands available anywhere in StarTool FDM, see
“Common Commands” in Chapter 2, "ISPF Interface Commands".

ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the LISTA/DDNAME table.

APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

BAT[CHJCL] Builds batch JCL that includes all DD statements in the DDNAME
table.
COMPR[ESS] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
COMPRESS subcommand.
Syntax COMPRESS [LIST/NOLIST/SUMMARY]

DUA[L] Displays a double line view of the LISTA/DDNAME table.

DD[NAME] Rebuilds the LISTA/DDNAME table selecting data sets with a
DDNAME mask.
Syntax DDNAME ddnamemask

EDITT[BL] (or Enters an edit session on LISTA/DDNAME table data.

ET[BL])
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses between
individual commands.

Command Reference 123

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

F Finds a string and positions the display start location.

Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[ANY/DDNAME/DSNAME/VOLUME/MEMBER/ALLOC]

FI[ND] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
FIND subcommand. Since the syntax entered on a FIND
subcommand is applied to each data set individually, do not attempt
to search mixed partitioned and non-partitioned data sets with a
single FIND global command.
Syntax FIND memgroup 'anystring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]

GL[OBAL] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
StarTool FDM subcommand.
Syntax GL anysubcommand [anyoperands]

LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the LISTA/DDNAME table. PF keys

10 and 22 are set to LEFT.
LISTA Rebuilds the LISTA/DDNAME table selecting data sets by attributes.
Syntax TA [attributes]

MODEL Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
MODEL command.
NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the LISTA/DDNAME table.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the LISTA/DDNAME table to print or to a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REM[OVE] Trims the LISTA/DDNAME table based on a string match.

Syntax
REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/DDNAME/DSNAME/VOLUME/MEMBER/ALLOC]

REPL[ACE] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
REPLACE subcommand. Since the syntax entered on a REPLACE
subcommand is applied to each data set individually, do not attempt
to update mixed partitioned and non-partitioned data sets with a
single REPLACE global command.
Syntax
REPLACE memgroup 'fromstring' 'tostring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]
[WRITE/NOWRITE]

RESET Used with data set tagging, clears the DATA/MSG field in all table
entries.
RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location.
PF keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the LISTA/DDNAME table. PF keys
11 and 23 are normally set to RIGHT.
SEEK Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and looks for
a member.
Syntax SEEK member

124 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

TAG Applies the specified line command to table entries marked with
*TAG* in the DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are

maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well
as at your installation.
X Clears the LISTA/DDNAME table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the LISTA/DDNAME table; equivalent to X ALL

The following line commands are supported in the LISTA/DDNAME function:

+ Provides an extension panel for command entry.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,+”>

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

6 Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.

A Changes to the data set and executes an alternate subcommand.
B Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.
C Changes to the data set.
COPY Changes to the data set and invokes the COPY subcommand.
DCAT Deconcatenates nonpermanent data sets in a concatenated group.
DUP Changes to the data set and invokes the DUP subcommand.
E Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.
FREE Frees a DDNAME or all data sets in a concatenated group.
GO Changes to the data set using GO processing (a number is optional).
IDC Performs an IDCAMS LISTC and directs output to the log.
K Kills and clears all following line commands.
LC Adds the data set name to the current LISTC/LISTF table.
LOG Copies the line into the log.
M Provides line command selection and entry assistance.
ML Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.
MOD Changes to the data set and issues a MODEL command.
O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
S Selects line command (normally CHANGE, it is set by SETSEL).
SEEK Changes to the data set and checks for a member.
SETA Saves a StarTool FDM subcommand for repeated use by the ALT line
command.
TAG Marks this table entry with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.
U Changes to the data set and displays USAGE.

Command Reference 125

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

UT Selects the extended user line command panel.

W Adds the data set name (and any member name) to the WORKPAD.
WHO Checks for users of this data set with the WHOHAS subcommand.
X Drops the table line.
XCOP Changes to the data set and invokes the XCOPY interface.
Z Changes to the data set and issues a COMPRESS subcommand.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in the
LISTA/DDNAME function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR- t=”Block line command,==”>

AA A command. Changes and executes an alternate subcommand for each line.

BB B command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
CC C command. Changes data set for each line.
EE E command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
GG GO command. Changes to each data set using GO processing.
LL LOG command. Copies the range of lines into the log.
MM M command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.
SS S command. Selects each line in the range of table lines.
SSEE SEEK command. Changes to each data set and checks for a member.
UU U command. Changes and displays USAGE for each line.
XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.
ZZ Z command. Changes and issues a COMPRESS for each line.

FUNCTIONS CTL A-M CTL N-Z LINE CMDS A-M LINE CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURE
--------------------------- List Allocations ------------------ ROW 1 TO 7 OF 18
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ==> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.ASM,VOL=SER=SER815 MEM=DAFX* -----------------------------
CMD DDNAME DATA/MSG I/O's O# VOLUME MEMBER ------ DATA SET NAME --------
ISPPLIB 177 1 SER006 SER07.LIB.PDSE
# 2 2 1 SER007 SER.COMPAREX.PANELS
# 3 0 1 TSG303 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.PREPLIB
# 4 27 1 TSG302 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.ISRENU
ISPMLIB 4 1 SER006 SER07.LIB.PDSE
# 2 0 1 SER007 SER.COMPAREX.MSGS
# 3 3 1 TSG302 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.ISRENU
# 4 88 1 TSG309 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.ISPENU
# 5 0 1 TSG301 SYSP.STD.ISPMLIB
ISPSLIB 0 1 TSG301 SYSP.STD.ISPSLIB
# 2 0 1 TSG302 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.ISRENU
ut ISPTLIB 1 1 TSG301 SYSP.STD.ISPTLIB
# 2 0 1 TSG309 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.ISRLIB
ISPPROF 22 1 SYSR2C SER07.ISPF.PROFILE
ISP05482 8 1 SER004 SER07.SPFLOG2.LIST

126 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

File Edit Confirm Menu Utilities Compilers Test Help

______________________________________________________________________________
EDIT WSER07.SPFTEMP1.CNTL Columns 00001 00072
Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR
****** **************************** Top of Data ******************************
000001 //WSER07A JOB (X170,374),'CLIST CONCATENATION',CLASS=A,
000002 // MSGCLASS=X,TIME=(0,30),NOTIFY=WSER07
000003 //PDA05021 EXEC PGM=IKJEFT01,DYNAMNBR=80,REGION=5M
000004 //SYSPROC DD DISP=SHR,DSN=SYS1.SISPCLIB
000005 //* UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=OS39R2
000006 // DD DISP=SHR,DSN=SYS1.CLIST
000007 //* UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=SCPMV5
000008 // DD DISP=SHR,DSN=WSER07.LIB.CLIST
000009 //* UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=SER002
000010 // DD DISP=SHR,DSN=SYS1.DGTCLIB
000011 //* UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=OS39R2
000012 // DD DISP=SHR,DSN=SYS1.HRFCLST
000013 //* UNIT=SYSALLDA,VOL=SER=OS39R2

----------------------- ut for LA user line commands ----------------------

OPTION ===>

Choose one of the following:

AMS - IDCAMS LISTC for data set 'SYSP.STD.ISPTLIB'
DSAT - DSAT command for data set 'SYSP.STD.ISPTLIB'

Dynamic Commands--note: < = TSG301,

/ = 'SYSP.STD.ISPTLIB'
LAST - TRP(DSAT / LAST)
LD__ - TRP(LISTD / HISTORY) /* PROVIDE HISTORY DATA
ST__ - TRP(STARTOOL / USAGE) /* PROVIDE USAGE STATISTICS
____ -
____ -

DECODE Subcommand
The DECODE subcommand decrypts a member. This was written using the data
encryption algorithm submitted by IBM to the National Bureau of Standards and published
in the Federal Register.

Example
DECODE mymember plaintxt keyexamp

Syntax
DECODE input output key [SHR|OLD]

Aliases
DEC, DECO, DECOD, DECODE

Command Reference 127

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Defaults
OLD

Required
input, output, key

Operands
input Identifies the member to be decoded.
If this is a 1- to 8-byte simple name, it is taken to be a member name in the
current data set; otherwise, it is taken to be data.set(member).
output Identifies the receiving member.
If this is a 1- to 8-byte simple name, it is taken to be a member name in the
current data set; otherwise, it is taken to be data.set(member).
key This is a 1- to 8-byte alphanumeric key to be used for decoding the data set
member.
OLD This allocation is not to be shared with any other allocation for this data set.
SHR This allocation is to be shared with other allocations for this data set.

Remarks
This subcommand decrypts data using the supplied translation key. Since this algorithm
works on eight bytes at a time, the actual number of bytes enciphered or deciphered is an
integral number of eight bytes that is less than or equal to the record length. The greatest
number of bytes left unchanged on a record are the right-most seven bytes.

NOTE This method does not record your key. If you cannot provide the key, the data is
not readable. Use the DECODE load module independently of StarTool FDM. A HELP entry
is available but the basic syntax is as follows:

DECODE input.dsn(memin) output.dsn(memout) key SHR/OLD

DELETE Subcommand
The DELETE (or SCRATCH) subcommand deletes a member from the data set. If you
delete a member group, the members are deleted in reverse member group order to
optimize directory operations.

If you are planning to delete members in a LLA controlled library, see “LLA and Deleted
Members” in Chapter 6, "Commands — L to N".

Example
DELETE mema:memb

128 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Syntax
DELETE memgroup [ALIAS/NOALIAS] [FORCE]

Aliases
DEL, DELE, DELET, DELETE, SCRA, SCRAT, SCRATC, SCRATCH

Defaults
memgroup, NOALIAS

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be deleted.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see Appendix
A, "Formatting Member Names".
ALIAS Deletes any associated members (aliases, apparent aliases, and
associated main members).
NOALIAS Deletes only the members specifically identified.
FORCE Deletes even if an edit session is currently using the member.

Remarks

NOTE This subcommand modifies the data set. To ensure data set integrity, allocate the
data set as OLD or be aware of the data set update protection provided by the StarTool
FDM command for SHR allocations. For details, see Appendix B, "Update Protection".

--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display -------- ROW 2636 OF 2647

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=DAF/ -----------------------------
>----->del daf/ alias
PDS162I Members to be deleted are: DAFABC, DAFJCLO, DISDAFD

PDS163I Associated members to be deleted are: ALIAS1

PDS394A Should all of these members be deleted (Y/N) ?

>----->y
PDS040I ALIAS1 has been deleted
PDS040I DISDAFD has been deleted
PDS040I DAFJCLO has been deleted

Command Reference 129

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

DELINK Subcommand
The DELINK subcommand reconstructs object code from a load module.

Example
DELINK mymemb

Syntax
DELINK memgroup [MODULE({* / Fullm / Partm*)} ]

Aliases
DELI, DELIN, DELINK

Defaults
memgroup

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be decoded to object code.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed. For more information,
see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
MODULE(name) Specifies a 1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits CSECT
or ENTRY names to be considered.
The MODULE operand has several valid forms:
 MODULE(*) – uses the previous name entered on any MODULE
keyword
 MODULE(Fullm) – decodes only a CSECT or ENTRY named FULLM
 MODULE(Partm*) – decodes only a CSECT or ENTRY named PARTM

130 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ----------------- ROW 1 OF 354
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=VTOC ------------------------------
>----->delink vtoc
//VTOC EXEC PGM=IEWL,
// PARM='NCAL,MAP,LIST,LET,RENT,REUS,REFR'
//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(1024,(200,20))
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLMOD DD DISP=SHR,DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD
//SYSLIBX DD *
ESD VTOCCMD VTOCMSG VTOCEXCP
ESD VTOCSORT PCLMAIN
TXT 00 VTOCCMD ...

DIRENTRY Subcommand
The DIRENTRY subcommand displays a member’s directory entry.

Example
DIRENTRY mema:memb

Syntax
DIRENTRY memgroup [SHORT/LONG]

Aliases
DIR, DIRE, DIREN, DIRENT, DIRENTR, DIRENTRY

Defaults
memgroup, SHORT for THEN(DIR) or ELSE(DIR); otherwise, LONG

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members whose directory entry is to be displayed.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see Appendix
A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.

Command Reference 131

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

SHORT Provides only a directory entry dump.

LONG Provides a directory entry dump and a display of individual elements from
the directory entry.

-------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ----------- ROW 2601 OF 2630

COMMAND ===> L ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=PDS99 ---------------------------
>----->direntry
PDS143I PDS99 Directory entry, length=46
0000 D7C4E2F9 F9404040 010907B1 01091700 *PDS99 ........*
0010 00000000 C2E303A9 B844A800 0000A800 *....BT.z..y...y.*
0020 02000000 D7C4E2F9 F9C14040 0100 *....PDS99A ..*

PDS262I LOC NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION

PDS262I --- ---- ----- -----------
PDS262I 00 PDS2NAME PDS99 MEMBER NAME
PDS262I 08 PDS2TTRP 010907 TTR OF FIRST BLOCK OF DATA
PDS262I 0B PDS2INDC B1 ALIAS; 1 TTRS FOLLOW; 17 HALFWORDS OF DATA
PDS262I 0C PDS2TTRT 010917,00 TTR OF FIRST TEXT BLOCK
PDS262I 10 PDS2TTRN 000000,00 (NOT USED FOR THIS MEMBER)
PDS262I 14 PDS2ATR1 C2 REENTRANT; REUS; NOT OVERLAY; NOT TEST
PDS262I NOT ONLY LOAD; NOT SCATTER; EXEC; NOT 1 TEXT
PDS262I 15 PDS2ATR2 E3 NOT DC; TEXT ORG=0; EP=0; HAS RLDS
PDS262I EDIT; NOT TEST; LKED F; REFRESHABLE
PDS262I 1F PDS2FTB2 11 RMODE ANY; ALIAS AMODE 24; MAIN AMODE 64

DISASM Subcommand
The DISASM subcommand reconstructs assembler language instructions from a module.
This procedure is often referred to as decoding or disassembling instructions.

Example
DISASM mymemb OFFSET(1af2)

Syntax
DISASM memgroup [FLOAT|NOFLOAT ]
[MODULE({*|fullname|partm*})]
[OFFSET(hexnum)]
[MVS370|MVSXA|ESA370]
[PRIV|NOPRIV]
[REASM]

Aliases
DISA, DISAS

132 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Defaults
memgroup, NOFLOAT, NOPRIV, ESA370

Required
None

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be disassembled.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed. For more information,
see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
FLOAT Includes floating-point instructions in the instruction set.
NOFLOAT Does not decode floating-point instructions.
MODULE(name) Specifies a 1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits CSECT
or ENTRY names to be displayed.
If you enter both MODULE and OFFSET keywords, the offset
applies to each module selected. The MODULE operand has
several valid forms:
 MODULE(*) – uses the previous name entered on any MODULE
keyword
 MODULE(Fullm) – formats only a CSECT or ENTRY named FULLM
 MODULE(Partm*) – formats only a CSECT or ENTRY named PARTM
OFFSET(Hx) Specifies a 1- to 6-digit hexadecimal module offset at which the
display is to begin. If you enter both MODULE and OFFSET
keywords, the offset applies to each module selected.
MVSXA Uses only instructions defined on MVS/XA systems.
ESA370 Uses only instructions defined on MVS/ESA systems. This
instruction set also includes all MVS/XA instructions.
PRIV Includes privileged instructions in the instruction set.
NOPRIV Does not decode privileged instructions.
REASM Outputs the disassembled instructions in a format that can be
submitted to recreate the decoded module. When you request
this format, the module offset field and the CSECT offset field
(the first two fields of output) are reversed in order and placed at
the end of each decoded statement.
PDS141I header messages are suppressed and JCL is created to
assemble and link the decoded module and its aliases.

Remarks
For program objects, the DISASM command will only produce output for sections that are
B_TEXT.

Command Reference 133

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

DISASM formats its output as follows:

module offset A hexadecimal offset in the current module. With REASM

format, this is the last output field.
CSECT offset A hexadecimal offset in the current CSECT. With REASM
format, this field is just before the last output field.
name An external name or generated internal name (the letter
A followed by a 6-character offset in the module).
operation A 1- to 5-byte reconstructed operation code.
operands The reconstructed operand values.
comments For SVC calls, the original MACRO (for example, GETMAIN
or TPUT).
hex representation 1 to 3 columns of the original hexadecimal data.
character representation 1 to 8 bytes of the same data in character mode
surrounded by asterisks.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 8936 OF 10720
COMMAND ===> ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=ZAPHELP -------------------------
>----->disasm zaphelp off(40c0)
PDS141I AT 003FF0 CSECT CSOUT LENGTH 000428
0040C0 00D0 BAL R15,228(,R12) 45F0 C0E4 *.0U*
0040C4 00D4 DC AL4(A0040CC) 000040CC *.. .*
0040C8 00D8 DC X'00000000' 00000000 *....*
0040CC 00DC A0040CC DC C'IKJDAIR ' C9D2D1C4C1C9D940 *IKJDAIR*
0040D4 00E4 SVC 6 LINK 0A06 *..*
0040D6 00E6 BXH R15,R15,58(R12) 86FF C03A *f..*
0040DA 00EA MVC 144(8,R10),416(R13) D207 A090 D1A0 *K...J.*
0040E0 00F0 XC 16(4,R10),16(R10) D703 A010 A010 *P.....*
0040E6 00F6 LA R0,48(,R10) 4100 A030 *....*
0040EA 00FA ST R0,8(,R10) 5000 A008 *&...*
0040EE 00FE MVI 8(R10),X'8F' 928F A008 *k...*
0040F2 0102 MVC 48(96,R10),936(R12) D25F A030 C3A8 *Kª..Cy*
0040F8 0108 MVC 88(8,R10),144(R10) D207 A058 A090 *K.....*
0040FE 010E LA R1,8(,R10) 4110 A008 *....*
004102 0112 SVC 19 OPEN 0A13 *..*

DISPLAY Subcommand
The DISPLAY subcommand lists member names from the data set directory. The default
member group is not affected by the DISPLAY or PATTERN subcommands.

Example
DISPLAY aa b4

134 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Syntax
DISPLAY name1 name2

Aliases
D, DI, DIS, DISP, DISPL, DISPLA, DISPLAY

Defaults
entire directory

Required
none

Operands
name1 The starting member name (or portion of the member name) at which the
display is to start. If omitted, the entire directory displays. Enter a group
name descriptor such as part1:part2, seg1/seg2, or part1*seg1 for name1,
in which case, the output consists of the member names that are displayed
by the MEMBERS subcommand.
name2 Specifies the ending member name (or portion of the member name) after
which the display is to stop. If omitted, the display continues to the end of
the directory.

Remarks
Neither DISPLAY nor PATTERN affect the current member group. If you enter DISPLAY
without operands, all members in the data set display. This differs from PATTERN in that
PATTERN remembers its previously entered operands.

-A is added following a displayed member name if the member name is an alias. The
member name is listed in a combined hexadecimal/character format if it does not contain
upper-case alphanumeric characters (including @, $, and #) or if the first character is
numeric. Unprintable characters (for 3270-type devices) in a member name display as
periods.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------------- ROW 518 OF 520
COMMAND ===> OLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=(PDSR ----------------------------
>----->d @*
@DIACLIK @DIAINIT @DIALOG @DIAPANL @DIAPART @DIASTAK
@DIATBL @DIAWRK
>----->d @:d
@DIACLIK @DIAINIT @DIALOG @DIAPANL @DIAPART @DIASTAK
@DIATBL @DIAWRK ALIAS1 -A ALLGLOB ASMEXT2 CHECKOUT
CICS COMPARE COMPARES COMPA1 COMPA2 COMPA3
DISASM3 DISDAFD DISDAFE

Command Reference 135

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

DSAT Subcommand
This interface is optional, and is used only if your installation installed the public domain
DSAT command. For current information on the DSAT command, refer to the CBT Web site
at http://www.cbttape.org/, file 112.

Use the DSAT subcommand to display allocation information for data sets on a direct
access device.

DSAT searches the catalog for the entries for the data sets specified. Allocation
information is obtained from the volume table of contents, formatted and displayed. If a
name is an index name, all data sets below the index display.

Bypass the catalog search by supplying the volume name on which the data set resides.
This option permits displaying information for uncataloged data sets.

Example
DSAT lib

Syntax
DSAT [(dsnamelist)] [ALL/DAONLY ]
[ALLOC/NOALLOC ]
[CCHHR/NOCCHHR ]
[CRDATE/NOCRDATE ]
[DCB/NODCB ]
[DEVICE/NODEVICE ]
[DEVTYPE/NODEVTYPE ]
[DSORG/NODSORG ]
[EXDATE/NOEXDATE ]
[GDGDATA/NOGDGDATA ]
[GENERIC/DSONLY ]
[HARDCOPY(ddname) ]
[HEADER/NOHEADER ]
[LASTREF/NOLASTREF ]
[PDS/NOPDS ]
[PRINT/NOPRINT ]
[RC(TALLOC/TUSED/TDIFF/ ]
LALLOC/LUSED/LDIFF/NUM/ ]
PREVIOUS/DSORG/DIRALLOC/ ]
DIRUSED/ENTRIES/ALIASES/MEMBERS) ]
[SECONDARY/NOSECONDARY ]
[SEQNO/NOSEQNO ]
[SERIAL/NOSERIAL ]
[TOTALS/NOTOTALS ]
[VOLUME(name) ]

Aliases
DSA, DSAT

136 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Defaults
dsnamelist defaults to ‘prefix’ to list a user’s data sets; see underscores above.

If you specify HARDCOPY, NOPRINT is the default.

Required
none

Operands
dsnamelist One or more data set or index level names. Use TSO naming
conventions. If a specified name is an index name, data sets
under that level display. If you do not specify name, the prefix is
used. If no name is specified and the profile specifies NOPREFIX,
the user ID is used.
If you enter a keyword, you must specify dsnamelist. If you omit
dsnamelist, it does not default to the prefix, but the keyword is
interpreted as the dsnamelist, not a keyword.
ALL Displays all data set names under an index level.
DAONLY Displays data sets on mounted direct access devices.
ALLOC Lists allocation information (tracks allocated, tracks free, and
extents).
NOALLOC Does not list allocation information.
CCHHR Displays Format 1 DSCB address.
NOCCHHR Does not display CCHHR.
CRDATE Lists creation date.
NOCRDATE Does not list creation date.
DCB Lists DCB information (RECFM, BLKSIZE, and LRECL).
NODCB Does not list DCB information.
DEVTYPE Displays device type code (for example, 3010200F for a 3390).
NODEVTYPE Does not display device type code.
DEVICE Lists device name (3380, 9345, etc.).
NODEVICE Does not list device name.
DSORG Lists data set organization.
NODSORG Does not list data set organization.
EXDATE Lists expiration date.
NOEXDATE Does not list expiration date.
GDGDATA Displays information on generation data group indexes.
NOGDGDATA Does not display information on generation data group indexes.
GENERIC Name specifies a generic key.
DSONLY Treats names as data set names, not index names.

Command Reference 137

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

HARDCOPY(dd) Specifies the DDNAME of a pre-allocated data set for output from
DSAT.
HEADER Displays an output header line.
NOHEADER Does not display a header line.
LASTREF Displays last date referenced.
NOLASTREF Does not display last date referenced.
PDS Lists PDS directory information (blocks alloc, used, entries, and
aliases).
NOPDS Does not list PDS directory information.
PRINT Output is to be displayed.
NOPRINT Output is not to be displayed, except for error messages.
RC(type) How the return code is to be set.
If you use DSAT as a StarTool FDM subcommand, return code
processing is not performed (the return code is set to zero). If
you use DSAT in a CLIST or REXX exec or in single subcommand
mode as in the following example, the return code is set
properly:
STARTOOL FILE(ISPPROF) DSAT LIB
RC(TALLOC)
If you do not specify RC, RC=4 means successful completion and
RC=16 means unable to interpret command. Otherwise, RC is
set to a value as specified by:
 TALLOC - total tracks allocated
 TUSED - total tracks used
 TDIFF - total over-allocation (TALLOC minus TUSED)
 LALLOC - tracks allocated by last data set
 LUSED - tracks used by last data set
 LDIFF - last data set over-allocation (LALLOC minus LUSED)
 NUM - number of data sets displayed (including data sets not
found)
 PREVIOUS - assumes the return code of the previous command
 DSORG - sets the return code based on the data set organization
of the data sets displayed as:
 All data sets were sequential
 All data sets were PDS
 Data sets were mixed PDS and sequential
 Data set other than PDS or sequential or an error
 DIRALLOC - number of directory blocks allocated
 DIRUSED - number of directory blocks used
 ENTRIES - number of entries in the directory (members and
aliases)
 ALIASES - number of alias entries
 MEMBERS - number of entries less the number of aliases
SECONDARY Displays secondary allocation information.

138 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

NOSECONDARY Does not display secondary allocation information.

SEQNO Lists file sequence numbers.
NOSEQNO Does not list file sequence numbers.
SERIAL Lists volume names.
NOSERIAL Does not list volume names.
TOTALS Displays totals (tracks allocated, tracks free, and data sets
displayed).
NOTOTALS Does not display totals.
VOLUME Specifies the volume to be searched for the data set.

Remarks
Use DSAT in CLISTs to find the allocation of a data set or a group of data sets and set the
return code to the specified value. Test the return code with the WHEN command.
Suppress output by specifying NOPRINT. Use the HARDCOPY keyword to direct the output
to a pre-allocated data set.

Select the attributes to be displayed by specifying keyword operands. The information

displayed is:
 Volume name on which the data set is located.
 File sequence number
 Device type code from catalog entry
 Allocation (allocated, free, and extents)
 Secondary allocation (amount and units)
 Data set organization
 DCB (RECFM, BLKSIZE, and LRECL)
 Creation date
 Expiration date
 Last date referenced
 Fully qualified data set name
 CCHHR of the Format 1 DSCB
 Generation data group data
 PDS directory information

Command Reference 139

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ------------ ROW 61 TO 77 OF 77
COMMAND ===> L ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=(BATDELAY --------------------------
>----->dsat lib
SERIAL ALLOC FREE EX DSORG -DCB ATTRIBUTES- CR. DATE -DSNAME-
SER006 379 0 2 A-PO FB 13680 80 03/05/93 SER07.LIB.ASM
SER007 140 97 4 A-PO FB 9040 80 10/04/89 SER07.LIB.CLIST
SER006 4 2 3 A-PO VB 32760 255 03/15/91 SER07.LIB.CLISTV
SER006 100 15 1 A-PO FB 13680 80 03/17/93 SER07.LIB.CNTL
SER006 1 0 1 A-PO FB 9040 80 07/17/92 SER07.LIB.EXPDT
SER007 25 0 1 A-PO FB 9040 80 10/04/89 SER07.LIB.FILE112
SER007 63 0 1 A-PO FB 9040 80 10/04/89 SER07.LIB.FILE296
SER007 203 0 2 A-PO U 32000 0 10/04/89 SER07.LIB.LOAD
SER006 765 225 3 A-PO FB 13680 80 05/06/93 SER07.LIB.PDSE
SER006 459 0 1 A-PO FB 13680 80 05/06/93 SER07.LIB.PDSE311
SER006 180 0 2 A-PO FB 13680 80 06/29/93 SER07.LIB.PDSE320
SER007 4 0 1 A-PO FB 9040 80 09/21/92 SER07.LIB.PDSINSTL
SER007 2 0 1 A-PO U 13030 0 07/09/93 SER07.LIB.STOW
SER007 10 9 1 A-PS FB 2000 200 06/30/93 SER07.LIB.TESTVSAM
2335 348 14 DATA SETS DISPLAYED
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

DSNAME Subcommand
The DSNAME subcommand displays statistics on the current data set allocation using
message format PDS200I, PDS210I, or PDS220I depending on the last DSNAME operand
(MSG, TSO, or JCL) entered.

The DSNAME subcommand automatically invokes while executing several subcommands

such as in CHANGE, COMPRESS, FIXPDS, and USAGE. MSG format output always displays
VSAM data sets.

Example
DSN

Syntax
DSNAME [MSG / TSO / JCL]

Aliases
DS, DSN, DSNA, DSNAM, DSNAME, DSNAMES

Defaults
Initially MSG; thereafter, previous MSG/TSO/JCL

140 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Required
none

Operands
MSG Uses the PDS200I message (table or msg format) for allocation display.
TABLE Uses the PDS200I message (table or msg format) for allocation display.
TSO Uses the PDS210I message (TSO format) for allocation display.
JCL Uses the PDS220I message (JCL or batch format) for allocation display.
BATCH Uses the PDS220I message (JCL or batch format) for allocation display.

------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ------------- ROW 2648 OF 2661

COMMAND ===> OLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=DAF/ -----------------------------
>----->dsname jcl
PDS220I //SYS00134 DD DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST,DISP=SHR,UNIT=3380,
PDS220I // DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=80,BLKSIZE=9040,OPTCD=C),VOL=SER=STR815,
PDS220I // SPACE=(TRK,(47,40,30)) /*FREE TRK=10,FREE DIR=25*/

>----->dsn tbl
PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3380 C FB 80 9040 1X 47 10 40 TRK 25

>----->dsn tso
PDS210I ALLOC F(SYS00134) DA('C911407.LIB.TEST') SHR UNIT(3380) -
PDS210I RECFM(F B) LRECL(80) BLKSIZE(9040) OPTCD(C) VOLUME(STR815) -
PDS210I TRK SPACE(47,40) DIR(30) /*FREE TRK=10,FREE DIR=25*/

DUP Subcommand
The DUP subcommand copies members to another data set. It is in the COPY
subcommand and performs the copy with internal routines. Use the COPY subcommand
without concern for using DUP since DUP routines are used as needed.

Copying members between unlike data sets is supported; however, load members can
only be copied to load libraries. Records are truncated or padded with blanks during the
copy as required.

If the source data set is RECFM=F with LRECL=80 and the target data set is RECFM=V
with LRECL=255 (or the reverse), DUP supports CLIST conversion during the copy. CLIST
conversion involves assigning new sequence numbers at the beginning or end of each
output line. For converting from RECFM=V to RECFM=F, DUP breaks lines up as required
to fit in 80-character lines using a - as a continuation character.

If the data set to be copied contains load modules (RECFM is U) and the output block size
is smaller than the input block size, DUP does not copy the data set since a COPYMOD
function is required. In this case, use the COPY subcommand. COPY automatically
requests a COPYMOD function because of the differences in block sizes.

Command Reference 141

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Example
DUP mem1:mem2 other.dataset shr

Syntax
DUP memgroup
{/ or dsname [VOLUME(volser)] / * / FILE(ddname) [NUMBER(numb)]}
[OLD/SHR / NEW [BLK/TRK/CYL] [DIR(num)] [SPACE sec)]]
[ROUND] [EXPDT(yyddd)/RETPD(nnnn)] [RLSE]
[STORCLAS(sclass)] [MGMTCLAS(mclass)]
[DATACLAS(dclass)] [DSNTYPE(LIBRARY/PDS)]
[UNCTLG/NOCATLG]
[ALIAS/NOALIAS ]
[CHANGE/GO ]
[ADDZAP/ADDZAP(numb) ]
[NONUM/SNUM ]
[NOCLIST ]
[REXX ]
[AS(pname) / TO(pname) ]
[CALL/NOCALL ]
[EXIST/NOEXIST/EXCLUDE/NOBLDL ]
[MAXBLK(num) ]
[REPLACE/NOREPLACE ]
[SUMMARY/LIST/NOLIST ]
[UNIT(Unitname) ]
[CHANGE/GO ]
[MOVE ]
[SUBSTITUTE(oldstring,newstring)]
[VOLUME(volser) ]
* [FROMKEY(key)/FROMADDRESS(add)/FROMNUMBER(num) ]
* [TOKEY(key)/TOADDRESS(add)/TONUMBER(num) ]
*NOTE: Lines with an asterisk are supported for VSAM only.

Aliases
DU, DUP

Abbreviations
FKEY for FROMKEY, FADDR for FROMADDRESS, FNUM for FROMNUMBER, TKEY for TOKEY,
TADDR for TOADDRESS, and TNUM for TONUMBER.

Defaults
ALIAS if load, NOALIAS otherwise; SHR, NOREPLACE, MAXBLK(output BLKSIZE). If NEW
is specified, BLK/TRK/CYL, DIR, SPACE, ROUND, EXPDT, STORCLAS, MGMTCLAS,
DATACLAS, and DSNTYPE default to values used for the input data set.

Required
memgroup, dsname / FILE(ddname)

142 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Operands
memgroup The members to be copied to the target data set.
Default member names, member lists, member name
ranges, and member name patterns are allowed. See
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
dsname The output data set. Use standard TSO dsname syntax or a
temporary data set name such as &&TEMP. Only sequential,
direct or partitioned output data sets are supported by DUP.
As an alternative to the AS or TO keywords, enter partial
member names in parentheses following the data set name,
such as:
the.dsn(pname)
FILE(ddname) The output data set is allocated with the provided DDNAME.
Only disk data sets are supported. They must be sequential
or partitioned.
NUMBER(numb) The concatenation number for the DDNAME identified. numb
defaults to 1. If numb is larger than the number of
concatenated data sets, the last data set in the
concatenation sequence is used.
OLD Obtains exclusive use of the output data set.
SHR Allows shared use of the output data set. StarTool FDM
provides output data set protection. See Appendix B,
"Update Protection".
CHANGE Specifies that StarTool FDM should CHANGE to the output
data set at the end of the DUP process.
GO Specifies that StarTool FDM should initiate a GO session for
the output data set at the end of the DUP process.
ALIAS Copies any associated members (aliases, apparent aliases,
and associated main members).
NOALIAS Copies only the members specifically identified.
AS(pname) pname defines the name of any output members. For
example, with AS(new) and the input members AA, ABBA,
and IBM04, members named NEW, NEWA, and NEW04 are
created. AS and TO are equivalent keywords.
If only a single member is input and NOALIAS is in effect,
the resulting member name is taken only from the AS or TO
keyword.
TO(pname) pname defines the name of any output members. For
example, with TO(new) and the input members AA, ABBA,
and IBM04, members named NEW, NEWA, and NEW04 are
created. TO and AS are equivalent keywords.
If only a single member is input and NOALIAS is in effect,
the resulting member name is taken only from the AS or TO
keyword.
REPLACE Replaces members in the output data set by any copied
members.
NOREPLACE Does not replace members in the output data set by copied
members.

Command Reference 143

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

ADDZAP For load members only, specifies that a ZAP IDR record is to
be added (each ZAP IDR record contains space for 19
historical entries).
ADDZAP(numb) For load members only, add 1 to 99 ZAP IDR records.
MAXBLK(nm) For source members only, nm specifies the maximum
output block size to be used when the members are
reconstructed.
NONUM For source members only, specifies that the input members
are all data and no sequence numbers are to be formatted.
This keyword is ignored on a RECFM=F to RECFM=V CLIST
conversion.
SNUM For source members only, specifies that sequence numbers
in the input (the first 8 columns for RECFM=V data sets;
otherwise the last 8 columns) are to be discarded during the
copy.
NOCLIST CLIST conversion is not to be performed. Perform CLIST
conversion if RECFM=V, LRECL=255 data is copied to
RECFM=F, LRECL=80 or the reverse. CLIST conversion
entails assigning new sequence numbers and breaking up
long lines into several short ones while maintaining CLIST
format rules.
REXX Specifies that RECFM=VB, LRECL=255 REXX members be
converted to RECFM=F, LRECL=80 REXX members using
REXX continuation rules.
This algorithm works for many REXX routines but it is not
error-free because this subcommand is not aware of text
strings delimited by “or”.
UNIT(uname) The allocation unit name. Use this parameter if the default
unit name is incorrect for this allocation.
NEW Creates the output data set. When you specify NEW, also
specify BLK/TRK/CYL, DIR, SPACE, ROUND, EXPDT (or
RETPD), RLSE, STORCLAS, MGMTCLAS, DATACLAS, and
DSNTYPE keywords.
VOLUME(volser) For NEW data sets, specifies the output volume name. For
existing data sets, Use this parameter if the output data set
is not cataloged. For new data sets, code VOLUME(*) to
mean the volume parameter is to be copied.
DIR(num) The number of directory blocks for the output data set. If
you do not enter DIR, the default is taken from the input
data set.
SPACE(prim,sec) The primary and secondary quantities for the output data
set in track or cylinder units.
If you do not enter BLK, TRK, or CYL but you enter SPACE,
the space allocation units are assumed to be the same as
the current allocation.
BLK Allocates the output data set in blocks. If you enter BLK
without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken from
the current allocation and converted to equivalent block
units.

144 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

TRK Allocates the output data set in tracks. If you enter TRK
without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken from
the current allocation and converted to equivalent track
units.
CYL Allocates the output data set in cylinder units. If you enter
CYL without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken
from the current allocation and converted to equivalent
cylinder units.
ROUND Used with BLK to specify that the data set allocation be
rounded up to cylinder boundaries.
EXPDT(yyddd) The expiration date for the data set. On and after the
expiration date, delete or write over the data set. Also use
the format EXPDT(yyyyddd).
RETPD(nnnn) The number of days (0 to 9999) that the data set be
retained by your data center.
RLSE Any unused space in the data set is to be released after the
copy operation.
STORCLAS(sc) The storage class for the data set. Use this parameter to
identify performance and availability requirements for data
sets. Use this parameter instead of UNIT and VOLUME
keywords for SMS-managed data sets to determine where
the data set is allocated. To nullify this parameter, enter
STORCLAS(*).
MGMTCLAS(mc) The management class for the data set. This parameter
establishes the migration, backup, and space release
characteristics for SMS-managed data sets. To nullify this
parameter, enter MGMTCLAS(*).
DATACLAS(dc) The data class for the data set. Use this parameter to
provide data attributes such as RECFM, KEYLEN, SPACE,
EXPDT or RETPD, DSORG, LRECL, and some VSAM SHR
options for SMS-managed data sets. To nullify this
parameter, enter DATACLAS(*). Use DATACLAS for data
sets that are not SMS-managed.
DSNTYPE(typ) Specify typ as LIBRARY for a PDSE or PDS for a partitioned
data set. A PDSE must be a SMS-managed data set.
UNCATLG Does not catalog the NEW data set.
NOCATLG Does not catalog the NEW data set.
CALL Calls the copy program to perform the copy.
NOCALL Does not call the copy program. Member checking, control
card generation, and data set allocations are performed.
EXIST Copies only the subset of memgroup that is also present in
the output data set (the REPLACE keyword is also used).
NOEXIST Copies only the subset of memgroup that is not present in
the output data set.
NOBLDL Does not perform BLDL (member existence) checking in the
target library. Uses this parameter when performance of the
COPY subcommand is very important and BLDL checking
(by StarTool FDM) for possible errors is not important.
SUMMARY Displays only copy summary and error messages.

Command Reference 145

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

LIST Displays all copy messages.

NOLIST Displays no copy messages.
MOVE If no errors are detected during the copy process, all of the
copied members are deleted.
SUBSTITUTE(old,new) Used with a / to represent the current data set name. Use
SUBSTITUTE to replace a string of characters in the source
data set name to create a target data set name.
For example, if the current data set is PDSEXXX.MSGS, the
following two subcommands are equivalent:
DUP ABC* PDSEYYYY.MSGS
DUP ABC* / SUBSTITUTE(XXX/YYYY)
FROMKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, code ky as the key of the first
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be
coded as x’hexkey’. Access begins at the first record whose
key matches (or is greater than) the portion of the key
specified.
Use this parameter with TOKEY. Specify it only for an
alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.
FROMADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, code ad as 0 through 99999999 to
specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the first record to
be accessed. The RBA value must match the beginning of a
logical record. If you specify this parameter for key-
sequenced data, the records are accessed in physical
sequential order instead of key order. Use this parameter
with TOADDRESS.
FROMADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through
a path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed
FROMNUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, code nm as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative record number (RRN) of the first
record to be accessed. This record must be present in the
data set. Use this parameter with TONUMBER. Specify it
only for a variable or fixed relative record data set.
TOKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, code ky as the key of the last
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be
coded as x’hexkey’. Access ends after the first record whose
key matches the portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with FROMKEY. Specify it only for an
alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.

146 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

TOADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, code ad as 0 through 99999999 to

specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the last record to
be accessed. The RBA value does need not to match the
beginning of a logical record. If you specify this parameter
for key-sequenced data, the records are accessed in
physical sequential order instead of key order. Use this
parameter with FROMADDRESS.
TOADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through
a path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed
TONUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, code nm as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative record number (RRN) of the last
record to be accessed. This record need not be present in
the data set. Use this parameter with FROMNUMBER.
Specify it only for a variable or fixed relative record data
set.

Remarks
If you use the TO (or the equivalent AS) keyword, each member is renamed in the copy in
a generic fashion. For example, if you enter TO(X12), each resulting member name is
formed by placing X12 over the first three characters of the original member name. An
exception to this rule is made when only a single member is to be copied and its aliases
are not also requested. In this case, the member name is taken directly from the TO
keyword.

For load members, add a null ZAP IDR record as the member is being copied. For non-load
members, the output member is reblocked to the receiving data set’s BLKSIZE or the
MAXBLK specified.

NOTE This subcommand modifies the output data set. To ensure data set integrity,
allocate the output data set as OLD, or be aware of the data set update protection
provided by the StarTool FDM command for SHR allocations. For details, see Appendix B,
"Update Protection" on page 421.

Command Reference 147

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

----------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ---------- ROW 153 TO 161 OF 161

COMMAND ===> OLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand or a special control code:
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CLISTV,VOL=SER=STR92T MEM=AA* ----------------------------
>----->dup aa* lib.clistv2
PDS072I CLIST conversion will be performed
PDS852E AA already exists
PDS051I AAAA was copied; input=6; output=6
PDS051I AAC was copied; input=44; output=44
PDS051I AA2 was copied; input=1; output=1
PDS051I AA6 was copied; input=70; output=70

PDS054I Totals -- Members=4; Input=121; Characters=9,680

---------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ------------- Row 75 to 93 of 93

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=STARXYZ* --------------------------
>------>dup starxyz* lib.cntls replace
PDS051I STARXYZE was replaced; input=27; output=27
PDS051I STARXYZJ was copied; input=15; output=15
PDS051I STARXYZM was copied; input=26; output=26
PDS051I STARXYZO was copied; input=25; output=25
PDS051I STARXYZT was copied; input=22; output=22
PDS051I STARXYZU was copied; input=12; output=12
PDS051I STARXYZV was copied; input=39; output=39
PDS051I STARXYZ1 was replaced; input=14; output=14
PDS051I STARXYZ2 was replaced; input=22; output=22
PDS051I STARXYZ3 was copied; input=12; output=12
PDS051I STARXYZ5 was copied; input=19; output=19
PDS051I STARXYZ6 was copied; input=21; output=21
PDS051I STARXYZ8 was copied; input=14; output=14
PDS051I STARXYZ9 was copied; input=23; output=23

PDS054I Totals -- Members=14; Input=291; Characters=23,280

DVOL Subcommand
This interface is optional. Use it only if your installation installed the public domain DVOL
command. For information on the DVOL command, refer to the CBT Web site at http://
www.cbttape.org/, file 112.

Use the DVOL subcommand to display the amount of free space on a direct access device.

Example
DVOL tso long

Syntax
DVOL [(volumelist)/* ] [SHORT/LONG ]
[HEADER/NOHEADER ]

148 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

[PRINT/NOPRINT ]
[SERONLY ]
[HARDCOPY(ddname) ]

Aliases
DV, DVO, DVOL

Defaults
Use an * to display all volumes, SHORT, HEADER, and PRINT. If HARDCOPY is specified,
NOPRINT is the default.

Required
none

Operands
volumelist A list of one or more volume names of mounted direct access
volumes or partial volume names.
If you do not enter a volume, or if you specify an *, the information
displays for each direct access volume on the system.
If you enter a volume name with a U followed by 1 to 3 digits, the
data is used as a UCB name.
SHORT Displays short form output.
LONG Displays long form output.
HEADER Displays a short form header.
NOHEADER Displays no short form header.
PRINT Displays output.
NOPRINT Displays no output.
SERONLY Displays only a list of mounted volumes.
HARDCOPY(dd) Specifies the DDNAME of a pre-allocated data set to receive a copy
of DVOL output.

Remarks
DVOL reads the Format 4 and Format 5 DISCOs from the VTOC of a direct access volume
and displays:
 Volume name
 Unit address
 Device type including density indicators
 Mount status and use status
 Number of blank DISCOs in the VTOC

Command Reference 149

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

 Condition of the VTOC indicators byte

 VSAM data fields
 Total free space in tracks
 Number of free extents
 Number of free cylinders
 Size of largest extents (up to 5) in cylinders + tracks
 Size of largest extents (up to 5) in tracks

The Return code is set to the total number of tracks in the 5 largest extents (to a
maximum of 4095) for the last volume displayed.

If an error condition exists on the volume, the return code is set to 0.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------ ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ------------ ROW 46 TO 60 OF 60
COMMAND ===> OLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=(BATDELAY --------------------------
>----->dvol abc
SERIAL --UNIT-- ATTRIBUTES VSAM AVAIL -----TOTALS---- LARGEST-EXTENT 5 EXTS
ADR TYPE MOUNT/USE DSCBS TRACKS EXT CYL CYL+TR TRACKS TRACKS
ABC522 522 3380E RESDNT/PRIV OFF 791 13247 3 881 442+14 6644 13247
ABCD4B 531 3390M3 RESDNT/PRIV OFF 753 9538 14 632 422+ 0 6330 9399

>----->dvol abcd4b long

VOLUME SERIAL = ABCD4B UNIT = 531 TYPE = 3390M3
STATUS: RESIDENT PRIVATE UNALLOCATED ONLINE
VTOC CONTAINS 753 BLANK DSCB'S
INDEXED VTOC CONTAINS 86 FREE VIR'S
FREE SPACE IS 9538 TRACKS IN 14 EXTENTS INCLUDING 632 FULL CYLINDER
LARGEST EXTENTS ARE: /CYL+TR/ 422+ 0/ 100+11/ 60+ 3/ 40+ 0/ 3+10/
/TRACKS/ 6330/ 1511/ 903/ 600/ 55/
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

EDIT Subcommand
The EDIT or SPFEDIT subcommand enters ISPF edit for a member.

Example
EDIT mema:memb

Syntax
EDIT memgroup [OLD/NEW ]
[MACRO(macname) ]
[SM(macname)/SETMACRO(macname) ]
[PROFILE(profname) ]
[SP(profname)/SETPROF(profname)]
[CONFIRM/NOCONFIRM ]
[SETCONFIRM/NOSETCONFIRM ]
* [FROMKEY(key)/FROMADDRESS(add)/FROMNUMBER(num) ]

150 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

* [TOKEY(key)/TOADDRESS(add)/TONUMBER(num) ]

*NOTE: Lines with an asterisk are supported for VSAM with PEDIT or EDIF.

Aliases
E, ED, EDI, EDIT, S, SP, SPF, SPFE, SPFED, SPFEDI, SPFEDIT

Abbreviations
FKEY for FROMKEY, FADDR for FROMADDRESS, FNUM for FROMNUMBER, TKEY for TOKEY,
TADDR for TOADDRESS, and TNUM for TONUMBER.

Defaults
memgroup, confirm

Required
none

Operands
memgroup The source members to be edited.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed. For more
information, see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
OLD Verifies that the member exists before invoking ISPF EDIT
service.
NEW Verifies that the member does not exist before invoking ISPF
EDIT service.
MACRO(mac) An initial edit macro name.
SM(mac) A default initial edit macro name. To nullify this parameter,
enter SM(*).
SETMACRO(mac) A default initial edit macro name. To nullify this parameter,
enter SETMACRO(*).
PROFILE(prof) The edit profile name (the supplied name is used instead of
the low-level DSNAME qualifier).
SP(prof) A default edit profile name. To nullify this parameter, enter
SP(*).
SETPROF(prof) A default edit profile name. To nullify this parameter, enter
SETPROF(*).
CONFIRM For ISPF 4.x, specifies that you desire prompting for MOVE,
REPLACE, or CANCEL operations.
NOCONFIRM For ISPF 4.x., no confirmation prompting for MOVE, REPLACE,
or CANCEL operations.

Command Reference 151

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

SETCONFIRM For ISPF 4.x, specifies a default of CONFIRM for subsequent

edits in this StarTool FDM session. Override this keyword on
individual edit commands with NOCONFIRM.
NOSETCONFIRM For ISPF 4.x, specifies a default of NOCONFIRM for subsequent
edits in this StarTool FDM session. Override this keyword on
individual edit sessions with CONFIRM.
FROMKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, code ky as the key of the first record
to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be coded as
x’hexkey’. Access begins at the first record whose key matches
(or is greater than) the portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with TOKEY. Specify it only for an alternate
index or a key-sequenced data set.
FROMADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, code ad as 0 through 99999999 to
specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the first record to be
accessed. The RBA value must match the beginning of a
logical record. If you specify this parameter for key-sequenced
data, the records are accessed in physical sequential order
instead of key order. Use this parameter with TOADDRESS.
FROMADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with spanned
records if any of the spanned records are to be accessed
FROMNUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, code nm as 0 through 99999999 to
specify the relative record number (RRN) of the first record to
be accessed. This record must be present in the data set.
Use this parameter with TONUMBER. Specify it only for a
variable or fixed relative record data set.
TOKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, code ky as the key of the last record
to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be coded as
x’hexkey’. Access ends after the first record whose key
matches the portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with FROMKEY. Specify it only for an
alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.

152 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

TOADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, code ad as 0 through 99999999 to

specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the last record to be
accessed. The RBA value does need not to match the
beginning of a logical record. If you specify this parameter for
key-sequenced data, the records are accessed in physical
sequential order instead of key order. Use this parameter with
FROMADDRESS.
TOADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with spanned
records if any of the spanned records are to be accessed
TONUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, code nm as 0 through 99999999 to
specify the relative record number (RRN) of the last record to
be accessed. This record need not be present in the data set.
Use this parameter with FROMNUMBER. Specify it only for a
variable or fixed relative record data set.

Remarks
On the first entry of an EDIT or SPFEDIT subcommand, StarTool FDM presents any
pending EDIT recovery sessions to you before entering EDIT for a selected member.

If you enter a : for the member name position, a MEMLIST is provided instead.

VSAM data sets are edited with the PEDIT command. However, use ISPF EDIF services to
access up to 255 characters of any individual record, but the SAVE command is disabled.
You may have chosen a different interface during StarTool FDM installation. Of the
interfaces supported, only PEDIT and EDIF support positioning keywords such as
FROMKEY.

To determine which interface is used, type a CONTROL DEFAULT subcommand and look
for an output line beginning “EDIT calls” with one of the following values:
EDIF - uses the ISPF EDIF interface with up to 255 characters per record
PEDIT - uses PEDIT services
%VSAMMED - uses the MacKinney System’VSAM Utility Edit

EDREC Subcommand
The EDREC subcommand explicitly invokes ISPF edit recovery.

Example
EDREC

Command Reference 153

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Syntax
EDREC

Aliases
EDR, EDRE, EDREC

Operands
No operands are supported for the EDREC subcommand.

Remarks
This subcommand allows you to control when EDIT RECOVERY is to take place. EDIT
RECOVERY procedures are initiated on the first EDIT subcommand. With the EDREC
subcommand you can perform the appropriate action before the first EDIT subcommand.

ENCODE Subcommand
The ENCODE subcommand encrypts a member. This was written with the data encryption
algorithm submitted by IBM to the National Bureau of Standards and published in the
Federal Register.

Example
ENCODE original mymember keyexamp

Syntax
ENCODE input output key [SHR/OLD ]

Aliases
ENC, ENCO, ENCOD, ENCODE

Defaults
OLD

Required
input, output, key

154 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Operands
input The member to be encoded. If this is a 1- to 8-byte simple name it is taken
to be a member name in the current data set; otherwise, it is taken to be
data.set(member)
output The receiving member. If this is a 1- to 8-byte simple name it is taken to be
a member name in the current data set; otherwise, it is taken to be
data.set(member)
key This is a 1- to 8-byte alphanumeric key used for encoding the data set
member.
OLD This allocation is not to be shared with any other allocation for this data set.
SHR This allocation is to be shared with other allocations for this data set.

Remarks
This subcommand encrypts data using the supplied translation key. Since this algorithm
works on eight bytes at a time, the actual number of bytes enciphered or deciphered is an
integral number of eight bytes that is less than or equal to the record length. The greatest
number of bytes left unchanged on a record is the right-most seven bytes.

NOTE This method does not record your key. If you cannot provide the key, the data is
not readable. Use the ENCODE load module independently of StarTool FDM. A HELP entry
is available. Its basic syntax is as follows:

ENCODE input.dsn(memin) output.dsn(memout) key SHR/OLD

END Subcommand
The END subcommand terminates the STARTOOL command. In ISPMODE, the END
subcommand terminates the current function. Multiple END subcommands are required to
terminate the STARTOOL command.

Example
END

Syntax
END

Aliases
EN, END

Command Reference 155

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Operands
No operands are supported for the END subcommand.

Remarks
In ISPMODE or MEMLIST an END terminates the current function instead of the STARTOOL
command. To terminate StarTool FDM enter repeated END commands or a QUIT
subcommand.

EXCLUDE Subcommand
The EXCLUDE subcommand removes member names from the current MEMLIST. Use
EXCLUDE by itself or as follows:

FIND isp* 'string' else(exclude)

or

IF mem/ alias .... then(exclude)

Example
EXCLUDE isp* norent

Syntax
EXCLUDE memgroup
[SINCE/BEFORE ]
[TODAY/YESTERDAY/WEEK/CURRENT/BIWEEK/
MONTH/QUARTER/HALFYEAR/YEAR/BIYEAR/
LAST(numdays)/DATE(yyyy/mm/dd) ]
[CHANGED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd) ]
[CREATED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd) ]
[ABOVE(Count1) ]
[ALIAS/NOALIAS ]
[AMODE24/AMODE31/AMODE64/AMODEANY/NOAMODE24/
NOAMODE31/NOAMODE64/NOAMODEANY ] (load only)
[AUTH/NOAUTH ] (load only)
[BELOW(Count2) ]
[DC/NODC ] (load only)
[EDIT/NOEDIT ] (load only)
[EXEC/NOEXEC ] (load only)
[FLEVEL/NOFLEVEL ] (load only)
[HASALIAS/NOHASALIAS ]
[ID(Puid)/NOID/NOTID(Puid) ]
[LKED(Partl) ] (load only)
[LOADONLY/NOLOADONLY ] (load only)
[MODULE({* / Fullm / Partm*)} ] (load only)
[NULL/NONULL ]
[ORPHAN/NOORPHAN ]
[OVERLAY/NOOVERLAY ] (load only)

156 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

[PAGE/NOPAGE ] (load only)

[REFR/NOREFR ] (load only)
[RENT/NORENT ] (load only)
[REUS/NOREUS ] (load only)
[RMODE24/RMODEANY/NORMODE24/NORMODEANY] (load only)
[SCTR/NOSCTR ] (load only)
[SSI(hxdata)/SSI/NOSSI/PARTSSI(hxdata)]
[SYSMOD(Partu) / USERDATA(Partu) ] (load only)
[TEST/NOTEST ] (load only)
[TRANS(Partt) ] (load only)
[TTR(Lttr:Httr) ]
[USERDATA(Partu) / SYSMOD(Partu) ] (load only)
[USERID(Puid)/NOUSERID/NOTUSERID(Puid)]
[VSLKED/NOVSLKED ] (load only)
[ZAP(Partz) ] (load only)

Aliases
EXC, EXCL, EXCLU, EXCLUD, EXCLUDE

Defaults
memgroup, SINCE

Required
none

Operands
memgroup The members to be excluded from the current MEMLIST.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed. For more
information, see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names"
SINCE Uses dates from the specified date to the current date. SINCE
indicates that the implied date range (TODAY, YESTERDAY, ...
LAST, DATE) follows the date given. For source modules, the
date referenced is the ISPF modification date. For load
modules, it is the linkage edit date.
FROM Uses dates from the specified date to the current date. FROM
indicates that the implied date range (TODAY, YESTERDAY, ...
LAST, DATE) follows the date given. For source modules, the
date referenced is the ISPF modification date. For load
modules, it is the linkage edit date.
BEFORE Uses dates before (and including) the specified date. BEFORE
indicates that the implied date range (TODAY, YESTERDAY, ...
LAST, DATE) is before the given date. For source modules, the
date referenced is the ISPF modification date. For load
modules, it is the linkage edit date.

Command Reference 157

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

TO Uses dates before (and including) the specified date. TO

indicates that the implied date range (TODAY, YESTERDAY, ...
LAST, DATE) is before the given date. For source modules, the
date referenced is the ISPF modification date. For load
modules, it is the linkage edit date.
TODAY A date, equivalent to LAST(0).
YESTERDAY A date, equivalent to LAST(1).
WEEK A date, equivalent to LAST(7).
CURRENT A date, equivalent to LAST(10).
BIWEEK A date, equivalent to LAST(14).
MONTH A date, equivalent to LAST(30).
QUARTER A date, equivalent to LAST(120).
HALFYEAR A date, equivalent to LAST(183).
YEAR A date, equivalent to LAST(365).
BIYEAR A date, equivalent to LAST(730).
LAST(numdays) A date, the number of days before today.
DATE(cdate) The actual date. Enter it in ISPF format (yyyy/mm/dd), or
Julian format (yyyy.ddd).
CHANGED(date: Excludes members modified by an ISPF editor or a ZAP
program between the dates specified. If you enter a single
date, only that date is checked. A date range is entered like:
CHANGED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd)
Only members with ISPF statistics or members created by a
linkage editor are supported.
CREATED(date: Excludes members created with ISPF statistics or by the
linkage editor between the dates specified. If you enter a
single date, only that date is checked. A date range is entered
like:
CREATED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd)

ABOVE(Count1) Excludes members with more than the number of lines

(amount of storage for load modules) specified by the number,
Count1.
ALIAS Excludes alias members.
NOALIAS Excludes main members.
AMODE24 Excludes modules with addressing mode 24.
NOAMODE24 Excludes modules with addressing mode 31, 64 or ANY.
AMODE31 Excludes modules with addressing mode 31.
NOAMODE31 Excludes modules with addressing mode 24, 64 or ANY.
AMODE64 Excludes modules with addressing mode 64.
NOAMODE64 Excludes modules with addressing mode 24, 31 or ANY.
AMODEANY Excludes modules with addressing mode ANY.
NOAMODEANY Excludes modules with addressing mode 24, 31 or 64.
AUTH Excludes APF authorized modules.

158 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

NOAUTH Excludes non-authorized modules.

BELOW(Count2) Excludes members with less than the number of lines (amount
of storage for load modules) specified by the number, Count2.
DC Excludes downward-compatible modules.
NODC Excludes non-downward-compatible modules.
EDIT Excludes modules that are reprocessed by the linkage editor.
NOEDIT Excludes modules that cannot be reprocessed by the linkage
editor.
EXEC Excludes EXECUTABLE modules.
NOEXEC Excludes non-EXECUTABLE modules.
FLEVEL Excludes modules processed by the F-level linkage editor.
NOFLEVEL Excludes modules not processed by the F-level linkage editor.
HASALIAS Excludes main members that have one or more aliases.
NOHASALIAS Excludes alias members or main members without any aliases.
ID(Puid) Excludes members with ISPF statistics and user IDs matching
the partial name, Puid. Enter Puid as a partial TSO user ID
with 1 to 7 characters. ID is an alias of USERID.
NOID Excludes members without ISPF statistics. NOID is an alias of
NOUSERID.
NOTID(Puid) Excludes members without ISPF statistics or members with
ISPF statistics and user IDs that do not match the partial
name, Puid. Enter Puid as a partial TSO user ID with 1 to 7
characters. NOTID is an alias of NOTUSERID.
LKED(Partl) Excludes modules identified as linked by the linkage editor
defined by the partial name, Partl. Enter Partl as a partial
linkage editor IDR name with one to ten characters.
LOADONLY Excludes modules marked for LOAD ONLY.
NOLOADONLY Excludes modules not marked for LOAD ONLY.
MODULE(name) Specifies a 1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits
CSECT names for attribute searches. If you enter this
parameter with any TRANS, SYSMOD/USERDATA, or ZAP
keywords, only those CSECTs that satisfy the MODULE
keyword are checked for the other keyword conditions.
The MODULE operand has several valid forms:
 MODULE(*) – uses the previous name entered on any MODULE
keyword
 MODULE(Fullm) – excludes any module containing a CSECT or
ENTRY called FULLM
 MODULE(Partm*) – excludes any module containing a CSECT or
ENTRY called PARTM...
ORPHAN Excludes alias members that have no associated main
member.
NOORPHAN Excludes main members or alias members that have an
associated main member.
OVERLAY Excludes OVERLAY modules.

Command Reference 159

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

NOOVERLAY Excludes non-OVERLAY modules.

PAGE Excludes modules marked for loading on a page boundary.
NOPAGE Excludes modules not marked for loading on a page boundary.
REFR Excludes refreshable modules.
NOREFR Excludes non-refreshable modules.
RENT Excludes reentrant modules.
NORENT Excludes non-reentrant modules.
REUS Excludes reusable modules.
NOREUS Excludes non-reusable modules.
RMODE24 Excludes modules with residence mode 24.
NORMODE24 Excludes modules with residence mode ANY.
RMODEANY Excludes modules with residence mode ANY.
NORMODEANY Excludes modules with residence mode 24.
SCTR Excludes scatter-loaded modules.
NOSCTR Excludes non-scatter-loaded modules.
SSI(hxdata) Excludes members with matching SSI data.This is
implemented as a generic search matching SSI characters
from left to right for the number of characters entered.
SSI Excludes members with SSI data.
NOSSI Excludes members without SSI data.
PARTSSI(hxdata) Excludes members with matching SSI data. This is
implemented as a pattern search matching SSI digits as a
string anywhere in the SSI field of the member.
SYSMOD(Partu) Excludes modules with user IDR data that matches the partial
name, Partu. Enter Partu as partial IDR data with one to eight
characters. If you enter MODULE(...), the SYSMOD operand
applies only to CSECTs whose names satisfy the MODULE
argument.
TEST Excludes modules with the TEST attribute.
NOTEST Excludes modules without the TEST attribute.
TRANS(Partt) Excludes modules with CSECTS identified as having been
assembled or compiled by the translator defined by the partial
name, Partt. Enter Partt as a partial translator IDR name with
one to ten characters. If you enter MODULE(...), the TRANS
operand applies only to CSECTs whose names satisfy the
MODULE argument.
TTR(Lttr:Httr) Excludes members whose start address is in the specified TTR
range. Lttr defaults to 0 and can be entered as a hexadecimal
TTR value from 0 through FFFFFF. Httr defaults to FFFFFF and
can be entered as a hexadecimal TTR value from 0 through
FFFFFF.
USERDATA(Partu) Excludes modules with user IDR data that matches the partial
name, Partu. Enter Partu as partial IDR data with one to eight
characters. If you enter MODULE(...), the USERDATA operand
applies only to CSECTs whose names satisfy MODULE.

160 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

USERID(Puid) Excludes members with ISPF statistics and user IDs matching
the partial name, Puid. Enter Puid as a partial TSO user ID
with 1 to 7 characters. USERID is an alias of ID.
NOUSERID Excludes members without ISPF statistics. NOUSERID is an
alias of NOID.
NOTUSERID(Puid) Excludes members without ISPF statistics or members with
ISPF statistics and user IDs that do not match the partial
name, Puid. Enter Puid as a partial TSO user ID with 1 to 7
characters. NOTUSERID is an alias of NOTID.
VSLKED Excludes modules linked by the system linkage editor.
NOVSLKED Excludes modules not linked by the system linkage editor.
ZAP(Partz) Excludes modules with zap IDR data that matches the partial
name, Partz. Enter Partz as partial zap IDR data with one to
eight characters. If you enter MODULE(...), the ZAP operand
applies only to CSECTs whose names satisfy the MODULE
argument.

Remarks
If a member to be excluded is not in the MEMLIST, no action is taken. The following
sample screens show a before image of a member list and an after image showing the
results of an EXCLUDE = RENT.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL A-M LINE CMDS A-M DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M FEATURES
CONTROL N-Z LINE CMDS N-Z MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS
----------------------- Load MEMLIST 1, Session# 1 ------- ROW 1 TO 16 OF 138
COMMAND ===> exclude = rent SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=A/ --------------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG ALIASOF LEN/LKED -- ATTRIBUTES -- APF MODE MAIN
ADC2 *ALIAS 87/04/30 REFR RENT ADC2TSO
ADC2ACF2 88/06/02 REFR RENT
ADC2RACF 88/06/06 REFR RENT
ADC2SUB 87/03/23 REFR RENT
ADC2SVC *ALIAS 85/01/17 REFR RENT IGC0024I
ADC2TDSM 87/03/27 REFR RENT
ADC2TSO 87/04/30 REFR RENT
AEV00 89/07/11
AEV10 89/07/11 RENT REUS
AEV20 89/07/11 RENT REUS
AEV50 89/07/11
AEV80 89/07/11 RENT REUS
AEV90 89/07/11 RENT REUS
ASID 87/06/15 RANY

Command Reference 161

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

FUNCTIONS CONTROL A-M LINE CMDS A-M DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M FEATURES
CONTROL N-Z LINE CMDS N-Z MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------- Load MEMLIST 1, Session# 1 ----- ROW 1 TO 16 OF 91
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=(ADC2 -----------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG ALIASOF LEN/LKED -- ATTRIBUTES -- APF MODE MAIN
AEV00 89/07/11
AEV50 89/07/11
ASID 87/06/15 RANY
ASIDSP13 82/05/17
ASIDZZ *ALIAS 82/05/17 ASIDMM
ASM 78/02/19 DC
ASMH 82/05/25
ASMH2 82/05/25
ASMTOZAP 81/09/02
AUTO 82/06/16 AC=1
BLAKJACK 82/05/18
CACHE 85/08/04 AC=1
CALCVSAM 84/07/26
CALENDAR 89/03/06

EXEC Subcommand
The EXEC or % subcommand executes a CLIST containing StarTool FDM subcommands.
Use the TSO CLIST processor. Both implicit (%... ) and explicit (EXEC ... ) call forms are
supported.

Example
EXEC lib(clistmem) ‘parms’ list

Syntax
{EXEC clistname ['operands'] / %clistmem [operands]}

Aliases
%, EX, EXE, EXEC

Defaults
none

Required
clistname / clistmem

162 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

Operands
clistname The CLIST data set name.
clistmem The name of a member in the CLIST partitioned data set allocated to
FILE(SYSPROC).
operands Optional. May include any CLIST parameters.

Remarks
The % (implied CLIST) and EXEC subcommands are supported in an ISPF dialog
environment. Use the ISPF TSO command to invoke a CLIST that operates under ISPF
(independent of StarTool FDM).

When you enter subcommands from a CLIST (or in batch mode or from a storage stack),
no YES/NO prompts are provided; instead, YES responses are assumed in each case. YES
responses are also assumed if CONTROL NOPROMPT is in effect.

Command Reference 163

Chapter 4 Commands — D to E

164 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Chapter 5
Commands — F to I

FILTER Function
Use the FILTER command to set selection values for use later by the LISTC/LISTF or MASK
function. The NOFILTER keyword in MASK resets all FILTER options to their defaults.

Example
FILTER novs

Syntax
FILTER [ALL/P/PS/PO/PE/PDS/DA/IS/NOVS/VS/GDG]
[ASSOC/NOASSOC ]
[CHECKCAT/NOCHECK ]
[MIGRAT/NOMIGRAT/ONLYMIGR ]
[OPTICAL/NOOPTICAL ]
[QUICK/NOQUICK ]
[RESET ]

Aliases
FIL, FILT,\ FILTE, FILTER

Defaults
ALL, ASSOC, NOCHECK, MIGRAT, NOOPTICAL, NOQUICK

Required
none

Command Reference 165

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Operands
ALL Default. Searches for all data set types.
P Searches for PS, PO, and PE data sets.
PS Searches for sequential data sets.
PO Searches for partitioned data sets.
PE Searches for partitioned extended data sets.
PDS Searches for PO and PE data sets.
DA Searches for direct data sets.
IS Searches for ISAM data sets.
NOVS Searches for non-VSAM data sets.
VS Searches for VSAM data sets.
GDG Searches for Generation data sets.
ASSOC Default for LISTC. Adds associated components for VSAM clusters.
NOASSOC For LISTC, does not add associated VSAM components.
CHECKCAT For LISTF, checks the catalog status of each data set as it is added.
NOCHECK Default for LISTF. Does not check catalog status.
MIGRAT Default for LISTC. Searches for all data sets.
NOMIGRAT For LISTC, searches for non-migrated data sets.
ONLYMIGR For LISTC, searches for only migrated (MIGRAT or ARCIVE) data
sets.
OPTICAL Opens the VTOC for Optical devices (3395 M151).
NOOPTICAL Default. Does not open the VTOC for optical devices (3395 M151).
QUICK For LISTC, bypasses data set volume verification.
NOQUICK Default for LISTC. Verifies data set volume status.
RESET Resets the FILTER options to default values.

Remarks
Some special considerations apply for the FILTER command:

1 Migrated data sets are identified by a MIGRAT or ARCIVE volume name.

2 DSORG type checking cannot be performed on migrated data sets.

3 If QUICK is active, only GDG, NOVSAM and VSAM can be checked. P/PS/PO/PE/PDS/
DA/IS all result in non-VSAM data set selection.

4 MIGRAT/NOMIGRAT/ONLYMIGR, QUICK and ASSOC are only applicable to LISTC.

5 CHECKCAT/NOCHECK is applicable to LISTF only.

166 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

FIND Subcommand
The FIND subcommand displays portions of a member that contain a search string.
Optionally, enter the THEN or ELSE keywords to allow conditional execution of other
subcommands. When you enter a THEN keyword, the results of the FIND subcommand
are not displayed unless you also enter the DISPLAY keyword.

Example
FIND membera:memberz ‘this data’

Syntax
FIND memgroup 'search_string'
[NUM|SNUM|NONUM|LBLOCK|LDUMP|BLOCK|DUMP]
[CAPS|ASIS|IGNORE|PICTURE]
[WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]
[OFFSET(hexnum) MODULE({*|fullname|part*})]
[AFTER(num) DO(num) MAXMEMBERS(num) COLS(from:to)]
[AND('string2') ACOLS(from:to) {ACAPS|AASIS|AIGNORE|APICTURE}]
[ORx('string3') OCOLS(from:to) {OCAPS|OASIS|OIGNORE|OPICTURE}]
[FORMAT(from:to,from:to, ...)]
[SKIPREC(num) MAXIN(num) MAXOUT(num) MAXFIND(num)]
[SKIPCOL(num) MAXLEN(num) {FIRST|NOFIRST}]
[DISPLAY]
[THEN({ATTRIB|BROWSE|DIRENTRY|DELETE|EDIT|EXCLUDE|FSE|
HISTORY|LIST|MAP|MEMBERS|MEMLIST|NEWML|PRINT|REVIEW|
SUBMIT|SUBLIST|TSOEDIT|TSOLIST|VERIFY|VIEW})]
[ELSE({ATTRIB|BROWSE|DIRENTRY|DELETE|EDIT|EXCLUDE|FSE|
HISTORY|LIST|MAP|MEMBERS|MEMLIST|NEWML|PRINT|REVIEW|
SUBMIT|SUBLIST|TSOEDIT|TSOLIST|VERIFY|VIEW})]

[FROMKEY(key)/FROMADDRESS(address)/FROMNUMBER(num)]1
[TOKEY(key)/TOADDRESS(address)/TONUMBER(num)]1
1NOTE: Supported for VSAM only.

Aliases
FI, FIN

Abbreviations
FKEY for FROMKEY, FADDR for FROMADDRESS, FNUM for FROMNUMBER, TKEY for TOKEY,
TADDR for TOADDRESS, and TNUM for TONUMBER.

Defaults
memgroup, previous search string, IGNORE, NUM or previous LIST/FIND/REPLACE format

Command Reference 167

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Required
None

168 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Operands
memgroup The members to be searched.
Default member names, member lists, member name
ranges, and member name patterns are allowed. For more
information, see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
‘search_string’ The data to be located, delimited by single quotes. If you do
not enter the string or if it is null, the last string entered is
used. The string can contain 1 to 32 characters. If you enter
the ASIS keyword, the string is not translated to upper-case
letters.
As an alternative, enter hexadecimal data as a string
delimited with x’s like x0123456789abcdefx.
A hexadecimal string can contain 1 to 64 characters. x333x
and x0333x are equivalent.
NUM Examines the line number field (the last 8 bytes of a fixed-
format record or the first 8 bytes otherwise) of each logical
record for numerics. If the line number field is not numeric,
switch formatting to NONUM mode for the remainder of the
member.
For ISPF-saved members, the high-order 6 digits of the line
number field is formatted. Otherwise, the low-order 6 digits
of the line number field is formatted by suppressing leading
zeroes. The line number segment is followed by a blank and
up to 249 characters of data from the logical record.
SNUM Discards the line number field (the last 8 bytes of a fixed-
format record or the first 8 bytes otherwise). Searches or
displays up to 256 bytes from a logical record.
NONUM Searches or displays up to 256 bytes from a logical record
(without regard to line numbers).
LBLOCK Formats logical records with two hexadecimal offsets
(displacement in the member and displacement in the logical
record) and segments of up to 64 characters surrounded by
asterisks. Only formatted segments that contain the search
string display. However, a following segment also displays if
the string spans a segment boundary.
For load modules, only CSECT data is searched or displayed
and if a name is entered in a MODULE operand, only those
CSECT or ENTRY names that satisfy the name are searched
or displayed. CSECT records are formatted with two
hexadecimal offsets (a module offset and a CSECT offset)
and segments of up to 64 characters surrounded by
asterisks.
For VSAM records, the first field in the output is the relative
record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8 bytes of
the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer than 8 characters, a
+ is placed after the key); otherwise, it is a relative byte
address.

Command Reference 169

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

LDUMP Formats logical records with two hexadecimal offsets

(displacement in the member and displacement in the logical
record), segments of up to 32 characters of hexadecimal
data and up to 16 bytes of equivalent characters surrounded
by asterisks. Only formatted segments that contain the
search string display; however, a following segment also
displays if the string spans a segment boundary.
For load modules, only CSECT data is searched or displayed
and if a name is entered in a MODULE operand, only those
CSECT or ENTRY names that satisfy the name are searched
or displayed. CSECT records are formatted with two
hexadecimal offsets (a module offset and a CSECT offset),
segments of up to 32 characters of hexadecimal data and up
to 16 bytes of characters surrounded by asterisks.
For VSAM records, the first field in the output is the relative
record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8 bytes of
the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer than eight
characters, a + is placed after the key); otherwise, it is a
relative byte address.
BLOCK Formats physical records with two hexadecimal offsets
(displacement in the member and displacement in the
physical record) and segments of up to 64 characters
surrounded by asterisks.
Only formatted segments that contain the search string
display; however, a following segment also displays if the
string spans a segment boundary.
For VSAM records, the first field in the output is the relative
record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8 bytes of
the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer than eight
characters, a + is placed after the key); otherwise, it is a
relative byte address.
If you perform control interval processing, the first field is
always the control interval relative byte address.
TIP: For FIND operations against very large data sets
(several MB), use the BLOCK parameter to prevent ABENDs.
DUMP Formats physical records with two hexadecimal offsets
(displacement in the member and displacement in the
physical record), segments of up to 32 characters of
hexadecimal data and up to 16 bytes of equivalent
characters surrounded by asterisks.
Only formatted segments that contain the search string
display; however, a following segment displays if the string
spans a segment boundary.
For VSAM records, the first field in the output is the relative
record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8 bytes of
the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer than 8 characters, a
+ is placed after the key); otherwise, it is a relative byte
address.
If you perform control interval processing, the first field is
always the control interval relative byte address.
CAPS Upper case any character string search argument.
ASIS Does not upper-case the search string.
IGNORE Searches for upper- and lower-case string arguments.

170 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

PICTURE If specified, search for data using matching characters and

the following picture characters:
 = for any character
 % for any alphanumeric character
 @ for any alphabetic character
 # for any numeric character
 $ for any special character
 ~ for any non-blank character (can also use the “not”
character)
 . for any invalid character
 - for any non-numeric character
 < for any lower-case alphabetic character
 > for any upper-case alphabetic character
WORD Searches for strings preceded and followed by a non-
alphanumeric character. Can be used to limit the string hits.
PREFIX Searches for strings preceded by a non-alphanumeric
character. Can be used to limit the string hits.
SUFFIX Searches for strings followed by a non-alphanumeric
character. Can be used to limit the string hits.
OFFSET(hexnum) A 1- to 6-digit hexadecimal module offset at which the
search is to begin.
This operand is defined only for load modules and only with
the LDUMP or LBLOCK output formats.
If you enter MODULE and OFFSET keywords, the offset
applies to each module selected.
MODULE(name) A 1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits CSECT or
ENTRY names to be searched or displayed.
This operand is defined only for load modules and only with
the LDUMP or LBLOCK output formats.
If you enter MODULE and OFFSET keywords, the offset
applies to each module selected. The MODULE operand has
several valid forms:
 MODULE(*) – uses the previous name entered on any
MODULE keyword
 MODULE(Fullm) – searches or display only a CSECT or
ENTRY named FULLM
 MODULE(Partm*) – searches or display only a CSECT or
ENTRY named PARTM.
AFTER(num) Coded as 0 through 9999999 to specify the number of
matches to skip before reporting FIND strings.
MAXMEMBERS(num) n is coded as 0 through 9999999 to specify the maximum
number of members to be selected by FIND.
DO(num) Coded as 0 through 9999999 to specify the maximum
number of lines to output for a member.

Command Reference 171

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

COLS(from:to) Column range to search for the primary string (COLS is only
supported for formats NUM, SNUM, and NONUM). For
example, COLS(1:10) specifies that the string may begin in
columns 1 through 10.
AND('string2') Another string to search in addition to the primary string.
AND strings are supported only for formats NUM, SNUM, or
NONUM and a FIND is reported for a primary string only if
the AND string is found first.
ACOLS(from:to) Column range to search for the AND string. For example,
ACOLS(1:10) specifies that the string can begin in columns 1
through 10.
ACAPS If you use an AND character string argument, it is translated
to upper-case letters.
AASIS If you use an AND character string argument, it is not to be
translated to upper-case letters.
AIGNORE If you use an AND character string argument, searches for
upper- and lower-case data matching the string.
APICTURE If you use an AND character string argument, search for
data with matching characters and the following picture
characters:
 = for any character
 % for any alphanumeric character
 @ for any alphabetic character
 # for any numeric character
 $ for any special character
 ~ for any non-blank character (can also use the “not”
character)
 . for any invalid character
 - for any non-numeric character
 < for any lower-case alphabetic character
 > for any upper-case alphabetic character
ORx('string3') Another string to search as an alternate to the primary
string. ORx can be OR and OR2 through OR7, for a total of
eight OR conditions. OR strings are supported only for
formats NUM, SNUM or NONUM. A FIND is reported for either
a primary string or an OR string.
OCOLS(from:to) Column range to search for the OR string. For example,
OCOLS(1:10) specifies that the string can begin in columns 1
through 10.
OCAPS If you use an OR character string argument, it is translated
to upper-case letters.
OASIS If you use an OR character string argument, it is not to be
translated to upper-case letters.
OIGNORE If you use an OR character string argument, search for
upper- and lower-case data matching the string.

172 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

OPICTURE If you use an OR character string argument, searches for

data with matching characters and the following picture
characters:
 = for any character
 % for any alphanumeric character
 @ for any alphabetic character
 # for any numeric character
 $ for any special character
 ~ for any non-blank character (can also use the “not”
character)
 . for any invalid character
 - for any non-numeric character
 < for any lower-case alphabetic character
 > for any upper-case alphabetic character
FORMAT Specifies the record columns to display in the output when
(from:to,from:to, ...) reporting a FIND string. FORMAT is supported only with NUM,
SNUM, or NONUM data. For example,
FORMAT(21:30,0,1:10) specifies that the output be
formatted with data from columns 21 through 30, a blank
and data from columns 1 through 10.
SKIPREC(num) Ignores n (coded as 0 through 9999999) logical records
(physical records for BLOCK or DUMP formats) at the
beginning of a member.
MAXIN(num) Inputs up to n (coded as 0 through 9999999) logical records
(physical records for BLOCK or DUMP formats) for a member
after satisfying any SKIPREC operand.
MAXOUT(num) Displays up to n (coded as 0 through 9999999) output lines
for a member.
MAXFIND(num) Locates up to n (coded as 0 through 9999999) strings in a
member.
SKIPCOL(num) Ignores n (coded as 0 through 99999) columns at the
beginning of each logical record (physical record for BLOCK
or DUMP formats).
For NUM or SNUM output format with record format V,
SKIPCOL(0) refers to the first data position after the line
number field.
MAXLEN(num) Searches or displays up to n (coded as 0 through 99999)
characters in a logical record (physical record for BLOCK or
DUMP formats).
FIRST Lists all remaining data in the member after locating a string.
NOFIRST Lists only string matches.
DISPLAY The results of the FIND subcommand display before taking
any THEN action. This allows you to see the lines containing
the string and take a conditional action.

Command Reference 173

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

THEN(action) Executes a subcommand if the string is found in a member.

The subcommand can be ATTRIB, BROWSE, DIRENTRY,
DELETE, EDIT, EXCLUDE, FSE, HISTORY, LIST, MAP,
MEMBERS, MEMLIST, NEWML, PRINT, REVIEW, SUBMIT,
SUBLIST, TSOEDIT, TSOLIST, VERIFY, or VIEW.
NEWML is similar to MEMLIST except that it also performs a
MEMLIST RESET.
ELSE(action) Executes a subcommand if the string is not found in a
member. The subcommand may be ATTRIB, BROWSE,
DIRENTRY, DELETE, EDIT, EXCLUDE, FSE, HISTORY, LIST,
MAP, MEMBERS, MEMLIST, NEWML, PRINT, REVIEW, SUBMIT,
SUBLIST, TSOEDIT, TSOLIST, VERIFY, or VIEW.
NEWML is similar to MEMLIST except that it also performs a
MEMLIST RESET.
FROMKEY(key) For VSAM data sets only, code ky is coded as the key of the
first record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be
coded as x’hexkey’. Access begins at the first record whose
key matches (or is greater than) the portion of the key
specified. Use this parameter with TOKEY. Specify it only for
an alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.
FROMADDRESS For VSAM data sets only, code ad as 0 through 99999999 to
(address) specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the first record to
be accessed. The RBA value must match the beginning of a
logical record (or a control interval for control interval
processing). If you specify this parameter for key-sequenced
data, the records are accessed in physical sequential order
instead of key order. Use this parameter with TOADDRESS.
FROMADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components.
 Can be specified for any VSAM data set component if control
interval processing is being used.
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path.
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed.
FROMNUMBER(num) For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through
99999999 to specify the relative record number (RRN) of the
first record to be accessed. This record must be present in
the data set.
Use this parameter with TONUMBER. Specify it only for a
variable or fixed relative record data set.
TOKEY(key) For VSAM data sets only, code ky as the key of the last
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be
coded as x’hexkey’. Access ends after the first record whose
key matches the portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with FROMKEY. Specify it only for an
alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.

174 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

TOADDRESS For VSAM data sets only, code ad as 0 through 99999999 to

(address) specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the last record to
be accessed. The RBA value does need not to match the
beginning of a logical record (or a control interval for control
interval processing). If you specify this parameter for key-
sequenced data, the records are accessed in physical
sequential order instead of key order. Use this parameter
with FROMADDRESS.
TOADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components.
 Can be specified for any VSAM data set component if control
interval processing is being used.
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path.
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed.
TONUMBER(num) For VSAM data sets only, code nm as 0 through 99999999 to
specify the relative record number (RRN) of the last record
to be accessed. This record need not be present in the data
set.
Use this parameter with FROMNUMBER. Specify it only for a
variable or fixed relative record data set.

Remarks
Unprintable characters for 3270-type devices translate to periods before they display.

FIND formats are NUM, SNUM, NONUM, LBLOCK, LDUMP, BLOCK, and DUMP. For load
modules, the NUM, SNUM, and NONUM formats are equivalent to the LDUMP format and
for VSAM data sets, the NUM, SNUM, and NONUM formats are equivalent to the LBLOCK
format.

The default format is initially NUM; however, each time you enter a format operand on a
LIST, FIND, or REPLACE subcommand, the value entered is used as the output format for
subsequent LIST, FIND, and REPLACE subcommands. Also, note the following:

1 Formats NUM, SNUM, and NONUM limit the search and display length for logical
records to 256 characters.

2 Column 72 is not searched for formats NUM or SNUM if the record format is fixed with
80 character records since this is the continuation column.

3 Formats BLOCK and DUMP apply to physical records for non-VSAM data sets (or when
control interval processing is performed). The other formats apply to logical records.
For load modules, LBLOCK and LDUMP formats display only CSECT data.

TIP When using the FIND command against very large data sets (several MB), use
the BLOCK parameter to avoid an ABEND.

4 Formats LBLOCK, LDUMP, BLOCK, and DUMP display only those segments of a record
that contain the search string. A following segment also displays if the string spans a
segment boundary.

Command Reference 175

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

5 For VSAM DATA or INDEX components, the LIST, FIND, and REPLACE subcommands
support control interval access using the DUMP or BLOCK display formats. Instead of
accessing individual VSAM records, each GET or PUT obtains a VSAM control interval.

Control interval access is useful if a VSAM data set has logical errors. REPLACE repairs the
error; however, since only the component is opened for update, the next access of the
data set through the related cluster gets warning errors due to the differing time stamps.

The various FIND keywords are summarized by type below.

Keyword Type Keywords

format NUM, SNUM, NONUM, LBLOCK, LDUMP, BLOCK, DUMP
translate CAPS, ASIS, IGNORE, PICTURE
position OFFSET, MODULE, SKIPREC, MAXIN, MAXOUT, MAXFIND,
SKIPCOL, MAXLEN
condition THEN, ELSE
for source NUM, SNUM, NONUM, AND, ACOL, OR, OCOL, FORMAT
members
for load members OFFSET, MODULE
for VSAM FROMKEY, FROMADDRESS, FROMNUMBER, TOKEY, TOADDRESS,
TONUMBER

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------ ISPMODE Session Display ------------- ROW 2891 OF 2946
COMMAND ===> ROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR802 MEM=PDS99T1* -------------------------
>----->fi pds99t1* / exec /

** FIND PDS99T1A
000800 //ONE EXEC PGM=IEV90,REGION=2048K,
002400 //PDSAPPL EXEC PDSGEN,MEMBER=PDSAPPL
003200 //LK1 EXEC PGM=IEWL,PARM='MAP,RENT,REUS,REFR,LET,NCAL',COND=(0,LT)
004400 //ABEND EXEC PGM=IEFABEND,COND=(0,EQ)
PDS142I 43 lines in this member

** FIND PDS99T1D
000800 //ONE EXEC PGM=IEV90,REGION=2048K,
002800 //*ARSE EXEC PDSGEN,MEMBER=@PARSE
003000 //DIALOG EXEC PDSGEN,MEMBER=@DIALOG
003200 //LK1 EXEC PGM=IEWL,PARM='MAP,RENT,REUS,REFR,LET,NCAL',COND=(0,LT)
004400 //ABEND EXEC PGM=IEFABEND,COND=(0,EQ)

176 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
---------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log --------- ROW 1,000 TO 1,013 OF 1,013
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER007 MEM=PDSDECRY --------------------------
>----->find pdsdecry x4780c1x ldump

** FIND PDSDECRY
PDS141I AT 000000 CSECT ENCRYPT LENGTH 000015E0
000180 0180 C1D9E240 5000F000 0A0612FF 4780C1A4 *ARS &.0.......Au*
0001B0 01B0 30509180 40064780 C1D248E0 400406E0 *.&j. ...AK...
0001E0 01E0 4780C1FC 48E04004 06E05810 400047F0 *..A..... ..0*

PDS141I AT 0017C8 CSECT R050A90 ENTRY DECIPH

0018A8 0118 CB2C4740 C12A4780 C13259D0 CB304780 *... A...A......*
0018B8 0128 C1324140 000247F0 C1364140 0001D237 *A.. ...0A.. ..K.*

PDS142I 7 blocks in this member

PDS146I 5 strings found
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

--------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# --------- Row 1,392 to 1,411 of 1,421

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand or a special control code:
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER005 MEM=L* ------------------------------
>------>find l* 'P<<' picture

** FIND LMDLIST
Possible return codes are:
PDS142I 125 lines in this member
PDS146I 1 strings found

** FIND LOGOUT
D - terminated StarTool. After StarTool is terminated by CONDEND, the
I - HISTORY member MODULE({* / Fullm / Partm*})
D - MODULE({* / Fullm / Partm*})
RN- LKED(Partl)
RO- LKED(Partl)
I - TRANS(Partt)
D - TRANS(Partt/ ASM / ASMA90 / ASMH / COBOL /
RN- USERDATA(Partu) / SYSMOD(Partu)
RO- USERDATA(Partu) / SYSMOD(Partu)
RN- ZAP(Partz)
RO- ZAP(Partz)
D - Note that if MODULE(Fullm) or TRANS(Partt) is also

Command Reference 177

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS DATA CMDS A-M DATA CMDS N-Z DEFAULT FEATURE
---------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log ----------ROW 1,000 TO 1,017 OF 1,017
COMMAND ===> ROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.VSAM.AX.CLUSTER.PATH,VOL=SER=SER007 -----------------------------
>----->find 'vsam' dump
PDS140I DUMP RECORD 23 LENGTH 7,623 RBA 00024576
0007MM F+0010 40C9C4C3 F3F3F5F1 C9405C5C 40E5E2C1 * IDC3351I ** VSA*
0007MM F+0020 D440C040 D6D7C5D5 404F40C3 D3D6E2C5 *M OPEN | CLOSE*
0007MM F+0190 99899587 40E5E2C1 D4409799 968385A2 *ring VSAM proces*
0007MM F+08A0 99969940 81838385 A2A28995 8740E5E2 *ror accessing VS*
0007MM F+08B0 C1D440A5 9693A494 85408481 A381A285 *AM volume datase*

PDS140I DUMP RECORD 27 LENGTH 1,089 RBA 00013377

000730 +0020 99408183 8385A2A2 89958740 E5E2C1D4 *r accessing VSAM*

PDS142I 80 blocks in this data set

PDS146I 4 strings found
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

FINDMOD Subcommand
The FINDMOD subcommand searches for all copies of a system routine.

Example
FINDMOD iefbr14

Syntax
FINDMOD module [SYSTEM/NUCLEUS/ADDRESS]
[CHANGE/GO LIB(num) ]
[NOSEARCH ]

Aliases
FINDM, FINDMO, FINDMOD

Defaults
SYSTEM, LIB(1)

Required
module

178 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Operands
module Identifies the member to be found.
SYSTEM Issue a BLDL and search the LPA and MLPA. If the member is in
MLPA, TASKLIB, or LINKLIST, search the LINKLIST concatenation. If
the member is in LPA, search the LPALIB concatenation. Also, search
the in-storage nucleus.
NUCLEUS The search should take place in the in-storage nucleus.
ADDRESS Module is an address whose corresponding routine is to be located in
the LPA, MLPA, or NUCLEUS. Search the LINKLIST libraries if the
module is in MLPA and search the LPALIB concatenation if it is in LPA.
CHANGE Specifies that if the member is found, perform a CHANGE to that
library.
GO Specifies that if the member is found, initiate a GO session for that
library.
LIB(n) If there are multiple finds, LIB specifies which library to select for
CHANGE or GO. If you specify a higher number for LIB than actually
found, the last data set is selected.
NOSEARCH Specifies that the LINKLIST and LPALIB library concatenations are
not to be searched.

Remarks
If FINDMOD is entered with the SYSTEM parameter (the default) the following search
takes place:

1 A BLDL is issued and reported on.

2 The LPA and MLPA is searched (the module may be in both).

3 If the module is in MLPA, TASKLIB, or the LINKLIST, the LINKLIST libraries are
individually searched.

4 If in LPA, the LPALIB libraries are individually searched.

5 The in-storage nucleus map is searched.

If FINDMOD is entered with the ADDRESS parameter, the module parameter is assumed
to be a hex address and the following search takes place:

1 The in-storage nucleus map is searched.

2 If in MLPA, the LINKLIST libraries are individually searched.

3 If in LPA, the LPALIB libraries are individually searched.

If FINDMOD is entered with the NUCLEUS parameter, only the in-storage nucleus map is
searched.

Command Reference 179

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log ---------- ROW 1,000 TO 1,015 OF 1,015
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=ISF.V1R3M2.ISFLPA,VOL=SER=SYSS1C MEM=IGX00011 ------------------------
>----->findmod igx00011 change
PDS293I Member found in LINKLIST DSNAME='ISF.V1R3M2.ISFLPA'
PDS294I Member found in MLPA
PDS295I Address:02A13DD8; length:000200
PDS295I Attributes 1: Reentrant; Reusable; Not loadable only;
PDF295I Attributes 2: Authorized library; Authorized program; Amode 64;
PDF295I Attribute 3: Resident above 16Meg; PLPA resident;

Change 'ISF.V1R3M2.ISFLPA'
PDS200I DISP UNIT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3390 U 0 6160 1X 6 5 0 TRK 4

PDS222I Block allocation: SPACE=(6160,(40,,5))

PDS223I This is a linklist data set

PDS224I This data set is APF authorized

PDS300A ENTER OPTION -- DSN=ISF.V1R3M2.ISFLPA,VOL=SER=SYSS1C MEM=IGX00011

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

FIXPDS Subcommand
The FIXPDS subcommand alters attributes of the current data set. It contains functions
for sequential, PDS, and PDSE data sets. This subcommand also automatically invokes
DSNAME.

180 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Example
FIXPDS RELEASE RECFM(FBA)

Syntax
FIXPDS
[NEWDSNAME(new.data.set.name)]
[MODDSNMAME(data.set.to.modify) MODVOLUME(volume)]1

[ORDER]
[EXPANDDIR(num_add)|FREEDIR(num_unused)|
DIRFREE(percent)|INITDIR(rblks)|
{RESET(tblks)|RESET1|
[CHECK1|NOCHECK1] }]
[RELEASE1|RELEXTENT|RELSAVE(trks)|RELFREE(percent)|MAXSPACE]
[ADDTRK(trks)|ADDCYL(cyls)|ADDFREE(percent)]
[DSCB(offset, hexdata_to_verify, hexdata_to_replace)]1
[*TRK / *CYL / *BLK [*ROUND] ]
[*SPACE(number) ]
[*EXPDT(yyddd) / *RETPD(nnnn) ]
[*MGMTCLAS(mgmtclas) ]
[*STORTCLAS(storclas) ]
[ASM / CLIST / CNTL / LOAD / OBJECT ]
[DSORG(PS/PSU / DA/DAU / PO/POU / IS/ISU / VS/VSU) ]
[RECFM(F/FB/FA/FM/FBA/FBM/V/VB/VA/VM/VBA/VBM/U/UA/UM)]
[LRECL(L1) ]
[*BLKSIZE(L2) ]
[*OPTCD(W/WC/WCZ/C/CZ/Z) / *NOOPTCD ]

1
NOTE: Supported for PDSE data sets.

Aliases
FIX, FIXP, FIXPD

Defaults
NOCHECK, RECFM(previous value), LRECL(previous value), BLKSIZE(previous value),
OPTCD(previous value)

Required
none

Command Reference 181

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Operands
EXPANDDIR(#add) Expands the directory by adding #add unused directory
blocks. Type #add as a number from 0 through 99999.
The default is 50.
FREEDIR(#unused) Expands or reduces the directory as necessary to obtain
#unused free directory blocks. Type #unused as a
number from 0 through 99999. It defaults to 5.
ORDER Reads the directory looking for members that are
duplicates or out of order. Each such member causes a
prompting sequence before any fix is attempted. For out
of order members, the member is renamed back to itself
in two steps so that it can be placed in collating sequence.
For duplicate member names, one of the members is
renamed (to a name low in the collating sequence).
Dispose of either one or both later.
RESET(Totblks) Writes over the current directory with empty directory
blocks. Enter totblks as a number from 1 through 99999.
It defaults to the number of directory blocks already
allocated.
After the directory blocks are written, the end of data
marker (DS1LSTAR) is reset to indicate an empty
partitioned data set. This is the equivalent of a
COMPRESS for an empty partitioned data set.
RESET Reset the data set to an empty data set.
INITDIR(rblks) Writes over the current directory with empty directory
blocks. Enter rblks as a number from 1 through 99999. It
defaults to the number of directory blocks already
allocated. The data set end of data marker (DS1LSTAR) is
not modified as for RESET.
CHECK Check each member to see if it is being edited for options
RESET or INITDIR.
NOCHECK No edit check is desired.
DIRFREE(perc) Specifies the percent of free directory blocks desired (0 to
999). For example, if 20 is entered for a data set with 50
used directory blocks, the number of free directory blocks
will be adjusted (up or down) to 10.
ADDFREE(perc) Specifies the percent of unused space to be available in a
data set (0 to 999). For example, if 20 is entered for a
data set with 50 used tracks and 5 free tracks, another 5
tracks will be added to the data set in track or cylinder
increments. If RELFREE and ADDFREE are both used,
ADDFREE is performed first.
RELFREE(perc) Specifies the percent of unused space to be retained in a
data set (0 to 999). For example, if 20 is entered for a
data set with 50 used tracks, any unused space past track
60 will be returned to the system. If the data set was
allocated with cylinder secondary space, any returned
disk space will maintain cylinder boundaries for the data
set. If RELFREE and ADDFREE are both used, ADDFREE is
performed first.

182 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

RELEASE Returns any unused disk space in the current data set to
the system. If the data set was allocated with cylinder
secondary space, any returned disk space will maintain
cylinder boundaries for the data set.
RELEXTENT Returns any unused disk extents to the system.
RELSAVE(nnn) Returns any unused disk space in the current data set to
the system except for the first nnn tracks. If the data set
was allocated with cylinder secondary space, any
returned disk space will maintain cylinder boundaries for
the data set.
MAXSPACE Marks all extents of the data set as “in-use” by adjusting
the end of data set marker (DS1LSTAR). This could be
used after a data set compress to RESTORE members
after the used portion of the data set.
ADDTRK(trka) Adds a single secondary extent of trka tracks to the data
set.
This operation is independent of secondary space
indicators from the data set label.
ADDCYL(cyla) Adds a single secondary extent of cyla cylinders to the
data set.
This operation is independent of secondary space
indicators from the data set label.
DSCB(offs,ver,rep) Modify the Format 1 DSCB as specified by the OFFS, VER,
and REP parameters. The DSCB keyword may contain
multiple sets of OFFS, VER, and REP.
For example, the following subcommand changes the first
character of DS1DSSN and sets DS1EXPDT to zero if it is
set to any 1995 value:
FIXPDS DSCB(2D C1C2C3C4C5C6 F1 38 5F 000000)
Each OFFSET may vary from 2C to 8C.
Each VER must contain 2 to 20 hexadecimal characters
that are checked against the corresponding DSCB data. If
any VER fails, the DSCB keyword has no effect.
Each REP must contain 2 to 20 hexadecimal characters
that are used to update corresponding DSCB data.
If all sets of OFFS, VER and REP are processed
successfully and you confirm that these changes are
desirable, DSCB updates are performed by PDSEAUTH.
NEWDSNAME(dsname) Specifies a new data set name for an uncataloged data
set on a non-indexed volume.
If the new DSNAME begins with ‘NULL..” the data set is
also deleted. If you are authorized to use this facility,
Format 1 DSCB updates are made with PDSEAUTH. This
facility can rename a data set even if it is ENQUEUED.
MODDSNAME(dsname) Specifies a data set whose Format 1 DSCB is to be
modified. If you are authorized to use this facility, DSCB
updates are made with PDSEAUTH. Use this facility to
repair damaged data sets even if they cannot be allocated
directly.
MODVOLUME(volume) A volume name for use with the MODDSNAME keyword if
the data set is not cataloged or is mis-cataloged.

Command Reference 183

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

TRK Change the secondary space allocation type to tracks.

Indicate the number of tracks with a SPACE keyword. This
keyword modifies the Format 1 data set control block.
CYL Change the secondary space allocation type to cylinders.
Indicate the number of cylinders with a SPACE keyword.
This keyword modifies the Format 1 data set control
block.
BLK Change the secondary space allocation type to block
allocation. Change the number of blocks with a SPACE
keyword.
Specify the ROUND keyword to get space in cylinder
boundaries. This keyword modifies the Format 1 data set
control block.
ROUND Specified with BLK to indicate that secondary space be
obtained on cylinder boundaries. This keyword modifies
the Format 1 data set control block.
SPACE(number) Usually specified with TRK, CYL, or BLK to indicate the
number of units to obtain for a secondary allocation. This
keyword modifies the Format 1 data set control block.
EXPDT(yyddd) Specifies the expiration date for the data set. Delete or
write over the data set on or after the expiration date.
Use the format EXPDT(yyyyddd). This keyword modifies
the Format 1 data set control block; however, if the data
set is SMS managed, IDCAMS is invoked to update this
field in the catalog and the Format 1 data set control
block.
RETPD(nnnn) Specifies the number of days (0 to 9999) to retain the
data set.
MGMTCLAS(mgmtclas) For SMS-managed data sets, invokes IDCAMS to update
the management class of a data set.
STORCLAS(storclas) For SMS-managed data sets, invokes IDCAMS to update
the storage class of a data set.
ASM Modifies the DCB to RECFM(FB) LRECL(80) and the
BLKSIZE shown in the table below.
RECFM, LRECL, or BLKSIZE may be explicitly specified.
CLIST Modifies the DCB to RECFM(VB) LRECL(255) and the
BLKSIZE shown in the table below.
RECFM, LRECL, or BLKSIZE may be explicitly specified.
CNTL Modifies the DCB to RECFM(FB) LRECL(80) and the
BLKSIZE shown in the table below.
RECFM, LRECL, or BLKSIZE may be explicitly specified.
LOAD Modifies the DCB to RECFM(U) and the BLKSIZE shown in
the table below.
RECFM or BLKSIZE may be explicitly specified.
OBJECT Modifies the DCB to RECFM(FB) LRECL(80) and the
BLKSIZE shown in the table below.
RECFM, LRECL, or BLKSIZE may be explicitly specified.

184 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

FIXPDS BLKSIZE and device table

3350 3375 3380 3390 9345

ASM block sizes 6160 6800 6320 6480 7200
CLIST block sizes 6232 6816 6356 6518 6088
CNTL block sizes 6160 6800 6320 6480 7200
LOAD block sizes 19069 32760 32760 32760 32760
OBJECT block sizes 2960 3200 3120 3120 3200

DSORG(Newd) The desired data set organization for the data set. Normally, the
DSORG of a data set would only be changed to add or remove the
U (Unmoveable) attribute; however, the DSORG of DA and PS type
data sets are sometimes also manipulated. The new DSORG may
be any of the following: PS, PSU, DA, DAU, PO, POU, VS, VSU, IS,
or ISU.
Changing this parameter does not change the data set physically
The new value is just changed in the data set label (Format 1
DSCB).
RECFM(Newr) A new DCB RECFM value for the data set. Newr defaults to its
previous value for the data set or may be entered as any one of
the following: F, FB, FA, FBA, FM, FBM, V, VB, VA, VBA, VM, VBM,
U, UA, or UM.
Changing this parameter does not change the data set physically.
The new value is just changed in the data set label (Format 1
DSCB).
LRECL(L1) A new DCB LRECL value for the data set. L1 defaults to its
previous value for the data set or may be entered as a number
from 1 through 32767.
Changing this parameter does not change the data set physically.
The new value is just changed in the data set label (Format 1
DSCB).
BLKSIZE(L2) A new DCB BLKSIZE value for the data set. L2 defaults to its
previous value for the data set or may be entered as a number
from 1 through 32767.
Changing this parameter does not change the data set physically.
The new value is just changed in the data set label (Format 1
DSCB).
OPTCD(Newo) The desired OPTCD value for the data set. Newo defaults to its
previous value for the data set or may be changed to any of the
following: W, WC, WCZ, C, CZ, or Z.
NOOPTCD Turn off any current W, C, or Z OPTCD value.

Remarks
After a FIXPDS subcommand gains control, it writes messages regarding the data set
action to be taken and any potential error conditions. FIXPDS prompts you before making
any data set changes unless CONTROL NOPROMPT is in effect. If you invoke the FIXPDS
subcommand with no operands in an ISPF environment, StarTool FDM prompts with a
panel appropriate for the type of data set you are currently processing.

Command Reference 185

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

The following are more detailed logic notes on several of the different functions available
through the FIXPDS subcommand.

EXPANDDIR (expand  If no members exist in the data set, RESET is used

the directory—ignored
 The names of members that will be moved because of the
for sequential) or
expanded directory are listed
FREEDIR (adjust free
blocks—ignored for  If any of these members are in use by an ISPF edit session,
sequential) a warning message is issued
 As each member is moved, an informational message is
issued
 The additional directory blocks are written
RESET (reset the  If any members exist in the data set, a warning message is
directory or the data issued
set)
 If CHECK is specified and any members are in use by an
ISPF edit session, a warning message is issued
 The data set’s directory blocks are rewritten with null data,
destroying any existing member information. For a PDSE, a
STOW with “initialize” deletes all members
 The end of data marker (DS1LSTAR) is reset to indicate an
empty data set (this is not performed on a PDSE)
 A PDSE must be allocated as DISP=OLD prior to performing
the FIXPDS RESET function. This can be done with the
following command:
CH pdse.dsn OLD

INITDIR (initialize the  If any members exist in the data set, a warning message is
directory — ignored for issued
sequential)
 If CHECK is specified and any members are in use by an
ISPF edit session, a warning message is issued
 The data set’s directory blocks are rewritten with null data,
destroying any existing member information
 The end of data marker (DS1LSTAR) is not modified
RECFM, LRECL,  If a data type keyword such as ASM, CLIST, CNTL, LOAD, or
BLKSIZE (modify the OBJECT is entered, RECFM and LRECL default values are
DCB attributes — a provided from a table and a BLKSIZE value is determined
warning is issued) based on the allocated device type
 If any RECFM, LRECL, or BLKSIZE values are specifically
requested by keyword, these values will override the values
as determined from the data type keywords entered
 The data set is opened for output with these new DCB
parameters
RELEASE (return space  If the data set is currently open, an error message is issued
to operating system)
 The amount of space and the type of units (TRK or CYL) is
determined
 The data set is opened with EXTEND to get the space
released

186 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

MAXSPACE (mark all All extents of the data set are marked in use by setting the
allocated space in use) end of data marker (DS1LSTAR) value to the last disk
address for the data set. Use this with a RESTORE
subcommand to recover members that were deleted prior
to a data set compress. It may also be possible to resurrect
members lost from a PDS after the directory is overwritten
by sequential output due to some sort of JCL or procedural
error. The sequential data blocks take one or more tracks
followed by the end of file marker in the disk tracks
formerly occupied by the directory. To attempt recovery of
PDS members located after the overwritten tracks, enter:
 FIXPDS MAXSPACE
(to mark all allocated space in use)
 FIXPDS INITDIR(43) ADDTRK(1)
(to reinitialize the directory and add another extent)
 RESTORE name REPEAT NOPROMPT NODISPLAY
(to restore all deleted members)
 VERIFY :
(to find invalid members after the previous DS1LSTAR)
 BROWSE name
(to scan contents of members)
 RENAME name realname
(to name needed members properly)
 DELETE name
(to delete members not needed)
 COMPRESS
(to clean up unused space again)

ADDTRK or ADDCYL  An extent is added to the data set in the units given in the
(add one secondary keyword. For example, ADDTRK(12) adds one secondary
extent) extent of 12 tracks while ADDCYL(4) adds one secondary
extent of 4 cylinders
 This operation is independent of any secondary extent
information associated with the data set. It can add a single
extent of the specified size to a data set even if the data set
was allocated without secondary extents.
 StarTool FDM issues a warning message if you attempt to
add a secondary extent to any data set named
'xxx.NUCLEUS' (where xxx is any dsname prefix).
Secondary extents are not supported for the
‘SYS1.NUCLEUS’ data set. If this data set were used as an
operating system NUCLEUS data set, you could not IPL!
 StarTool FDM also issues a warning message if you attempt
to add an extent to a LINKLIST data set. While this is
supported by the operating system, the extent would not be
available for use until the next system IPL.

Command Reference 187

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

NEWDSNAME (rename),  A prompt panel displays showing current DSCB value. This
MODDSNAME, and panel contains field-level help to provide guidance.If any
DSCB (direct DSCB changes are made in this panel, a FIXPDS DSCB
update) subcommand will be generated
From the FIXPDS panel,  The DSCB keyword may contain multiple triples of
select “Examine or hexadecimal information with values for: OFFSET VER REP
update DSCB”.
 As an example, the following subcommand changes the first
character of DS1DSSN and sets DS1EXPDT to zero if it is set
to any 1995 value:
FIXPDS DSCB(2D C1C2C3C4C5C6 F1 38 5F
000000)
 Each OFFSET may vary from 2C to 8C
 Each VER must contain 2 to 20 hexadecimal characters
which are checked against the corresponding DSCB data
 If any VER fails, the DSCB keyword has no effect
 Each REP must contain 2 to 20 hexadecimal characters
which are used to update corresponding DSCB data
 If all sets of OFFS, VER, and REP are processed without
problems and you confirm that these changes are desirable,
DSCB updates will be performed by PDSEAUTH
 Since DSCB operates on a conditional basis, it can be set up
to operate on a global basis where only matching data sets
are modified, as in the following example:

GLOBAL FIXPDS DSCB(2D C1C2C3C4C5C6 F1 38 5F 000000)

 If you lower the BLKSIZE of a data set with FIXPDS, this
only changes the data set label. You need to find all
members with a larger BLKSIZE using VERIFY :. In a source
library, reconstruct these members with the REPRO
subcommand
This subcommand modifies the data set. To ensure data set
integrity, allocate the data set as OLD or be aware of the
data set update protection provided by the StarTool FDM
command for SHR allocations. For details, see Appendix B,
"Update Protection".

188 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

-------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ------------------- ROW 2957 OF 2970

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=PDS99T1* -------------------------
>----->fix freedir(45)
PDS050I TESTMSG will be moved
PDS050I TMP347 will be moved

PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3380 C FB 80 9040 1X 47 10 40 TRK 25

PDS392A Should this data set be modified (Yes/No) ?

>----->y
PDS051I TESTMSG is being moved
PDS051I TMP347 is being moved

PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3380 C FB 80 9040 1X 47 10 40 TRK 45

-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log# 1 -- ROW 305 TO 315 OF 315

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CLISTV,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=TRAP -----------------------------
>----->fix addfree(50)

PDS200I DISP UNIT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3390 VB 255 32760 1X 10 0 3 TRK 1

PDS392A Should this data set be modified (Yes/No) ?

>----->y

PDS200I DISP UNIT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3390 VB 255 32760 2X 15 5 3 TRK 1

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

FSE Subcommand
The FSE subcommand edits a member. Use the TSO FSE command.

Command Reference 189

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Example
FSE mema:memb cntl

Syntax
FSE memgroup [ASIS
[OLD/NEW
[NONUM
[ASM/BASIC/CLIST/CNTL/COBOL/DATA/
FORTE/FORTG/FORTGI/FORTH/GOFORT/
IPLI/LIST/PLI/PLIF/TEXT/VSBASIC ]

Aliases
FS, FSE

Defaults
memgroup, EDIT type based on the data set name

Required
none

190 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be edited.
Default member names, member lists, member name range, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
ASIS Edits the member with upper- and lower-case characters.
OLD Verifies that the member exists before calling FSE.
NEW Verifies that the member does not exist before calling FSE.
NONUM Edits the member without using line numbers.
ASM EDIT type is assembly.
BASIC EDIT type is BASIC.
CLIST EDIT type is CLIST.
CNTL EDIT type is CNTL.
COBOL EDIT type is COBOL.
DATA EDIT type is DATA.
FORTE EDIT type is FORTRAN level “E”.
FORTG EDIT type is FORTRAN level “G”.
FORTGI EDIT type is FORTRAN level “GI”.
FORTH EDIT type is FORTRAN level “H”.
GOFORT EDIT type is GOFORT.
IPLI EDIT type is IPLI.
LIST EDIT type is LIST.
PLI EDIT type is PLI.
PLIF EDIT type is PLI (F-level).
TEXT EDIT type is TEXT.
VSBASIC EDIT type is VSBASIC.

Remarks
If you enter an EDIT type keyword, that keyword is passed to FSE as the descriptive
qualifier; otherwise, a descriptive qualifier is chosen as follows:

1 If the low-level qualifier of the partitioned data set name is one of the valid descriptive
qualifiers for FSE (ASM, BASIC, CLIST, CNTL, COBOL, DATA, IPLI, LIST, PLI, TEXT, or
VSBASIC), that qualifier is passed to FSE.

2 If the low-level qualifier is FORT, GOFORT is passed to FSE.

3 Otherwise, the data type qualifier is not a valid descriptive qualifier and the general
descriptive qualifier, DATA, is passed to FSE.

This interface is optional, and should only be used if you have FSE+ installed at your
installation.

Command Reference 191

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

GO Function
The GO command allows you to initiate or switch to parallel StarTool FDM sessions.

Example
GO ‘sys1.parmlib’

Syntax
GO [* / ** / gonum / dsname [VOLUME(volser)] [SHR/OLD]
/ FILE(ddname) [NUMBER(num)]
[REPLACE ]

Aliases
G, GO

Defaults
SHR or previously used GO data set if an * is entered.

Required
none

192 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Operands
* Switches to the most recently used GO session. Use this to
toggle GO sessions. This is similar to the toggling for CHANGE
*.
** Rotates through active GO sessions. Set a PF key to GO **.
gonum The number (1 through 9) of the parallel session to initiate or
switch to.
dsname The data set name for the parallel session to initiate or switch
to. If the data set name is not entered in single quotes (‘), your
TSO PREFIX is appended to the start of the entered data set
name.
VOLUME(volser) The volume name to use for uncataloged data sets.
SHR Allocates the data set with a disposition of SHR; allows
simultaneous use of this data set by others. The use of SHR is
recommended.
OLD Allocates the data set with a disposition of OLD; does not allow
simultaneous use of this data set by others. The use of SHR is
recommended.
FILE(ddname) Identifies the DDNAME of a pre-allocated data set. Only disk
data sets (including VIO) are supported. If you use the FILE
keyword, then dsname, SHR/OLD, VOLSET, and VOLUME should
not also be used. If the data set is concatenated, use the SHR or
OLD keyword since StarTool FDM reallocates the data set.
NUMBER(num) The concatenation number desired for the DDNAME allocation
for the FILE keyword. num defaults to 1 but if num is larger than
the number of concatenated data sets, the last data set in the
sequence is used.
REPLACE Replaces a session (this is when a session number and a data
set name are both specified).

Remarks
The initial session invoked by StarTool FDM is called GO session 1. To establish an
alternate parallel session, enter GO and a session number or a data set name. StarTool
FDM prompts for the data set name, if necessary. A parallel session is initiated. To transfer
to an established parallel session, enter GO and the session number or data set name.

When you are in an alternate session, the log is shared between sessions. MEMLIST,
CSECTS, and ZAP processing is maintained uniquely between the different sessions. The
other functions are shared between sessions.

Delete a GO session with the DROP command. The syntax is:

Command Reference 193

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

DROP [*/num] [PROMPT]

HELP Subcommand
The HELP subcommand provides information for using StarTool FDM. HELP operates
differently depending on your operating mode. For example, if you are in ISPMODE or
MEMLIST, HELP provides standard ISPF tutorial information. In line mode or batch, the
HELP subcommand lists data from the HELP data set.

Example
HELP

Syntax
HELP [subcommand [FUNCTION] [SYNTAX] [OPERAND/OPERAND(k)]]

Note: the above operands are only defined in line mode or batch.

Aliases
H, HE, HEL, HELP

Defaults
none

Required
none

Operands
subcommand The name of a subcommand (or the alias name of a subcommand)
for which HELP is to be displayed. If this operand is omitted, a list
of valid subcommands displays.
FUNCTION Display function information for the subcommand.
SYNTAX Display syntax information for the subcommand.
OPERAND(k) Display information for the keyword identified in the (k) operand. If
the (k) operand is omitted, information on all operands of the
subcommand displays.

Remarks
The HELP subcommand provides information on using StarTool FDM.

194 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Use either the TSO HELP or HEL command. This choice is made during StarTool FDM
installation. To determine which program is used, enter a CONTROL DEFAULT
subcommand and look for an output line beginning “HELP calls”.

This interface is optional. Use it only with the HELP command processor or the public
domain HEL command.

HEX Function
The HEX command performs hexadecimal calculations.

Example
HEX

Syntax
HEX

Aliases
HEX

Operands
No operands are supported for the HEX subcommand.

Remarks
The HEX ISPF table displays in response to a HEX command. When you are in a HEX
display, you can delete a part of the table, find data in the table, print a part of the table,
store a part of the table in a data set, etc. For assistance with the different options
available, use the HELP command, CUA functions, or enter an O command as a primary
command.

The HEX table displays the calculator tape for your calculator. Enter new calculations from
the HEX display.

The following primary commands are supported directly for the HEX function. For
information on ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see <Xref>“Common
Commands” in Chapter 2, "ISPF Interface Commands".

EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on HEX table data.

(or ET[BL])
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV][PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]

OUT[PUT] Outputs the HEX table to print or a data set.

Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

Command Reference 195

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

REM[OVE] Trims the HEX table based on a string match.

Syntax
REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]

RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location.
PF keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
X Clears the HEX table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the HEX table; this is equivalent to X ALL

HISTORY Subcommand
The HISTORY subcommand displays the last linkage edit date for a module and lists any
CSECT IDR data assigned to that load module.

196 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Example
HISTORY mema:memb

Syntax
HISTORY memgroup
[ML|MEMLIST|NEWML|SUBLIST]
[MODULE({*|Fullname|Part*}) {ASIS|UPPERCASE|UC}]
[COBOL(ADV|NOADV, APOST|NOAPOST,
AWO|NOAWO, CMPR2|NOCMPR2,
COUNT|NOCOUNT, COMPCLASS|COMPPROGRAM,
CURRENCY|NOCURRENCY, DATA24|NODATA24,
DATA31|NODATA31, DATEPROC|NODATEPROC,
DBCS|NODBCS, DECK|NODECK,
DUMP|NODUMP, DYNAM|NODYNAM,
ENDJOB|NOENDJOB, EVENTS|NOEVENTS,
FASTSRT|NOFASTSRT, FDUMP|NOFDUMP,
INTDATELIL|INTDATEANSI, FLOW|NOFLOW,
LIB|NOLIB, LIST|NOLIST,
MAP|NOMAP, NAME|NONAME,
NUMBER|NONUMBER, NUMCLSALT|NUMCLSPRIM,
NUMPROCMIG|NONUMPROCMIG, NUMPROCPFD|NONUMPROCPFD,
OBJECT|NOOBJECT, OBJ370|NOOBJ370,
OFFSET|NOOFFSET, OPTFULL|NOOPT,
OPTIMIZE|NOOPTIMIZE, OUTDD|NOOUTDD,
PGMLONGMIX|NOPGMLONGMIX, PGMLONGUPP|NOPGMLONGUPP,
QUOTE|NOQUOTE, READYTRACE|NOREADYTRACE,
RENT|NORENT, RESIDENT|NORESIDENT,
RMODEANY|RMODE24, SEQUENCE|NOSEQUENCE,
SIZEMAX|NOSIZEMAX, SOURCE|NOSOURCE,
SSRANGE|NOSSRANGE, STATE|NOSTATE,
SYMDMP|NOSYMDMP, TERMINAL|NOTERMINAL,
TEST|NOTEST, TESTBLOCK|NOTESTBLOCK,
TESTPATH|NOTESTPATH, TESTSTMT|NOTESTSTMT,
TRUNCBIN|TRUNCBIN, TRUNCSTD|NOTRUNCSTD,
VBREF|NOVBREF, WORD|NOWORD,
XREF|NOXREF, ZWB|NOZWB)]
[EXTERN|WKEXTERN|PSEUDOREG|LABELREF|COMMON|PRIVATE|CSECT]
[GENERATE|CMNLOAD]
[ALL|
{LKED(Lpartname)|NOLKED}
{TRANS(Tpartname|ASM|ASMA90|ASMH|C|C++ZOS|C370|COBOL|
COBOLII|COBOLMVS|COBOLOS|COBOLVS|COBOLV4|COBOLZOS|
FORTRAN|FORTRANG|FORTRANH|FORTRANV|IFOX|PASCAL|
PLS|PL/X-390|PL1|PLX370|REXX370|RPG|SASC)|NOTRANS}
{ZAP(Zpartname)|NOZAP}]
[USERDATA(Upartname)|SYSMOD(Upartname)|NOUSERDATA|NOSYSMOD]
[NOSYSTEM]

Aliases
HI, HIS, HIST, HISTO, HISTOR, HISTORY

Defaults

Command Reference 197

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

memgroup, UPPERCASE, ALL, TRANS (from CONTROL), LKED, ZAP, and USERDATA. If LKED,
TRANS, ZAP, or USERDATA are specified, only the corresponding types of data are
provided.

Required
none

198 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Operands
memgroup Identifies the load members for which you want history data,
using standard MEMGROUP syntax.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed; for more information,
see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
MODULE(name) Specifies a 1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits CSECT
names for history reporting. If you enter this parameter with any
TRANS SYSMOD/USERDATA or ZAP keywords, only those CSECTs
that satisfy the MODULE keyword are checked for the other
keyword conditions.
The MODULE operand takes the following forms:
 MODULE(*) – uses name entered in the previous MODULE option
 MODULE(Fullname) – reports on CSECTs with this name only
 MODULE(Part*) – reports on CSECTs with names conforming to
this wildcard pattern
ASIS|UPPERCASE Lets the user specify how the MODULE(name) parameter is
processed. This parameter must immediately follow the MODULE
parameter in the parameter list. It takes one of the following
values:
ASIS Case is respected as typed for the CSECT name in
the MODULE(name) parameter.
UPPERCASE The CSECT name in the MODULE(name) parameter is
converted to uppercase characters before executing
the HISTORY command. This is the default value.
The alias UC is accepted for this value.
Customers using C++ translators and customers with lower-case
CSECT names in their code should use the ASIS parameter with
the HISTORY command.

Command Reference 199

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

COBOL(opt1, Specifies one or more COBOL compiler options that are to be

opt2, opt3, ...) matched for a COBOL CSECT. If all options entered for the given
compiler type match for a CSECT, the CSECT is listed.
If you also enter MODULE or TRANS parameters, the COBOL
keyword applies only to those CSECTs that pass the filtering.
Options for the COBOL parameter vary by translater used.
Supported options are listed by translater below.
All COBOL Compilers:
 OPTIMIZE|NOOPTIMIZE – optimize object code
 TEST|NOTEST – object code for debug
COBOL II, COBOL for MVS and VM, COBOL for OS/390 and
VM, and COBOL for z/OS:
 ADV|NOADV – byte for printer control character
 APOST|NOAPOST – apostrophe (‘) is non-numeric delimiter
 AWO|NOAWO – APPLY WRITE-ONLY clause
 CMPR2|NOCMPR2 – COBOL II release 2 compatible code
 COMPCLASS|COMPPROGRAM – (not COBOL II) compile unit is class
 CURRENCY|NOCURRENCY – (not COBOL II) alternate symbol for $
 DATA24|NODATA24 – dynamic storage is below 16 Megabytes
 DATA31|NODATA31 – dynamic storage is unrestricted
 DATEPROC|NODATEPROC – (not COBOL II) unknown at present
 DBCS|NODBCS – Double Byte Character Set shift codes
 DECK|NODECK – object code output to //SYSPUNCH
 DUMP|NODUMP – system dump if the compiler ABENDs
 DYNAM|NODYNAM – CALLed programs invoked dynamically
 EVENTS|NOEVENTS – (not COBOL II) messages to SYSEVENT
 FASTSRT|NOFASTSRT – invoke external product to perform sort
 FDUMP|NOFDUMP – (COBOL II) formatted dump for ABEND
 INTDATELIL|INTDATEANSI – (not COBOL II) Lilian for date basis
 LIB|NOLIB – process COPY, BASIS & REPLACE

200 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

COBOL (cont.)  LIST|NOLIST – compiler listing of generated code

 MAP|NOMAP – DATA DIVISION map
 NAME|NONAME – link-edit NAME for each object module
 NUMBER|NONUMBER – line numbers processed in columns 1 to 6
 NUMCLSALT|NONUMCLSPRIM – (not COBOL II) numeric class test
 NUMPROCMIG|NONUMPROCMI – invalid sign processing for migrate
 NUMPROCPFD|NONUMPROCPFD – invalid sign processing for speed
 OBJECT|NOOBJECT – object code output to //SYSLIN
 OFFSET|NOOFFSET – condensed PROCEDURE DIVISION list
 OPTFULL|NOOPT – (not COBOL II) OPTIMIZE(FULL)
 OUTDD|NOOUTDD – DISPLAY ddname instead of //SYSOUT
 PGMLONGMIX|NOPGMLONGMIX – (not COBOL II) names are ASIS
 PGMLONGUPP|NOPGMLONGUPP – (not COBOL II) not truncated
 QUOTE|NOQUOTE – quote mark (“) is non-numeric delimiter
 RENT|NORENT – reentrant object code
 RESIDENT|NORESIDENT – (COBOL II) Library Management to load
 RMODEANY|RMODE24 – (not COBOL II) RMODE(ANY)
 SEQUENCE|NOSEQUENCE – sequence numbers processed
 SIZEMAX|NOSIZEMAX – SIZE(MAX) used in compilation
 SOURCE|NOSOURCE – source listing
 SSRANGE|NOSSRANGE – check subscripts, indexes, and references
 TERMINAL|NOTERMINAL – diagnostic messages to //SYSTERM
 TESTBLOCK|NOTESTBLOCK – (not COBOL II) TEST(BLOCK)
 TESTPATH|NOTESTPATH – (not COBOL II) TEST(PATH)
 TESTSTMT|NOTESTSTMT – (not COBOL II) TEST(STMT)
 TRUNCBIN|NOTRUNCBIN – binary field truncation protection
 TRUNCOPT|NOTRUNCOPT – binary field truncation for performance
 VBREF|NOVBREF – verb cross reference
 WORD|NOWORD – alternate reserved word list
 XREF|NOXREF – symbol cross reference for names
 ZWB|NOZWB – remove sign in compare DISPLAY fields
NOTE: The following options can affect program execution for these
compilers: ADV, AWO, CMPR2, DATA, DYNAM, FASTSRT, FDUMP (COBOL
II only), OPTIMIZE, OUTDD, NUMPROC, RENT, RESIDENT (COBOL II
only), SSRANGE, TEST, TRUNC, and ZWB.

Command Reference 201

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

COBOL (cont.) COBOL VS and COBOL V4:

 COUNT|NOCOUNT – (COBOL VS) verb count summary
 ENDJOB|NOENDJOB – free main storage at ENDJOB
 FLOW|NOFLOW – flow trace output for ABEND
 OBJ370|NOOBJ370 – OBJECT COMPUTER is OBJ370
 OPTIMIZE|NOOPTIMIZE – optimize object code
 READYTRACE|NOREADYTRACE – (COBOL VS) READY TRACE
 RESIDENT|NORESIDENT – Library Management to load
 STATE|NOSTATE – statement number for ABEND
 SYMDMP|NOSYMDMP – formatted dump for an ABEND
 TEST|NOTEST – object code for debug
NOTE: The following options can affect program execution for these
compilers: COUNT (COBOL VS only) FLOW, OBJ370 OPTIMIZE,
RESIDENT, STATE, and TEST.

GENERATE Filter and reformat output from the HISTORY subcommand into a
form that can be processed by a program or a REXX exec as
described briefly below:
 The ** HIST message contains linkage edit attributes for the
module
 The PDS250I message shows all bit settings for COBOL VS and V4
 The PDS251I message TYP field contains ASM, PL1, FOR, RPG, REX,
C37, MAP, or ??? with the third character overlaid with D (for DB2),
I (for IMS), O (for ONLINE), B (for DB2 and ONLINE), or S (for
Secondary if the CSECT name is not the same as the module name)
 The PDS255I message contains all run time option bit settings for
COBOL II, COBOL for MVS & VM, or COBOL for OS/390 & VM
 The PDS260I message contains all bit settings for COBOL II,
COBOL for MVS & VM or COBOL for OS/390 & VM and the TYP field
will be II, MVS or OS with the third character overlaid with D (for
DB2), I (for IMS), O (for ONLINE), B (for DB2 and ONLINE), or S
(for Secondary if the CSECT name is not the same as the module
name)
 Most other HISTORY messages are suppressed
The format of each message with GENERATE is defined in the
PDS250I, PDS251I, PDS255I, and PDS260I message section. The
**HIST message separator line is changed as shown below:
 ** HIST COBOLTST Linkage attributes
 Col 9: CSECT name
 Col 23: RENT or blank
 Col 28: REUS or blank
 Col 33: REFR or blank
 Col 38: OVLY or blank
 Col 43: TEST or blank
 Col 48: SCTR (scatter loaded) or blank

202 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

 Col 53: OL (only loadable) or blank

 Col 56: NE (not editable) or blank
 Col 59: RANY or R24
 Col 64: AANY, A31, A24 or A64
 Col 69: RL= followed by the real member name for an alias
EXTERN Load modules with missing external symbols are desired. The
MODULE keyword may also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
WKEXTERN Load modules with missing weak symbols are desired. The
MODULE keyword may also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
PSEUDOREG Load modules with PSEUDO register symbols are desired. The
MODULE keyword may also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
LABELREF Load modules with ENTRY symbols are desired. The MODULE
keyword may also be specified to search for specific symbols.
COMMON Load modules with COMMON area symbols are desired. The
MODULE keyword may also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
PRIVATE Load modules with PRIVATE area symbols are desired. The
MODULE keyword may also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
CSECT Load modules with CSECT symbols are desired. The MODULE
keyword may also be specified to search for specific symbols.
LKED(partl) Specifies that if the linkage editor name matches the partial
name, Partl, a line identifying the editor is to be listed. Partl may
be entered as a partial linkage editor name with 1 to 10
characters.
NOLKED The HISTORY information listed should not include linkage editor
information. Other types of HISTORY output are not affected.
SYSMOD(Partu) Specifies that user IDR data which matches the partial name,
Partu, is to be listed. Partu may be entered as partial IDR data
with 1 to 8 characters. If you also enter MODULE(...), the
SYSMOD operand applies only to CSECTs that satisfy the MODULE
operand.
NOSYSMOD Specifies that the HISTORY information listed should not include
SYSMOD information. Other types of HISTORY output are not
affected.

Command Reference 203

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

TRANS(Partt) Specifies that CSECTS identified as having been assembled or

compiled by the translator defined by the partial name, Partt, are
to be listed. Partt may be entered as a partial translator name
with 1 to 10 characters. If you also enter MODULE(...), the TRANS
operand applies only to CSECTs that satisfy the MODULE operand.
If a generic translator name from below is entered instead of
Partt, the translator types shown below is used instead.
 ASM – IFOX, IEV90, or ASMA90 assembler (Translators
52ASM32B88, 52ASM31686, 566896201, 5734AS1, 569623400,
5741SC103, 360SAS037, 360SAS038, or 5734AS100)
 ASMA90 – High-level assembler (Translator 569623400)
 ASMH – Assembler H (Translators 566896201 and 5734AS1)
 COBOL – COBOL V4, COBOL VS, COBOL II or COBOL 370
(Translators 566895801, 566895807, 566895901, 40CB1,
5740CB103, 5752SC104, 40CB-1, 12345, or 12345-1).
 COBOLII – COBOL II (Translators 566895801 or 566895901)
 COBOLMVS – COBOL for MVS & VM (Translator 566895807)
 COBOLOS – COBOL for OS/390 & VM (Translator 5648A2500)
 COBOLVS – COBOL VS (Translators 5740CB103, 40CB1, 40CB-1,
12345, or 12345-1).
 COBOLV4 – COBOL V4 (Translators 5752SC104, 12345, or 12345-
1).
 C370 – C/370 (Translators 5688187, 5688216, or 5688040)
 FORTRAN – VS FORTRAN or FORTRAN G or H (Translators 5668-
806, 5734-FO2, 5734-FO3, 5734-F02, 5748-FO3, or 5796-PKR)
 FORTRANG – FORTRAN G (Translators 5734-FO2 or 5734-F02)
 FORTRANH – FORTRAN H (Translator 5734-FO3)
 FORTRANV – VS FORTRAN (Translators 5668-806, 5748-FO3, or
5796-PKR)
 IFOX – VS assembler (Translators 52ASM32B88, 52ASM31686,
15741SC103, 360SAS037, 360SAS038, or 5734AS100)
 PASCAL – VS PASCAL (Translator 566876701)
 PLS – PLS-III (Translator C’PLS-III’ or CA-PLNK 0)
 PLX370 – PL/X 370 (Translator PL/X-370)
 PL1 – PL/I (Translators 5734-PL1, 5668-910, or 5688-235)
 REXX370 – compiled rexx (Translator 569501301)
 RPG – RPG (Translator 5740RG1)
 SASC – SAS/C (Translators BLD121988, LC370B, SAS/C, SAS/C/,
or SDS080888)
NOTRANS HISTORY information listed should not include TRANSLATOR
information. Other types of HISTORY output are not affected.
USERDATA(Partu) User IDR data, which matches the partial name Partu, is to be
listed. Partu may be entered as partial IDR data with 1 to 8
characters. If you also enter MODULE(...), the USERDATA operand
applies only to CSECTs that satisfy the MODULE operand.

204 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

NOUSERDATA HISTORY information listed should not include USERDATA

information. Other types of HISTORY output are not affected.
ZAP(Partz) Zap IDR data, which matches the partial name Partz, is to be
listed. Partz may be entered as partial zap IDR data with 1 to 8
characters. If you also enter MODULE(...), the ZAP operand
applies only to CSECTs that satisfy the MODULE operand.
NOZAP HISTORY information listed should not include ZAP information.
Other types of HISTORY output are not affected.
ALL LKED, TRANS, USERDATA, ZAP is the reporting default. It is often
used with one of the negative options as in the following
example:
HISTORY name NOTRANS ALL

NOSYSTEM System modules are to be filtered out before reporting MAP

information as is done for HISTORY GENERATE. System or
compiler routines begin with DFH, DFS, DSN, IBM, IEY, IGY, ILB,
ISP, or PLI.
MEMBERS Displays the names of members that satisfy the HISTORY
subcommand without changing the current member group.
MEMLIST Same as ML. Specifies that any member displayed by the
HISTORY subcommand is selected for MEMLIST display. The
MODULE(name), LKED(Partl), TRANS(Partt), USERDATA(Partu) or
SYSMOD(Partu) and ZAP(Partz) keywords are used to search for
members to display. If no members are selected, a null sublist is
the result.
ML Same as MEMLIST. Specifies that any member displayed by the
HISTORY subcommand is selected for MEMLIST display. The
MODULE(name), LKED(Partl), TRANS(Partt), USERDATA(Partu) or
SYSMD(Partu) and ZAP(Partz) keywords are used to search for
members to display. If no members are selected, a null sublist is
the result.
NEWML Same as MEMLIST and ML except that the current MEMLIST is
reset.
SUBLIST Any member displayed by the HISTORY subcommand is selected
for inclusion in a new sublist. The MODULE(name), LKED(Partl),
TRANS(Partt), USERDATA(Partu) or SYSMOD(Partu) and
ZAP(Partz) keywords are used to search for members to display.
If no members are selected, a null sublist is the result.

Remarks
If any CSECTS in a load member were compiled by a COBOL compiler, several compile-
time options are listed for each COBOL CSECT (see messages PDS250I and PDS260I for
more information).

If a member is not a load module, any ISPF statistics or any SSI information are displayed
for the member and any HISTORY keyword information is ignored.

If DFSMS APAR OW29593 is applied on your system, the binder records hours, minutes
and seconds as well as the date in the history IDR record. The StarTool FDM PDS064I
message reports this information in HH:MM format if it is present:

Command Reference 205

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

PDS064I Last link-edited on 1999/06/18 by 5695DF108-BINDER ...

PDS064I Last link-edited on 1999/06/23 14:04 by 5695DF108-BINDER ...

------------------------ ISPMODE Session Display ------------- ROW 3000 OF 3010

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=ADC2SUB -------------------------
>----->hi adc2sub

** HISTORY ADC2SUB
PDS061I AMASPZAP update history by CSECT -
ADC2SUB 88/01/29 E230300
ADC2SUB 87/12/01 E230232
PDS062I User-supplied update history by CSECT -
ADC2LSV5 87/01/28 E230128 -- LOG RETRIEVAL 87/01/27 LEL
ADC2LSV1 86/02/26 ADD PATCH AND COPYRITE 86/02/26 MON
PDS063I ChangeMan module ADC2SUB package CO10000007 date 1987/03/23 time 10:33
PDS064I Last link-edited on 87/03/23 by LKED 566529508 V01 M00

----------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ------------Row 772 to 791 of 891

COMMAND ===> CROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand or a special control code:
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=COB* -----------------------------
>------>hist cob* cobol(rent) trans(cobolii)

** HISTORY COBOLCAP
PDS060I Translator history by CSECT -
DSN0MGF 85/08/09 566895801-COBOLII V11 M00
PDS260I CSECT____VER_TEST_SSRANG_OPT_CMPR2_ZWB_NUMPR_TRUNC_RES_RENT_DYNAM_DATA
PDS260I DSN0MGF IIS SSRANG OPT ZWB (PFD) (OPT) RES RENT 31/C

** HISTORY COBOLCA2
PDS060I Translator history by CSECT -
DSN0MGF 85/08/09 566895801-COBOLII V11 M00
PDS260I CSECT____VER_TEST_SSRANG_OPT_CMPR2_ZWB_NUMPR_TRUNC_RES_RENT_DYNAM_DATA
PDS260I DSN0MGF IIS SSRANG OPT ZWB (PFD) (OPT) RES RENT 31/C

------------------------ISPMODE Session# 2 Log -------- ROW 1,000 TO 1,020 OF 1,020

COMMAND ===> L ===> CSR
- DSN=SYS1.LINKLIB,VOL=SER=SP422P MEM=IDCAMS -------------------------------
>----->hi idcams

** HISTORY IDCAMS
PDS062I User-supplied update history by CSECT -
IDCSA03 92/10/15 UY73238
IDCTP06 91/10/01 UY59099
IDCEX02 90/12/19 RSI03481661
PDS063I ChangeMan module IDCAMS package CO10000017 date 1992/10/15 time 10:33
PDS064I Last link-edited on 92/10/15 by LKED 566528408 V03 M03

206 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

>------>hi : cobol(ssrange,test) ml

** HISTORY COBMVS
PDS260I CSECT____VER_TEST_SSRANG_OPT_CMPR2_ZWB_NUMPR_TRUNC_RES_RENT_DYNAM_DATA
PDS260I COBTEST MVS TEST SSRANG OPT ZWB (MIG) (STD) RES RENT 31

** HISTORY COBOLFFF
PDS260I CSECT____VER_TEST_SSRANG_OPT_CMPR2_ZWB_NUMPR_TRUNC_RES_RENT_DYNAM_DATA
PDS260I DSN0MGF MVS TEST SSRANG OPT CMPR2 ZWB (MIG) (BIN) RES RENT DYNAM 31
PDS255I Run-time options:
DEBUG, SSRANGE, STAE, NOAIXBLD, NOSPOUT, NORTEREUS, NOLIBKEEP, NOWSCLEAR, NOMI

** HISTORY COBOL45
PDS250I CSECT____VER_COUNT_FLOW_STATE_TEST_TRACE_RES_ENDJOB_SYMD_OBJ_OPTIMIZE_
PDS250I H4810001 VSS TEST RES ENDJOB COBOL

PDS165I Members are: COBMVS, COBOLFFF, COBOL45

PDS193I This group contains 3 members

-------------------- Load MEMLIST (Attributes), Session# 1 --- Row 1 to 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ==> CSR
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand or a special control code:
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=(COBMVS -------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG ALIASOF LEN/LKED -- ATTRIBUTES - APF MODE MAIN
COBMVS 1998/04/23 AANY
COBOLFFF 1991/06/25 RENT REUS
COBOL45 1998/05/05
TESTAM64 2003/01/24 A64

---------------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log ----------ROW 1,000 TO 1,023 OF 1,023

COMMAND ===> ROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER007 MEM=(COBOL6 ----------------------------
>----->hi (cobola,cobolran)

** HISTORY COBOLA
PDS250I CSECT____VER_COUNT_FLOW_STATE_TEST_TRACE_RES_ENDJOB_SYMD_OBJ_OPTIMIZE
PDS250I CZARVSY VS2 FLOW TEST RES ENDJOB SYMD 370 OPTIMIZE
PDS062I User-supplied update history by CSECT -
DFSLI000 83/06/16 RSI31640356
PDS063I ChangeMan module COBOLA package CO10000027 date 1989/12/01 time 10:33
PDS064I Last link-edited on 89/12/01 by LKED 566528408 V02 M03

** HISTORY COBOLRAN
PDS260I CSECT___VER_TEST_SSRANG_OPT_CMPR2_ZWB_NUMPR_TRUNC_RES_RENT_DYNAM_DATA
PDS260I DSN0MGF IID SSRANG OPT ZWB NOPFD (STD) RES RENT 31/CA
PDS260I DSN0MGZ IID SSRANG OPT ZWB (PFD) (BIN) RES RENT 31/CA
PDS255I Run-time options:
DEBUG, SSRANGE, STAE, NOAIXBLD, NOSPOUT, NORTEREUS, NOLIBKEEP, NOWSCLEAR, NMIX
PDS062I User-supplied update history by CSECT -
IGZEBST 85/05/06 UP52062
ISPLINK 84/11/26 RSI43240150

Command Reference 207

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

>------>hi (cobol6,dsx0mgf,cobos390) nosyst

** HISTORY COBOL6
PDS060I Translator history by CSECT -
HM01A 1985/01/29 40CB1-COBOLVS V20 M00
DATECALC 1983/06/20 5734AS100-IFOX00 V05 M01
UABEND 1983/06/20 5734AS100-IFOX00 V05 M01
PDS250I CSECT____VER_COUNT_FLOW_STATE_TEST_TRACE_RES_ENDJOB_SYMD_OBJ_OPTIMIZE_
PDS250I HM01A VSS ENDJOB 370 CAPEX
PDS061I AMASPZAP update history by CSECT -
PDS067I Member has 1 IDR blocks with space for 19 IDR entries
PDS068I 1 IDR entries are in use; 18 are available for use
PDS063I ChangeMan module COBOL6 package CO10000027 date 1989/12/01 time 10:33
PDS064I Last link-edited on 1989/12/01 by 566528408-DFPLKED V02 M03

** HISTORY DSX0MGF
PDS060I Translator history by CSECT -
DSX0MGF 1985/08/09 566895801-COBOLMVS V11 M00
PDS260I CSECT____VER_TEST_SSRANG_OPT_CMPR2_ZWB_NUMPR_TRUNC_RES_RENT_DYNAM_DATA
PDS260I DSX0MGF IID SSRANG OPT ZWB (PFD) (OPT) RES RENT 31
PDS061I AMASPZAP update history by CSECT -
PDS067I Member has 1 IDR blocks with space for 19 IDR entries
PDS068I 1 IDR entries are in use; 18 are available for use
PDS063I ChangeMan module DSXOMGF package CO10000127 date 1991/06/25 time 10:33
PDS064I Last link-edited on 1991/06/25 by 566528408-DFPLKED V03 M01

** HISTORY COBOS390
PDS060I Translator history by CSECT -
COBTEST 1998/04/23 5648A2500-COBOLOS V12 M00
PDS260I CSECT____VER_TEST_SSRANG_OPT_CMPR2_ZWB_NUMPR_TRUNC_RES_RENT_DYNAM_DATA
PDS260I COBTEST OSS ZWB NOPFD (STD) RES 31
PDS067I Member has 1 IDR blocks with space for 19 IDR entries
PDS068I 1 IDR entries are in use; 18 are available for use
PDS063I ChangeMan module COBOS390 package CO10000327 date 1998/04/23 time 10:33
PDS064I Last link-edited on 1998/04/23 by 5695DF108-BINDER V01 M01

>------>hi (cobol6,dsx0mgf,cobos390) gen

** HIST COBOL6 R24 A64

PDS250I HM01A VSS NNNNNNNNNNNNNNYNYYYNNNNN
PDS251I DATECALC ASS
PDS251I UABEND ASS

** HIST DSX0MGF RENT REUS RANY A31 RL=BOBZIM

PDS260I DSX0MGF IID NYYNYNNNNNYNYYYNYYYNYYYYNNNNYYNNNNNNNNNN
PDS255I Run-time options: NNNNNNNNNNNYYYNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

** HIST COBOS390 R24 AANY

PDS260I COBTEST OSS YNYNNNNNNNNNYNNNNNYYYYNNNYNNNYNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

IDCAMS Subcommand
The IDCAMS subcommand invokes IDCAMS passing it a command and operands and
displays the output from the command.

208 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Example
IDCAMS listcat entry(userid.vsam.ix.cluster) all

Syntax
IDCAMS command operands

Aliases
ID, IDC, IDCA, IDCAM, IDCAMS

Defaults
none

Required
IDCAMS command and operands; if no IDCAMS command is entered in ISPF mode, an
IDCAMS prompting sequence is initiated.

Operands
command Specifies the IDCAMS command: ALLOCATE, ALTER, BLDINDEX,
CNVTCAT, DEFINE, DELETE, EXAMINE, EXPORT, IMPORT, LISTCAT,
PRINT, REPRO, or VERIFY. IDCAMS is invoked as an APF-authorized
processor through the TSO/E IKJEFTSR interface. Operations on a
catalog that require authorization (DEFINE with RECATALOG, DEFINE
with RECOVERY, EXPORT, IMPORT, PRINT, REPRO, or VERIFY) can be
performed.
operands Any additional operands for the command. For example, DEFINE needs
an initial operand of ALIAS, AIX, CLUSTER, GDG, NONVSAM,
PAGESPACE, PATH, or USERCATALOG followed by additional operands to
complete the DEFINE command.

Remarks
If you invoke the IDCAMS subcommand with no operands in an ISPF environment, you
are prompted for which of several IDCAMS commands you want to perform. Previous
operands entered for each command are remembered across ISPF sessions.

An IDCAMS subcommand issued from StarTool FDM is limited to a maximum of 245

characters of data. This restriction may be a problem if you are entering IDCAMS DEFINE
commands directly. The IDCAMS DEFINE prompts use an alternative interface that allows
up to 800 characters.

If you use the IDCAMS prompting interface, normal TSO conventions are used for data
set names but catalog names must be fully qualified. When IDCAMS is invoked with a
command and operands, all data set and catalog names must be fully qualified but you
can optionally use quotation marks around data set names.

Command Reference 209

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

DEFINE is a short-hand command for entering IDCAMS with no operands and selecting
the DEFINE option.

The following DEFINE KSDS panel can be reached by:

IDCAMS;DEFINE;KSDS

or

DEFINE;KSDS

-------------------------- IDCAMS DEFINE for a KSDS ------------------------------

OPTION ===>

KSDS cluster name ==> VSAM.KSDS

Volume name ==> SER006 (optional if SMS managed or modelled)
Model data set ==>
Average record ==> 50
Maximum record ==> 500
Span records ==> NO (YES or NO)
Expiration date ==> (Julian -- yyyyddd)
Retention time ==> (number of days, this overrides expiration)
DATA space type ==> CYLINDERS (CYLINDERS/KILOBYTES/MEGABYTES/RECORDS/TRKS)
primary ==> 1 (in above units)
secondary ==> 1 (in above units)
INDEX space type ==> TRACKS (CYLINDERS/KILOBYTES/MEGABYTES/RECORDS/TRKS)
primary ==> 1 (in above units)
secondary ==> 1 (in above units)
Key length ==> 26 (1 to 255)
Key offset ==> 0 (0 to end of record)
SMS Data class ==>
SMS MGMT class ==>
SMS Storage class ==>
More parameters? ==> YES (YES or NO)

----------------------- IDCAMS DEFINE for a KSDS (part 2) --------------------

OPTION ===>

DATA component ==> 'SER07.VSAM.KSDS.DATA'

INDEX component ==> 'SER07.VSAM.KSDS.INDEX'
Erase on delete ==> NO (YES or NO)
Recatalog data set==> NO (YES or NO)
Replicate index ==> NO (YES or NO)
Reusable cluster ==> NO (YES or NO)
Imbed index ==> NO (YES or NO)
Speed load ==> YES (YES or NO)
Write check ==> NO (YES or NO)
Owner ==> SER07 (owner-id of cluster)
DATA CI size ==> 4096 (multiple of 512 to 8K; multiple of 2K to 32K)
INDEX CI size ==> 4096 (multiple of 512 to 8K; multiple of 2K to 32K)
Buffer space ==> (minimum: two DATA CI's plus one INDEX CI)
CI percent free ==> 10 (0 to 100)
CA percent free ==> 15 (0 to 100)
Crossregion share ==> 1 (1, 2, 3 or 4)
Crosssystem share ==> 3 (3 or 4)
Catalog name ==>

210 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

IF Subcommand
The IF subcommand searches for members that meet defined conditions. The action to be
taken is specified by the THEN and ELSE keywords. You can omit the THEN or ELSE
keyword. If you omit both THEN and ELSE, a default of THEN(ATTRIB) is assumed.

If all conditions are met for a given member, any THEN action is taken for that member;
otherwise, any ELSE action is taken.

Command Reference 211

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Example
IF mema:memb changed(93/11/24:93/11/30) then(edit)

Syntax
IF memgroup
[SINCE/BEFORE ]
[TODAY/YESTERDAY/WEEK/CURRENT/BIWEEK/
MONTH/QUARTER/HALFYEAR/YEAR/BIYEAR/
LAST(numdays)/DATE(yyyy/mm/dd) ]
[CHANGED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd) ]
[CREATED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd) ]
[ABOVE(Count1) ]
[ALIAS/NOALIAS ]
[AMODE24/AMODE31/AMODE64/AMODEANY/NOAMODE24/NOMODE31
NOAMODE64/NOAMODEANY ] (load only)
* [APFERR/NOAPFERR ] (load only)
* [APPARENTALIAS/NOAPPARENTALIAS ]
[AUTH/NOAUTH ] (load only)
[BELOW(Count2) ]
* [BLOCKERR/MAXBLK(size)/NOBLOCKERR ]
[DC/NODC ] (load only)
[EDIT/NOEDIT ] (load only)
[EXEC/NOEXEC ] (load only)
* [EXTERN/WKEXTERN/PSEUDOREG/LABELREF/COMMON/PRIVATE/CSECT] (load)
[FLEVEL/NOFLEVEL ] (load only)
[HASALIAS/NOHASALIAS ]
[ID(Puid)/NOID/NOTID(Puid) ]
* [IDRFULL/NOIDRFULL ] (load only)
* [IOERR/NOIOERR ]
[LKED(Partl) ] (load only)
* [LKEDERR/NOLKEDERR ] (load only)
* [LOADERR/NOLOADERR ] (load only)
[LOADONLY/NOLOADONLY ] (load only)
* [LRECLERR/NOLRECLERR ]
[MODULE({* / Fullm / Partm*)} ] (load only)
* [NAMEERR/NONAMEERR ]
[NULL/NONULL ]
[ORPHAN/NOORPHAN ]
[OVERLAY/NOOVERLAY ] (load only)
*[PACKED/NOPACKED ]
[PAGE/NOPAGE ] (load only)
[REFR/NOREFR ] (load only)
[RENT/NORENT ] (load only)
[REUS/NOREUS ] (load only)
* [RLDERR/NORLDERR ] (load only)
* [RLDZERO/NORLDZERO ] (load only)
[RMODE24/RMODEANY/NORMODE24/NORMODEANY ] (load only)
[SCTR/NOSCTR ] (load only)
* [SPFEDIT/NOSPFEDIT ]
[SSI(hexdata)/SSI/NOSSI/PARTSSI(hexdata) ]
[SYSMOD(Partu) / USERDATA(Partu) ] (load only)

[TEST/NOTEST ] (load only)

[TRANS(Partt) ] (load only)

212 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

[TTR(Lttr:Httr) ]
[USERDATA(Partu) / SYSMOD(Partu) ] (load only)
[USERID(Puid)/NOUSERID/NOTUSERID(Puid) ]
[VSLKED/NOVSLKED ] (load only)
[ZAP(Partz) ] (load only)
[THEN(ATTRIB / BROWSE / DIRENTRY / DELETE / EDIT /
EXCLUDE / FIND / FSE / HISTORY / LIST /
MAP / MEMBERS / MEMLIST / NEWML / PRINT /
REVIEW / SUBMIT / SUBLIST / TSOEDIT / VERIFY /
VIEW ]
[ELSE(ATTRIB / BROWSE / DIRENTRY / DELETE / EDIT /
EXCLUDE / FIND / FSE / HISTORY / LIST /
MAP / MEMBERS / MEMLIST / NEWML / PRINT /
REVIEW / SUBMIT / SUBLIST / TSOEDIT / VERIFY /
VIEW ]

* Note: the * marked tests are unique to IF as compared to ML or EXCLUDE

Aliases
I, IF

Defaults
memgroup, SINCE, THEN(ATTRIB) if neither THEN nor ELSE is entered

Required
none

Command Reference 213

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members whose attributes are to be examined.
Default member names, member lists, member name
ranges, and member name patterns are allowed; see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
SINCE Uses dates from the specified date to the current date.
SINCE indicates that the implied date range (TODAY,
YESTERDAY, ... LAST, DATE) follows the date given. For
source modules, the date referenced is the ISPF modification
date; for load modules, it is the linkage edit date.
FROM Uses dates from the specified date to the current date. FROM
indicates that the implied date range (TODAY, YESTERDAY, ...
LAST, DATE) follows the date given. For source modules, the
date referenced is the ISPF modification date; for load
modules, it is the linkage edit date.
BEFORE Uses dates before (and including) the specified date. BEFORE
indicates that the implied date range (TODAY, YESTERDAY, ...
LAST, DATE) is before the given date. For source modules,
the date referenced is the ISPF modification date; for load
modules, it is the linkage edit date.
TO Uses dates before (and including) the specified date. TO
indicates that the implied date range (TODAY, YESTERDAY, ...
LAST, DATE) is before the given date. For source modules,
the date referenced is the ISPF modification date; for load
modules, it is the linkage edit date.
TODAY A date, equivalent to LAST(0).
YESTERDAY A date, equivalent to LAST(1).
WEEK A date, equivalent to LAST(7).
CURRENT A date, equivalent to LAST(10).
BIWEEK A date, equivalent to LAST(14).
MONTH A date, equivalent to LAST(30).
QUARTER A date, equivalent to LAST(120).
HALFYEAR A date, equivalent to LAST(183).
YEAR A date, equivalent to LAST(365).
BIYEAR A date, equivalent to LAST(730).
LAST(numdays) A date indicating the number of days before today.
DATE(cdate) A date indicating the actual date. It can be entered in ISPF
format (yyyy/mm/dd), or Julian format (yyyy.ddd).
CHANGED(date: Searches for members modified by an ISPF editor or a ZAP
program between the dates specified. If only a single date is
entered, only that date is checked but normally a date range
is entered like:
CHANGED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd)
Only members with ISPF statistics or members created by a
linkage editor are supported.

214 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

CREATED(date: Searches for members created with ISPF statistics or by the

linkage editor between the dates specified. If only a single
date is entered, only that date is checked but normally a
date range is entered like:
CREATED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd)

ABOVE(Count1) Selects members with more than the number of lines

(amount of storage for load modules) defined by the number,
Count1.
ALIAS Selects alias members.
NOALIAS Selects main members.
AMODE24 Selects modules with addressing mode 24.
NOAMODE24 Selects modules with addressing mode 31, 64 or ANY.
AMODE31 Selects modules with addressing mode 31.
NOAMODE31 Selects modules with addressing mode 24, 64 or ANY.
AMODE64 Selects modules with addressing mode 64.
NOAMODE64 Selects modules with addressing mode 24, 31 or ANY.
AMODEANY Selects modules with addressing mode ANY.
NOAMODEANY Selects modules with addressing mode 24, 31, or 64.
APFERR Selects modules linked by the system linkage editor with
invalid APF length indicators.
NOAPFERR Selects modules linked by the system linkage editor with
valid APF length indicators or modules linked with previous
linkage editors.
APPARENTALIAS Selects main members whose start addresses match the
start address of another main member.
NOAPPARENTALIAS Selects alias members or main members whose start
addresses do not match the start address of another main
member.
AUTH Selects APF-authorized modules.
NOAUTH Selects non-authorized modules.
BELOW(Count2) Selects members with less than the number of lines (amount
of storage for load modules) defined by the number, Count2.
BLOCKERR Selects members with block sizes exceeding the DCB
BLKSIZE.
MAXBLK(sizeb) Selects members with block sizes exceeding sizeb.
NOBLOCKERR Selects members without block size errors.
DC Selects downward-compatible modules.
NODC Selects no downward-compatible modules.
EDIT Selects modules that can be reprocessed by the linkage
editor.
NOEDIT Selects modules that cannot be reprocessed by the linkage
editor.
EXEC Selects executable modules.

Command Reference 215

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

NOEXEC Selects non-executable modules.

EXTERN Selects load modules with missing external symbols. The
MODULE keyword may also be specified to search for specific
missing symbols.
WKEXTERN Selects load modules missing weak external symbols. The
MODULE keyword may also be specified to search for specific
missing symbols.
PSEUDOREG Selects load modules with PSEUDO register symbols. The
MODULE keyword may also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
LABELREF Selects load modules with ENTRY symbols. The MODULE
keyword may also be specified to search for specific symbols.
COMMON Selects load modules with COMMON area symbols. The
MODULE keyword may also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
PRIVATE Selects load modules with PRIVATE area symbols. The
MODULE keyword may also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
CSECT Selects load modules with CSECT symbols. The MODULE
keyword may also be specified to search for specific symbols.
FLEVEL Selects modules processed by the F-level linkage editor.
NOFLEVEL Selects modules not processed by the F-level linkage editor.
HASALIAS Selects main members that have one or more aliases.
NOHASALIAS Selects alias members or main members without any aliases.
ID(Puid) Selects members with ISPF statistics and user IDs matching
the partial name Puid. Puid can be entered as a partial TSO
user ID with 1 to 7 characters. ID is an alias of USERID.
NOID Selects members without ISPF statistics. NOID is an alias of
NOUSERID.
NOTID(Puid) Selects members without ISPF statistics or members with
ISPF statistics and user IDs that do not match the partial
name Puid. Puid can be entered as a partial TSO user ID with
1 to 7 characters. NOTID is an alias of NOTUSERID.
IDRFULL Selects members that cannot contain more IMASPZAP IDR
records.
NOIDRFULL Selects members that contain more IMASPZAP IDR records.
IOERR Selects members with I/O errors.
NOIOERR Selects members without I/O errors.
LKED(Partl) Selects modules identified as linked by the linkage editor
defined by the partial name Partl. Partl can be entered as a
partial linkage editor IDR name with 1 to 10 characters.

216 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

LKEDERR Selects modules with any of the following illegal linkage edit
attribute combinations:
 Modules with RENT and NOREUS attributes
 Modules with RMODEANY and AMODE24 or AMODEANY
attributes
 Modules with OVLY and RENT, REUS, REFR, SCTR, RMODEANY,
AMODE31, AMODE64, or AMODEANY attributes
 Modules with TEST and NOEDIT attributes
 Modules with REUS and SCTR attributes
NOLKEDERR Selects modules with none of the above illegal linkage edit
attribute combinations.
LOADERR Selects modules that ABEND when they are LOADED.
NOLOADERR Selects modules that can be LOADED without errors.
LOADONLY Selects modules marked for LOAD ONLY.
NOLOADONLY Selects modules not marked for LOAD ONLY.
LRECLERR Selects members with any of the following LRECL errors:
 BLKSIZE divided by input LRECL not integral (RECFM=F)
 Input LRECL exceeding maximum DCB LRECL (RECFM=V)
 Input LRECL less than 4 bytes (RECFM=V)
NOLRECLERR Selects members with none of the above LRECL errors.
MODULE(name) Specifies a 1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits
CSECT or ENTRY names for attribute searches. If you enter
this parameter with any TRANS, SYSMOD/USERDATA, or ZAP
keywords, only those CSECTs that satisfy the MODULE
keyword are checked for the other keyword conditions.
The MODULE operand has several valid forms:
 MODULE(*) – uses the previous name entered on any
MODULE keyword
 MODULE(Fullm) – considers only modules containing a CSECT
or ENTRY named FULLM
 MODULE(Partm*) – considers only modules containing a
CSECT or ENTRY named PARTM...
NAMEERR Selects members whose member names are not upper-case
alphanumeric or whose first character is numeric.
NONAMEERR Selects members whose member names are upper-case
alphanumeric and whose first character is not numeric.
NULL Selects members with no data.
NONULL Selects members with some data.
ORPHAN Selects alias members that have no associated main
member.
NOORPHAN Selects main members or alias members that have an
associated main member.
OVERLAY Selects overlay modules.
NOOVERLAY Selects non-overlay modules.

Command Reference 217

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

PACKED Specifies that ISPF packed source members are desired.

NOPACKED Specifies that ISPF packed source members are not desired.
PAGE Selects modules marked for loading on a page boundary.
NOPAGE Selects modules not marked for loading on a page boundary.
REFR Selects refreshable modules.
NOREFR Selects non-refreshable modules.
RENT Selects reentrant modules.
NORENT Selects non-reentrant modules.
REUS Selects reusable modules.
NOREUS Selects non-reusable modules.
RLDERR Selects modules linked since OS/VS whose RLD/CONTROL
count from the directory does not match the first RLD entry.
NORLDERR Selects modules whose RLD/CONTROL count from the
directory match the first RLD entry or modules linked before
OS/VS.
RLDZERO Selects modules whose RLD/CONTROL count is zero.
NORLDZERO Selects modules whose RLD/CONTROL count is not zero.
RMODE24 Selects modules with residence mode 24.
NORMODE24 Selects modules with residence mode ANY.
RMODEANY Selects modules with residence mode ANY.
NORMODEANY Selects modules with residence mode 24.
SCTR Selects scatter-loaded modules.
NOSCTR Selects no scatter-loaded modules.
SPFEDIT Selects members that are currently in use by an ISPF EDIT
session.
NOSPFEDIT Selects members that are not currently in use by an ISPF
EDIT session.
SSI(hexdata) Selects members with matching SSI data. This is
implemented as a generic match of SSI characters on the
first part of the SSI field for the number of characters
entered. For example, SSI(698) would match actual SSI
fields of 698BADEF or 69800000 but it would not match
06980000.
SSI Selects members with SSI data.
NOSSI Selects members without SSI data.
PARTSSI(hx) Selects members with matching SSI data. This is
implemented as a pattern check, matching SSI digits as a
string anywhere in the SSI field of the member. For example,
PARTSSI(698) would match actual SSI fields of 698BADEF or
00006980 but it would not match 80000069.

218 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

SYSMOD(Partu) Selects modules with user IDR data that matches the partial
name Partu. Partu can be entered as partial IDR data with 1
to 8 characters. If you also enter MODULE(...), the SYSMOD
operand applies only to CSECTs whose names satisfy the
MODULE argument.
TEST Selects modules with the TEST attribute.
NOTEST Selects modules without the TEST attribute.
TRANS(Partt) Selects modules with CSECTS identified as having been
assembled or compiled by the translator defined by the
partial name Partt. Partt can be entered as a partial
translator IDR name with 1 to 10 characters. If you also
enter MODULE(...), the TRANS operand applies only to
CSECTs whose names satisfy the MODULE argument.
TTR(Lttr:Httr) Selects members whose start address is in the specified TTR
range. Lttr defaults to 0 and can be entered as a
hexadecimal TTR value from 0 through FFFFFF. Httr defaults
to FFFFFF and can be entered as a hexadecimal TTR value
from 0 through FFFFFF.
USERDATA(Partu) Selects modules with user IDR data that matches the partial
name Partu. Partu can be entered as partial IDR data with 1
to 8 characters. If you also enter MODULE(...), the
USERDATA operand applies only to CSECTs whose names
satisfy the MODULE argument.
USERID(Puid) Selects members with ISPF statistics and user IDs matching
the partial name Puid. Puid can be entered as a partial TSO
user ID with 1 to 7 characters. USERID is an alias of ID.
NOUSERID Selects members without ISPF statistics. NOUSERID is an
alias of NOID.
NOTUSERID(Puid) Selects members without ISPF statistics or members with
ISPF statistics and user IDs that do not match the partial
name Puid. Puid can be entered as a partial TSO user ID with
1 to 7 characters. NOTUSERID is an alias of NOTID.
VSLKED Selects modules linked by the system linkage editor.
NOVSLKED Selects modules not linked by the system linkage editor.
ZAP(Partz) Selects modules with zap IDR data that matches the partial
name Partz. Partz can be entered as partial zap IDR data
with 1 to 8 characters. If you also enter MODULE(...), the
ZAP operand applies only to CSECTs whose names satisfy the
MODULE argument.

Command Reference 219

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

THEN(action) Executes a subcommand if all conditions are met for a

member. The subcommand can be ATTRIB, BROWSE,
DIRENTRY, DELETE, EDIT, EXCLUDE, FIND, FSE, HISTORY,
LIST, MAP, MEMBERS, MEMLIST, NEWML, PRINT, REVIEW,
SUBMIT, SUBLIST, TSOEDIT, TSOLIST, VERIFY, or VIEW.
NEWML is similar to MEMLIST except that it also performs a
MEMLIST RESET. If neither a THEN nor an ELSE operand is
entered, THEN(ATTRIB) is the default condition.
ELSE(action) Executes a subcommand if any condition is not met for a
member. The subcommand can be ATTRIB, BROWSE,
DIRENTRY, DELETE, EDIT, EXCLUDE, FIND, FSE, HISTORY,
LIST, MAP, MEMBERS, MEMLIST, NEWML, PRINT, REVIEW,
SUBMIT, SUBLIST, TSOEDIT, TSOLIST, VERIFY, or VIEW.
NEWML is similar to MEMLIST except that it also performs a
MEMLIST RESET. If neither a THEN nor an ELSE operand is
entered, THEN(ATTRIB) is the default condition.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
----------------------- ISPMODE Session Display -------------- ROW 3011 OF 3020
COMMAND ===> LL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=: -------------------------------
>----->if : rmodeany then(sublist).
>----->members
PDS165I Members are: ASID, ASIDZN, PDSPGM, WHAT, WHATO

PDS193I This group contains 5 members

>----->if : rmodeany then(attr)

PDS232I NAME ALIASOF CREATED SIZE SSI ATTRIBUTES
PDS232I ASID 87/06/15 3120 RANY, A31
PDS232I ASIDZN ?UNKNOWN 87/06/15 3120 CB123021 RANY, A31
PDS232I PDSPGM 89/06/10 436K RANY, A31, RENT, REUS
PDS232I WHAT PDSPGM 89/06/10 436K RANY, A31, RENT, REUS
PDS232I WHATO 89/02/17 388K RANY, A31, RENT, REUS

PDS119I 3 members RMODEANY; size is 827K

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
----------------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log# 1 ------- ROW 735 TO 747 OF 747
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=: ----------------------------------
>----->if : last(15)
PDS230I ISPF Stats: VER.MOD CREATED LAST MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD ID
PDS230I A 01.00 93/04/08 93/04/08 13:21 5 5 0 SER07
PDS230I ABLK 01.01 93/04/09 93/04/09 14:37 6 9 0 SER07
PDS230I ADOC 01.01 93/04/15 93/04/15 10:17 156 192 0 SER07
PDS230I LOADMARK 01.02 93/02/26 93/04/05 6:43 50 48 0 SER07
PDS230I SAMPSECR 01.26 90/03/27 93/04/16 5:57 197 220 140 SER07
PDS230I TRIAL601 01.00 93/04/14 93/04/14 15:16 123 123 0 SER07
PDS117I 6 members counted; cumulative size from statistics is 537 records

PDS147I 292 members searched

PDS148I 6 members found

220 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

ISPF Subcommand
The ISPF subcommand invokes the ISPF primary panel with any option.

Example
ISPF 3.3

Syntax
ISPF [option]

Aliases
IS, ISP, ISPF

Defaults
none

Required
none

Operands
option Specifies an initial ISPF option (such as 3.3) that allows you to skip
intermediate panel displays.

Remarks
The result of using the ISPF subcommand is a temporary suspension of your StarTool FDM
session and entry to the specified ISPF function. After you terminate ISPF by repeated
ENDs, your StarTool FDM session is activated again. This is a stacked ISPF session.

ISPMODE Function
The ISPMODE subcommand switches StarTool FDM to a full screen session display mode.
Subcommands entered and the outputs from internal StarTool FDM subcommands are
maintained in a log.

Command Reference 221

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Example
ISPMODE

Syntax
ISPMODE

Aliases
ISPM, ISPMO, ISPMOD, ISPMODE

Operands
No operands are supported for the ISPMODE subcommand.

Remarks
The ISPMODE log displays in response to a ISPMODE subcommand issued in line mode.
You then enter ISPMODE (an ISPF dialog mode). After you are in dialog mode, use the
LOG command to select any one of nine different logs for your session display.

When ISPMODE is active, StarTool FDM operates as a normal ISPF dialog. Enter the HELP
command while in ISPMODE to get ISPF tutorial information or enter the INDEX command
to go to the StarTool FDM tutorial index panel directly.

Suspend ISPMODE with the SUSPEND command. SUSPEND places your session into line
mode (for example, you can go into line mode to SEND or RECEIVE data using IND$FILE).
To enter ISPMODE again, type an ISPMODE, ISPXEQ, or MEMLIST subcommand.

ISPXEQ Function
Use the ISPXEQ subcommand to enter StarTool FDM in LISTA or LISTV dialog mode
instead of the usual ISPMODE or MEMLIST mode.

ISPXEQS is a variation of ISPXEQ that invokes a “short” variation. StarTool FDM

terminates at the first END command.

222 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

Example
STARTOOL LIB.CNTL ISPXEQ LISTA OPEN

Syntax
ISPXEQ / ISPXEQS {command}

Aliases
ISPX, ISPXE, ISPXEQ, ISPXEQS

Defaults
none

Required
command

Operands
command Specifies a ISPMODE command to be executed after StarTool FDM
initialization.

Remarks
Use the ISPXEQ subcommand in building ISPF command table entries for StarTool FDM
dialog functions. For example, add the following command table entry for an ISPF
command called LA:
SELECT CMD(STARTOOL 'SYS1.HELP' ISPXEQ LISTA &ZPARM)

Command Reference 223

Chapter 5 Commands — F to I

224 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Chapter 6
Commands — L to N

LIST Subcommand
The LIST subcommand displays data from a member or data set.

Example
LIST mema:memb

Syntax
LIST memgroup [NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP ]
[OFFSET(Hx) MODULE({* / Fullm / Partm*)} ]
[MAXMEMBERS(num) ]
[FORMAT(from:to,from:to, ...) ]
[SKIPREC(n) MAXIN(n) MAXOUT(n) ]
[SKIPCOL(n) MAXLEN(n) ]
* [FROMKEY(key)/FROMADDRESS(add)/FROMNUMBER(num) ]
* [TOKEY(key)/TOADDRESS(add)/TONUMBER(num) ]

*NOTE: Lines with an asterisk are supported for VSAM only.

Aliases
LI, LIS, LIST

Abbreviations
FKEY for FROMKEY, FADDR for FROMADDRESS, FNUM for FROMNUMBER, TKEY for TOKEY,
TADDR for TOADDRESS, and TNUM for TONUMBER.

Defaults
memgroup, NUM or previous LIST/FIND/REPLACE format

Required
none

Command Reference 225

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be displayed.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed; for more
information, see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
NUM Examines the line number field (the last 8 bytes of a fixed-
format record or the first 8 bytes otherwise) of each logical
record. If the field is not numeric, switches formatting to
NONUM mode for the remainder of the member.
For ISPF-saved members, the high-order 6 digits of the line
number field is formatted; otherwise, the low-order 6 digits
of the line number field is formatted by suppressing leading
zeroes. The line number segment is followed by a blank and
up to 249 characters of data from a logical record.
SNUM Discards the line number field (the last 8 bytes for a fixed-
format record or the first 8 otherwise). Displays up to 256
bytes from a logical record.
NONUM Displays up to 256 bytes from a logical record (without
regard to line numbers).
LBLOCK Formats logical records with two hexadecimal offsets
(displacement in the member and displacement in the logical
record) and segments of up to 64 characters surrounded by
asterisks.
For load modules, only CSECT data is displayed. If you enter
a name in a MODULE operand, only those CSECT or ENTRY
names that satisfy the condition display. CSECT records are
formatted with two hexadecimal offsets (a module offset and
a CSECT offset) and segments of up to 64 characters
surrounded by asterisks.
For VSAM records, the first field in the output is the relative
record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8 bytes of
the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer than 8 characters, a +
will be placed after the key); otherwise, it is a relative byte
address.
LDUMP Logical records are formatted with two hexadecimal offsets
(displacement in the member and displacement in the logical
record), segments of up to 32 characters of hexadecimal data
and up to 16 bytes of equivalent characters surrounded by
asterisks.
For load modules, only CSECT data displays. If you enter a
name in a MODULE operand, only those CSECT or ENTRY
names that satisfy the condition display. CSECT records are
formatted with two hexadecimal offsets (a module offset and
a CSECT offset), segments of up to 32 characters of
hexadecimal data and up to 16 bytes of characters
surrounded by asterisks.
Also, for VSAM records, the first field in the output is the
relative record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8
bytes of the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer than 8
characters, a + will be placed after the key); otherwise, it is a
relative byte address.

226 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

BLOCK Physical records are formatted with two hexadecimal offsets

(displacement in the member and displacement in the
physical record) and segments of up to 64 characters
surrounded by asterisks.
For VSAM records, the first field in the output is the relative
record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8 bytes of
the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer than 8 characters, a +
will be placed after the key); otherwise, it is a relative byte
address.
If control interval processing is being performed, the first
field is always the control interval relative byte address.
DUMP Physical records are formatted with two hexadecimal offsets
(displacement in the member and displacement in the
physical record), segments of up to 32 characters of
hexadecimal data and up to 16 bytes of equivalent characters
surrounded by asterisks.
For VSAM records, the first field in the output is the relative
record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8 bytes of
the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer 8 eight characters, a
+ will be placed after the key); otherwise, it is a relative byte
address.
If control interval processing is being performed, the first
field is always the control interval relative byte address.
OFFSET(Hx) Specifies a 1- to 6-digit hexadecimal module offset at which
the display is to begin. This operand is only defined for load
modules and only with the LDUMP or LBLOCK output formats.
If both MODULE and OFFSET keywords are entered, the offset
applies to each module selected.
MODULE(name) Specifies a 1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits
CSECT or ENTRY names to be displayed. This operand is only
defined for load modules and only with the LDUMP or LBLOCK
output formats. If both MODULE and OFFSET keywords are
entered, the offset applies to each module selected. The
MODULE operand has several valid forms:
 MODULE(*) – uses the previous name entered on any MODULE
keyword
 MODULE(Fullm) – displays only a CSECT or ENTRY named
FULLM
 MODULE(Partm*) – displays only a CSECT or ENTRY named
PARTM...
MAXMEMBERS(n) n is coded as 0 through 9999999 to specify the maximum
number of members to be output by LIST.
FORMAT The record columns to display in the output when displaying
(from:to,from:to, ...) LIST data. FORMAT is only supported with NUM, SNUM or
NONUM data. For example, FORMAT(21:30,0,1:10) specifies
that the output should be formatted with data from columns
21 through 30, a blank and data from columns 1 through 10.
SKIPREC(n) Ignores n (coded as 0 through 9999999) logical records
(physical records for BLOCK or DUMP formats) at the
beginning of a member.
MAXIN(n) Inputs up to n (coded as 0 through 9999999) logical records
(physical records for BLOCK or DUMP formats) for a member
after satisfying any SKIPREC operand.

Command Reference 227

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

MAXOUT(n) Displays up to n (coded as 0 through 9999999) output lines

for a member.
SKIPCOL(n) Ignores n (coded as 0 through 99999) columns at the
beginning of each logical record (physical record for BLOCK or
DUMP formats).
For NUM or SNUM output format with record format V,
SKIPCOL(0) refers to the first data position after the line
number field.
MAXLEN(n) Displays up to n (coded as 0 through 99999) characters in a
logical record (physical record for BLOCK or DUMP formats).
FROMKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, ky is coded as the key of the first
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be coded
as x’hexkey’. Access begins at the first record whose key
matches (or is greater than) the portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with TOKEY. It can only be specified for an
alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.
FROMADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the first record
to be accessed. The RBA value must match the beginning of a
logical record (or a control interval for control interval
processing). If this parameter is specified for key-sequenced
data, the records are accessed in physical sequential order
instead of key order. Use this parameter with TOADDRESS.
FROMADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Can be specified for any VSAM data set component if control
interval processing is being used
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path.
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed
FROMNUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative record number (RRN) of the first record
to be accessed. This record must be present in the data set.
Use this parameter with TONUMBER. It can only be specified
for a variable or fixed relative record data set.
TOKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, ky is coded as the key of the last
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be coded
as x’hexkey’. Access ends after the first record whose key
matches the portion of the key specified. Use this parameter
with FROMKEY. It can only be specified for an alternate index
or a key-sequenced data set.

228 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

TOADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through 99999999

to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the last record to
be accessed. The RBA value does need not to match the
beginning of a logical record (or a control interval for control
interval processing). If this parameter is specified for key-
sequenced data, the records are accessed in physical
sequential order instead of key order. This parameter may be
used with FROMADDRESS.
TOADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Can be specified for any VSAM data set component if control
interval processing is being used
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed
TONUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative record number (RRN) of the last record
to be accessed. This record need not be present in the data
set. This parameter can be used with FROMNUMBER and it
can only be specified for a variable or fixed relative record
data set.

Remarks
Unprintable characters for 3270-type devices are translated to periods before they
display.

LIST formats are NUM, SNUM, NONUM, LBLOCK, LDUMP, BLOCK, and DUMP. For load
modules, the NUM, SNUM, and NONUM formats are equivalent to the LDUMP format. For
VSAM data sets, the NUM, SNUM, and NONUM formats are equivalent to the LBLOCK
format.

The default format is initially NUM; however, each time a format operand is entered on a
LIST, FIND, or REPLACE subcommand, the value entered is used as the output format for
subsequent LIST, FIND, and REPLACE subcommands. Also, note the following:

1 Formats NUM, SNUM, and NONUM limit the display length for logical records to 256
characters.

2 Formats BLOCK and DUMP apply to physical records for non-VSAM data sets (or when
control interval processing is being performed). The other formats apply to logical
records. For load modules, LBLOCK and LDUMP formats display only CSECT data.

3 For VSAM DATA or INDEX components, the LIST, FIND, and REPLACE subcommands
support control interval access using the DUMP or BLOCK display formats. Instead of
accessing individual VSAM records, each GET or PUT obtains a VSAM control interval.

Control interval access could be useful if a VSAM data set has logical errors. REPLACE can
repair the error; however, since only the component is opened for update, the next access
of the data set through the related cluster gets warning errors due to the differing time
stamps.

Command Reference 229

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ----------------- ROW 7 OF 682
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=ZAPHELP -------------------------
>----->list zaphelp off(40c0)
PDS141I AT 003FF0 CSECT CSOUT LENGTH 00000428
0040C0 00D0 45F0C0E4 000040CC 00000000 C9D2D1C4 *.0U.. .....IKJD*
0040D0 00E0 C1C9D940 0A0686FF C03AD207 A090D1A0 *AIR ..f..K...J.*
0040E0 00F0 D703A010 A0104100 A0305000 A008928F *P.........&...k.*
0040F0 0100 A008D25F A030C3A8 D207A058 A0904110 *..Kª..CyK.......*
004100 0110 A0080A13 9110A060 4710C1CA 41F00004 *....j..-..A..0..*
004110 0120 47F0C03A 4110A030 58F01030 45E0F008 *.0......0....*
004120 0130 47F0C1CA 4800A012 95F1A0BF 4780C1D0 *.0A.....n1....A*
004130 0140 95F0A0BF 4780C162 954EA0BF 4780C166 *n0....A.n+....A.*
004140 0150 9560A0BF 4780C160 9240A0BF 47F0C164 *n-....A-k ...0A.*
004150 0160 06000600 06001200 47D0C1D0 4000A012 *.........A ...*
004160 0170 4110A030 4100A0BF 58F01030 05EF9120 *.........0....j.*
004170 0180 A0004780 C1B6D201 A0BEC422 4110A13B *....A.K...D... .*
004180 0190 95401000 4770C19C 4610C190 D2031001 *n ....A...A.K...*
004190 01A0 C41C4100 A0BB1B10 47D0C1B6 4010A0BC *D........A. ...*
0041A0 01B0 4110A0BC 0A239104 A0004780 C1CA94FB *......j.....A.m.*

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS EATURES
----------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log ---------- ROW 1,000 TO 1,017 F 1,176
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ==> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CLISTV,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=CLI* -----------------------------
>----->list cli*

** LIST CLIST
/* THE FOLLOWING CLIST WILL ESTABLISH AN ALTLIB FOR CLIST TESTING */
/* */
PROC 1 DSNAME
ALTLIB ACT APP(CLIST) DSN(&DSNAME)
WRITE &DSNAME IS A NEW CLIST LIBRARY FOR TESTING
PDS142I 5 lines in this member

** LIST CLISTDSP
000100 PROC 2 DSN MEM VOL(VOLSER)
000200 ISPEXEC DISPLAY PANEL(&MEM.)
PDS142I 2 lines in this member

** LIST CLISTSOE
PROC 0
CONTROL MAIN

230 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# Row 6,031 to 6,050 of 9,034

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand or a special control code:
- DSN=WSER07.SDSF.LIST,VOL=SER=SER007 --------------------------------------
>------>list format(9:22,0,41:120)
9501 7AB7 CLI #FIXORDR,1 ORDER KEYWORD?
4770 835C BNE DIRO920 NO, SKIP
9102 7864 TM DSORG,DS1DSGPO PARTITIONED?
47E0 835C BNO DIRO920 NO, SKIP
9200 7AB7 MVI #FIXORDR,0 RESET ORDER FLAGS
D707 7B0C 7B0C DIRO000 XC #HIGHMEM,#HIGHMEM CLEAR HIGH MEMBER NAME
D707 7B14 7B14 XC #DUPLMEM,#DUPLMEM CLEAR DUPLICATE MEMBER
D203 7B18 834E MVC #DUPLMEM+4(4),DIRO0000 INITIAL VALUE FOR ZERO
D707 7D10 7D10 XC MEMNAME,MEMNAME CLEAR DUPLICATE MEMBER
9201 7CDE MVI STARTTR+2,X'01' FIRST TTR
D207 7B1C 7D10 DIRO010 MVC #LASTMEM,MEMNAME PREVIOUS MEMBER NAME
45E0 7DEC BAL R14,READDIR READ NEXT MEMBER
4110 CCB8 LA R1,L762$1 MEMBER DUPLICATE MESSA
M$MSG (1) OUTPUT ONE OF THE MESS
45E0 7DDC + BAL R14,$TMSGRT
4110 C6ED LA R1,PDS397A CORRECT DATA SET?
4520 7E40 BAL R2,YESNO PROMPT FOR RESULTS

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
----------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log -------- ROW 1,000 TO 1,016 OF 1,016
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER007 MEM=IEFBR14 ---------------------------
>----->list iefbr14 dump skiprec(3)
PDS140I DUMP RECORD 4 LENGTH 21 TTR 00120D
000135 0000 80140480 0200F5F7 F3F4C1E2 F1F0F040 *......5734AS100 *
000145 0010 06018124 0F *..a..*

PDS140I DUMP RECORD 5 LENGTH 20 TTR 00120E

00014A 0000 80138800 0281336F 0BD9E2C9 F1F2F4F0 *..h..a.?.RSI1240*
00015A 0010 F0F7F7F5 *0775*

PDS140I DUMP RECORD 6 LENGTH 20 TTR 00120F

00015E 0000 0D000000 00040000 06000000 40000008 *............ ...*
00016E 0010 00020008 *....*

PDS140I DUMP RECORD 7 LENGTH 8 TTR 001210

000172 0000 1BFF07FE 00000000 *........*

PDS142I 7 blocks in this member

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

Command Reference 231

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS DATA CMDS A-M DATA CMDS N-Z DEFAULT FEATURE
----------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 --------- ROW 131 TO 156 OF 261
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.VSAM.RV.CLUSTER,VOL=SER=SER007 ----------------------------------
>----->list block
PDS140I BLOCK RECORD 1 LENGTH 29 RBA 00000004
0000001 0000 *0000XX00 SET ZCTVERB = PDSSX*

PDS140I BLOCK RECORD 2 LENGTH 15 RBA 00000037

0000002 0000 *00000100 PROC 0*

PDS140I BLOCK RECORD 3 LENGTH 31 RBA 00000056

0000003 0000 *00000200 ISPEBEX TBBOT ISPCMDS*

PDS140I BLOCK RECORD 4 LENGTH 57 RBA 00000091

0000005 0000 *00000500 SET ZCTACT = &STR(SELECT CMD(%PDSSX DUMMYDSN))*

PDS140I BLOCK RECORD 5 LENGTH 49 RBA 00000152

0000006 0000 *00000600 SET ZCTDESC = 'INVOKE THE PDS PROGRAM'*

PDS140I BLOCK RECORD 6 LENGTH 31 RBA 00000205

0000007 0000 *00000700 ISPEBEX TBADE ISPCMDS*

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS DATA CMDS A-M DATA CMDS N-Z DEFAULT FEATURE
-------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ------ ROW 675 TO 700 OF 1,075
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.VSAM.IS.CLUSTER,VOL=SER=SER007 ----------------------------------
>----->list block skiprec(21)
PDS140I BLOCK RECORD 22 LENGTH 80 RBA 00001484
00000600 000 *00000600A004E /* SECONDARY OF THE REQUESTED SIZE FOR DATA S*
00000600 040 *ETS */ *

PDS140I BLOCK RECORD 23 LENGTH 7,623 RBA 00024576

000007MM 000 *000007MM Format: IDC3351I * VSAM OPEN | CLOSE | I/O RETURN *
000007MM 040 *CODE IS rc *
000007MM 080 * RPLFDBWD = nnnnnnnn *
000007MM 0C0 * *
000007MM 100 * *
000007MM 140 * Description: An e*
000007MM 180 *rror occurred during VSAM processing that resulted in the *
000007MM 1C0 * return code*
000007MM 200 * identified by 'rc' in the message text. The *
000007MM 240 * RPLFDBWD value, if*
000007MM 280 * present, is documented in DFP MACRO IN- *
000007MM 2C0 * STRUCTIONS. The values o*

LISTA Function
LA or LISTA command displays your TSO session allocations in an ISPF table. DDNAME is
another way to use the LISTA table. The LISTA/DDNAME table is maintained in DDNAME
and concatenation order (the SORT command is not supported).

232 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Example
LISTA open old mod

Syntax
LISTA [ALL ]
[OPEN ]
[UNOPEN/CLOSED ]
[CONCAT/CATENATE ]
[NONCAT/NONCON ]
[DUMMY/NULLFILE ]
[ ]
[TERMINAL ]
[JESFILE/SYSOUT ]
[TMP/TEMPORY ]
[NEW MOD SHR OLD ]
[TASKLIB ]
[SETDEF ]
[RESET ]

Aliases
LA, LISTA

Defaults
ALL

Required
none

Operands
ALL Selects all allocations (initial default).
OPEN Selects open allocations.
UNOPEN Selects closed allocations.
CLOSED Selects closed allocations.
CONCAT Selects allocations that are a part of a concatenation.
CATENATE Selects allocations that are a part of a concatenation.
NONCAT Selects allocations that are not concatenated.
NONCON Selects allocations that are not concatenated.
DUMMY Selects NULLFILE allocations.
NULLFILE Selects NULLFILE allocations.
Selects NULLFILE allocations that are not also TERMINAL.
TERMINAL Selects TERMINAL allocations.

Command Reference 233

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

JESFILE Selects allocations to JES output files.

SYSOUT Selects allocations to JES output files.
TMP Selects temporary allocations.
TEMPORY Selects temporary allocations.
NEW Selects NEW allocations.
MOD Selects MOD allocations.
SHR Selects SHR allocations.
OLD Selects OLD allocations.
TASKLIB Selects TASKLIB allocations (including STEPLIB).
SETDEF Makes the selected operands the new default for this session instead
of ALL.
RESET Clears the LISTA table before adding any new entries.

Remarks
The LISTA/DDNAME ISPF table displays in response to a LISTA command. When you are
in a LISTA/DDNAME display, you can delete a part of the table, find data in the table, print
a part of the table, store a part of the table in a data set, etc. For assistance with the
different options available, use the HELP command, CUA functions, or enter an O
command as either a primary command or as a line command.

LISTA has alternate panels, as do most of the ISPMODE tables in StarTool FDM, containing
extra information about the listed data sets. The first LISTA/DDNAME panel shows basic
allocation information such as DDNAME, data set TYPE, Open count (under the header
O#), VOLUME allocated, MEMBER name, and DSNAME. Command error messages are
provided under the DATA/MSG header as follows:

*INVALID This line command is not supported.

*DD GONE This file is not allocated.
*OPEN DD This file is open.
*IN USE This file is in use.
*NOT CON This file is not concatenated.
*PERMCON This file is permanently concatenated.
*NO DDN* This file has a blank ddname.

TYPE is the data set DSORG or VIO, CTLG, VVDS, JES, or TERM depending on the type of
allocation.

The second LISTA/DDNAME panel is a double line panel that includes some additional
information: DISP for data set disposition and STAT for data set status. The STAT field is
TMP for temporary, PRM for permanent, or CNV for convertible.

234 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

The following primary commands are supported directly for the LISTA/DDNAME function.
For information on ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see “Common
Commands” in Chapter 2, "ISPF Interface Commands".

ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the LISTA/DDNAME table.

APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

BAT[CHJCL] Builds batch JCL that includes all DD statements in the LISTA table.
COMPR[ESS] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
COMPRESS subcommand.
Syntax COMPRESS [LIST/NOLIST/SUMMARY]

DUA[L] Displays a double line view of the LISTA/DDNAME table.

DD[NAME] Rebuilds the LISTA/DDNAME table selecting data sets with a
DDNAME mask.
Syntax DDNAME ddnamemask

EDITT[BL] (or Enters an edit session on LISTA/DDNAME table data.

ET[BL])
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses between
individual commands.
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[ANY/DDNAME/DSNAME/VOLUME/MEMBER/ALLOC]

FI[ND] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
FIND subcommand. Since the syntax entered on a FIND
subcommand is applied to each data set individually, do not attempt
to search mixed partitioned and non-partitioned data sets with a
single FIND global command.
Syntax
FIND memgroup 'anystring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]

GL[OBAL] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
StarTool FDM subcommand.
Syntax GLOBAL anysubcommand [anyoperands]

LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the LISTA/DDNAME table. PF keys

10 and 22 are normally set to LEFT.
LISTA Rebuilds the LISTA/DDNAME table selecting data sets by attributes.
Syntax LISTA [attributes]

MODEL Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
MODEL command.
NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the LISTA/DDNAME table.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the LISTA/DDNAME table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

Command Reference 235

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

REM[OVE] Trims the LISTA/DDNAME table based on a string match.

Syntax
REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/DDNAME/DSNAME/VOLUME/MEMBER/ALLOC]

REPL[ACE] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
REPLACE subcommand. Since the syntax entered on a REPLACE
subcommand is applied to each data set individually, do not attempt
to update mixed partitioned and non-partitioned data sets with a
single REPLACE global command.
Syntax
REPLACE memgroup 'fromstring' 'tostring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]
[WRITE/NOWRITE]

RESET Often used with data set tagging, clears the DATA/MSG field in all
table entries.
RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location.
PF keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the LISTA/DDNAME table. PF keys
11 and 23 are normally set to RIGHT.
SEEK Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and looks for
a member.
Syntax SEEK member

TAG Applies the specified line command to table entries marked with
*TAG* in the DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are

maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well as
your installation.
X Clears the LISTA/DDNAME table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the LISTA/DDNAME table; this is equivalent to X ALL

The following line commands are supported in the LISTA/DDNAME function:

+ Provides an extension panel for command entry.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,+”>

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

6 Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.

A Changes to the data set and executes an alternate subcommand.
B Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.
C Changes to the data set.
COPY Changes to the data set and invokes the COPY subcommand.
DCAT Deconcatenates non-permanent data sets in a concatenated group.
DUP Changes to the data set and invokes the DUP subcommand.

236 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

E Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.

FREE Frees a DDNAME or all data sets in a concatenated group.
GO Changes to the data set using GO processing (a number is optional).
IDC Performs an IDCAMS LISTC and directs output to the log.
K Kills and clears all following line commands.
LC Adds the data set name to the current LISTC/LISTF table.
LOG Copies the line into the log.
M Provides line command selection and entry assistance.
ML Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.
MOD Changes to the data set and issues a MODEL command.
O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
S Selects line command (normally CHANGE, it is set by SETSEL).
SEEK Changes to the data set and checks for a member.
SETA Saves a StarTool FDM subcommand for repeated use by the ALT line
command.
TAG Marks this table entry with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.
U Changes to the data set and displays USAGE.
UT Selects the extended user line command panel.
W Adds the data set name (and any member name) to the WORKPAD.
WHO Checks for users of this data set with the WHOHAS subcommand.
X Drops the table line.
XCOP Changes to the data set and invokes the XCOPY interface.
Z Changes to the data set and issues a COMPRESS subcommand.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in the
LISTA/DDNAME function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR- t=”Block line command,==”>

AA A command. Changes and executes an alternate subcommand for each line.

BB B command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
CC C command. Changes data set for each line.
EE E command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
GG GO command. Changes to each data set using GO processing.
LL LOG command. Copies the range of lines into the log.
MM M command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.
SS S command. Selects each line in the range of table lines.
SSEE SEEK command. Changes to each data set and checks for a member.

Command Reference 237

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

UU U command. Changes and displays USAGE for each line.

XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.
ZZ Z command. Changes and issues a COMPRESS for each line.

FUNCTIONS CTL A-M CTL N-Z LINE CMDS A-M LINE CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURE
----------------------- List Allocations ----------------- ROW 1 TO 7 OF 39
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ==> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CLISTV,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=/AXI -----------------------------
CMD DDNAME DATA/MSG I/O's O# VOLUME MEMBER ------ DATA SET NAME --------
STEPLIB 34 1 SER007 SER07.LINK.LOAD
# 2 0 1 SER007 SER09.SDS.LOAD
# 3 0 1 SER007 SER.COMPAREX.LINKLIB
ISPPLIB 195 1 SER006 SER07.LIB.PDSE
# 2 2 1 SER007 SER.COMPAREX.PANELS
# 3 0 1 TSG303 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.PREPLIB
# 4 27 1 TSG302 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.ISRENU
# 5 0 1 TSG309 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.ISPENU
# 6 0 1 TSG301 SYSP.CUST.ISPPLIB
ISPMLIB 4 1 SER006 SER07.LIB.PDSE
o # 2 0 1 SER007 SER.COMPAREX.MSGS
# 3 3 1 TSG302 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.ISRENU
# 4 99 1 TSG309 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.ISPENU
# 5 0 1 TSG301 SYSP.STD.ISPMLIB
ISPSLIB 0 1 TSG301 SYSP.STD.ISPSLIB
# 2 0 1 TSG302 SYSI.IBMPDF.SYS350.ISRENU
ISPTLIB 1 1 TSG301 SYSP.STD.ISPTLIB

---------------------- StarTool o LISTA Line Command -------------------------

OPTION ===>

Choose one of the following line commands:

More: +
+ - provide an extension panel for command entry.
= - repeat the previous line command.
6 - change to the data set and MEMLIST all.
a - change to the data set and execute an alternate subcommand.
b - change to the data set and MEMLIST all.
c - change to 'SER.COMPAREX.MSGS'.
dcat - deconcatenate non-permanent members in a concatenated group.
e - change to the data set and MEMLIST all.
free - free a ddname or all data sets in a concatenated group.
go - change to the data set using GO processing (a number is optional).
idc - perform an IDCAMS LISTC with output to log.
k - kill and clear all following line commands.
log - format and copy line to log.
m - change to the data set and MEMLIST all.
mod - change to the data set and MODEL.
s - SELECT line command (normally CHANGE, it is set by SETSEL).
seek - change to the data set and check for a member.
u - change to the data set and display USAGE.
ut - use the extended user line command panel.

238 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

LISTC Function
Use the LC or LISTC command to display data sets from a catalog source in an ISPF table.
The table displaying LISTC data sets is combined with LISTF data sets.

LISTC/LISTF tables can be saved permanently. They are saved in the ISPF profile data set
by default (ISPPROF) but the DDNAME can be changed in the SETALL option. To manage
these tables, use the SAVE, ID, MERGE, NOSAVE, and ERASE commands. To automatically
save these tables at program end or when a new LISTC/LISTF table is retrieved, check the
setting of “Automatic save” in SETALL for LISTC/LISTF.

Saved LISTC/LISTF tables are given members names of the form PDSLF0na if the name is
one or two numeric digits; otherwise, a name of the form ##name is used where name is
a 1- to 6-character alphanumeric table identification name.

The FIND and REPLACE global subcommands bypass non-partitioned data sets. If you
want to search or update non-partitioned data sets, use GLOBAL followed by FIND or
REPLACE and any operands.

In the LISTC prompt panel, enter the LEVEL/DSN field as a partial data set name. The first
level can contain an * after one or more characters and any additional levels can contain
an * before or after any characters in that level. For example: SYS*.NU*.*.*XY

Due to a restriction in the SUPERLOCATE service, generic searches for GDG data sets
must contain an * in the first position of the GDG data set node. For example, if you
search for NODE1.GDG.G00*, no GDG entries will be found. However, you can find these
entries by changing the search to NODE1.GDG.*G00.

You can bypass the LISTC or LISTF prompting panels by using the MASK command. See
“MASK Function”.

Example
LISTC

Syntax
LISTC [name] [RESET] [PROMPT]

Aliases
LC, LISTC

Defaults
none – add to the LISTC/LISTF table

Required
none

Command Reference 239

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Operands
name 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters, the LISTC/LISTF table name to retrieve.
RESET Clears the LISTC/LISTF table before adding any new entries.
PROMPT Prompts for LISTC operands even if a LISTC/LISTF table exists.

Remarks
The LISTC/LISTF ISPF table displays in response to a LISTC command. When you are in a
LISTC display, you can delete a part of the table, sort the data in different directions, find
data in the table, print a part of the table, store a part of the table in a data set, etc. For
assistance with the different options available, use the HELP command, CUA functions, or
you enter an O command as either a primary command or as a line command.

There are ten defined formats for LISTC/LISTF. Select which panels you want to use with
the SETPANEL command as shown below. You can switch between these panel formats
with RIGHT and LEFT commands. Following this panel is a sample of each of the ten
defined panel formats. StarTool FDM displays DSORG (under header DO) as DA for direct,
PE for partitioned extended, PO for partitioned, PS for sequential, and VS for VSAM.

Each of the panels contain a column of data under the C (for Catalog) header which is Y if
the data set is cataloged, N if the data set is not cataloged, and - if the data set catalog
status was not checked.

The column of data under the V (for Volume) header provides feedback as to whether or
not the data set is present on the volume. Y and N are short for YES or NO, M is short for
Managed (meaning that it is a SMS data set), and - means that the status of the data set
was not checked.

The following primary commands are supported directly for the LISTC function. For
information on ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see “Common Commands”
in Chapter 2, "ISPF Interface Commands".

ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the LISTC/LISTF table.

Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
APP[LY]
each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

COMPR[ESS] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
COMPRESS subcommand.
In LISTC/LISTF tables, non-partitioned data sets are skipped.
Syntax COMPRESS [LIST/NOLIST/SUMMARY]

DUA[L] Displays a triple line view of the LISTC/LISTF table.

EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on LISTC/LISTF table data.
(or ET[BL])
ER[ASE] Deletes the LISTC/LISTF table in memory and on disk.
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses between
individual commands.
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.

240 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Syntax
F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[ANY/DSNAME/VOLUME/DO/RECFM/CDATE/ RDATE]

FI[ND] Global command. Changes to each table data set and issues a FIND
subcommand. In LISTC/LISTF tables, non-partitioned data sets are
skipped.
Syntax
FIND memgroup 'anystring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]

GL[OBAL] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
StarTool FDM subcommand.
Syntax GLOBAL anysubcommand [anyoperands]

ID Changes the table ID name.

Syntax ID name

(where name is a 1- to 6-character alphanumeric name).

LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the LISTC/LISTF table. PF keys
10 and 22 are normally set to LEFT.
LISTC Searches for more data sets from a catalog source (after
prompting).
Syntax LISTC [name] [RESET]

(where name is 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters)

LISTF Searches for more data sets from a volume source (after
prompting).
Syntax LISTF [name] [RESET]

(where name is 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters)

LO[AD] Loads data set names from operating system control blocks.
Syntax LOAD APFLST/LNKLST/LPALST [RESET]

LOAD LNKLST now supports both static and dynamic linklists.

L[OCATE] Positions to a data line in sorted tables by searching the current
sorted column for the specified data.
Syntax LOCATE data
pdsname/pvolume/cdate/rdate/trksize/
trkfree/extents/blksize/dsorg/alloc

MER[GE] Merges data from a saved LISTC/LISTF table into the current table.
Syntax MERGE name [GROUP/SAMPLE] [RESET]

(where name is 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters)

MODEL Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
MODEL command.
NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the LISTC/LISTF table.
NOS[AVE] Specifies that the current LISTC/LISTF table should not be saved on
disk regardless of the setting of “Automatic save” in SETALL for
LISTC/LISTF.

Command Reference 241

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the LISTC/LISTF function

and operand syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the LISTC/LISTF table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REF[RESH] Global command. Updates information and status for all lines in the
LISTC/LISTF table. Also, REFRESH corrects volume name entries for
cataloged data sets.
REM[OVE] Trims the LISTC/LISTF table based on a string match.
Syntax
REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/DSNAME/VOLUME/DO/RECFM/CDATE/RDATE]

REPL[ACE] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
REPLACE subcommand. In LISTC/LISTF tables, non-partitioned data
sets are skipped.
Syntax
REPLACE memgroup 'fromstring' 'tostring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]
[WRITE/NOWRITE]

RESET Often used with data set tagging, clears the DATA/MSG field in all
table entries.
RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location.
PF keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the LISTC/LISTF table. PF keys
11 and 23 are normally set to RIGHT.
SAVE Creates a permanent table for use in a different StarTool FDM
session.
Syntax SAVE [name] [REPLACE/NOREPL]

(where name is 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters)

SEEK Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and looks
for a member. In LISTC/LISTF tables, non-partitioned data sets are
skipped.
Syntax SEEK member

SO[RT] Sorts function tables into an alternate order. SORT with no operands
sorts the table in default order, while SORT with a field name sorts
the table in that order.
Syntax SORT [DSNAME/VOLUME/CDATE/RDATE/SIZE/FREE
/EXTENTS/BLKSIZE/TYPE/ALLOC]
[ASCEND/DESCEND]

TAG Applies the specified line command to table entries marked with
*TAG* in the DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are

maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well
as your installation.
WHO[HAS] Global command. Issues a WHOHAS subcommand for each data set
in the table.

242 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

X Clears the LISTC/LISTF table relative to the cursor position.

Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the LISTC/LISTF table; this is equivalent to X ALL

The following line commands are supported in the LISTC function – note that the DFHSM
commands are supported from the UT panel.

+ Provides an extension panel for command entry.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,+”>

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

6 Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.

A Changes to the data set and executes an alternate subcommand.
ACAT Catalogs a non-VSAM data set using an alternate user catalog from the UT
panel.
AUNC Uncatalogs a non-VSAM data set using an alternate user catalog from the
UT panel.
B Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.
C Changes to the data set.
CAT Catalogs this data set.
COPY Changes to the data set and invokes the COPY subcommand.
DEL Deletes this data set (normally after a confirmation prompt).
DUP Changes to the data set and invokes the DUP subcommand.
E Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.
GO Changes to the data set using GO processing (a number is optional).
HBAC HBBACK DFHSM command to back up the data set.
HBDE HBDEL DFHSM command for the data set.
HDEL HDEL DFHSM command for the data set.
HMIG HMIG DFHSM command for the data set.
HML2 HMIG DFHSM command for the data set to LEVEL 2.
HREC HRECALL DFHSM command for the data set.
HSM Prompts for various HSM actions on a data set.
IDC Performs an IDCAMS LISTC and directs output to the log.
INFO Displays information on the data set in panel format; also, updates data set
information.
K Kills and clears all following line commands.
LC Checks the catalog entry for this data set and merges that entry into the
LISTC/LISTF table (if different); also, updates data set information.
LOG Copies the line into the log.
M Provides line command selection and entry assistance.
ML Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.

Command Reference 243

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

MOD Changes to the data set and issues a MODEL command.

O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
PB Changes to the data set and PBROWSEs this data set.
PE Changes to the data set and PEDITs this data set.
RACF Provides entry assist panels for RACF commands LISTDSD, ADDSD,
PERMIT, ALTDSD, DELDSD, and SEARCH.
REFR Refreshes and updates information and status for this data set.
REN Renames this data set (after prompting).
S Selects line command (normally CHANGE, it is set by SETSEL).
SEEK Changes to the data set and checks for a member.
SETA Saves a StarTool FDM subcommand for repeated use by the ALT line
command.
TAG Marks this table entry with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.
U Changes to the data set and displays USAGE.
UNC Uncatalogs this data set (not allowed for SMS-managed data sets).
UT Selects the extended user line command panel.
VSAM Invokes VSAM manipulation and information services.
W Adds the data set name to the WORKPAD.
WHO Checks for users of this data set with the WHOHAS subcommand.
X Drops the table line.
XCOP Changes to the data set and interfaces with extended copy.
XMIT Transmits the data set to another user.
Z Changes to the data set and issues a COMPRESS subcommand.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in the
LISTC function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR- t=”Block line command,==”>

AA A command. Changes and executes an alternate subcommand for each line.

BB B command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
CC C command. Changes data set for each line.
DDEL DEL command. Deletes each data set (normally after a confirmation prompt
on each one).
EE E command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
GG GO command. Changes to each data set using GO processing.
LL LOG command. Copies the range of lines into the log.
MM ML command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.

244 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

SS S command. Selects each line in the range of table lines.

SSEE SEEK command. Changes to each data set and checks for a member.
UU U command. Changes and displays USAGE for each line.
XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.
ZZ Z command. Changes and issues a COMPRESS for each line.

----------------------------- Set PANEL Defaults -----------------------------

OPTION ===>
Enter SAVE as a primary command to save these variables in your ISPF
profile as defaults for future StarTool sessions or press PF6/PF18
More: +
LISTC/LISTF Displays in order of RIGHT rotation:
Show Attributes view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DO RECFM LRECL BLKSI
Show Dsname view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DO RECFM (full dsname)
Show Custom view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DO RECFM ... (customized?)
Show Size view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- SIZE FREE USED DEVICE
Show Extent view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- EXT SEC ALLOC RND KEY RKP
Show User view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DO RECFM ... (customized?)
Show Double line view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DEVICE DO .. (for 2 lines
Show Created view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- CREATED REFERENCED UPD
Show Expiration view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- EXPIRATION DIR USED RACF
Show Total view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DEVICE DO .. (for 3 lines)
...
In-progress message increments (use 999999 to suppress these messages):
Memlist increment ===> 500 members processed between messages
LISTC/LISTF increment ===> 250 data sets processed between messages
LISTVOL increment ===> 50 volumes processed between messages
VMAP increment ===> 500 data sets processed between messages

--------------------- List files TESTXX - (Attributes) ---- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- VOLUME DO RECFM LRECL BLKSI
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ STR911 PO FB 80 9040
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ STR92P PO VB 255 9040
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________ MIGRAT

------------------------ List files TESTXX - (Dsname) ------ ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME --------------------- VOLUME DO RECFM
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST____________________________ STR911 PO FB
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV___________________________ STR92P PO VB
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV__________________________ MIGRAT

---------------------- List files TESTXX - (Custom) -------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- VOLUME DO RECFM LRECL BLKSI
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ STR911 PO FB 80 9040
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ STR92P PO VB 255 9040
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________ MIGRAT

Command Reference 245

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

------------------------- List files TESTXX - (Size) ------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- SIZE FREE USED DEVICE
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ 100T 4T 96% 3380K
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ 2T 0T 100% 3390M3
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________

----------------------- List files TESTXX - (Extent) ------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- EXT SEC ALLOC RND KEY RKP
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ 3 33 TRK NO 0 0
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ 1 10 TRK NO 0 0
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________

---------------------- List files TESTXX - (User) ---------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- VOLUME DO RECFM LRECL BLKSI
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ STR911 PO FB 80 9040
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ STR92P PO VB 255 9040
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________ MIGRAT

--------------------- List files TESTXX - (Double line) ---- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR972 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME --------------------- VOLUME DEVICE DO
RECFM LRECL BLKSI SIZE FREE USED CREATED EXPIRATION REFERENCED
Y Y *CHANGE* WSER07.LIB.CLIST____________________________ STR911 3380K PO
FB 80 9040 100T 4T 96% 1989/10/04 ** NONE ** 1995/06/28
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV___________________________ STR92P 3390M3 PO
VB 255 9040 2T 0T 100% 1995/03/16 1995/12/31 1995/06/20
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV__________________________ MIGRAT

----------------------- List files TESTXX - (Created) ------ ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- CREATED REFERENCED UPD
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ 1989/10/04 1995/06/28 U
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ 1994/03/16 1995/06/20
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________

---------------------- List files TESTXX - (Expiration) ---- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR972 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- EXPIRATION DIR USED RACF
Y Y *CHANGE* WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ ** NONE ** 73 64
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ 1995/12/31
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________

246 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

------------------------ List files TESTXX - (Total) ------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR972 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME --------------------- VOLUME DEVICE
DO LRECL KEY CREATED EXPIRATION --SIZE- -DIR- ALLOC USED
RECFM BLKSI RKP REFERENCED UPD EXT --FREE- -USED -SEC- RND
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST____________________________ STR911 3380K
PO 80 0 1989/10/04 ** NONE ** 100T TRK 96%
FB 9040 0 1995/06/28 U 3 4T 33 NO
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV___________________________ STR92P 3390M3
PO 255 0 1994/03/16 1994/12/31 2T TRK 100%
FB 9040 0 1995/06/20 1 0T 10 NO
Y - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV__________________________ MIGRAT

----------------------------- ut for LC user line commands -----------------

OPTION ===>

Choose one of the following:

ALC - Allocate data set prompt
HDEL - HDEL command for data set 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATA9040'
HMIG - HMIG command for data set 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATA9040'
HML2 - HMIG to LEV2 for data set 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATA9040'
HBDE - HBDEL command for data set 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATA9040'
HREC - HRECALL command for data set 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATA9040'

Dynamic Commands--note: < = MVSD4B,

/ = 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATA9040'
DSN3 - CMD(DSAT / VOL(<)) /* THIS IS A COMMENT
LCLC - TRP(LISTC ENT(/) ALL) /* THIS IS A COMMENT
ST__ - TRP(STARTOOL / USAGE) /* PROVIDE USAGE STATISTICS
____ -

------------------------- Dataset Information Display ------------------------

OPTION ===>

Dataset name: SER07.SMSTEST.DATA08

on Volume: MVSD4B SMS classes
DSORG: PE CREATION DATE: 1992/07/31 STORAGE CLASS: TESTSC
RECFM: FB REFERENCE DATE: 1993/04/14 MANAGEMENT CLASS: (NULL)
LRECL: 80 EXPIRATION DATE: 1992/04/09 DATA CLASS: DATAF
BLKSIZE: 32720 UPDATE FLAG: U Last backup: 00.000
DATASET TYPE: LIBRARY
ALLOCATED SPACE: 132T
UNUSED SPACE: 0T KEY LENGTH: 0
ALLOCATION TYPE: TRK KEY POSITION: 0
SECONDARY SIZE: 1
EXTENT COUNT: 123

Command Reference 247

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

---------------------------- VSAM KSDS information ---------------------------

OPTION ===>
More: +
Cluster name ===> SER07.VSAM.IS.CLUSTER
Data name ===> SER07.VSAM.IS.CLUSTER.DATA
Index name ===> SER07.VSAM.IS.CLUSTER.INDEX
Catalog name ===> ICFUCAT.VTSG312
Key length ===> 8 Owner ===> (NULL)
Key offset ===> 0 Creation Date ===> 1993.006
Average LRECL===> 200 Expiration ===> 1994.164 14.24.07
Maximum LRECL===> 9000
SPND NERAS NRUS Storage class ===>
UNORD SHR(1,3) Management ===>
Data class ===>
Data space usage -TRACKS- KILOBYTES - CA's - - CI's - percent
Allocated space 1 40 1 10
High used space 1 40 1 10 100.0
Real used space 1 28 1 7 70.0
Index space usage -TRACKS- KILOBYTES - CA's - - CI's - percent
Allocated space 1 40 1 10
High used space 1 4 1 1 10.0

Usage indicators for space and performance

NIMBD NREPL SPEED

Space indicators -- CI -- -- CA -- Usage indicators
Percent free ===> 10 10 Total records ===> 80
Splits ===> 2 0 Deleted ===> 0
Percent Splits > 20.0 0.0 Updated ===> 8
attributes - Data - - Index- Inserted ===> 8
CI Size ===> 4096 4096 Retrieved ===> 4549
CIs per CA ===> 10 10
Block size ===> 4096 4096 Buffer space ===> 12288
Block/Track ===> 10 10 Index levels ===> 1
Tracks/CA ===> 1 1 Index records ===> 1

LISTF Function
Use the LF or LISTF command to display data sets from a volume or VTOC source in an
ISPF table. The table displaying LISTF data sets is combined with LISTC data sets.

LISTC/LISTF tables can be saved permanently. They are saved in the ISPF profile data set
by default (ISPPROF) but the DDNAME can be changed in the SETALL option. To manage
these tables, use the SAVE, ID, MERGE, NOSAVE, and ERASE commands. To automatically
save these tables at program end or when a new LISTC/LISTF table is retrieved, check the
setting of “Automatic save” in SETALL for LISTC/LISTF.

Saved LISTC/LISTF tables are given member names of the form PDSLF0na if the name is
one or two numeric digits; otherwise, use a name of the form ##name where name is a
1- to 6-character alphanumeric table identification name.

In the LISTF prompt panel, enter a volume mask in the search field and the LEVEL/DSN
field as a partial data set name. For the LISTF volume mask, use a / may for a pattern
specification. Use an * for a combination name, and use a : for a range. For example:
TSO/03, TSO*, and TSO:TSO80. For the data set name, each level can contain an *
before or after any characters in that level. For example: SYS*.NU*.*.*XY.

248 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

You can bypass the LISTC or LISTF prompting panels by using the MASK command. See
“MASK Function”.

Example
LISTF

Syntax
LISTF [name] [RESET] [PROMPT]

Aliases
LF, LISTF

Defaults
none—add to the LISTC/LISTF table

Required
none

Operands
name 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters, the LISTC/LISTF table name to retrieve.
RESET Clears the LISTC/LISTF table before adding any new entries.
PROMPT Prompts for LISTF operands even if a LISTC/LISTF table exists.

Remarks
The LISTF/LISTC ISPF table displays in response to a LISTF command. When you are in a
LISTF display, you can delete a part of the table, sort the data in different directions, find
data in the table, print a part of the table, store a part of the table in a data set, etc. For
assistance with the different options available, use the HELP command, CUA functions, or
enter an O command as either a primary command or as a line command.

There are ten defined formats for LISTC/LISTF. Select which panels you want to use with
the SETPANEL command, as shown below. You can switch between these panel formats
with RIGHT and LEFT commands. Following this panel is a sample of each of the ten
defined panel formats. StarTool FDM displays DSORG (under header DO) as DA for direct,
PE for partitioned extended, PO for partitioned, PS for sequential, and VS for VSAM.

Each of the panels contain a column of data under the C (for Catalog) header which is Y if
the data set is cataloged, N if the data set is not cataloged, and - if catalog status was not
checked.

The column of data under the V (for Volume) header provides feedback as to whether or
not the data set is present on the volume. Y and N are short for YES or NO, M is short for

Command Reference 249

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Managed (meaning that it is a SMS data set), and - means that the status of the data set
was not checked.

The following primary commands are supported directly for the LISTF function; for
information on ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see “Common Commands”
in Chapter 2, "ISPF Interface Commands".

ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the LISTC/LISTF table.

APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

COMPR[ESS] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
COMPRESS subcommand. In LISTC/LISTF tables, non-partitioned
data sets are skipped.
Syntax COMPRESS [LIST/NOLIST/SUMMARY]

DUA[L] Displays a triple line view of the LISTC/LISTF table.

EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on LISTC/LISTF table data.
(ET[BL])
ER[ASE] Deletes the LISTC/LISTF table in memory and on disk.
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses between
commands.
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[ANY/DSNAME/VOLUME/DO/RECFM/CDATE/RDATE]

FI[ND] Global command. Changes to each table data set and issues a FIND
subcommand. In LISTC/LISTF tables, non-partitioned data sets are
skipped.
Syntax FIND memgroup 'anystring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]

GL[OBAL] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
StarTool FDM subcommand.
Syntax GLOBAL anysubcommand [anyoperands]

ID Changes the table ID name.

Syntax ID name

(where name is a 1- to 6-character alphanumeric name)

LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the LISTC/LISTF table. PF keys
10 and 22 are normally set to LEFT.
LISTC Searches for more data sets from a catalog source (after
prompting).
Syntax LISTC [name] [RESET]

(where name is 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters)

LISTF Searches for more data sets from a volume source (after
prompting).
Syntax LISTF [name] [RESET]

250 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

(where name is 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters)

LO[AD] Loads data set names from operating system control blocks.
Syntax LOAD APFLST/LNKLST/LPALST [RESET]
L[OCATE] Positions to a data line in sorted tables by searching the current
sorted column for the specified data.
Syntax LOCATE name
pdsname/pvolume/cdate/rdate/trksize/
trkfree/extents/blksize/dsorg/alloc
MER[GE] Merges data from a saved LISTC/LISTF table into the current table.
Syntax MERGE name [GROUP/SAMPLE] [RESET]

(where name is 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters)

MODEL Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
MODEL command.
NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the LISTC/LISTF table.
NOS[AVE] Specifies that the current LISTC/LISTF table not be saved on disk
regardless of the setting of “Automatic save” in SETALL for LISTC/
LISTF.
O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the LISTC/LISTF function
and operand syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the LISTC/LISTF table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REF[RESH] Global command. Updates information and status for all lines in the
LISTC/LISTF table. Also, REFRESH corrects volume name entries for
cataloged data sets.
REM[OVE] Trims the LISTC/LISTF table based on a string match.
Syntax
REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/DSNAME/VOLUME/DO/RECFM/CDATE/RDATE]

REPL[ACE] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues a
REPLACE command. In LISTC/LISTF tables, non-partitioned data
sets are skipped.
Syntax
REPLACE memgroup 'fromstring' 'tostring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]
[WRITE/NOWRITE]

RESET Often used with data set tagging, clears the DATA/MSG field in all
table entries.
RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location.
PF keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the LISTC/LISTF table. PF keys
11 and 23 are normally set to RIGHT.
SAVE Creates a permanent table for use in a different StarTool FDM
session.
Syntax SAVE [name] [REPLACE/NOREPL]

Command Reference 251

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

(where name is 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters)

SEEK Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and looks
for a member. In LISTC/LISTF tables, non-partitioned data sets are
skipped.
Syntax SEEK member

SO[RT] Sorts function tables into an alternate order. SORT with no operands
sorts the table in default order, while SORT with a field name sorts
the table in that order.
Syntax SORT [DSNAME/VOLUME/CDATE/RDATE/SIZE/FREE
/EXTENTS/BLKSIZE/TYPE/ALLOC]
[ASCEND/DESCEND]

TAG Applies the specified line command to table entries marked with
*TAG* in the DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are

maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well
as your installation.
WHO[HAS] Global command. Issues a WHOHAS subcommand for each data set
in the table.
X Clears the LISTC/LISTF table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the LISTC/LISTF table; this is equivalent to X ALL

The following line commands are supported in the LISTF function – note that the DFHSM
commands are supported from the UT panel.

+ Provides an extension panel for command entry.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,+”>

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

6 Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.

A Changes to the data set and executes an alternate subcommand.
ACAT VSAM data set using an alternate user catalog from the UT panel.
AUNC Uncatalogs a non-VSAM data set using an alternate user catalog from the UT
panel.
B Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.
C Changes to the data set.
CAT Catalogs this data set.
COPY Changes to the data set and invokes the COPY subcommand.
DEL Deletes this data set (normally after a confirmation prompt).
DUP Changes to the data set and invokes the DUP subcommand.
E Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.
GO Changes to the data set using GO processing (a number is optional).
HBAC HBBACK DFHSM command to back up the data set.

252 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

HBDE HBDEL DFHSM command for the data set.

HDEL HDEL DFHSM command for the data set.
HMIG HMIG DFHSM command for the data set.
HML2 HMIG DFHSM command for the data set to LEVEL 2.
HREC HRECALL DFHSM command for the data set.
HSM Prompts for various HSM actions on a data set.
IDC Performs an IDCAMS LISTC and directs output to the log.
INFO Displays information on the data set in panel format; also, updates data set
information.
K Kills and clears all following line commands.
LC Checks the catalog entry for this data set and merges that entry into the
LISTC/LISTF table (if different); also, updates data set information.
LOG Copies the line into the log.
M Provides line command selection and entry assistance.
ML Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.
MOD Changes to the data set and issues a MODEL command.
O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
PB Changes to the data set and PBROWSEs this data set.
PE Changes to the data set and PEDITs this data set.
RACF Provides entry assist panels for RACF commands: LISTDSD, ADDSD, PERMIT,
ALTDSD, DELDSD, and SEARCH.
REFR Refreshes and updates information and status for this data set.
REN Renames this data set (after prompting).
S Selects line command (normally CHANGE, it is set by SETSEL).
SEEK Changes to the data set and checks for a member.
SETA Saves a StarTool FDM subcommand for repeated use by the ALT line
command.
TAG Marks this table entry with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.
U Changes to the data set and displays USAGE.
UNC Uncatalogs this data set (not allowed for SMS-managed data sets).
UT Selects the extended user line command panel.
VSAM Invokes VSAM manipulation and information services.
W Adds the data set name to the WORKPAD.
WHO Checks for users of this data set with the WHOHAS subcommand.
X Drops the table line.
XCOP Changes to the data set and interfaces with extended copy.
XMIT Transmits the data set to another user.
Z Changes to the data set and issues a COMPRESS subcommand.

Command Reference 253

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in the
LISTF function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR-t=”Block line command,==”>

AA A command. Changes and executes an alternate subcommand for each

line.
BB B command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
CC C command. Changes data set for each line.
DDEL DEL command. Deletes each data set (normally after a confirmation
prompt on each one).
EE E command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
GG GO command. Changes to each data set using GO processing.
LL LOG command. Copies the range of lines into the log.
MM ML command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.
SS S command. Selects each line in the range of table lines.
SSEE SEEK command. Changes to each data set and checks for a member.
UU U command. Changes and displays USAGE for each line.
XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.
ZZ Z command. Changes and issues a COMPRESS for each line.

----------------------------- Set PANEL Defaults -----------------------------

OPTION ===>
Enter SAVE as a primary command to save these variables in your ISPF
profile as defaults for future StarTool sessions or press PF6/PF18
More: +
LISTC/LISTF Displays in order of RIGHT rotation:
Show Attributes view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DO RECFM LRECL BLKSI
Show Dsname view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DO RECFM (full dsname)
Show Custom view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DO RECFM ... (customized?)
Show Size view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- SIZE FREE USED DEVICE
Show Extent view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- EXT SEC ALLOC RND KEY RKP
Show User view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DO RECFM ... (customized?)
Show Double line view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DEVICE DO .. (for 2 lines
Show Created view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- CREATED REFERENCED UPD
Show Expiration view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- EXPIRATION DIR USED RACF
Show Total view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- VOLUME DEVICE DO .. (for 3 lines)
...
In-progress message increments (use 999999 to suppress these messages):
Memlist increment ===> 500 members processed between messages
LISTC/LISTF increment ===> 250 data sets processed between messages
LISTVOL increment ===> 50 volumes processed between messages
VMAP increment ===> 500 data sets processed between messages

254 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

--------------------- List files TESTXX - (Attributes) ---- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- VOLUME DO RECFM LRECL BLKSI
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ STR911 PO FB 80 9040
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ STR92P PO VB 255 9040
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________ MIGRAT

------------------------ List files TESTXX - (Dsname) ------ ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME --------------------- VOLUME DO RECFM
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST____________________________ STR911 PO FB
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV___________________________ STR92P PO VB
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV__________________________ MIGRAT

---------------------- List files TESTXX - (Custom) -------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- VOLUME DO RECFM LRECL BLKSI
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ STR911 PO FB 80 9040
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ STR92P PO VB 255 9040
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________ MIGRAT

------------------------- List files TESTXX - (Size) ------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- SIZE FREE USED DEVICE
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ 100T 4T 96% 3380K
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ 2T 0T 100% 3390M3
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________

----------------------- List files TESTXX - (Extent) ------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- EXT SEC ALLOC RND KEY RKP
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ 3 33 TRK NO 0 0
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ 1 10 TRK NO 0 0
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________

---------------------- List files TESTXX - (User) ---------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- VOLUME DO RECFM LRECL BLKSI
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ STR911 PO FB 80 9040
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ STR92P PO VB 255 9040
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________ MIGRAT

Command Reference 255

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

--------------------- List files TESTXX - (Double line) ---- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR972 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME --------------------- VOLUME DEVICE DO
RECFM LRECL BLKSI SIZE FREE USED CREATED EXPIRATION REFERENCED
Y Y *CHANGE* WSER07.LIB.CLIST____________________________ STR911 3380K PO
FB 80 9040 100T 4T 96% 1989/10/04 ** NONE ** 1995/06/28
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV___________________________ STR92P 3390M3 PO
VB 255 9040 2T 0T 100% 1995/03/16 1995/12/31 1995/06/20
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV__________________________ MIGRAT

---------------------- List files TESTXX - (Created) ------ ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR969 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- CREATED REFERENCED UPD
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ 1989/10/04 1995/06/28 U
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ 1994/03/16 1995/06/20
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________

---------------------- List files TESTXX - (Expiration) ---- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR972 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME ---------- EXPIRATION DIR USED RACF
Y Y *CHANGE* WSER07.LIB.CLIST_________________ ** NONE ** 73 64
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV________________ 1995/12/31
- - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV_______________

------------------------ List files TESTXX - (Total) ------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR972 MEM=PDSPN49:PDSPN75 -------------------
CMD C V DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME --------------------- VOLUME DEVICE
DO LRECL KEY CREATED EXPIRATION --SIZE- -DIR- ALLOC USED
RECFM BLKSI RKP REFERENCED UPD EXT --FREE- -USED -SEC- RND
Y Y *CHANGE WSER07.LIB.CLIST____________________________ STR911 3380K
PO 80 0 1989/10/04 ** NONE ** 100T TRK 96%
FB 9040 0 1995/06/28 U 3 4T 33 NO
Y Y *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTV___________________________ STR92P 3390M3
PO 255 0 1994/03/16 1994/12/31 2T TRK 100%
FB 9040 0 1995/06/20 1 0T 10 NO
Y - *REFRESH WSER07.LIB.CLISTVV__________________________ MIGRAT

256 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

-------------------- StarTool o LISTC/LISTF Line Command ---------------------

OPTION ===>

Choose one of the following line commands:

More: +
a - change to the data set and execute an alternate saved command.
b - change to the data set and MEMLIST all.
c - change to 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATA9040'
cat - catalog the data set.
del - delete the data set (after prompting).
e - change to the data set and MEMLIST all.
go - change to the data set using GO processing (a number is optional).
idc - perform an IDCAMS LISTC with output to log.
info - display data set information in panel format and update statistics.
lc - check the catalog entry and merge that information into the table.
log - format and copy line to log.
m - change to the data set and MEMLIST all.
ren - rename the data set (after prompting).

LISTGRP Subcommand
The LISTGRP subcommand lists the member group specifications for the current member
group.

LISTGRP lists only the names of the member groups; it does not list member names.

Example
LISTGRP

Syntax
LISTGRP

Aliases
LISTG, LISTGR, LISTGRP

Defaults
none

Required
none

Operands
none

Command Reference 257

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ------------ ROW 1 OF 15
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.PDSE112.CLIST,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=(ADD* -------------------------
>----->AT (add*,cut/,jcl/)
PDS230I ISPF Stats: VER.MOD CREATED LAST MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD ID
PDS230I ADDCYL 01.00 93/05/07 93/05/07 7:55 42 42 0 SER07
PDS230I ADDDIR 01.02 93/05/07 93/05/07 8:45 48 48 3 SER07
PDS230I ADDTRK 01.03 93/05/07 93/05/07 8:27 42 42 4 SER07
PDS230I CUT 01.00 93/06/07 93/06/07 9:29 160 160 0 SER07
PDS230I CUTJCL 01.22 93/06/18 93/06/20 6:53 179 168 0 SER09
PDS230I $PDSWJCL 01.02 93/06/18 93/06/19 9:05 24 17 0 SER09
PDS230I CUTJCL 01.22 93/06/18 93/06/20 6:53 179 168 0 SER09
PDS117I 7 members counted; cumulative size is 674 records

>----->listgrp
MEM (ADD*
CUT/
JCL/)
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ***********************************

LISTV Function
The LV or LISTV command displays disk volume space usage in an ISPF table.

Example
LISTV stor:stor03

Syntax
LISTV mask [RESET] [ADDR/GENERIC]

Aliases
LV, LISTV

Defaults
none – add to the LISTV table

Required
none

258 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Operands
mask If ADDR or GENERIC do not follow this parameter, displays all volumes
that match the volume mask (mask may contain 1 to 6 characters. An *
or : can display all volumes.Use a / for a pattern specification. Use an *
for a combination name. Use a : for a range. For example:
TSO/03,TSO*,TSO:TSO80.

RESET Clears the LISTV table before adding any new entries.
ADDR Displays all volumes that match the partial UCB address (name can
contain 1 to 3 characters). For example: 0C
GENERIC Displays all volumes that map to the system UNITNAME (name can
contain 1 to 8 characters). For example: SYSDA.
STGGRP Displays volumes that match the SMS storage group specified.

Remarks
The LISTV ISPF table displays in response to a LISTV command. When you are in a LISTV
display, you can delete a part of the table, sort the data in different directions, find data in
the table, print a part of the table, store a part of the table in a data set, etc. For
assistance with the different options available, use the HELP command, CUA functions, or
enter an O command as either a primary command or as a line command.

There are five defined formats for LISTV. You can select which panels you want to use with
the SETPANEL command, as shown below. You can switch between these panel formats
with RIGHT and LEFT commands. Following this panel is a sample of each of the defined
formats.

The Attributes LISTV panel shows basic volume space information and volume name,
device address and type, the mount attributes (PRIV, PUB, or STOR), the volume use
count and several status indicators for the volume under the header STAT-INDC:

A The volume is Allocated.

C A Catalog on the volume is open; the CAXWA chain is searched to check this.
D DOS contamination; Indexed VTOC is disabled.
S The volume is marked SHARED in the UCB.
I An Indexed VTOC is on the volume.
M The volume is Managed by SMS.
P A Page data set on the volume is open.
V The volume has the VSAM ownership bit on.
R A CRA (Catalog Recovery Area) is on the volume.

The DATA/MSG field is set to *VTOCERR if the VTOC cannot be input or *RESRV if the
volume is reserved. The VTOC Size panel shows VTOC information for systems
programmers. This includes mount attributes (PRIV, PUB, or STOR), mount status (RESV,
PRES, or SYSRes), storage group name (for SMS-managed volumes), the volume use
count (note that it is displayed as *** if it goes over 999), the VTOC CCHH address, VTOC
size in tracks, free DSCB count, and free VIR count.

Command Reference 259

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

The following primary commands are supported directly for the LISTV function; for
information on ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see “Common Commands”
in Chapter 2, "ISPF Interface Commands".

ADD Adds data sets to the LISTF table for all volumes in the LISTV table
without prompting.
ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the LISTV table.
APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

DUAL Switches to a 2-line view of the LISTV table.

EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on LISTV table data.
ET[BL])
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses between
individual commands.
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[ANY/VOLUME/ADDRESS]

LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the LISTV table. PF keys 10 and
22 are normally set to LEFT.
LISTV Prompts for LISTV parameters and adds additional volumes to the
LISTV table.
Syntax LISTV [mask] [RESET] [ADDR/GENERIC]

LISTVT[OC] Adds data sets to the LISTF table for all volumes in the LISTV table
after a prompt.
L[OCATE] Positions to a data line in sorted tables by searching the current
sorted column for the specified data.
Syntax
LOCATE pvolume/pucb/totalfree/largestfree/attrib

NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the LISTV table.

O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the LISTV function and
syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the LISTV table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REF[RESH] Updates information and status for all lines in the table.
REM[OVE] Trims the LISTV table based on a string match.
Syntax REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/VOLUME/ADDRESS]

RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location.
PF keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the LISTV table. PF keys 11 and
23 are normally set to RIGHT.

260 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

SO[RT] Sorts function tables into an alternate order. SORT with no operands
sorts the table in default order, while SORT with a field name sorts
the table in that order.
Syntax SORT [VOLUME/ADDRESS/ATTR/TYPE/SPACE/LARGEST]
[ASCEND/DESCEND]

SPA[CE] Updates volume space statistics for each volume in the LISTV table.
STATS Updates volume attributes for each volume in the LISTV table.
TAG Applies the specified line command to table entries marked with
*TAG* in the DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are

maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well as
your installation.
X Clears the LISTV table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the LISTV table; this is equivalent to X ALL

The following line commands are supported in the LISTV function:

+ Provides an extension panel for command entry.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,+”>

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

ADD Adds data sets to the LISTF table for this volume with no prompting.
DIRF Tailors batch JCL to set the DIRF bit on for this volume.
INDX Tailors batch JCL to reverse the indexed VTOC status for this volume (an
OS/VTOC will be switched to an indexed status and an indexed volume will
be switched to an OS/VTOC).
K Kills and clears all following line commands.
LF Invokes LISTF to do a VTOC search on this volume after prompting.
LFEX Invokes LISTF to do a VTOC search on this volume with no prompting.
LIST Adds data sets to the LISTF table for this volume after prompting.
LOG Copies the line into the log.
M Provides line command selection and entry assistance.
O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
REFR Updates volume space and attributes for this volume.
S Select line command (normally SPAC, it is set by SETSEL).
SPAC Refreshes space data and statistics for this volume.
STAT Refreshes statistics for this volume.
TAG Mark this table entry with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.
UT Select the extended user line command panel.
VMAP Invokes the VMAP function on this volume.

Command Reference 261

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

VTOC Invokes the TSO VTOC command to display volume contents in the log.
VUSE Invokes the VUSE subcommand on this volume.
X Drops the table line.

Block line commands are doubled letters which delimit a range of table entries for which
the same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in
the LISTV function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
LL LOG command. Copies the range of lines into the log.
OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.
SS S command. Selects each line in the range of table lines.
XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.

------------------------------ Set PANEL Defaults -----------------------------

OPTION ===>
Enter SAVE as a primary command to save these variables in your ISPF
profile as defaults for future StarTool sessions or press PF6/PF18
...
LISTV Displays in order of RIGHT rotation:
Show Attributes view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- Device Mount Total free LARGEST
Show Free Space view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- Device type and free space
Show Percent use view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- Device Mount Percent used
Show VTOC size view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- Device Mount VTOC size Location
Show Custom view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- Device Total .... (customized?)
Show Double line view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- Device Total free/Percent used
...
In-progress message increments (use 999999 to suppress these messages):
Memlist increment ===> 500 members processed between messages
LISTC/LISTF increment ===> 250 data sets processed between messages
LISTVOL increment ===> 50 volumes processed between messages
VMAP increment ===> 500 data sets processed between messages

------------------------ List Volumes - (Attributes) -------- Row 1 to 3 of 3

COMMAND ===> lv trn101 SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER005 MEM= ----------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD VOLUME DATA/MSG DEV DEV MOUNT USE ---- TOTAL FREE ---- LARGEST STATUS
---- NAME -------- ADDR TYPE ATTR CNT CYLS TRKS NUM DSCBS CYLS TRKS -INDC-
LDA001 21B 3390M2 PR 1 1191 4 2 5792 1191 0 A CSI
SER005 246 3390M2 PR 6 821 535 139 5486 607 15 A SIM
TRN101 808 3390M3 ST 11 1587 261 73 9710 932 0 A CSI
****************************** Bottom of data *******************************

+-----------------+
| TOTAL= 1 |
| --------------- |
| ADDS = 1 |
| USED = 51% |
| TOTAL FREE |
| CYLS = 1587 |
+-----------------+

262 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

------------------------- List Volumes - (Free Space) -------- Row 1 to 4 of 4

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=MVS* ------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD VOLUME DATA/MSG DEV ----- TOTAL FREE ------- ---- LARGEST EXTENT ---
--- NAME -------- TYPE CYLS+TRKS=TRACKS->KBYTES CYLS+TRKS=TRACKS->KBYTES
OS39H2 3380 73 13 1108 52605 73 9 1104 52415
OS39R2 3390M3 341 12 5127 290516 341 10 5125 290403
SCPMV5 3380E 813 129 12324 585118 165 0 2475 117508
SER002 3380E 1441 17 21632 1027044 1438 0 21570 1024100

-------------------------- List Volumes - (Percent) --------- Row 1 to 3 of 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER005 MEM= ----------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD VOLUME DATA/MSG DEV DEV MOUNT USE SPACE VTOC FREE FREE LARGEST STATUS
---- NAME -------- ADDR TYPE ATTR CNT USED USED VIRS DSCBS CYLS TRKS -INDC-
LDA001 21B 3390M2 PR 1 46% 3% 284 5792 1191 0 A CSI
SER005 246 3390M2 PR 6 61% 8% 237 5486 607 15 A SIM
TRN101 808 3390M3 ST 11 51% 2% 193 9710 932 0 A CSI
******************************* Bottom of data *******************************

-------------------------- List Volumes - (VTOC Size) -------- Row 1 to 3 of 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER005 MEM= ----------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD VOLUME DATA/MSG DEV DEV -MOUNT- STORAGE USE -----VTOC---- FREE FREE
---- NAME -------- ADDR TYPE ATT STAT CLASS CNT --CCHH-- SIZE DSCBS VIRS
LDA001 21B 3390M2 PR PRES 1 00010000 120 5792 284
SER005 246 3390M2 PR PRES SER90 6 00010000 120 5486 237
TRN101 808 3390M3 ST PRES 11 0000000B 199 9710 193
****************************** Bottom of data ********************************

--------------------------- List Volumes - (Custom) ---------- Row 1 to 3 of 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER005 MEM= ----------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD VOLUME DATA/MSG DEV DEV MOUNT USE --TOTAL FREE-- LARGEST STATUS
---- NAME -------- ADDR TYPE ATTR CNT CYLS TRKS NUM CYLS TRKS -INDC-
STORAGE STATUS SPACE ------ VTOC -------
CLASS ---- USED DSCBS VIRS SIZE USED --CCHH--
LDA001 21B 3390M2 PR 1 1191 4 2 1191 0 A CSI
PRES 46% 5792 284 120 3% 00010000
SER005 246 3390M2 PR 6 821 535 139 607 15 A SIM
SER90 PRES 61% 5486 237 120 8% 00010000
TRN101 808 3390M3 ST 11 1587 261 73 932 0 A CSI
PRES 51% 9710 193 199 2% 0000000B
******************************* Bottom of data *******************************

Command Reference 263

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

--------------------------- List Volumes - (Double) ---------- Row 1 to 3 of 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER005 MEM= ----------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD VOLUME DATA/MSG DEV DEV MOUNT USE --TOTAL FREE-- LARGEST STATUS
---- NAME -------- ADDR TYPE ATTR CNT CYLS TRKS NUM CYLS TRKS -INDC-
STORAGE STATUS SPACE ------ VTOC -------
CLASS ---- USED DSCBS VIRS SIZE USED --CCHH--
LDA001 21B 3390M2 PR 1 1191 4 2 1191 0 A CSI
PRES 46% 5792 284 120 3% 00010000
ut SER005 246 3390M2 PR 6 821 535 139 607 15 A SIM
SER90 PRES 61% 5486 237 120 8% 00010000
TRN101 808 3390M3 ST 11 1587 261 73 932 0 A CSI
PRES 51% 9710 193 199 2% 0000000B
******************************* Bottom of data ******************************

------------------------ ut for LV user line commands ----------------------

OPTION ===>

Choose one of the following for volume SER005

DVOL - DVOL command

Dynamic Commands--note: < = SER005

LONG - TRP(DVOL < LONG) /* LONG FORMAT DVOL
OVER - TRP(VTOC < LIM(PCT LT 50) OR1(UNUSED GT 30))
____ -

LLA Subcommand
The LLA subcommand selectively refreshes member directory entries in LLA-managed
data sets. If a member is not present in the data set, the LLA subcommand removes that
member from LLA management.

Example
LLA isr*

Syntax
LLA memgroup [ALIAS/NOALIAS]
[FORCE ]
[SYNC ]

Aliases
LLA

Defaults
memgroup, ALIAS

264 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Required
none

Operands
memgroup The name of the modules for which the LLA entry is to be refreshed or
removed.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed; for more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
ALIAS Any associated members (aliases, apparent aliases, and associated
main members) are also to be refreshed in the LLA directory with
LLACOPY.
NOALIAS Only the named members are to be refreshed or removed from the LLA
directory with LLACOPY.
FORCE The LLACOPY is to be performed even if StarTool FDM indicates the data
set is not LLA-managed. For example, if PARMLIB member CSVLLAxx
indicates GET_LIB_ENQ(NO). If this parameter is used and the data set
is not managed, a BLDL is performed by the operating system instead of
an LLACOPY.
SYNC Members that are not synchronized with their directory entries are to be
selectively refreshed. SYNC can update only changed members in a
library thereby saving resources required to needlessly stage members.
SYNC processing is only available for LLA-managed, LINKLIST data sets
because a system BLDL is used to determine a member’s LLA status.
Therefore, this routine cannot determine the LLA status of any members
that are also in a TASKLIB data set.
NOTE SYNC processing compares directory entries provided by LLA
against directory entries from disk to determine if members are
synchronized. This type of check cannot detect a zap or update in
place.

Remarks
Internally, the LLA subcommand issues an LLACOPY macro to refresh LLA entries.
LLACOPY does not refresh LLA if:
 The current data set is not managed by LLA
 LLA is not active; there is no LLA directory to update
 System level does not support LLA

When you first enter an LLA managed library with StarTool FDM or you request a USAGE
subcommand, you should get the feedback message:

PDS189I This data set is managed by LLA”

If you attempt to use the LLA subcommand and LLA is not active or the data set is not
managed by LLA, you should get the error message:

“PDS727E This data set is not managed by LLA”

Command Reference 265

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

If the operating system level does not support LLA, LLACOPY returns codes associated
with BLDL. That is, a member that is present gets a message saying the LLA entry was
refreshed. A member that is not present gets a message saying the LLA entry was
removed.

Issue an ‘LLA REFRESH’ command to resolve these error messages.

LLA and Deleted Members

Use the LLA subcommand as a line command in a MEMLIST table to manage deleted
members.

If you are planning to rename members of an LLA controlled data set, set “Remove
renamed members” in SETALL for MEMLIST to NO. Then, after a member is renamed with
the REN line command, enter an LLA line command on both the old and new member
names to inform LLA of their status changes. After the LLA subcommands finish, remove
the old member name with an X line command.

If you are planning to delete members of an LLA controlled data set, set “Remove deleted
members” in SETALL for MEMLIST to NO. Then, after a member is deleted with the DEL
line command, enter an LLA line command on the deleted member name to inform LLA
that the member has been deleted from the data set. After the LLA subcommand finishes,
you can remove the deleted member with an X line command.

-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log # 1 -- ROW 195 to 197 of 197

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SYS1.V310.SYSLINK,VOL=SER=SYSPDS MEM=STARTOOL ------------------------
>----->lla (startool,oldmod)
PDS073I STARTOOL has been refreshed
PDS073I PDSTOOLS has been refreshed
PDS074I OLDMOD has been removed
PDS073I PDSE has been refreshed
PDS073I PDS has been refreshed
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

LOG Function
The LOG command displays the current or one of nine session logs. LOG table 1 is the
default. It is the table displayed when dialog mode is first started.

Example
LOG

Syntax
LOG [num] [RESET] [NODISPL]

266 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Aliases
LO, LOG, 8

Defaults
1 initially; otherwise, the current log table.

Required
none

Operands
num Identifies the log table desired (1 through 9).
RESET Empties the selected log table and initializes it with the PDS300I default
message.
NODISPL Sets the LOG function to use the selected numbered session log;
however, it does not cause a switch from the current function. RESET and
NODISPL are often used together to clear a log table without transiting to
the nullified log table.

Remarks
The ISPMODE, ISPXEQ, or MEMLIST subcommand is used to first enter dialog mode. After
you are in dialog mode, use the LOG command to display any one of nine log tables.

The log is displayed in response to a LOG command or to display the output from a
subcommand. When you are in the log table, you can delete a part of the log, find data in
the log, print a part of the log, store a part of the log in a data set, etc. For assistance with
the different options, use the HELP command, CUA functions, or enter an O command as
a primary command.

In the following, LOG session processing is described in more detail. The PUTLINE and
PUTGET routines are monitored for data.
 When the PUTLINE routine is entered, the dialog adds another log table entry.
 If an output checkpoint is reached for a subcommand (by default, 250 output lines as
set by SETALL for the LOG), ISPMODE positions the log table display to the beginning
of the output of this subcommand and allows you to continue or terminate. You must
respond to this screen before you can enter any StarTool FDM subcommands. Some
useful commands in this situation are:

C Continue with the output from the subcommand.

END Terminate the subcommand (using a simulated attention).
F Find data in the log.

 By default, CONTROL PROMPT is enabled. This enables prompting in several situations

with StarTool FDM messages PDS390A through PDS399A at critical decision points in
StarTool FDM processing. StarTool FDM operates in reply required mode until you

Command Reference 267

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

respond to these messages. You cannot enter other StarTool FDM subcommands.
Some useful commands in this situation are:

CAN On a PDS390A prompt from RESTORE, enter CAN to terminate RESTORE

processing.
F Find data in the log.
NO Indicates that StarTool FDM not complete the current action.
YES Indicates that StarTool FDM continue with the current action.

 When the PUTGET routine is entered, the dialog positions the log display to the
beginning of the output of the just completed subcommand. Enter any type of
subcommand or command at this time.

The following primary commands are supported in the LOG function. For documentation
on ISPMODE commands available anywhere, see “Common Commands” in Chapter 2,
"ISPF Interface Commands".

ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the log.

BAT[CHJCL] Builds batch JCL that includes all StarTool FDM statements in the
LOG table.
CAN After a reply required for RESTORE, specifies that StarTool FDM
terminate RESTORE processing. A YES response allows the
restoration of the current deleted member and a NO response
skips the current deleted member for RESTORE processing.
COLS Provides a column ruler in the log for determining column
numbers.
CONT[INUE] After a checkpoint, specifies that StarTool FDM continue the
current interrupted process until the next checkpoint interval as
specified by SETALL for the LOG. Use END to terminate the
process.
DUA[L] Displays a double line view of the log table.
EDITL[OG] Enters an edit session on the output from the last subcommand.
(EL[OG])
EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on data from the log.
(ET[BL])
F Finds a string. Resets the display start location and positions the
cursor.
Syntax F anystring [nn mm] [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]

(where nn and mm are column numbers)

LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the log table. PF keys 10 and 22
are normally set to LEFT.
MERGE Adds members to the MEMLIST table from a saved MEMLIST table.
Syntax MERGE name [RESET] [NOSTATS]

(where name is 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters)

268 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

NO After a required reply, specifies that StarTool FDM not complete the
current action. A YES response allows the process to continue. For
a RESTORE subcommand, enter CAN to terminate RESTORE
processing.
NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the log table.
O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the log function and
operand syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the log table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

RCH[ANGE] Captures the command or data set name under the cursor in the
log for modification and/or reuse. PF keys 6 and 18 are normally
set to RCHANGE.
RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find). Resets the display start location and
positions the cursor over the string. PF keys 5 and 17 are normally
set to RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the log table. PF keys 11 and 23
are normally set to RIGHT.
S[ELECT] BROWSEs load members and EDITs source members. The value
used for the command is set in SETSEL.
Syntax SELECT member

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are

maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well
as your installation. The log UT panel also allows dynamic primary
commands with which you specify command names and their
corresponding actions.
X Clears the log table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the log table. This is equivalent to X ALL

Y[ES] After a required reply, specifies that StarTool FDM continue the
current action. A NO response stops the current action. For a
RESTORE subcommand, enter CAN to terminate RESTORE
processing.

General LOG Notes

1 Only the first 159 characters of an output line are retained in the log. This can be a
consideration in LIST, FIND, or REPLACE with long lines and with list formats NUM,
SNUM, or NONUM.

2 Echoed subcommand lines are identified with >------> before the subcommand.
Continuation lines are identified by a - character in the first log position.

3 The F command is a log search command and not the StarTool FDM FIND
subcommand. If you want the FIND subcommand, enter FI, FIN, or FIND.

4 Subcommand names PRINT, HELP, and TSO are intercepted by ISPF. To use the
StarTool FDM subcommands with the same names, use an abbreviated name such as
PRI, HE, or TS.

Command Reference 269

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

5 Since output is displayed only at a checkpoint or at the completion of a subcommand,

output from a subcommand cannot be monitored as it is produced. Therefore, if
StarTool FDM is in a CPU loop, the screen locks until it receives an attention. At that
time, any outputs generated display and an appropriate response is given. For more
information, see Appendix D, "Attention Processing".

6 If a StarTool FDM subcommand is too long for the 48 character command field, enter
the first 47 or less characters followed by a + to indicate that more data is required. A
continuation panel with more room for operand entry displays.

7 The END command does not work as in StarTool FDM line mode. END terminates the
current function. Multiple END commands are normally required to terminate the
StarTool FDM command. Use the QUIT subcommand to terminate StarTool FDM.

-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ------- Row 1 to 27 of 59

COMMAND ===> batchjcl SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=STARXYZ* --------------------------
>------>dup starxyz* lib.cntls
PDS852E STARXYZ7 already exists
PDS051I STARXYZE was copied; input=27; output=27
PDS051I STARXYZJ was copied; input=15; output=15
PDS051I STARXYZM was copied; input=26; output=26

PDS054I Totals -- Members=3; Input=44; Characters=5,440

>------>change lib.cntls
PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3380 C FB 80 32720 1X 10 5 10 TRK 6

PDS300A ENTER OPTION -- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTLS,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=STARXYZ*

>------>compress
IEB1135I IEBCOPY FMID HDZ11C0 SERVICE LEVEL UW30359 DATED 19960711 DFSMS 1.3
IEB1035I WSER07 ISPFPROC ISPFPRO2 07:45:26 WED 23 APR 1997 PARM=''
IEB1064I STANDARD DD NAMES- SYSIN SYSPRINT SYSUT1 SYSUT2 SYSUT3 IEB1065I
OVERRIDING DD NAMES- SYS00017 SYS00018 SYS00016 SYS00016 SYS00019 IEB1057I VL
GETMAIN REQUESTED 250K TO 1M BYTES. OBTAINED 1M.
ISPFPRO2 COPY INDD=SYS00016,OUTDD=SYS00016 GENERATED STATEMENT
IEB1058I ALLOCATED 2 CONTIGUOUS BUFFERS EACH 94976 BYTES. WORK AREA HAS 826K
IEB1018I COMPRESSING PDS OUTDD=SYS00016 VOL=SER001 DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTLS
IEB1106I CONTROL TABLE IS 210 BYTES LONG. WORK AREA HAS 825K BYTES AVAILABLE.
IEB1103I FIRST GAS BUBBLE IS BEFORE MEMBER CARDIN AT TTR=X'00000C'
IEB1097I FOLLOWING MEMBER(S) MOVED IN DATA SET REFERENCED BY SYS00016
IEB1098I 21 OF 21 MEMBERS MOVED IN DATA SET REFERENCED BY SYS00016
IEB144I THERE ARE 8 UNUSED TRACKS IN OUTPUT DATA SET REFERENCED BY SYS00016
IEB149I THERE ARE 6 UNUSED DIRECTORY BLOCKS IN OUTPUT DIRECTORY
IEB1056I RELEASED 1016K ADDITIONAL BYTES.
IEB147I END OF JOB - 0 WAS HIGHEST SEVERITY CODE

PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3380 C FB 80 32720 1X 10 8 10 TRK 6

270 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

File Edit Confirm Menu Utilities Compilers Test Help

_____________________________________________________________________
EDIT WSER07.SPFTEMP1.CNTL Columns 00001 00072
Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR
****** **************************** Top of Data *****************************
000001 //WSER07A JOB (X170,374),'SHOWS PROTOTYPING',CLASS=A,
000002 // MSGCLASS=X,TIME=(0,30),NOTIFY=WSER07
000003 //PDS05021 EXEC PGM=IKJEFT01,DYNAMNBR=80,REGION=5M
000004 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
000005 //SYSTSPRT DD SYSOUT=*
000006 //SYSTSIN DD *
000007 dup starxyz* lib.cntls
000010 change lib.cntls
000011 compress
****** *************************** Bottom of Data ***************************

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS DATA CMDS A-M DATA CMDS N-Z DEFAULT FEATURE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log ROW 1,000 TO 1,009 OF 1,009
COMMAND ===> ut SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=ANY/ ----------------------------- -
IDC0509I INDEX ALLOCATION STATUS FOR VOLUME SER007 IS 0
>------>DEFINE CLUSTER ( NAME(SER07.VSAM.T.CLUSTER) INDEXED VOL(SER007) RECORD
-SIZE(200 9000) SPANNED KEYS(8 0) ERASE NORECATAL
-OG NOREPLICATE NOREUSE NOIMBED SPEED WRITECHECK BUFFERSPACE(40000) FREESPACE(
-33 15) SHAREOPTIONS(2 3)) DATA ( TRACKS(1 1
-) CISZ(4096) ) INDEX ( TRACKS(1 1) CISZ(4096) )
IDC0508I DATA ALLOCATION STATUS FOR VOLUME SER007 IS 0
IDC0509I INDEX ALLOCATION STATUS FOR VOLUME SER007 IS 0
IDC0512I NAME GENERATED-(D) SER07.VSAM.TS.DATA
IDC0512I NAME GENERATED-(I) SER07.VSAM.TS.INDEX
>----->c lib.test
PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3380 C FB 80 9040 1X 47 10 40 TRK 24

PDS300A ENTER OPTION -- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=ANY/

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

------------------------- UT for a PDS User Commands -----------------------

OPTION ===>

Choose one of the following:

Z - ZAP command processor
MINE - Members last saved by SER07
MONTH - Members updated in the last month

Dynamic Commands--note: < = ,

/ = 'SER07.LIB.TEST'
SETSYS1_ - WORKPAD 12 SETUP /* SETUP MY SYS1.* SESSION
LISTHIST - TRP(LISTD / HISTORY)
LOAD____ - GO LIB.LOAD
PROCLIB_ - GO 'SYS1.PROCLIB' VOL(SYSRES)
________ -

Command Reference 271

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

MAP Subcommand
The MAP subcommand lists the CSECT structure of a load module. It can also modify the
addressing mode and residence mode of specific module CSECTS. The map it produces is
similar to the output produced by the MAP option of the linkage editor.

Example
MAP mema:memb

Syntax
MAP memgroup [FULL/SHORT/ENTRY/RELINK/JCL/LCT ]
[EXTERN/WKEXTERN/PSEUDOREG/LABELREG/COMMON/PRIVATE/CSECT]
[OFFSET(hexoff) ]
[NOSYSTEM ]
[MODULE({* / Fullm / Partm*)} ]
[REPLACE ]
[AMODE24/AMODE31/AMODE64 AMODEANY RMODE24/RMODEANY ]
[MEMBERS / MEMLIST / ML / NEWML / SUBLIST ]

Aliases
MA, MAPD

Defaults
memgroup, FULL

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the load members for which you want map information.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed. For more information,
see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
FULL Provides a full CSECT map. This option also provides the name of
the corresponding main module for alias members unless
CONTROL NOALIASINFO is in effect.
SHORT Provides a CSECT map with entry names within CSECTS, missing
weak external references, and alias member names omitted.
ENTRY Displays only the ENTRY point symbol.
RELINK Generates JCL and linkage editor control statements for use in
relinking this module.

272 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

JCL Generates JCL and linkage editor control statements for use in
relinking this module.
LCT Generates commented linkage attributes and linkage editor
control statements for use in managing this module.
OFFSET(hexoff) Specifies a 1- to 8-character hexadecimal offset for the origin of
this load module.
EXTERN Load modules with missing external symbols are wanted. The
MODULE keyword can also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
WKEXTERN Load modules with missing weak symbols are wanted. The
MODULE keyword can also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
PSEUDOREG Load modules with PSEUDO register symbols are wanted. The
MODULE keyword can also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
LABELREF Load modules with ENTRY symbols are wanted. The MODULE
keyword can also be specified to search for specific symbols.
COMMON Load modules with COMMON area symbols are wanted. The
MODULE keyword can also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
PRIVATE Load modules with PRIVATE area symbols are wanted. The
MODULE keyword can also be specified to search for specific
symbols.
CSECT Load modules with CSECT symbols are wanted. The MODULE
keyword can also be specified to search for specific symbols.
MODULE(nm) Specifies a 1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits CSECT
and ENTRY names for map reporting.
The MODULE operand has several valid forms:
 MODULE(*) – uses the previous name entered on any MODULE
keyword
 MODULE(Fullm) – reports only on CSECT or ENTRY name FULLM
 MODULE(Partm*) – reports only on CSECT or ENTRY name
PARTM...
REPLACE Specifies with RELINK, LCT, or JCL to indicate all CSECTS are to
be listed with binder REPLACE statements before the binder
INCLUDE statement. REPLACE can also be used with the
MODULE keyword to select module names for replacement.
AMODE24 Sets the addressing mode of CSECTS identified by MODULE to 24.
AMODE31 Sets the addressing mode of CSECTS identified by MODULE to 31.
AMODE64 Sets the addressing mode of CSECTS identified by MODULE to 64.
RMODE24 Sets the residence mode of CSECTS identified by MODULE to 24.
RMODE64 Sets the addressing mode of CSECTS identified by MODULE to 64.
AMODEANY Sets the addressing mode of CSECTS identified by MODULE to
ANY.
RMODEANY Sets the addressing mode of CSECTS identified by MODULE to
ANY.

Command Reference 273

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

NOSYSTEM System modules are to be filtered out before reporting MAP

information as is done for HISTORY GENERATE. System or
compiler routines begin with DFH, DFS, DSN, IBM, IEY, IGY, ILB,
ISP, or PLI.
MEMBERS Displays the names of members that satisfy the MAP
subcommand without changing the current member group.
MEMLIST Same as ML. Any member displayed by the MAP subcommand is
selected for MEMLIST display. The MODULE(name) keyword
searches for members to display. If no members are selected, a
null sublist is the result.
ML Same as MEMLIST. Any member displayed by the MAP
subcommand is selected for MEMLIST display. The
MODULE(name) keyword searches for members to display. If no
members are selected, a null sublist is the result.
NEWML Same as MEMLIST and ML except that the current MEMLIST is
reset.
SUBLIST Any member displayed by the MAP subcommand is selected for
inclusion in a new sublist. The MODULE(name) keyword searches
members to display. If no members are selected, a null sublist is
the result.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 115 OF 127
COMMAND ===> map zap$ SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=ZAP$ ----------------------------
** MAP ZAP$
ZAP 00000000 00003F06
PCL 00003F08 000000E5
CSOUT 00003FF0 00000428
ZAPHELP 00004418 00001B1C
ASMGASM 00005F38 000007E4
PDS103I Entry point at 00000000 -- ZAP
PDS104I Module length 00006720 -- 27K
PDS066I Member is an alias for: ZAPMAIN

274 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

------------------------ ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 --- Row 264 to 280 of 280

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=IBMUSER.LIB.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=DSAT ----------------------------
>------>map dsat

** MAP DSAT
DSAT 00000000 00001CC8 RMODE 24 AMODE 64
DSATPDS 00001CC8 00000498 RMODE 24 AMODE 64
DSATPCL 00002160 000003F8 RMODE 24 AMODE 64

PDS103I Entry point at 00000000 -- DSAT

PDS104I Module length 00002558 -- 10K
>------>map dsat mod(dsatp*) amode31 amode64 rmodeany

** MAP DSAT
DSATPDS 00001CC8 00000498 RMODE ANY AMODE 31
DSATPCL 00002160 000003F8 RMODE ANY AMODE 31

PDS103I Entry point at 00000000

PDS104I Module length 00002558 -- 10K
****************************** Bottom of data ******************************

---------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 --- Row 464 to 480 of 480

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=IBMUSER.LIB.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=DSAT -------------------------------
>------>map dsat64 relink replace

** MAP DSAT64
//LKED EXEC PGM=IEWL,
// PARM=’NCAL,MAP,LIST,LET,RENT,REUS,REFR’
//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(2048,(200,20))
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=WSER07.LINK.LOAD
//SYSLMOD DD DISP=SHR,DSN=WSER07.LINK.LOAD
//SYSLIN DD *
REPLACE DSAT,DSATPDS,DSATPCL
INCLUDE SYSLIB(DSAT64)
ORDER DSAT64,DSATPDS,DSATPCL
MODE RMODE(ANY),AMODE(64)
SETCODE AC(1)
ENTRY DSAT64
NAME DSAT64(R)

Command Reference 275

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

---------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 --- Row 334 to 350 of 350

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=IBMUSER.LIB.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=DSAT -------------------------------
>------>map dsat64 relink replace module(dsatp*)

** MAP DSAT64
//LKED EXEC PGM=IEWL,
// PARM=’NCAL,MAP,LIST,LET,RENT,REUS,REFR’
//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(2048,(200,20))
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=WSER07.LINK.LOAD
//SYSLMOD DD DISP=SHR,DSN=WSER07.LINK.LOAD
//SYSLIN DD *
REPLACE DSATPDS,DSATPCL
INCLUDE SYSLIB(DSAT64)
ORDER DSAT64,DSATPDS,DSATPCL
MODE RMODE(ANY),AMODE(64)
SETCODE AC(1)
ENTRY DSAT64
NAME DSAT64(R)

--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 635 OF 649

COMMAND ===> map zap$ relink SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=ZAP$ ----------------------------
** MAP ZAP$
//LKED EXEC PGM=IEWL,
// PARM='NCAL,MAP,LIST,LET'
//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(2048,(200,20))
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD
//SYSLMOD DD DISP=SHR,DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD
//SYSLIN DD *
INCLUDE SYSLIB(ZAPMAIN)
ORDER ZAP,PCL,CSOUT,ZAPHELP,ASMGASM,OACNOW
ENTRY OACNOW
ALIAS ZAP,ZAP$,ZAPHELP
NAME ZAPMAIN(R)

MASK Function
The MASK command is an extension to the LISTC and LISTF commands. It allows you to
enter a data set mask or a volume mask and to then optionally execute the LISTC or
LISTF function.

Example
MASK ser07.lib.*

Syntax
MASK mask [n/VOLUME/VOLUME(vmask) ]
[CLEAR/NOCLEAR ]
[UPDATE/LC/LISTC/LF/LISTF]
[RESET ]

276 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

[NOFILTER ]
[PROMPT ]

Aliases
MAS, MASK

Defaults
1, CLEAR, LISTC

Required
mask

Operands
mask Identifies the mask that is to be applied to LISTC or LISTF.
For the LISTF volume mask, user a / for a pattern specification; use
an * for a combination name, and a : for a range. For example:
TSO/03, TSO*, and TSO:TSO80.
If the mask is for a data set name, each level can contain an * before
or after any characters in that level. For example: SYS1.NU*.*.*XY.
The first level can contain an * after a beginning character string.
n/VOLUME Identifies the position that this mask is to occupy (1 - 3 for a data set
mask) or VOLUME for a volume mask.
The VOLUME keyword can contain a volume mask. If you do this, the
first mask is considered a data set mask; otherwise, the first mask is
considered a volume mask.
CLEAR Clears out the other mask entries.
NOCLEAR Leaves the other mask entries.
UPDATE Updates the mask only.
LC Executes LISTC with this mask.
LISTC Executes LISTC with this mask.
LF Executes LISTF with this mask.
LISTF Executes LISTF with this mask.
RESET Clears the current LISTC/LISTF table before executing LISTC or LISTF.
NOFILTER Ignores all FILTER options and resets all of the FILTER options to their
defaults.
PROMPT Displays MASK prompt panel after updating with string.

Remarks
MASK provides a way to update LISTC/LISTF parameters without prompting. You can use
it from a WORKPAD to build and execute a complicated LISTF table. The following MASK

Command Reference 277

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

command builds a data set table from a catalog search of data sets using the single data
set mask, USERID.*.CNTL:

MASK USERID.*.CNTL

The following MASK command builds a data set table from a VTOC search of all PUBxxx
volumes using the single data set mask, USERID.*.CNTL:

MASK USERID.*.CNTL VOLUME(PUB*) LISTF

The following MASK commands build up 3 data set masks. The first MASK command
clears all previous masks and the next one adds an additional data set mask. The last
MASK command adds a data set mask, a volume mask, and starts the VTOC search to
build the LISTF table.

MASK SYS1.* 1 UPDATE CLEAR

MASK SYS2.* 2 UPDATE NOCLEAR
MASK SYS3.* 3 VOLUME(RES*) NOCLEAR LISTF

The above example could also have been specified as:

MASK SYS1.* 1 UPDATE CLEAR

MASK SYS2.* 2 UPDATE NOCLEAR
MASK SYS3.* 3 UPDATE NOCLEAR
MASK RES* VOLUME NOCLEAR LISTF

The following MASK command continues a data set search to additional volumes starting
with SYS:

MASK SYS* VOLUME NOCLEAR LISTF

MEMBERS Subcommand
The MEMBERS subcommand lists members that are in the current member group. It is
often used to check member names in a given group before invoking another
subcommand that processes member groups.

Example
MEMBERS mema:memb

Syntax
MEMBERS memgroup [COUNT / NOCOUNT/ ONLYCOUNT NOBLDL]

Aliases
ME, MEM, MEMB, MEMBE, MEMBER, MEMBERS

Defaults
memgroup, COUNT

278 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members whose names are to be displayed.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
COUNT Issues a summary message to display the number of members in the
current group.
NOCOUNT Does not issue a summary count message.
ONLYCOUNT Issues only a message indicating the number of members in the
current group.
NOBLDL The existence of each member in the current group need not be
verified with a BLDL macro. This parameter is intended for high-
performance applications in conjunction with the SUBLIST
subcommand.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 150 OF 155
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=(ASID ---------------------------
>----->if : rmode31 then(sublist)
>----->members
PDS165I Members are: ASID, ASIDZN, JOB0LIST, MAPXA, PDSPGM, SORT, TSDYNLXA,
WHAT, WHATO, X$SPACE, XVOLS

PDS193I This group contains 11 members

****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

MEMLIST Function
The MEMLIST subcommand builds a scrollable member list display on which StarTool FDM
subcommands can be entered as line commands to process individual members. Enter
ISPF commands, StarTool FDM subcommands, and primary commands to the right of
COMMAND==>. For additional information, see Appendix A, "Formatting Member
Names".

Example
MEMLIST mema:memb

Syntax
MEMLIST memgroup
[SINCE/BEFORE ]

Command Reference 279

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

[TODAY/YESTERDAY/WEEK/CURRENT/BIWEEK/
MONTH/QUARTER/HALFYEAR/YEAR/BIYEAR/
LAST(numdays)/DATE(yyyy/mm/dd) ]
[CHANGED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd) ]
[CREATED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd) ]
[ABOVE(Count1) ]
[ALIAS/NOALIAS ]
[AMODE24/AMODE31/AMODE64/AMODEANY/NOAMODE24/
NOAMODE31/NOAMODE64/NOAMODEANY ] (load only)
[AUTH/NOAUTH ] (load only)
[BELOW(Count2) ]
[DC/NODC ] (load only)
[EDIT/NOEDIT ] (load only)
[EXEC/NOEXEC ] (load only)
[FLEVEL/NOFLEVEL ] (load only)
[HASALIAS/NOHASALIAS ]
[ID(Puid)/NOID/NOTID(Puid) ]
[LKED(Partl) ] (load only)
[LOADONLY/NOLOADONLY ] (load only)
[MODULE(* / Fullm / Partm*) ] (load only)
[NULL/NONULL ]
[ORPHAN/NOORPHAN ]
[OVERLAY/NOOVERLAY ] (load only)
[PAGE/NOPAGE ] (load only)
[REFR/NOREFR ] (load only)
[RENT/NORENT ] (load only)
[REUS/NOREUS ] (load only)
[RMODE24/RMODEANY/NORMODE24/NORMODEANY] (load only)
[SCTR/NOSCTR ] (load only)
[SSI(hxdata)/SSI/NOSSI/PARTSSI(hxdata)]
[SYSMOD(Partu) / USERDATA(Partu) ] (load only)
[TEST/NOTEST ] (load only)
[TRANS(Partt) ] (load only)
[TTR(Lttr:Httr) ]
[USERDATA(Partu) / SYSMOD(Partu) ] (load only)
[USERID(Puid)/NOUSERID/NOTUSERID(Puid)]
[VSLKED/NOVSLKED ] (load only)
[ZAP(Partz) ] (load only)
[RESET/NORESET ]
[LKEDDATE/NOLKEDDATE ] (load only)

Aliases
ML, MEML, MEMLI, MEMLIS, MEMLIST

Defaults
memgroup, NORESET, LKEDDATE, SINCE

Required
none

280 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members that are to be added to the member
list.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed. For more information,
see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
SINCE Uses dates from the specified date to the current date. SINCE
indicates that the implied date range (TODAY, YESTERDAY, ...
LAST, DATE) follows the date given. For source modules, the
date referenced is the ISPF modification date; for load
modules, it is the linkage edit date.
FROM Uses dates from the specified date to the current date. FROM
indicates that the implied date range (TODAY, YESTERDAY, ...
LAST, DATE) follows the date given. For source modules, the
date referenced is the ISPF modification date; for load
modules, it is the linkage edit date.
BEFORE Uses dates before (and including) the specified date. BEFORE
indicates that the implied date range (TODAY, YESTERDAY, ...
LAST, DATE) is before the given date. For source modules, the
date referenced is the ISPF modification date; for load
modules, it is the linkage edit date.
TO Uses dates before (and including) the specified date. TO
indicates that the implied date range (TODAY, YESTERDAY, ...
LAST, DATE) is before the given date. For source modules, the
date referenced is the ISPF modification date; for load
modules, it is the linkage edit date.
TODAY A date, equivalent to LAST(0).
YESTERDAY A date, equivalent to LAST(1).
WEEK A date, equivalent to LAST(7).
CURRENT A date, equivalent to LAST(10).
BIWEEK A date, equivalent to LAST(14).
MONTH A date, equivalent to LAST(30).
QUARTER A date, equivalent to LAST(120).
HALFYEAR A date, equivalent to LAST(183).
YEAR A date, equivalent to LAST(365).
BIYEAR A date, equivalent to LAST(730).
LAST(numdays) A date indicating the number of days before today.
DATE(cdate) A date indicating the actual date; enter it in ISPF format (yyyy/
mm/dd), or Julian format (yyyy.ddd).
CHANGED(date: Searches for members modified by an ISPF editor or a ZAP
program between the dates specified. If you enter only a single
date, only that date is checked, but normally a date range like
CHANGED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd) is entered.
Only members with ISPF statistics or members created by a
linkage editor are supported.

Command Reference 281

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

CREATED(date: Searches for members created with ISPF statistics or by the

linkage editor between the dates specified. If you enter only a
single date, only that date is checked, but normally a date
range like CREATED(yyyy/mm/dd:yyyy/mm/dd) is entered.
ABOVE(Count1) Selects members with more than the number of lines (amount
of storage for load modules) defined by the number Count1.
ALIAS Selects alias members.
NOALIAS Selects main members.
AMODE24 Selects modules with addressing mode 24.
NOAMODE24 Selects modules with addressing mode 31 or ANY.
AMODE31 Selects modules with addressing mode 31.
NOAMODE31 Selects modules with addressing mode 24 or ANY.
AMODE64 Selects modules with addressing mode 64.
NOAMODE64 Selects modules with addressing mode 64 or ANY.
AMODEANY Selects modules with addressing mode ANY.
NOAMODEANY Selects modules with addressing mode 24, 31 or 64.
AUTH Selects APF-authorized modules.
NOAUTH Selects non-authorized modules.
BELOW(Count2) Selects members with less than the number of lines (amount of
storage for load modules) defined by the number Count2.
DC Selects downward-compatible modules.
NODC Selects no downward-compatible modules.
EDIT Selects modules that can be reprocessed by the linkage editor.
NOEDIT Selects modules that cannot be reprocessed by the linkage
editor.
EXEC Selects EXECUTABLE modules.
NOEXEC Selects non-EXECUTABLE modules.
FLEVEL Selects modules processed by the F-level linkage editor.
NOFLEVEL Selects modules not processed by the F-level linkage editor.
HASALIAS Selects main members that have one or more aliases.
NOHASALIAS Selects alias members or main members without any aliases.
ID(Puid) Selects members with ISPF statistics and user IDs matching
the partial name Puid. Enter Puid as a partial TSO user ID with
1 to 7 characters. ID is an alias of USERID.
NOID Selects members without ISPF statistics. NOID is an alias of
NOUSERID.
NOTID(Puid) Same as NOTUSERID. Selects members without ISPF statistics
or members with ISPF statistics and user IDs that do not match
the partial name Puid. Enter Puid as a partial TSO user ID with
1 to 7 characters.

282 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

LKED(Partl) Selects modules identified as linked by the linkage editor

defined by the partial name Partl. Enter Partl as a partial
linkage editor IDR name with 1 to 10 characters.
LOADONLY Selects modules marked for LOAD ONLY.
NOLOADONLY Selects modules not marked for LOAD ONLY.
MODULE(name) Specifies a 1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits CSECT
names for attribute searches.
If you enter this parameter with any TRANS, SYSMOD/
USERDATA, or ZAP keywords, only those CSECTs that satisfy
the MODULE keyword are checked for the other keyword
conditions. The MODULE operand has several valid forms:
 MODULE(*) – uses the last name entered on a MODULE keyword
 MODULE(Fullm) – selects any module containing a CSECT or
ENTRY called FULLM
 MODULE(Partm*) – selects any module containing a CSECT or
ENTRY called PARTM...
ORPHAN Selects alias members that have no associated main member.
NOORPHAN Selects main members or alias members that have an
associated main member.
OVERLAY Selects OVERLAY modules.
NOOVERLAY Selects non-OVERLAY modules.
PAGE Selects modules marked for loading on a page boundary.
NOPAGE Selects modules not marked for loading on a page boundary.
REFR Selects refreshable modules.
NOREFR Selects non-refreshable modules.
RENT Selects reentrant modules.
NORENT Selects non-reentrant modules.
REUS Selects reusable modules.
NOREUS Selects non-reusable modules.
RMODE24 Selects modules with residence mode 24.
NORMODE24 Selects modules with residence mode ANY.
RMODEANY Selects modules with residence mode ANY.
NORMODEANY Selects modules with residence mode 24.
SCTR Selects scatter-loaded modules.
NOSCTR Selects no scatter-loaded modules.
SSI(hxdata) Selects members with matching SSI data. This is implemented
as a generic search matching SSI characters from left to right
for the number of characters entered.
SSI Selects members with SSI data.
NOSSI Selects members without SSI data.

Command Reference 283

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

PARTSSI(hxdata) Selects members with matching SSI data. This is implemented

as a pattern search matching SSI digits as a string anywhere in
the SSI field of the member.
SYSMOD(Partu) Selects modules with user IDR data that matches the partial
name Partu. Enter Partu as partial IDR data with 1 to 8
characters. If MODULE(...) is also entered, the SYSMOD
operand applies only to CSECTs whose names satisfy the
MODULE argument.
TEST Selects modules with the TEST attribute.
NOTEST Selects modules without the TEST attribute.
TRANS(Partt) Selects modules with CSECTs identified as having been
assembled or compiled by the translator defined by the partial
name Partt. Enter Partt as a partial translator IDR name with 1
to 10 characters. If MODULE(...) is also entered, the TRANS
operand applies only to CSECTs whose names satisfy the
MODULE argument.
TTR(Lttr:Httr) Selects members whose start address is in the specified TTR
range. Lttr defaults to 0 and can be entered as a hexadecimal
TTR value from 0 through FFFFFF. Httr defaults to FFFFFF and
can be entered as a hexadecimal TTR value from 0 through
FFFFFF.
USERDATA(Partu) Selects modules with user IDR data that matches the partial
name Partu. Enter Partu as partial IDR data with 1 to 8
characters. If MODULE(...) is also entered, the USERDATA
operand applies only to CSECTs whose names satisfy the
MODULE argument.
USERID(Puid) Selects members with ISPF statistics and user IDs matching
the partial name Puid. Enter Puid as a partial TSO user ID with
1 to 7 characters. USERID is an alias of ID.
NOUSERID Selects members without ISPF statistics. NOUSERID is an alias
of NOID.
NOTUSERID(Puid) Selects members without ISPF statistics or members with ISPF
statistics and user IDs that do not match the partial name Puid.
Enter Puid as a partial TSO user ID with 1 to 7 characters.
NOTUSERID is an alias of NOTID.
VSLKED Selects modules linked by the system linkage editor.
NOVSLKED Selects modules not linked by the system linkage editor.
ZAP(Partz) Selects modules with zap IDR data that matches the partial
name Partz. Enter Partz as partial zap IDR data with 1 to 8
characters. If MODULE(...) is also entered, the ZAP operand
applies only to CSECTs whose names satisfy the MODULE
argument.
RESET Drops any current members from the member list and adds the
member group named with this subcommand.
NORESET Merges the current member group with the existing member
list.
LKEDDATE Provides linkage edit date info for load members (IDR data
must be read).
NOLKEDDATE Does not provide that linkage edit date information for load
members.

284 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Remarks
MEMLIST line commands and their outputs are maintained in the log.

If a StarTool FDM subcommand is too long for the 48-character input field, enter the first
47 or less characters followed by a + to indicate more data is required. A continuation
panel with more room for operand entry displays.

The MEMLIST ISPF table displays in response to a MEMLIST subcommand issued in

StarTool FDM line mode or in ISPMODE. Once in the MEMLIST display, you can delete a
part of the table, find data in the table, add additional members to the table, print a part
of the table, store a part of the table in a data set, sort the table in different directions,
and so on. For assistance with the different options available, use the HELP command,
CUA functions, or enter an O command as either a primary command or as a line
command.

The primary screen for MEMLIST generally shows the most commonly used member
attribute information and the alternate screens show some additional data. For source
members, the secondary screen adds member TTR information and an ALIASOF field that
is filled in for alias members as a result of entering ALIASCHK (alias check or option 55).
The primary screen fields are:

CMD Command. Enter a line command here.

NAME Member name. The 8-character member name.
DATA/MSG Data field. Enter up to 8 bytes of operand information here. It is used as
a command feedback field — any information in this field that is
preceded by an * is ignored when a line command is entered.
VER.MOD Version and modification level. These numbers can range from 0
through 99 and they reflect the level of the member.
CREATED Creation date. The format is YY/MM/DD.
LAST Modification date. The format is YY/MM/DD.
MODIFIED Modification time. The format is HH:MM.
SIZE Size of member in lines. Member sizes up to 65,555 display.
INIT Initial size of member in lines. Member sizes up to 65,555 display.
ID User ID. The user ID of the last person to modify this member.

The second source member screen reformats the data and adds the following data for
each member:

ALIASOF Alias information field. For aliases, this field contains *ALIAS until a
ALIASCHK (option 55) is performed. After that point, it contains the name
of the corresponding main member if it exists or *ORPHAN otherwise.
TTR TTR address. The address of the first record for this member relative to
the start of the data set.

Load members have four different screens defined. The first screen contains the linkage
edit date and most information required to manipulate load members. The second screen
adds more detailed information; the third screen combines the first two screens and the
fourth screen can be customized and contains Change Man data.

Command Reference 285

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

The first screen displays:

CMD Command. Enter a line command here.

NAME Member name. The 8-character member name.
DATA/MSG Data field. Enter up to 8 bytes of operand information here. It is used
as a command feedback field — any information in this field that is
preceded by an * is ignored when a line command is entered.
ALIASOF Alias information field. For aliases, this field contains *ALIAS until a
ALIASCHK (option 55) is performed. After that point, it contains the
name of the corresponding main member if it exists or one of the
following:
 *ORPHAN – orphan. No corresponding main member is in the data set
 =BYTTR – orphan. A main member matches by TTR address but it does
not have the same name as noted in the orphan’s directory entry
 =BYNAME – orphan. The main member noted in the directory entry of
the orphan member exists but it does not have the same TTR address
LEN/LKED Length/LKED date. If LKEDDATE is in effect, the IDR data for each
member is read and this field contains the linkage edit date in YY/
MM/DD format. Otherwise, the module length displays using 6
hexadecimal characters.
UTES Linkage attributes. This is four columns that contain linkage
attributes as follows:
 DC - downward compatible attribute
 LOAD - load only attribute
 NOED - NOEDIT attribute
 NOEX - NOT Executable attribute
 OVLY - overlay attribute
 REFR - refreshable attribute
 RENT - reentrant attribute
 REUS - reusable attribute
 SCTR - scatter attribute
 ERRL - load only attribute conflict with scatter attribute
 ERRO - overlay attribute conflict with reentrant, reusable, load only, or
scatter attribute
 ERRS - scatter attribute conflict with reentrant, overlay, or load only
 ERR1 - refreshable attribute conflict with not reusable attribute
APF This field contains AC=1 if the module is marked as authorized. If
the field is incorrectly formatted it contains ERR; otherwise, this field
is blank.

286 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

MODE This field contains an indication of the residence mode of the

module. If AMODE and RMODE have not been set, this field is blank;
otherwise, this field contains one of the following:
 RANY - RMODE of ANY and AMODE 31
 AANY - RMODE of 24 and AMODE ANY
 A31 - RMODE of 24 and AMODE 31
 A24 - RMODE of 24 and AMODE 24
 A64 - RMODE of 24 and AMODE 64.
 ERR - RMODE of ANY; AMODE ANY or AMODE of 24. This is invalid
MAIN This field is for alias entries. It contains the name of the
corresponding main member as noted in the directory entry. Check
this information for correctness by ALIASCHK (Option 55).

The second load module screen adds the following fields:

TTR TTR address. The address of the first record for this member
relative to the start of the data set.
MATCH Matching member by TTR. This field is for alias entries. It is
filled in by ALIASCHK (option 55) to show the name of the
matching main member according to the TTR address. If the
ALIASOF field has an unusual value (such as =BYTTR or
=BYNAME), this field and the MAIN field provide names of the
affected members.
LENGTH Module length. Hexadecimal length of the module.
LEN-KB Module length in 1024 or K-byte units.
ENTRY Entry point address in hexadecimal.
SSI SSI data in hexadecimal.

Save MEMLIST tables permanently. They are saved in the ISPF profile data set by default
(ISPPROF) but you can change the DDNAME in the SETALL option. To manage these
tables, use the SAVE and MERGE commands.

Saved MEMLIST tables are given members names of the form PDSML0na if the name is
one or two numeric digits; otherwise, a name of the form @#name is used where name is
a 1- to 6-character alphanumeric table identification name.

The following primary commands are supported directly for the MEMLIST function. For
information on ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see “Common Commands”
in Chapter 2, "ISPF Interface Commands".

* Merges current member group members into the MEMLIST table.

*cm ERR- t=”Command,*”>

ALIASCHK Alias check. Checks aliases and adds all associated members to the
MEMLIST display.
ALL MEMLIST all. Adds all members in the data set to the MEMLIST
display.
ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the MEMLIST table.
APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
each entry.

Command Reference 287

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

Syntax APPLY linecmd

BAT[CHJCL] Builds batch JCL that includes all StarTool FDM statements in the LOG
table.
DUA[L] Displays a double line view of the MEMLIST table.
EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on MEMLIST table data.
(or ET[BL])
EQ[UATE] SUBLIST =. Resets the current member group to the members in the
current MEMLIST.
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses between
individual commands.
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[ANY/MEMBER/DATE/LENGTH/ENTRY/MAIN/
/MATCH/SSI/TTR/ALIASOF] (for load)
[ANY/MEMBER/VERMOD/CREATED/MODIFIED/
/SIZE/INIT/ID/TTR/ALIASOF] (for source)
LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the MEMLIST table. PF keys 10
and 22 are normally set to LEFT.
L[OCATE] Positions to a data line in sorted tables by searching the current
sorted column for the specified data.
Syntax LOCATE pmember/ttr/puserid/pdate/size/vermod
/plinkdate/hexlength/apf/attrib/pssi

MER[GE] Adds members to the MEMLIST table from a saved MEMLIST table.
Syntax MERGE name [RESET] [NOSTATS]

(where name is 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters)

MON[TH] Merges members updated or created this month into the MEMLIST.
NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the MEMLIST table.
O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the MEMLIST function and
operand syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the MEMLIST table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REM[OVE] Trims the MEMLIST table based on a string match.

Syntax
REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[MEMBER/VERMOD/CREATED/MODIFIED/SIZE/INIT/
ID/TTR/ALIASOF/DATA/MSGS] (source members)
[MEMBER/DATE/LENGTH/ENTRY/MAIN/MATCH/SSI/
TTR/ALIASOF/DATA/MSGS] (load members)

RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location. PF
keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the MEMLIST table. PF keys 11
and 23 are normally set to RIGHT.
SAVE Creates a permanent table for use in a different StarTool FDM session.
Syntax SAVE [name] [REPLACE/NOREPL]

288 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

(where name is 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters)

S[ELECT] Normally BROWSEs load members and EDITs source members. The
value used for the command is set in SETSEL.
Syntax SELECT member

SO[RT] Sorts function tables into an alternate order. SORT with no operands
sorts the table in default order, while SORT with a field name sorts the
table in that order.
Syntax
SORT
[MEMBER/TTR/DATE/SIZE/APF/MODE/ATTR/TTR] (load)
[MEMBER/TTR/VERMOD/CREATED/MODIF/SIZE/ID](source)
[ASCEND/DESCEND]

TAG Forms a member group containing only members marked with *TAG*
in the DATA/MSG field.
TOD[AY] Merges members updated or created today into the MEMLIST.
UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are
maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well as
your installation. The MEMLIST UT panel also allows dynamic primary
commands with which you specify command names and their
corresponding actions.
WE[EK] Merges members updated or created this week into the MEMLIST.
X Clears the MEMLIST table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the MEMLIST table. This is equivalent to X ALL

In addition to the above, you can enter StarTool FDM subcommands and ISPF commands
on the command line. Also, if you want a StarTool FDM subcommand to apply to all
members currently in the MEMLIST, use = as the member group name for the
subcommand.

By default, line commands that produce output display it in an edit session and this
output is also recorded in the log. To place this output only in the log, check the setting of
“Automatic EDITLOG” in SETALL for MEMLIST. The following line commands are supported
in the MEMLIST function:

+ Provides an extension panel for command entry.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,+”>

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

ATTR Provides a preinitialized entry assist panel to update member attributes.

CSEC Invokes the CSECTS function for a load member.
DEC Decrypts the member into another data set.
ENC Encrypts the member into another data set.
INFO Displays attributes of the member using the subcommand.
K Kills and clears all following line commands.
LOG Copies the line into the log.

Command Reference 289

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

M Provides line command selection and entry assistance.

ML Updates statistics and attributes for this member.
O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
PAN Displays this member as a panel using ISPF services.
S Selects line command (normally BROWSE for load and EDIT for source; see
SETSEL).
SWAP Renames swap member with the member named in the DATA/MSG field.
TAG Marks this member line with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.
UT Selects the extended user line command panel.
W Adds the data set name and the member name to the WORKPAD.
X Drops this member from the MEMLIST table.
XMIT Transmits this member to another user.

In addition to the above line commands, most StarTool FDM subcommands that define a
memgroup can be used as line commands. This set of subcommands includes ABE,
ACFCOMP, BROWSE, COPY, DCF, DELETE, DELINK, DIRENTRY, DISASM, DUP, EDIT, FIND,
FSE, HISTORY, LIST, LLA, MAP, OUTCOPY, PGMDOC, PRINT, READOBJ, REPLACE, REPRO,
REVIEW, SEPARATE, SUBMIT, TSOEDIT, TSOLIST, VERIFY, VPRINT, and XREF.

Also, you can use the ALIAS, COMPARE, REPRO, and RENAME subcommands as line
commands but they each require another member name to be entered as an operand in
the DATA/MSG field.

Each subcommand name must be abbreviated to a maximum of four characters to fit into
the CMD field. Also, several of the above subcommands are available only on source data
sets (ABE, ACFCOMP, DCF, EDIT, FSE, READOBJ, SUBMIT, and TSOEDIT) and others are
available only on load data sets (DELINK, DISASM, HISTORY, LLA, MAP, PGMDOC, and
XREF).

MEMLIST and Deleted Members

If a MEMLIST operand is added to a RESTORE subcommand, RESTORE adds deleted
members to the MEMLIST table instead of resurrecting them. For more details, see
"RESTORE Subcommand" on page 347. In addition, if you set “Remove deleted members”
in SETALL for MEMLIST to NO, members deleted by the DEL line command are also
maintained in the MEMLIST table. Use a REST line command (with an optional new name
in the DATA/MSG column) to resurrect a deleted member.

A restricted subset of line commands are available for examining and manipulating
deleted members. The following line commands are supported for this purpose:

= Equal. Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

DELI Delink. Delinks the deleted member (for load only).

DISA Disasm. Disassembles the deleted member (for load only).
DUP Duplicate. Copies the deleted member to another data set.

290 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

E Edit. Enters edit on the deleted member. The SAVE command is not
permitted.
F Find. Searches the deleted member.
HIST History. Displays historical data from the deleted member (for load only).
K Kill. Cancels and clears all following line commands.
L List. Lists the deleted member.
LOG Log. Copies the line into the log.
M Menu. Provides line command selection and entry assistance.
MAP Map. Displays the structure of the deleted member (for load only).
LLA Informs LLA that the member has been deleted.
PB PBROWSE. Browses the deleted member.
PE PEDIT. Enters edit on the deleted member. The SAVE command is not
permitted.
REST Restore. Resurrects this deleted member.
REV Review. Browses the deleted member.
X X. Drops this deleted member from the MEMLIST table.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in the
MEMLIST function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR- t=”Block line command,==”>

AA subcommand. Displays attributes.

BB BROWSE subcommand. Enters ISPF browse.
DD DIRENTRY subcommand. Displays the directory entry.
DDEL DEL command. Deletes each member.
EE EDIT subcommand. Enters ISPF edit (source only).
HH HISTORY subcommand. Displays module history data (load only).
LL LIST command. Lists each member.
MM MAP subcommand. Displays module map (load only).
OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.
PP PRINT subcommand. Produces a hard-copy.
SS S command. Selects a member (normally edit or browse).
TT TAG command. Marks each member line with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG
field.
VV VERIFY subcommand. Validates each member.
XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.

Command Reference 291

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

MEMLIST : RMODEANY produces the following:

-------------------------- Load MEMLIST 1, Session# 2 ------- ROW 1 TO 5 OF 5

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=(ASID -----------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG ALIASOF LEN/LKED -- UTES -- APF MODE MAIN
ASID 92/06/15 RANY
LOOK 90/12/19 AC=1 RANY
PDSPGM 93/01/17 RENT REUS RANY
PDSPGMV *ALIAS 93/01/17 RENT REUS RANY PDSPGM
WHATO 89/02/17 RENT REUS RANY

-------------------------- Load MEMLIST 2, Session# 2 ------- ROW 1 TO 5 OF 5

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER007 MEM=(ASID -----------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG ALIASOF TTR MAIN MATCH LENGTH LEN-KB ENTRY
ASID 000205 000C30 4K 000000
LOOK 01370F 00D8F8 55K 000000
PDSPGM 00AB1E 082D50 524K 0001A8
PDSPGMV PDSPGM 00AB1E PDSPGM PDSPGM 082D50 524K 024ED0
WHATO 006E11 060D88 388K 000000

TODAY was entered to produce the following:

------------------------- Source MEMLIST 1, Session# 1 ---- ROW 1 TO 16 OF 20

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=(@COPY -----------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG VER.MOD CREATED LAST MODIFIED SIZE INIT ID
@COPY 01.18 87/11/11 92/10/09 9:22 1813 1408 SER07
@DSNAME 01.45 89/03/26 92/10/09 12:27 1042 694 SER07
@DUP 01.31 92/05/01 92/10/09 8:56 1466 712 SER07
@PDSMAIN 01.84 90/01/30 92/10/09 8:32 6143 5190 SER07
@USAGE 01.20 87/11/11 92/10/09 7:03 1095 341 SER07
PDSAAUX 01.05 92/07/30 92/10/09 14:56 128 122 SER07
ut PDSMODL5 01.20 92/07/22 92/10/09 7:18 131 117 SER07
PDSMODL6 01.12 92/07/22 92/10/09 7:18 125 117 SER07
PDSMODL7 01.18 92/07/22 92/10/09 7:19 114 99 SER07

------------------- ut for ML (Source) user line commands ------------------

OPTION ===>

Choose one of the following for member PDSMODL5

ASM - ASMCL Clist
ALC - Allocate dataset and member prompt
CDPU - Composite Document Printing Utility (GDDM application)
CLS - Construct user clist from prompt panel
EQ - Edit member with EQUAL macro
EXEC - Invoke PDSMODL5 as a CLIST
PREP - CLIST for Panel preprocessing using ISPPREP
PT - Direct command to PRINT prompt panel
%xxx - Invoke %XXX SER07.LIB.CNTL PDSMODL5

Dynamic Commands--note: < = , ! = PDSMODL5,

/ = 'SER07.LIB.CNTL(PDSMODL5)'
NONE - ! NONE /* REMOVE ISPF STATISTICS
STAT - ! ADDSTATS /* CREATE ISPF STATISTICS
RADD - ! NONE ADDSTATS /* REMOVE, THEN CREATE ISPF STATISTICS
PRT_ - PRINT ! CLASS(X) FORM(DX00) ASA NOMSG
____ -

292 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

------------------------------ Set PANEL Defaults -----------------------------

OPTION ===>
Enter SAVE as a primary command to save these variables in your ISPF
profile as defaults for future StarTool sessions or press PF6/PF18
...
MEMLIST Displays in order of RIGHT rotation:
Show Attributes view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- Load module attributes
Show TTR, Size view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- TTR location and size
Show Double line view ===> YES (Yes/No) -- Combined information
Show Change Man view ===> NO (Yes/No) -- Change Man date .. (customized?)
...
In-progress message increments (use 999999 to suppress these messages):
Memlist increment ===> 500 members processed between messages
LISTC/LISTF increment ===> 250 data sets processed between messages
LISTVOL increment ===> 50 volumes processed between messages
VMAP increment ===> 500 data sets processed between messages

-------------------- Load MEMLIST (Attributes), Session# 1 --- Row 1 to 5 of 5

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=CMN/ -------------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG ALIASOF LEN/LKED -- UTES -- APF MODE MAIN
CMNAPSPL 1994/06/02 RENT REUS RANY
DSAT 1995/12/19 REFR RENT AC
DSATA DSAT 1995/12/19 REFR RENT AC DSAT
PDSE520 1997/03/13 REFR RENT
VTOC 1995/06/14 REFR RENT

--------------------- Load MEMLIST (TTR/Size), Session# 1 ---- Row 1 to 5 of 5

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=CMN/ -----------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG ALIASOF TTR MAIN MATCH LENGTH LEN-KB ENTRY
CMNAPSPL 027F08 006140 25K 000000
DSAT 048005 002558 10K 000000
DSATA DSAT 048005 DSAT DSAT 002558 10K 000000
PDSE520 048C08 0AE020 697K 0A4198
VTOC 034506 004790 18K 000000

---------------------- Load MEMLIST (Double), Session# 1 ----- Row 1 to 5 of 5

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=CMN/ ------------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG ALIASOF LEN/LKED -- UTES -- APF MODE MAIN
MATCH LENGTH LEN-KB TTR ENTRY SSI
--- -------- -------- -------- -------- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- --------
CMNAPSPL 1994/06/02 RENT REUS RANY
006140 25K 027F08 000000 40BE1799
--- -------- -------- -------- -------- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- --------
DSAT 1995/12/19 REFR RENT AC
002558 10K 048005 000000
--- -------- -------- -------- -------- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- --------
DSATA DSAT 1995/12/19 REFR RENT AC DSAT
DSAT 002558 10K 048005 000000
--- -------- -------- -------- -------- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- --------
PDSE520 1997/03/13 REFR RENT
0AE020 697K 048C08 0A4198
--- -------- -------- -------- -------- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- --------
VTOC 1995/06/14 REFR RENT
004790 18K 034506 000000 ABACADAE

Command Reference 293

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

-------------------- Load MEMLIST (Change Man), Session# 1 --- Row 1 to 5 of 5

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=CMN/ -----------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG ALIASOF LEN/LKED -- UTES - CMN date time
CMNAPSPL 1994/06/02 RENT REUS 1994/06/02 18:08
DSAT 1995/12/19 REFR RENT
DSATA DSAT 1995/12/19 REFR RENT
PDSE520 1997/03/13 REFR RENT
VTOC 1995/06/14 REFR RENT

NUCMAP Function
The NUCMAP command displays the current system nucleus.

Example
NUCMAP

Syntax
NUCMAP

Aliases
NUC, NUCM, NUCMA, NUCMAP

Defaults
none

Required
none

Operands
none

Remarks
NUCMAP provides a way to look at the current nucleus by memory address. The CSECTS
table is used.

The CSECTS ISPF table displays in response to a NUCMAP command. When you are in a
CSECTS/NUCMAP display, you can delete a part of the table, sort the table in different
directions, find data in the table, print a part of the table or store a part of the table in a

294 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

data set. For assistance with the different options available, use the HELP command, CUA
functions or enter an O command as either a primary command or as a line command.

The CSECTS/NUCMAP table displays the names of all CSECTs and ENTRYs for the
NUCLEUS. The screen fields for each line are:

CMD Command. Enter a line command here.

TYPE Type of entry. Any of the following may appear:
CSECT – CSECT entry.
ENTRY – ENTRY within a CSECT.
DATA/MSG Data field. This is a command feedback field.
SECTION CSECT name.
ENTRY ENTRY name.
ADDR Address of this symbol (this is for the CSECTS function only).
LENG Hexadecimal length of this CSECT.
MD/SG Mode or segment. An AMODE/RMODE indication is provided as
follows:
 R64 - RMODE of ANY and AMODE 64
 A64 - RMODE of 24 and AMODE 64
 RANY - RMODE of ANY and AMODE 31
 AANY - RMODE of 24 and AMODE ANY
 A31 - RMODE of 24 and AMODE 31
 A24 - RMODE of 24 and AMODE 24
MEM ADDR Memory address in hexadecimal.

The following primary commands are supported directly for the CSECTS/NUCMAP
function. For information on ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see
“Common Commands” in Chapter 2, "ISPF Interface Commands".

APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

EDITT[BL] (or Enters an edit session on CSECT/NUCMAP table data.

ET[BL])
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses between
individual commands.
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[ANY/ADDRESS/NAME/ENTRY/SEGMENT/MODE]

L[OCATE] Positions to a data line in sorted tables by searching the current

sorted column for the specified data.
Syntax LOCATE csectname/address

O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the CSECTS/NUCMAP

function and operand syntax assistance.

Command Reference 295

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

OUT[PUT] Outputs the CSECTS/NUCMAP table to print or a data set.

Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REM[OVE] Trims the CSECTS/NUCMAP table based on a string match.

Syntax REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/ADDRESS/NAME/ENTRY/SEGMENT/MODE]

RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location. PF
keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
SO[RT] Sorts function tables into an alternate order. SORT with no operands
sorts the table in default order, while SORT with a field name sorts
the table in that order.
Syntax SORT [ADDRESS/NAME]
[ASCEND/DESCEND]

TAG Applies the specified line command to table entries marked with
*TAG* in the DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are

maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well as
your installation.
X Clears the CSECTS/NUCMAP table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the CSECTS/NUCMAP table. This is equivalent to X ALL

The following line commands are supported in the CSECTS/NUCMAP function:

+ Provides an extension panel for command entry.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,+”>

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

K Kills and clears all following line commands.

LOG Copies the line into the log.
O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
TAG Marks this table entry with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.
X Drops the table line.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in the
CSECTS function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR- t=”Block line command,==”>

OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.

XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.

296 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

FUNCTIONS CONTROL LINE CMDS DEFAULTS FEATURES

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------- CSECT Display for *NUCMAP* -- ROW 1 TO 17 OF 3,526
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=(PDSPNAX ---------------------------
CMD TYPE DATA/MSG SECTION ENTRY MEM ADDR -LENG- MODE
CSECT IOSVATTN 00FC3D00 000106 A24
CSECT IEAVFX00 00000000 001000 A24
ENTRY IEATCBP 00000218 A24
CSECT IECVDDT5 00FCE000 00004C A24
CSECT IECVPRNT 00FCE050 000478 A31

Command Reference 297

Chapter 6 Commands — L to N

298 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Chapter 7
Commands — O to R

OPTIONS Subcommand
The OPTIONS subcommand displays the subcommands (or options) supported by StarTool
FDM. This display varies when a non-partitioned data set is being processed.

In any table function, if the O alias of OPTIONS is entered as a line command, the
O Subcommand Selection panel displays to assist in entering subcommands. In
ISPMODE or MEMLIST, the O alias of OPTIONS at the COMMAND ==> prompt also brings
up the subcommand assist prompt panel.

----------------------- StarTool O Subcommand Selection ---------------------------

OPTION ===>

Choose one of the following:

More: +
--- CONTROL ---
LEFT - Scroll command or PF key
RIGHT - Scroll command or PF key
F - Find data in table prompt
OUT - Output a copy of table to print or to a data set
UT - Extended user command panel
X - Clear a portion of the table
XMIT - Transmit this data set to another user
LASTCMD - display the last commands entered from the command line
SETUSER - define dynamic user commands and operands
--- FUNCTIONS ---
STATUS - Display function status and selection panel

Example
OPTIONS

Syntax
OPTIONS

Aliases
O, OP, OPT, OPTI, OPTIO, OPTION, OPTIONS

Operands
No operands are supported for the OPTIONS subcommand.

Command Reference 299

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

OUTCOPY Subcommand
The OUTCOPY subcommand formats utility control statements that can be used by
IEBCOPY to select members from a data set. Output is directed to a pre-allocated FILE
with the DDNAME PDSOUT.

Example
OUTCOPY mema:memb

Syntax
OUTCOPY memgroup [ALIAS/NOALIAS ]
[CLOSE/NOCLOSE ]
[ECHO/NOECHO ]
[IEBUPDTE/NOIEBUPDTE ]
[REPLACE ]
[TEXT('string')/NOTEXT]

Aliases
OUTC, OUTCO, OUTCOP, OUTCOPY

Defaults
initially: memgroup, ECHO, NOCLOSE, NOALIAS, NOTEXT, NOIEBUPDTE

thereafter: memgroup, NOCLOSE, previous(ALIAS/NOALIAS; ECHO/NOECHO; TEXT/

NOTEXT; IEBUPDTE/NOIEBUPDTE)

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the member names to be output on an IEBCOPY format
select statement.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
ALIAS Includes any associated member names (aliases, apparent aliases,
and associated main members) in the members processed.
NOALIAS Processes only members actually identified.
CLOSE Closes the PDSOUT file. The member or member group specified
with the CLOSE operand is not output to the PDSOUT file.
NOCLOSE Opens or keeps the PDSOUT data set open.
ECHO Echoes each utility control statement to the terminal as well as to
the PDSOUT data set.

300 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

NOECHO Does not echo the utility control statements to the terminal; output
is only directed to the PDSOUT data set.
IEBUPDTE Formats each output statement in IEBUPDTE format instead of the
standard IEBCOPY format. The use of this format also suppresses
COPY statements normally generated for data set changes.
NOIEBUPDTE Formats each output statement in the standard IEBCOPY format.
REPLACE Specifies that the form of the COPY statement is to be changed to
support replacing members in the target data set.
TEXT('st') Replaces the second member name on each subsequent SELECT
output statement with the specified string, ST.
NOTEXT Nullifies any TEXT operand and writes the second copy of the
member name (as usual) on each subsequent SELECT output
statement.

Remarks
OUTCOPY does not use ISPF services. If StarTool FDM was invoked from READY mode,
StarTool FDM attempts to establish an ISPF environment for the first OUTCOPY
subcommand so that subsequent subcommands can use ISPF services.

OUTCOPY usage notes:

1 Output is directed to FILE(PDSOUT).

2 PDSOUT must be allocated to a sequential data set or to a member of a partitioned

data set with fixed, 80 character records prior to entering the first OUTCOPY
subcommand.

3 For new data sets, the following default DCB attributes are used:

DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=80,BLKSIZE=3120)

4 An IEBCOPY COPY statement is written before the first SELECT statement for each
data set as determined by the CHANGE subcommand. The COPY statement is of the
form:

COPY OUTDD=OUTPUT,INDD=xxx
(where xxx is the low-level qualifier of the input data set name)
However, if the REPLACE keyword is in effect, the format is:

COPY OUTDD=OUTPUT,INDD=((xxx,R))

5 The default IEBCOPY select statement is of the form:

S M=memname,memname))
memname is the member name. You can modify this format output statement by an
editor if member rename or member replace functions are to be performed. If you
specify TEXT('Any String'), each subsequent IEBCOPY statement changes to the form:

S M=memname ANY STRING

6 OUTCOPY maintains a list of member names written after each copy statement and
does not output a member name more than once.

Command Reference 301

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

7 You can establish a CLIST such as the following for IEBCOPY use:

PROC 3 FROMDSN FROMQUAL TODSN CONTROLS(PDSOUT.CNTL)

ALLOC F(SYSIN) DA(&CONTROLS.) SHR
ALLOC F(SYSPRINT) DA(*)
ALLOC F(&FROMQUAL.) DA(&FROMDSN.) SHR
ALLOC F(OUTPUT) DA(&TODSN.) OLD
CALL 'SYS1.LINKLIB(IEBCOPY)'

8 Assuming that OUTCOPY has created output in PDSOUT.CNTL, copy selected

members from your LIB.LOAD data set to ‘SYS1.LINKLIB2’, by entering the
following line from READY mode:

%COPYOUT LIB.LOAD LOAD ‘SYS1.LINKLIB2’

Another method for capturing IEBCOPY control statements is to use the COPY
subcommand with the NOCALL keyword. Obtain the generated images using the CONTROL
subcommand with the DSN keyword or by the ISPMODE OUTPUT command.

PATTERN Subcommand
The PATTERN subcommand lists member names from the data set directory. Only those
member names that contain the PATTERN name segments specified display. The default
member group is not affected by the DISPLAY or PATTERN subcommands.

You can enter one or two member name segments as patterns. If you enter two
segments, both segments must occur in a member name for it can be displayed. For
example, with the pattern segments xx and 1x, members named M1X4XX, M1XX, and
XX1X are displayed by this subcommand while members named X1X or MXX13X are not
displayed.

Example
PATTERN iea/sys

Syntax
PATTERN [segment1 [segment2] ]

Aliases
P, PA, PAT, PATT, PATTE, PATTER, PATTERN

Defaults
previously entered segment1 and segment2 operands

Required
none

302 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Operands
segment1 A name segment that must be found in a member name for the member
name to be displayed.
Enter a group name descriptor such as part1:part2, seg1/seg2, or
part1*seg1 for segment1, in which case, the output consists of the
member names that are displayed by the MEMBERS subcommand.
segment2 A second name segment that must also be found in a member name for
the member name to be displayed.

Remarks
Neither PATTERN nor DISPLAY affect the current member group. If you enter PATTERN
without operands, the previously entered operands are used. This differs from DISPLAY. A
DISPLAY with no operands shows all members in the data set.

-A is added following a displayed member name if the member name is an alias. The
member name is listed in a combined hexadecimal/character format if it does not contain
upper case alphanumeric characters (including @, $, and #) or if the first character is
numeric. Unprintable characters (for 3270-type devices) in a member name display as
periods.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 273 OF 285
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=(ASID ----------------------------
>----->d
@DIACLIK @DIAINIT @DIALOG @DIAPANL @DIAPART @DIASTAK
@DIATBL @DIAWRK ALLGLOB ASMEXT2 CHECKOUT CICS
COMPARE COMPARES COMPA1 COMPA2 COMPA3 DISAMSM
DISAMXM DISASME DISASMX DISASM3 MAPXREF PDS99
PDS99T1D TESTMSG
>----->p dia
@DIACLIK @DIAINIT @DIALOG @DIAPANL @DIAPART @DIASTAK
@DIATBL @DIAWRK
>----->p al/
@DIALOG ALLGLOB
>----->p ob/al
ALLGLOB
>----->p dis*
DISAMSM DISAMXM DISASME DISASMX DISASM3
>----->p
DISAMSM DISAMXM DISASME DISASMX DISASM3

PBROWSE Function
PBROWSE (for parallel browse) is a multiple-format data set browser that supports most
z/OS data access methods and database management systems. PBROWSE is called a
parallel function because you can suspend a browse session to process other data sets
using GO sessions. On returning control to the browse session, resume where you left off
as with other StarTool FDM parallel activities.

Command Reference 303

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Invoke PBROWSE directly under control of StarTool FDM with the PBROWSE command, or,
using the SUPEREDIT option, invoke it transparently with the BROWSE command. Use PB
(for PBROWSE) as a line command in MEMLIST.

PBROWSE supports sequential, direct, PDS, PDSE and all VSAM data types including
PATHs. It also allows you to browse deleted members. In addition, you can perform VSAM
positioning.

NOTE PBROWSE does not support multivolume files. It also cannot be used with
variable-length (VB or VS) file organizations. For these file types, use PVIEW or PEDIT
instead of PBROWSE.

Example
PBROWSE

Syntax
PBROWSE member
* [FROMKEY(key)/FROMADDRESS(add)/FROMNUMBER(num) ]
* [TOKEY(key)/TOADDRESS(add)/TONUMBER(num) ]

*NOTE: Lines with an asterisk are supported for VSAM data sets only

Aliases
PB, PBR, PBRO, PBROW, PBROWS, PBROWSE

Abbreviations
FKEY for FROMKEY, FADDR for FROMADDRESS, FNUM for FROMNUMBER, TKEY for TOKEY,
TADDR for TOADDRESS, and TNUM for TONUMBER.

Defaults
none

Required
member

Operands
member Identifies the member to be browsed.
FROMKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, ky is coded as the key of the
first record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can
be coded as x’hexkey’; access begins at the first record
whose key matches (or is greater than) the portion of the
key specified. Use this parameter with TOKEY. Specified
for an alternate index or a key-sequenced data set only.

304 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

FROMADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through

99999999 to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of
the first record to be accessed. The RBA value must
match the beginning of a logical record. If you specify this
parameter for key-sequenced data, the records are
accessed in physical sequential order instead of key order.
Use this parameter with TOADDRESS.
FROMADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed
through a path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed
FROMNUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through
99999999 to specify the relative record number (RRN) of
the first record to be accessed. This record must be
present in the data set.
Use this parameter with TONUMBER. Specify it only for a
variable or fixed relative record data set.
TOKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, ky is coded as the key of the last
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be
coded as x’hexkey’; access ends after the first record
whose key matches the portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with FROMKEY. Specify it only for an
alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.
TOADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through
99999999 to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of
the last record to be accessed. The RBA value does need
not to match the beginning of a logical record. If you
specify this parameter for key-sequenced data, the
records are accessed in physical sequential order instead
of key order. Use this parameter with FROMADDRESS.
TOADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed
through a path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed
TONUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through
99999999 to specify the relative record number (RRN) of
the last record to be accessed. This record need not be
present in the data set.
Use this parameter with FROMNUMBER. Specify it only for
a variable or fixed relative record data set.

Remarks

Command Reference 305

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Use a LOG command to suspend PBROWSE. Then move to other StarTool FDM processes;
however, use any function name or subcommand that does not conflict with the command
names supported for PBROWSE.

The following primary commands are supported directly in the PBROWSE function. For
information on ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see "Common Commands"
on page 39.

Displays a columns line on the first line of the data area. The columns
line remains at the top of the data display. It is useful in identifying
CO[LS] columns to be used with the FIND command.
Syntax COLS [ON/OFF]

F[IND] Finds a string and positions the display start location.

Syntax FIND anystring [nn mm] [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]

(where nn and mm are column numbers)

HEX Sets HEX display mode on or off.
Syntax HEX [ON/OFF]

L[OCATE] Positions directly to the specified record number.

Syntax LOCATE recnumber

PAD Changes the padding character and specifies the number of pad
characters desired.
Syntax PAD character/'character'/x'hex' [column]

Example: PAD a 45
RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location. PF
keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.

PBROWSE - WSER07.VSAM.CUST.CLUSTER --------------- LINE 00000401 COL 001 080

COMMAND ===> f new word SCROLL ===> CSR
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
Smith 0392 92A444510Yorba Linda,CA 92686 YYNB
Jones 0194 92A444511Minneapolis,MN 55416 YYNX
Green 1293 92A444512Denver, CO 80222 NNYD
Watson 1093 92A444513Middlesex,UB11 4AA England NNNF
Aku 0394 92A444515Apu, Easter Island NNYF
Ricker 0993 92A444518Ward Hill, MA 01835 YNYF
Jackson 0494 92A444519Springfield, MO 65890 YYND
Rogers 0394 92A444520Oakland, NJ 07436 XXMG
Thomas 0692 92A444521Naples, FL 33942 AACC
Schmidt 0993 92A444522Bremen, Germany MMNN
Stone 1093 92A444523Blue ridge, PA 17214 VVGC
Apple 0294 92A444524Alpharetta, GA 30201 AABB
Cznski 1293 92A444525Springboro, OH 45066 YYMN
Johnson 0394 92A444529Clinton, MD 20797 AAEE
Engel 0494 92A444533New york, NY 10117 UUFF

306 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

PBROWSE - WSER07.VSAM.CUST.CLUSTER --------------- LINE 00000401 COL 001 080

COMMAND ===> f x'd48995' SCROLL ===> CSR
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+..
.
Smith 0392 92A444510Yorba Linda,CA 92686 YYNB
4E98A84FFFF4444FFCFFFFFFE99884D89886CC4FFFFF444444444444EEDC444444444444444444
02493800392000092144451086921039541B310926860000000000008852000000000000000000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Jones 0194 92A444511Minneapolis,MN 55416 YYNX
4D998A4FFFF4444FFCFFFFFFD899889998A6DD4FFFFF444444444444EEDE444444444444444444
01655200194000092144451149555176392B450554160000000000008857000000000000000000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Green 1293 92A444512Denver, CO 80222 NNYD
4C98894FFFF4444FFCFFFFFFC89A8964CD4FFFFF4444444444444444DDEC444444444444444444
079555012930000921444512455559B03608022200000000000000005584000000000000000000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Watson 1093 92A444513Middlesex,UB11 4AA England NNNF
4E8AA994FFFF444FFCFFFFFFD88898A8A6ECFF4FCC4C989898444444DDDC444444444444444444
061326501093000921444513494435257B42110411055731540000005556000000000000000000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------

PEDIT Function
PEDIT (for parallel edit) is a multiple-format line editor that supports most z/OS data
access methods and database management systems. PEDIT is called a parallel function
because you can suspend an edit session to process other data sets using GO sessions.
On returning control to the edit session, resume where you left off as with other StarTool
FDM parallel activities.

PEDIT supports sequential data sets, striped sequential data sets, direct files, VSAM keyed
sequential data sets (including either a base cluster or a path over a cluster), other VSAM
data set types, partitioned data sets (PDSs), and extended partitioned data sets (PDSEs).

Invoke PEDIT directly under control of StarTool FDM with the PEDIT command, or, using
the SUPEREDIT option, invoke it transparently with the EDIT command.

Example
PEDIT

Syntax
PEDIT [member|memgroup]
[AUDIT]
[BACKUP]
[COPYBOOK]
[LOAD|NOLOAD|BLOCK]
[SELECT]
[VIEW]
* [FROMKEY(key)|FROMADDRESS(address)|FROMNUMBER(record_number)]
* [TOKEY(key)|TOADDRESS(address)|TONUMBER(record_number)]

Command Reference 307

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

*NOTE: Parameters marked with an asterisk are supported for VSAM data sets only.

Aliases
PE, PED, PEDI, PEDIT

Abbreviations and Synonyms

CB for COPYBOOK, FADDR for FROMADDRESS, FKEY for FROMKEY, REUSE for LOAD, TADDR
for TOADDRESS, TKEY for TOKEY

Defaults
LOAD (NOLOAD for non-KSDS VSAM data sets)

Required
None

Operands
member Name of data set member to be edited. If no default data
set name has been set, PEDIT will prompt for data set. If
no member or memgroup is supplied, PEDIT will prompt
for member name and data set.
Alternative: memgroup
memgroup Memlist or memgroup naming multiple data set members
to be edited in sequence during this PEDIT session. If no
default data set name has been set, PEDIT will prompt for
data set. If no memgroup or member name is supplied,
PEDIT will prompt for member name and data set.
Alternative: member
LOAD The entire member is to be loaded into memory for editing
and rewritten completely at the SAVE command. With this
option, record lengths can be modified (even for VSAM
ESDS data sets) and line commands such as I (insert),
C (copy), D (delete), M (move), and R (repeat) are
available.
Restrictions: VSAM data sets must be marked REUS or
must be empty. Executable load members may not use
the LOAD option.
Synonym: REUSE
Alternatives: NOLOAD, BLOCK
NOLOAD Only changed records are kept in memory. Line commands
that modify data records are not available.
BLOCK Only changed records are kept in memory and the edit
display consists of one line for each physical record. Line
commands that modify data records are not available.

308 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

COPYBOOK PEDIT prompts for a copybook member to overlay the

record and format the data displayed.
Synonym: CB
SELECT StarTool FDM is to prompt for record selection parameters
based on the data set type and only selected records
display in the edit session. No line commands are
supported except for the D (delete) line command for
VSAM KSDS data sets.
AUDIT StarTool FDM is to prompt for allocation parameters and a
data set name for an audit data set before starting the edit
session. During the edit session, StarTool FDM records a
before and after image of any changed record using the
current record formatting mode (character, hexadecimal,
or copybook). If PEDIT is not able to output records to the
audit data set, PEDIT disables the audit facility and notifies
you. You can continue the PEDIT session or terminate the
session with a CANCEL command.
BACKUP For sequential data sets, indicates that StarTool FDM is to
make a backup copy of the data set before placing you in
edit or selective edit. This permits editing large data sets
and D (delete) and I (insert) are supported. When you
enter SAVE during the edit session, any changes that have
been made to that point are merged into the original data
set and the backup data set must be rebuilt.
This process may take some time.This option also supports
multi-volume sequential data sets in LOAD or SELECT
modes; however, LOAD is usually not appropriate.
VIEW This edit session is to operate with the SAVE command
disabled. Records are examined only. Use the PVIEW
command as shorthand for PEDIT with the VIEW keyword.
FROMKEY(key) For VSAM data sets only, key is coded as the key of the
first record to be accessed. This is a generic key and it can
be coded as x’hexkey’; access begins at the first record
whose key matches (or is greater than) the portion of the
key specified.
Use this parameter with TOKEY. Specify it only for an
alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.
FROMADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through
99999999 to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the
first record to be accessed. The RBA value must match the
beginning of a logical record. If this parameter is specified
for key-sequenced data, the records are accessed in
physical sequential order instead of key order. Use this
parameter with TOADDRESS.
FROMADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed
through a path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed

Command Reference 309

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

FROMNUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through

99999999 to specify the relative record number (RRN) of
the first record to be accessed. This record must be
present in the data set.
Use this parameter with TONUMBER. Specify it can only for
a variable or fixed relative record data set.
TOKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, ky is coded as the key of the last
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be
coded as x’hexkey’. Access ends after the first record
whose key matches the portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with FROMKEY. Specify it only for an
alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.
TOADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through
99999999 to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the
last record to be accessed. The RBA value does need not to
match the beginning of a logical record. If this parameter is
specified for key-sequenced data, the records are accessed
in physical sequential order instead of key order. Use this
parameter with FROMADDRESS.
TOADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed
through a path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed
TONUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through
99999999 to specify the relative record number (RRN) of
the last record to be accessed. This record need not be
present in the data set.
Use this parameter with FROMNUMBER. Specify it only for
a variable or fixed relative record data set.

Remarks
PEDIT supports records lengths to 32K with updates made directly to a VSAM data set.

Use a LOG command to suspend PEDIT and then go to other StarTool FDM processes.
Enter any StarTool FDM function name to suspend PEDIT, but do not suspend it with a
StarTool FDM subcommand. For example, enter LISTC to suspend PEDIT and go to the
LISTC/LISTF function; however, if you enter REPLACE, an invalid command prompt is
returned.

PEDIT is similar to ISPF edit. You can also perform VSAM positioning. Usually changes in a
VSAM KSDS are made by typing over individual characters; these characters are not
upper-case (however, the CAPS command is supported).

If records are moved or copied out of sequence, PEDIT marks the record with ==SEQ> in
the line number column. In a similar fashion, duplicate records are marked with ==DUP>
in the line number field.

The keys for these records (and for records that are moved but remain in key sequence)
are unprotected so that you can change the key field. PEDIT does not permit you to save

310 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

a data set if records are out of order or if there are duplicate keys; however, you can
CANCEL the session.

Record exclusions with the X line command or the EXCLUDE or X primary command are
not yet supported.

PEDIT offers several basic advantages:

Audit facility StarTool FDM can record images of records in character,

hexadecimal, or copybook mode before and after changes.
Copybook mode COBOL, Assembler or PL/I copybook data display mode is
supported in addition to character and hexadecimal. The
display can be in a record layout mode with one record per
screen or in vertical format with multiple records on a
single screen.
Extended Copybook Dynamically selects a copybook based on record values.
This supports data sets with base and segment copybook
portions.
Selective EDIT Edits only selected records in an edit session.
Parallel EDIT Goes from one edit session to any other PEDIT edit session
or StarTool FDM function.
Long records PEDIT supports record lengths up to 32K.
Large data sets With the NOLOAD and BLOCK keywords, PEDIT only
maintains changed records in memory using an update-in-
place strategy for saving changed records.
Physical records With the BLOCK keyword, examines and updates
RECFM=U, RECFM=F/FB, and RECFM=V/VB physical
blocks directly. With variable blocked data sets, you can
correct physical record construction errors.

For sequential data sets, LOAD is the default; however, for very large data sets you can
use NOLOAD. Only changed records are retained in memory. Also, only changed data
blocks are rewritten for a SAVE command.

PEDIT supports editing a PDS load member and NOLOAD is forced. If a load member is
updated with PEDIT, it marks the user’s USERID as the ZAP IDR data and it assumes that
the first CSECT of the module was modified (PEDIT is not aware of CSECT boundaries).
Editing a PDS load member is equivalent to zapping the member; however, it is much
simpler to perform with an edit.

For a PDS source member, LOAD is the default; however, you can specify NOLOAD or
BLOCK.

For a PDSE source member, LOAD is forced; an updated member is always entirely
rewritten when it is saved. PEDIT does not currently support saving PDSE program
objects.

For VSAM data sets other than KSDS data sets, NOLOAD is forced; line commands that
modify the data set are not supported and only modified records are rewritten to the data
set. For a variable RRDS, you can modify the lengths of individual records in a PEDIT
session.

Use the COPYBOOK command to select a copybook member as follows:

1 Enter a CB command.

Command Reference 311

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

2 Enter a generic member name; for example: mydata.set(xyz*)

3 This displays all members matching the generic member name in a MEMLIST.

4 Examine the members with E (edit), B (browse), or CBM (CBMAP) line commands.

5 Enter S (select) to select the desired copybook member and pass its name to
copybook prompt.

6 Press Enter to process the data set with the selected copybook member.

Use a copybook in normal copybook mode (displayed in layout mode with one record on a
screen), extended copybook mode (using multiple copybook members selected by data
values), or vertical copybook mode (multi-record displayed in tabular mode using headers
from the copybook).

Extended copybook support provides for copybooks with base and segment portions. The
appropriate copybook is selected dynamically based on record values. Save and manage
these copybook selections with the PROFMAN application. Once PEDIT is active, you can
use the PROFMAN application to position to the CB portions and type an S line command
to activate an extended copybook table.

To use extended copybooks, select copybook support from PEDIT or PVIEW and specify
TEMP, REDO, CREATE, or MOD on the extended copybook line near the bottom. To modify
an existing extended copybook member, type its name in the copybook save name field.

Use the TEMP option to enter a temporary extended copybook table that will not be saved
and use REDO to modify a temporary extended copybook table. Use CREATE to create a
saved extended copybook table and MOD to modify an existing table.

If you have multiple 01 levels in different copybooks, you normally define each one as a
BASE. If a file definition is split into two or more copybooks, define the first part as a
BASE from one copybook member and multiple following parts from different copybooks
as SEGMENT sections. There must always be at least one BASE segment. Each one can be
associated with multiple SEGMENT sections.

Once you are in the extended copybook dialog, type an S line command to define the first
base segment and fill in the desired elements on the copybook selection panel. Be sure to
enter the type (BAS for BASE or SEG for SEGMENT) for each item.

The following line commands are supported in extended copybook mode:

S Selects an item to be updated.

D Deletes an item.
R Repeats an item.
I Inserts a null item.

Type an A primary command when you want to activate the extended copybook in PEDIT.
This restarts the edit session.

The following primary commands are supported directly for the PEDIT function. For
information on ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see "Common Commands"
on page 39.

BOU[NDS] Specifies default find column limits. BOUNDS OFF and BOUNDS
with no operand turn-off-bounds processing. BOUNDS LIST shows
current boundaries.

312 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Syntax BOUNDS nn mm| OFF | LIST

CAN[CEL] Terminates the edit session with no data updates.

CB Prompts for a COBOL, Assembler or PL/I copybook name to overlay
define edit records.
Syntax
CB [ON]|[OFF]|[NEW]|[FIRST]|[NEXT]|[PREV]
[ON] -- default, switches to copybook mode
[OFF] -- reverts to the previous PEDIT display
[NEW] -- prompts for a new copybook member
[FIRST] -- switches to the first copybook with matching values
[NEXT] -- switches to the next base copybook that matches
[PREV] -- switches to the previous base copybook that matches

CBMAP Prompts for a COBOL, Assembler or PL/I copybook name to display

independently of edit records. CBMAP also sets the default
copybook data set and member for the CB line command.
C[HANGE] Updates a character string or a hexadecimal string.
Syntax CHANGE anystring newstring [nn mm] [ASIS] [ALL]
[FIRST|LAST|PREV] [PREFIX|SUFFIX|WORD]

(where nn and mm are column numbers)

The two strings must be the same length.
CLOSE Same as END, updates changed records and terminates PEDIT.
COPYBOOK Prompts for a COBOL, Assembler or PL/I copybook name to overlay
define edit records.
Syntax
COPYBOOK [ON]|[OFF]|[NEW [member]]|[FIRST]|[NEXT]|[PREV]
[ON] -- default, switches to copybook mode
[OFF] -- reverts to the previous PEDIT display
[NEW member] -- Sets default copybook to named member.
If no member supplied, PEDIT prompts for it.
[FIRST] -- switches to the first copybook with matching values
[NEXT] -- switches to the next base copybook that matches
[PREV] -- switches to the previous base copybook that matches
CREATE Creates a new partitioned data set member from marked copy or
moves data lines in an edit session.
Syntax CREATE [member]

(if a member name is not specified, use extended CREATE)

CUT Places marked edit sessions lines into the StarTool FDM clipboard.
In a later PEDIT or ISPF edit session, use PASTE to place these
lines back into a session.
Syntax
CUT [mm] [ADD|REPL] [DEFAULTS]
mm -- two character table name
ADD -- add to the current clipboard
REPL -- replace clipboard contents
DEFAULTS -- display a panel for defaults

DIS[PLAY] Displays operands and defaults for COPYBOOK, SCREEN,

VERTICAL, SHOW, and HIDE.
END Same as CLOSE, updates changed records and terminates PEDIT.

Command Reference 313

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

F[IND] Finds a string and positions the display start location. Search
strings up to 64 characters in length are supported.
Syntax
FIND anystring [nn mm] [ASIS] [ALL]
[FIRST|LAST|PREV] [PREFIX|SUFFIX|WORD]
[CHECK] -- for copybook, searches for invalid packed decimal
[NAME] -- for copybook, positions to a copybook variable name
[SAME] -- for copybook, searches only the current record

(where nn and mm are column numbers)

HEX Sets HEX display mode on or off.
Syntax HEX [ON|OFF]

HIDE For copybook display or VERTICAL display, excludes named or

numbered elements from the current display.
Syntax
HIDE {ALL|varnam|gennam|n1 [TO] n2} GROUP
ALL -- all variables are to be hidden
varnam -- exact variable name from the copybook
gennam -- partial variable name like FORM-DETAIL*
n1 -- entry number for a variable from SCREEN NUMBER
TO -- used with n2 to indicate a range
n2 -- a second entry number to specify a range end with TO
GROUP -- hides all variables from a given copybook level

KEY Positions directly to the record with the corresponding record key.
Syntax KEY 'record key' | x'hexkey'

L[OCATE] Positions directly to a record number or duplicate record (by key).

Syntax LOCATE recnumber [DUP] [FIRST]

NEXT Positions to a following logical record. Use SET to change the

default number of records to move forward if no operands are
entered. NEXT 1 SET is the default. SET changes the default and
causes a new record to display.
Syntax NEXT [num SET]|[MAX]

OUT[PUT] Outputs the current PEDIT edit record to print or a data set using
the current display mode (character, hexadecimal, or copybook).
Syntax OUTPUT [=c | F(ddname)]

PAD Changes the padding character and specifies the number of pad
characters desired.
Syntax PAD character|'character'|x'hex' [column]

Example: PAD a 45
PASTE Places lines from the StarTool FDM clipboard into the active edit
session. Use the PEDIT or ISPF edit CUT macro to place lines into
the clipboard.
Syntax
PASTE [mm] [ZERO|KEEP] [DEFAULTS]
mm -- two character table name
ZERO -- insert clipboard contents and clear clipboard
KEEP -- insert clipboard contents and keep clipboard
DEFAULTS -- display a panel to set defaults

314 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

PREV[IOUS] Positions to a previous logical record. Use SET to change the

default number of records to move backward if no operands are
entered. PREV 1 SET is the default. SET changes the default and
causes a new record to display.
Syntax PREVIOUS [num SET]|[MAX]

RCH[ANGE] Changes a string (repeat change) and positions the display start
location. PF keys 6 and 18 are normally set to RCHANGE.
RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location.
PF keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
REPL[ACE] Replaces a data set or member from marked copy or moves data
records in an edit session.
Syntax REPLACE [member]

(if a member name is not specified, use extended REPLACE)

RESET Clears all pending line commands without letting them execute.
SHOW For copybook display or VERTICAL display, includes named or
numbered elements in the current display.
Syntax
SHOW {ALL|varnam|gennam|n1 [TO] n2} GROUP ONLY
ALL -- all variables are to be shown
varnam -- exact variable name from the copybook
gennam -- partial variable name like FORM-DETAIL*
n1 -- entry number for a variable from SCREEN NUMBER
TO -- used with n2 to indicate a range
n2 -- entry number to specify range end with TO
GROUP -- selects all variables in a given copybook level
ONLY -- hides all variables except those identified

SORT For a VSAM KSDS data set, sorts records into ascending order by
key.
Syntax SORT

SCREEN Changes the copybook display to show different types of data in

the data type field and the displayed data field as shown in the
table below.
Syntax
SCREEN
[TYPE|PICTURE|OFFSET|COLUMN|NUMBER][DATA|NODATA|HEX][LEA
D|NOLEAD][LEV88|NOLEV88]

This table contains the copybook screen part, the header, and an example:
COBOL level and name LEVEL AND NAME 02 SAMPLE-FIRST
data type=TYPE LENGTH TYPE 1 PAC
data type=PICTURE PICTURE S99V9
data type=OFFSET OFFSET 62
data type=COLUMN COLUMN 63
data type=NUMBER NUMBER 4
displayed data=DATA DATA
2.1
displayed data=NODATA OFFSET 62
displayed data=HEX DATA
F24BF1

SUB[MIT] Submits JCL member(s) to JES for background execution.

Syntax: SUBMIT memgroup [TSO_SUBMIT_operands]

Command Reference 315

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

VERT[ICAL] Prompts for a COBOL, Assembler or PL/I copybook name to display

records in a tabular copybook format.
Select or exclude copybook elements to display with the SHOW and
HIDE commands.
Syntax
VERTICAL [ON|OFF|NEW [member]] [DEFAULT] [NAME|NONAME]
[PICT|NOPICT] [COL|NOCOL] [NUM|NONUM] [ONLY]
[LEV1|NOLEV1] [LEV88|NOLEV88]
ON -- turns on VERTICAL with the current copybook
OFF -- turns off VERTICAL mode
[NEW member] -- Sets default copybook to named member.
If no member name supplied, PEDIT prompts for it.
DEFAULT -- sets header to NAME, NOPICT, TYPE, COL, NUM
NAME|NONAME -- controls display of variable name
PICT|NOPICT -- controls display of variable picture
TYPE|NOTYPE -- controls display of variable type
COL|NOCOL -- controls display of variable start column
NUM|NONUM -- controls display of variable reference number
ONLY -- display only selected headers; otherwise, additive
LEV1|NOLEV1 -- controls if the LEVEL 1 variable is displayed
LEV88|NOLEV88 -- controls if LEVEL 88 items are displayed

The following line commands are supported in the PEDIT function:

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

? Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.

( Shifts a line logically to the left.
(( Shifts a block of lines logically to the left.
) Shifts a line logically to the right.
)) Shifts a block of lines logically to the right.
A After this entry.
B Before this entry.
Cn Copies line with an optional count.
COLS Displays a formatted line for identifying display columns.
In Inserts line with an optional count.
Mn Moves line with an optional count.
Rn Moves line with an optional count.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in the
PEDIT function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR- t=”Block line command,==”>

CC C command. Copy block.

DD D command. Delete block.
MM M command. Move block.
RR R command. Repro block.

316 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

PEDIT --- WSER07.VSAM.CUST.CLUSTER ---------------- LINE 0000403 COL 001 070

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
r2 403 Green 1293 92A444512 Denver, CO 80222 NNYD
=>COLS ....+....1....+ ....2.... +....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....
000404 Watson 1093 92A444513 Middlesex,UB11 4AA England NNNF
000405 Aku 0394 92A444515 Apu, Easter Island NNYF
000408 Rogers 0394 92A444520 Oakland, NJ 07436 XXMG
==DUP> Rogers 0394 92A444520 Oakland, NJ 07436 XXMG
==DUP> Rogers 0394 92A444520 Oakland, NJ 07436 XXMG
000411 Thomas 0692 92A444521 Naples, FL 33942 AACC
000414 Apple 0294 92A444524 Alpharetta, GA 30201 AABB
000415 Smith 1292 92A444528 Phoenix, AZ 85071 ABCE
==SEQ> Cznski 1293 92A444525 Springboro, OH 45066 YYMN

PEDIT --- WSER07.VSAM.CUST.CLUSTER ---------------- LINE 0000405 COL 001 070

COMMAND ===> c x'c197a4' x'c1d7c4' SCROLL ===> CSR
==DUP> Green 1293 92A444512 Denver, CO 80222 NNYD
4C98894FFFF4444 FFCFFFFFF C89A8964CD4FFFFF4444444444444444DDEC444444444
079555012930000 921444512 455559B03608022200000000000000005584000000000
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
=>COLS ....+....1....+ ....2.... +....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....
....+....1....+ ....2.... +....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....
....+....1....+ ....2.... +....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
d 0406 Watson 1093 92A444513 Middlesex,UB11 4AA England NNNF
4E8AA994FFFF444 FFCFFFFFF D88898A8A6ECFF4FCC4C989898444444DDDC444444444
061326501093000 921444513 494435257B42110411055731540000005556000000000
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

PEDIT --- WSER07.PDSDEMO.VSAM.CLUSTER ------------- COLUMNS 000001 000035

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
000001 90A44452
LEVEL AND NAME LENGTH TYP DATA ....1....+....2....+....3...
01 TESTBOOK
02 MYFILE-SKIP 1 CHR
02 MYFILE-IDENTIFIER 14 CHR Apple 0294
02 MYFILE-KEY
05 MYFILE-KEY-FIRST2 2 CHR 90
05 MYFILE-KEY-REST 7 CHR A444524
02 MYFILE-PLACE-OF-BUSINESS 27 CHR Alpharetta, GA 30201
02 MYFILE-MISSION-KEYS
05 MYFILE-KEY-ONE 1 CHR A
05 MYFILE-KEY-TWO 1 CHR A
05 MYFILE-KEY-THREE-FOUR 1 CHR B
05 MYFILE-KEY-THREE-FOUR 1 CHR B
02 FILLER 2 CHR
05 MYFILE-HIT-DISTANCE-ONE 3 PAC 2.1
05 MYFILE-HIT-DISTANCE-TWO 5 PAC .02

PEDIT WSER07.VSAM.DEMOLONG.CLUSTER ----------- COLUMNS 000001 000070

COMMAND ===> cb SCROLL ===> CSR
****** ********************* TOP OF DATA ************************************
000001 A AAAAAAAA THE REST1
000002 B BBBBBBBB THE REST2
000003 C CCCCCCCC THE REST3
000004 D 19460228 CHEC K DATE
****** ******************** BOTTOM OF DATA **********************************

Command Reference 317

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

----------------------------------- Copybook --------------------------

COMMAND ===>

Primary command: MAP to view the copybook member before exiting this panel.
IMPORT or EXPORT to retrieve or save a copybook object.

Copybook type ===> COPYBOOK (COPYBOOK, EXTENDED, or VERTICAL)

Copybook or Vertical Copybook data set name:
Data set ===> 'WSER077.LIB.CNTL(CB002T)'
Member name ===> CB002T (name of member if not included in dsn)
Data set type ===> MVS (MVS, Panvalet or Librarian)

Optional:
Language type ===> EITHER (COBOL, PLI, EITHER, or ASM)
Starting name ===>
Starting column ===> 1 (1 to 32760 if first variable is offset)

Extended copybook options:

Extended copybook ===> NONE (Temp, Redo, Create, Mod, Use, Import)
Copybook save name ===> (3 to 6 character name used with Mod or Use
Source library ===> PROFILE (Profile, Group, Sample, or Other)
Other DSNAME ===>

------------------------ Source MEMLIST 1, Session# 2 ----- Row 1 to 17 of 17

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand or a special control code:
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=CB00* -----------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG VER.MOD CREATED LAST MODIFIED SIZE INIT ID
CB000X 01.00 1997/10/06 1997/10/06 11:12 178 178 WSER07
e CB001 01.03 1997/03/18 1998/03/27 9:53 38 37 WSER07
CB002 01.00 1997/03/18 1997/03/18 16:26 6 6 WSER07
CB002A 01.04 1998/06/01 1998/06/01 16:55 9 9 WSER07
CB003 01.00 1997/03/18 1997/03/18 16:27 6 6 WSER07
CB004 01.03 1997/07/25 1997/07/25 8:37 84 84 CHECK

EDIT WSER07.LIB.CNTL(CB001) - 01.03 Columns 00001 00072

Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR
000007 123456 01 TESTBOOK.
000008 123456 02 MYFILE-SKIP PICTURE X(1).
000009 123456 02 FILLERX PIC 9(11) BINARY.
000010 123456 02 MYFILE-IDENTIFIER PICTURE X(14).
000011 123456 02 MYFILE-KEY.
000012 123456 05 MYFILE-KEY-FIRST2 PIC X(2).
000013 123456 05 MYFILE-KEY-REST PIC X(7).
000014 123456 02 MYFILE-PLACE-OF-BUSINESS PIC X(27).
000015 123456 02 TOFILE-COUNT-BINARY PIC S9(4).
000016 123456 02 FILLER PIC X.
000017 123456 02 MYFILE-MISSION-KEYS.
000018 123456 05 MYFILE-KEY-ONE PIC X(1).
000019 123456 05 MYFILE-KEY-TWO PIC X(1).
000020 123456 05 MYFILE-KEY-XXX PIC S9999 COMP.
000021 123456 05 MYFILE-KEY-THREE-FOUR PIC X(1) OCCURS 2 TIMES.

318 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

----------------------- Source MEMLIST 1, Session# 2 ----- Row 1 to 17 of 17

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand or a special control code:
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=CB00* ------------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG VER.MOD CREATED LAST MODIFIED SIZE INIT ID
CB000X 01.00 1997/10/06 1997/10/06 11:12 178 178 WSER07
s CB001 *EDIT* 01.03 1997/03/18 1998/03/27 9:53 38 37 WSER07
CB002 01.00 1997/03/18 1997/03/18 16:26 6 6 WSER07

----------------------------------- Copybook ---------------------------------

COMMAND ===>
Primary command: MAP to view the copybook member before exiting this panel.

Copybook data set name:

Data set ===> 'WSER07.LIB.CNTL(CB001)'
Member name ===> CB00* (name of member if not included in dsn)
Data set type ===> MVS (MVS, Panvalet or Librarian)

PEDIT WSER07.VSAM.DEMOLONG.CLUSTER -------------------------------------

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
RECORD 1 KEY= AAAAAAAA THE
LEVEL AND NAME LENGTH TYP DATA ....1....+....2....+....3..
01 TESTBOOK
02 MYFILE-SKIP 1 CHR A
02 FILLERX 8 BIN X'C1C1C1C1C1C1C1C1'
02 MYFILE-IDENTIFIER 14 CHR THE REST1
02 MYFILE-KEY
05 MYFILE-KEY-FIRST2 2 CHR
05 MYFILE-KEY-REST 7 CHR
02 MYFILE-PLACE-OF-BUSINESS 27 CHR
02 TOFILE-COUNT-BINARY 4 DIS X'40404040'
02 FILLER 1 CHR
02 MYFILE-MISSION-KEYS
05 MYFILE-KEY-ONE 1 CHR
05 MYFILE-KEY-TWO 1 CHR
05 MYFILE-KEY-XXX 2 BIN 16448

----------------------------------- Copybook --------------------------

COMMAND ===>
Primary command: MAP to view the copybook member before exiting this panel.
IMPORT or EXPORT to retrieve or save a copybook object.
Copybook type ===> COPYBOOK (COPYBOOK, EXTENDED, or VERTICAL)
Copybook or Vertical Copybook data set name:
Data set ===> 'WSER07.LIB.CNTL(CB001)'
Member name ===> CB001 (name of member if not included in dsn)
Data set type ===> MVS (MVS, Panvalet or Librarian)
More: +
Optional:
Language type ===> EITHER (COBOL, PLI or EITHER)
Starting name ===>
Starting column ===> 1 (1 to 32760 if first variable is offset)
Extended copybook options:
Extended copybook ===> temp (None, Temp, Redo, Create, Mod, or Use)
Copybook save name ===> (3 to 6 character name used with Mod or Use)
Source library ===> PROFILE (Profile, Group, Sample, or Other)
Other DSNAME ===>

Command Reference 319

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

---------------------------- Extended Copybook #1 ----------------------------

COMMAND ===>

Primary command: MAP to view the copybook member before exiting this panel.
More: +
Specify the copybook data set and member in normal TSO syntax:
Data set ===> LIB.CNTL
Member name ===> cb001 (member if not included in dsname)
Data set type ===> MVS (MVS, Panvalet or Librarian)
Language type ===> EITHER (COBOL, PLI or EITHER)
Starting name ===>
Type ===> BASE (The first one must be a BASE)
Column number ===> 1 (1-32760 or Blank for default)
Compare operator/Length ===> EQ (LT,LE,EQ,GE,GT,NE or 0-32760)
Compare Strings ===> c'a' (string,string)
AND/OR ==> OR
Column number ===> (1-32760 or Blank for no compare)
Compare operator/Length ===> EQ (LT,LE,EQ,GE,GT,NE or 0-32760)
Compare Strings ===> (string,string)

----------------------------- Extended Copybook ------------------------------

COMMAND ===> a

Primary commands: S to Save this list, A to Activate this list, END to cancel.
Line commands: S to Select one line at a time and update selection options.
More: +

Type Member Level 01 name Lang Type Selection

_ 1 BAS CB001 TESTBOOK EITHER YES
_ 2 BAS CB0046 UNKNOWN EITHER DEFAULT
_ 3 NA EITHER NA

PEDIT WSER07.VSAM.DEMOLONG.CLUSTER -------------------------------------

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
RECORD 1 KEY= AAAAAAAA THE
LEVEL AND NAME LENGTH TYP DATA ....1....+....2....+....3....+
01 TESTBOOK BASE: CB001 # 1
02 MYFILE-SKIP 1 CHR A
02 FILLERX 8 BIN X'C1C1C1C1C1C1C1C1'
02 MYFILE-IDENTIFIER 14 CHR THE REST1
02 MYFILE-KEY
05 MYFILE-KEY-REST 7 CHR
02 MYFILE-PLACE-OF-BUSINESS 27 CHR
02 TOFILE-COUNT-BINARY 4 DIS X'40404040'

320 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

PEDIT WSER07.PDSE531.TSRC(DEM2VSAM) ---------- COLUMNS 000001 000017

COMMAND ===> hide 4 to 6 SCROLL ===> CSR
NAME |TESTBOOK|MYFILE-SKIP|MYFILE-IDENTIFIER|MYFILE-KEY|MYFILE-KEY-FIRST2
TYPE |LV1 80 |CHR 1 |CHR 14 |GRP 9 |CHR 2
COLUMN|(1:80) |(1:1) |(2:15) |(16:24) |(16:17)
NUMBER|1 |2 |3 |4 |5
****** ******************** TOP OF DATA ************************************
000001 Test 0311 92
000002 Smith 0392 92
000003 Jones 0194 92
000004 Green 1293 92
000005 Watson 1093 92
000006 Aku 0394 92
000007 Ricker 0993 92
000008 Jackson 0494 92
000009 Rogers 0394 92
000010 Thomas 0692 92
000011 Schmidt 0993 92
000012 Stone 1093 92
000013 Apple 0294 92
000014 Cznski 1293 92
000015 Smith 1292 92
000016 Johnson 0394 92
****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA **********************************

PEDIT WSER07.PDSE531.TSRC(DEM2VSAM) ---------- COLUMNS 000001 000043

COMMAND ===> hide 2;show 5 SCROLL ===> CSR
NAME |TESTBOOK|MYFILE-SKIP|MYFILE-IDENTIFIER|MYFILE-PLACE-OF-BUSINESS
TYPE |LV1 80 |CHR 1 |CHR 14 |CHR 19
COLUMN|(1:80) |(1:1) |(2:15) |(25:43)
NUMBER|1 |2 |3 |7
****** ******************** TOP OF DATA ************************************
000001 Test 0311 Anytown, AW, 95120
000002 Smith 0392 Yorba Linda,CA 9268
000003 Jones 0194 Minneapolis,MN 5541
000004 Green 1293 Denver, CO 80222
000005 Watson 1093 Middlesex,UB11 4AA
000006 Aku 0394 Apu, Easter Island
000007 Ricker 0993 Ward Hill, MA 01835
000008 Jackson 0494 Springfield, MO 658
000009 Rogers 0394 Oakland, NJ 07436
000010 Thomas 0692 Naples, FL 33942
000011 Schmidt 0993 Bremen, Germany
000012 Stone 1093 Blue ridge, PA 1721
000013 Apple 0294 Alpharetta, GA 3020
000014 Cznski 1293 Springboro, OH 4506
000015 Smith 1292 Phoenix, AZ 85071
000016 Johnson 0394 Clinton, MD 20797
****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA **********************************

PVIEW Function
The PVIEW command is shorthand for PEDIT with the VIEW keyword. PVIEW can view a
data set even if it is currently being edited. PVIEW is equivalent to PEDIT with the SAVE
command disabled.

Command Reference 321

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Example
PVIEW

Syntax
PVIEW member [REUSE/NOLOAD/BLOCK ]
[COPYBOOK/CB ]
[SELECT ]
[AUDIT ]
* [FROMKEY(key)/FROMADDRESS(add)/FROMNUMBER(num) ]
* [TOKEY(key)/TOADDRESS(add)/TONUMBER(num) ]

*NOTE: Lines with an asterisk are supported for VSAM data sets only

Aliases
PV, PVI, PVIE, PVIEW

Abbreviations
FKEY for FROMKEY, and FADDR for FROMADDRESS, TKEY for TOKEY, and TADDR for
TOADDRESS.

Defaults
none

Required
none

Operands
See the documentation for the “PEDIT Function”.

PGMDOC Subcommand
The PGMDOC subcommand lists module descriptions from a program table. The output is
a one-line description of each module in the member group.

Example
PGMDOC idc*

Syntax
PGMDOC memgroup

322 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Aliases
PG, PGM, PGMD, PGMDO, PGMDOC

Defaults
memgroup

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the member names of interest.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed; for more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ------------- ROW 1 OF 59
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SYS2.TSO.CMDLIB,VOL=SER=SYS804 MEM=(JBB2217 --------------------------
>----->pgm (jbb2217,dsnttttt,xyz456,isr*)
PDS235I PRODUCT FROM DESCRIPTION
JBB2217 MVSFMID IBM MVS/SP R2.1.7 5752***** R217
DSNTTTTT MVS IBM DB2 Prefix
XYZ456 UNKNOWN (THIS MODULE NAME WAS NOT FOUND)
ISRFR77 ISPF/PDF IBM 3277 French Translate Table
ISRFR77A ISPF/PDF IBM 3277 French APL Translate Table
ISRFR78 ISPF/PDF IBM 3278 French Translate Table
ISRFR78A ISPF/PDF IBM 3278 French Text Translate Table
ISRFR78T ISPF/PDF IBM 3278 French APL Translate Table
ISRGE78 ISPF/PDF IBM 3278 German Translate Table
ISRGE78A ISPF/PDF IBM 3278 German APL Translate Table
ISRHA78H ISPF/PDF IBM 5550 Korean Translate Table
ISRKA78K ISPF/PDF IBM 5550 Japanese Translate Table
ISRLALIN ISPF/PDF IBM LMF - All Listing Interface
ISRLAUCL ISPF/PDF IBM LMF - Activity Log Cleanup
ISRLCFCL ISPF/PDF IBM LMF - Control File Control

PRINT Subcommand
The PRINT subcommand prints a hardcopy list of a member. Use the TSO PRINTDS or
PRINTOFF command (as generated during StarTool FDM installation). Add any PRINTDS/
PRINTOFF operands after the member name.

Command Reference 323

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Example
PRINT mema:memb form(0012) asa

Syntax
PRINT memgroup [ASA ]
[ASIS/CAPS ]
[CLASS(c) ]
[COPIES(num) ]
[DEST(destname) ]
[FCB(fcbname) ]
[FORMS(formname) ]
[HEADING/NOHEADING]
[HOLD/NOHOLD ]
[LIST/NOLIST ]
[NOMSG ]
[PRINT/NOPRINT ]
[PROG(progname) ]
[SNUM ]
[TEXT ]
[UCS(ucsname) ]
[VOLUME(volname) ]

Note: the above operands are for the PRINTOFF command.

Aliases
PR, PRI, PRIN, PRINT

Defaults
memgroup, CLASS(A), NOHOLD, LIST, PRINT, ASIS, HEADING

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be printed.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed; for more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
If the memgroup is specified as a : (for all members), the PRINT
command is called only once to print the entire data set.
others Optional. May include any desired TSO PRINTOFF or PRINTDS
operands.

324 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Remarks
Either the TSO PRINTDS or PRINTOFF command is used. This choice was made during
StarTool FDM installation. To determine which program is used, enter a CONTROL
DEFAULT subcommand and look for an output line beginning ”PRINT calls”. This interface
is optional and should only be used with the TSO PRINTDS command or the public domain
PRINTOFF command.

PROFMAN Function
The PROFMAN (profile manager) command manages saved MEMLIST, LISTC/LISTF and
WORKPAD tables. Primary commands such as SORT, F (find), REMOVE, and OUTPUT are
useful in managing saved tables.

Syntax
PROFMAN

Aliases
PRO, PROF, PROFM, PROFMA, PROFMAN

Defaults
none

Required
none

Operands
none

Remarks
PROFMAN builds and displays a table containing all of your saved MEMLIST, LISTC/LISTF
and WORKPAD tables. From this display, you can inspect, manage, and activate any of
these tables.

The alternate (reached with a LEFT or RIGHT command) view of this function shows the
first line of each saved table. This should give you some context to help you identify a
given table.

Command Reference 325

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

The following primary commands are supported directly for the PROFMAN function. For
documentation on ISPMODE commands available anywhere in StarTool FDM, see
"Common Commands" on page 39.

ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the PROFMAN table.

DUA[L] Displays a double line view of the PROFMAN table.
EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on PROFMAN table data.
(or ET[BL])
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax F anystring [ASIS]
[ANY/FUNC/NAME/MODIFIED/ID/SIZE/ENTRY]

LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the PROFMAN table. PF keys 10

and 22 are normally set to LEFT.
L[OCATE] Positions to a data line in sorted tables by searching the current
sorted column for the specified data.
Syntax
LOC {LC/ML/WO[partname]}name/partdate/user/size

NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the PROFMAN table.

O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the PROFMAN function and
operand syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the PROFMAN table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REM[OVE] Trims the PROFMAN table based on a string match.

Syntax REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/FUNC/NAME/MODIFIED/ID/SIZE/ENTRY]

RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location.
PF keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the PROFMAN table. PF keys 11
and 23 are normally set to RIGHT.
SO[RT] Sorts function tables into an alternate order. SORT with no operands
sorts the table in default order, while SORT with a field name sorts
the table in that order.
Syntax SORT [FUNC/NAME/MODIFIED/ID/SIZE]
[ASCEND/DESCEND]

X Clears the PROFMAN relative to the cursor position.

Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the PROFMAN table. This is equivalent to X ALL

The following line commands are supported in the PROFMAN function:

= Repeats the previous line command.

D Displays this saved table.
DEL Deletes this saved table.
K Kills and clears all following line commands.

326 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

LOG Copies the line into the log.

MERG Merges this table into a MEMLIST, LISTC/LISTF, or WORKPAD table.
O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
REN Renames this saved table.
S Selects line command (activates the MEMLIST, LISTC/LISTF, or WORKPAD
table).
X Drops the table line.

------------------------------ PROFMAN Table List --------- ROW 1 TO 16 OF 16

COMMAND ===> right SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command or a special control code:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD FUNC NAME DATA/MSG Last Modified SIZE ID First entry in table
LC ABC 93/12/08 15.00 1 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.CLIST
LC ISPF23 94/05/27 10.29 5 WSER07 WSER07.ISPF23.ISPLLIB
LC PDSE 94/08/04 08.16 14 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.PDSE
LC SDSF 94/08/19 09.48 9 WSER07 WSER07.SDSF.DIA410
LC SHARE 94/09/07 13.40 43 WSER07 WSER07.FILE020.DATA
LC TRYIT3 94/06/24 11.42 3 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.CLIST
LC WSER07 94/06/03 15.04 147 WSER07 SYS1.CS2.UCAT.VSTR80M
LC WSER09 94/06/03 15.05 44 WSER07 WSER09.ALL.ASM
LC 10 94/01/10 07.23 3 WSER07 SYS1.LINKLIB
LC 20 94/07/12 13.10 1 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.ASM
LC 99 94/05/12 11.41 12 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.PDSE
ML SPEC 94/07/06 09.26 12 WSER07 ##BCBC ##ISPF23 ##PD
ML TRY4 94/07/21 07.23 3 WSER07 PDSLCPNL PDSMLPNL PDSW
WO AAAA 94/07/06 16.27 1 WSER07 - this is a test
WO 2 94/05/03 15.39 0 WSER07
WO 10 94/01/04 12.33 1 WSER07 D 'SYS1.LINKLIB'
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

------------------------------ PROFMAN Table List ---------- ROW 1 TO 9 OF 16

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command or a special control code:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD FUNC NAME DATA/MSG Last Modified SIZE ID
--- First entry in table --------------------------------------------
LC ABC 93/12/08 15.00 1 WSER07
WSER07.LIB.CLIST STR84O PO FB 80 9040
LC ISPF23 94/05/27 10.29 5 WSER07
WSER07.ISPF23.ISPLLIB MIGRAT
LC PDSE 94/08/04 08.16 14 WSER07
WSER07.LIB.PDSE STR84V PO FB 80 9040
LC SDSF 94/08/19 09.48 9 WSER07
WSER07.SDSF.DIA410 STR80L PS FBA 121 23474
LC SHARE 94/09/07 13.40 43 WSER07
WSER07.FILE020.DATA STR826 PO FB 80 9040
LC TRYIT3 94/06/24 11.42 3 WSER07
WSER07.LIB.CLIST STR911 PO FB 80 9040
LC WSER07 94/06/03 15.04 147 WSER07
SYS1.CS2.UCAT.VSTR80M STR80M VS U 0 4096
LC WSER09 94/06/03 15.05 44 WSER07
WSER09.ALL.ASM MIGRAT
LC 10 94/01/10 07.23 3 WSER07
SYS1.LINKLIB ES2RES PO U 0 23200

Command Reference 327

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

------------------------------ PROFMAN Table List --------- ROW 1 TO 16 OF 16

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command or a special control code:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD FUNC NAME DATA/MSG Last Modified SIZE ID First entry in table
WO AAAA 94/07/06 16.27 1 WSER07 - this is a test
LC ABC 93/12/08 15.00 1 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.CLIST
LC ISPF23 94/05/27 10.29 5 WSER07 WSER07.ISPF23.ISPLLIB
LC PDSE 94/08/04 08.16 14 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.PDSE
LC SDSF 94/08/19 09.48 9 WSER07 WSER07.SDSF.DIA410
LC SHARE 94/09/07 13.40 43 WSER07 WSER07.FILE020.DATA
ML SPEC 94/07/06 09.26 12 WSER07 ##BCBC ##ISPF23 ##PD
LC TRYIT3 94/06/24 11.42 3 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.CLIST
ML TRY4 94/07/21 07.23 3 WSER07 PDSLCPNL PDSMLPNL PDSW
LC WSER07 94/06/03 15.04 147 WSER07 SYS1.CS2.UCAT.VSTR80M
LC WSER09 94/06/03 15.05 44 WSER07 WSER09.ALL.ASM
WO 2 94/05/03 15.39 0 WSER07
LC 10 94/01/10 07.23 3 WSER07 SYS1.LINKLIB
WO 10 94/01/04 12.33 1 WSER07 D 'SYS1.LINKLIB'
LC 20 94/07/12 13.10 1 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.ASM
LC 99 94/05/12 11.41 12 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.PDSE
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

------------------------------ PROFMAN Table List --------- ROW 1 TO 19 OF 21

COMMAND ===> locate 94/06 SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command or a special control code:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD FUNC NAME DATA/MSG Last Modified SIZE ID First entry in table
WO 1 94/10/07 11.19 6 WSER07 - xxx
WO 44 94/09/13 14.43 0 WSER07
LC SHARE 94/09/07 13.40 43 WSER07 WSER07.FILE020.DATA
LC SDSF 94/08/19 09.48 9 WSER07 WSER07.SDSF.DIA410
LC PDSE 94/08/04 08.16 14 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.PDSE
ML TRY4 94/07/21 07.23 3 WSER07 PDSLCPNL PDSMLPNL PDSW
WO NEW1 94/07/20 12.55 6 WSER07 - xxx
LC 20 94/07/12 13.10 1 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.ASM
WO AAAA 94/07/06 16.27 1 WSER07 - this is a test
WO AB 94/07/06 14.42 5 WSER07 -
WO F 94/07/06 14.39 5 WSER07 -
ML SPEC 94/07/06 09.26 12 WSER07 ##BCBC ##ISPF23 ##PD
LC WSER07 94/06/03 15.04 147 WSER07 SYS1.CS2.UCAT.VSTR80M
LC ISPF23 94/05/27 10.29 5 WSER07 WSER07.ISPF23.ISPLLIB
LC 99 94/05/12 11.41 12 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.PDSE
WO 2 94/05/03 15.39 0 WSER07
LC 10 94/01/10 07.23 3 WSER07 SYS1.LINKLIB

------------------------------ PROFMAN Table List -------- ROW 15 TO 21 OF 21

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command or a special control code:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD FUNC NAME DATA/MSG Last Modified SIZE ID First entry in table
LC WSER07 94/06/03 15.04 147 WSER07 SYS1.CS2.UCAT.VSTR80M
LC ISPF23 94/05/27 10.29 5 WSER07 WSER07.ISPF23.ISPLLIB
LC 99 94/05/12 11.41 12 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.PDSE
WO 2 94/05/03 15.39 0 WSER07
LC 10 94/01/10 07.23 3 WSER07 SYS1.LINKLIB
WO 10 94/01/04 12.33 1 WSER07 D 'SYS1.LINKLIB'
LC ABC 93/12/08 15.00 1 WSER07 WSER07.LIB.CLIST
*********************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

328 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

QUIT Subcommand
The QUIT subcommand terminates StarTool FDM.

Example
QUIT

Syntax
QUIT

Aliases
Q, QU, QUI, QUIT

Operands
No operands are supported for the QUIT subcommand.

Remarks
The QUIT subcommand is equivalent to multiple END subcommands. Use it from
ISPMODE or MEMLIST instead of using repeated ENDs when you want to terminate
StarTool FDM and not just the current function.

READOBJ Subcommand
The READOBJ subcommand reads and disassembles object code.

Example
READOBJ PTF1107

Syntax
READOBJ memgroup [FLOAT/NOFLOAT ]
[MVS370/MVSXA/ESA370 ]
[PRIV/NOPRIV ]
[REASM ]

Aliases
READ, READO, READOB, READOBJ

Command Reference 329

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Defaults
memgroup, NOFLOAT, NOPRIV, ESA370

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be disassembled.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
FLOAT Includes floating-point instructions in the instruction set.
NOFLOAT Does not decode floating-point instructions.
MVS370 Uses only instructions defined on MVS/370 systems.
MVSXA Uses only instructions defined on MVS/XA systems.
ESA370 Uses only instructions defined on MVS/ESA systems. This instruction
set also includes all MVS/XA instructions.
PRIV Includes privileged instructions in the instruction set.
NOPRIV Does not decode privileged instructions.
REASM Outputs the disassembled instructions in a format that can be
reassembled to recreate the decoded module. When you request this
format, the CSECT offset field (the first output field) is placed at the
end of each decoded statement.

Remarks
READOBJ uses an algorithm that allows several object decks to be present in a single
member. READOBJ formats its output as follows:

CSECT offset A hexadecimal offset in the current CSECT.

With REASM format, this is the last output field.
name An external name or generated internal name (format: “A”
followed by a 6-character offset in the module).
operation A 1- to 5-byte reconstructed operation code.
operands The reconstructed operand values.
comments For SVC calls, the original MACRO (for example, GETMAIN or
TPUT).
hex representation 1 to 3 columns of the original hexadecimal data.
character 1 to 8 bytes of the same data in character mode surrounded
representation by asterisks.

330 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ROW 370 TO 387 OF 1,370
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.DATA,VOL=SER=SER005 MEM=COMPAREC ---------------------------
>----->readobj comparec
00000 COMPARE CSECT
00000 COMPRPCL B 140(,R15) 47F0 F08C *.00.*
00004 BSM R12,R3 0BC3 *.C*
00006 DC C'OMPARE ' D6D4D7C1D9C54040 *OMPARE *
0000E DC C' 06/03' 404040F0F661F0F3 * 06/03*
00016 DC C'/92 13.4' 61F9F240F1F34BF4 */92 13.4*
0001E DC C'8 ' F840 *8 *
00020 B 32(,R10) 47F0 A020 *.0..*
00024 DC X'ABABABABABABABAB' ABABABABABABABAB *........*
0002C DC X'ABABABABABABABAB' ABABABABABABABAB *........*

RECALL Subcommand
The RECALL (or RC) subcommand displays the previous subcommand or displays and
reenters the previous subcommand for execution.

The following subcommands are ignored for the purposes of the RECALL subcommand:
CHANGE, HELP, K (KLEAR), and TSO.

Example
RECALL enter

Syntax
RECALL [ENTER/NOENTER/CHANGE]

Aliases
R, RC, RE, REC, RECA, RECAL, RECALL

Defaults
NOENTER

Required
none

Operands
ENTER Displays and reenters the previous subcommand.

Command Reference 331

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

NOENTER Displays the previous subcommand for typing over.

CHANGE Generates a prototype CHANGE subcommand for the currently
allocated data set.

Remarks
In ISPMODE additional options are available to retrieve subcommands from the log.
LASTCMDS allows you to display or select any of the last 32 primary subcommands
entered.

RENAME Subcommand
The RENAME subcommand changes a member’s name.

If you are planning to rename members in a LLA controlled library, see “LLA and Deleted
Members” in Chapter 6, "Commands — L to N".

Example
RENAME thismem thatmem

Syntax
RENAME curname newname [GROUP/NOGROUP ]
[SWAP/NOSWAP ]
[REPBY(repnm) ]
[FORCE ]

Aliases
REN, RENA, RENAM, RENAME

Defaults
NOSWAP, NOGROUP

Required
curname, newname

Operands
curname Specifies the current name of the member.
newname Specifies the new name for the member. This new name becomes
the default member name.

332 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

GROUP Renames a group of members. The range of names affected is

defined by the first operand and the resulting member name is
obtained by replacing the first characters of the member name by
the second group of characters from the RENAME subcommand.
For example, if you enter RENAME IEB ABCD GROUP, all members
beginning IEB... are renamed to ABCD... and a member named
IEB12 is assigned the name ABCD12. Similarly, with RENAME IEB
OX GROUP, a member named IEB12 is assigned the name OX12.
NOGROUP Renames only the member specifically identified.
SWAP Exchanges directory entries for curname and newname. Both
members must exist before the operation takes place. This is the
equivalent of the following three subcommands:
RENAME curname tempnam
RENAME newname curname
RENAME tempnam newname

NOSWAP Does not exchange member directory entries.

REPBY(repnm) Replaces curname with repnm after renaming curname to
newname. For example, RENAME ONE TWO REPBY(NEWONE) is
equivalent to the following two subcommands:
RENAME ONE TWO
RENAME NEWONE ONE

FORCE Renames even if an edit session is currently using the member.

Remarks
If you rename a main load member, any associated alias directory entries are updated to
reflect the new base member name.

If you rename a main load member to itself, any associated alias entries are checked and
updated as needed. A rename of a main member to itself may be useful in completing a
rename sequence for a utility such as ISPF 3.1 or TSO RENAME which leave alias entries
pointing at the original main member name.

NOTE This subcommand modifies the data set. To ensure data set integrity, allocate the
data set as OLD or be aware of the data set update protection provided by the StarTool
FDM command for SHR allocations. For details, see Appendix B, "Update Protection".

Command Reference 333

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 286 OF 299
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.TEST,VOL=SER=STR815 MEM=@OLD:@OLD ------------------------
>----->ren @dia @old group
PDS161I Members to be renamed are: @DIACLIK, @DIAINIT, @DIALOG, @DIAPANL,
@DIAPART, @DIASTAK, @DIATBL, @DIAWRK

PDS391A Should these members be renamed (Yes/No) ?

>----->y
PDS090I @DIACLIK has been renamed to @OLDCLIK
PDS090I @DIAINIT has been renamed to @OLDINIT
PDS090I @DIALOG has been renamed to @OLDLOG
PDS090I @DIAPANL has been renamed to @OLDPANL
PDS090I @DIAPART has been renamed to @OLDPART
PDS090I @DIASTAK has been renamed to @OLDSTAK
PDS090I @DIATBL has been renamed to @OLDTBL
PDS090I @DIAWRK has been renamed to @OLDWRK
****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

REPLACE Subcommand
The REPLACE subcommand changes portions of a member that contains a search string.
Only those portions of the member that contain the search string display after a character
string substitution. For load modules or VSAM data sets, the search and replace strings
must have the same length.

Example
REPLACE mema:memb /before/after/ write

(or equivalently)
REPLACE mema:memb ‘before’ ‘after’ write

(or equivalently)
REPLACE mema:memb xc2c5c6d6d9c5xc1c6e3c5d9x write

Syntax
REPLACE memgroup
+stra+strb+
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP ]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE/PICTURE ]
[STATS/NOSTATS ]
[WRITE/NOWRITE/UPDATE/NOUPDATE ]
[WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX ]
[OFFSET(Hx) MODULE({* / Fullm / Partm*)} ]
[AFTER(num) DO(num) MAXMEMBERS(num) COLS(from:to) ]
[AND('string2') ACOLS(from:to) ACAPS/AASIS/AIGNORE/APICTURE]
[ORx('string3') OCOLS(from:to) OCAPS/OASIS/OIGNORE/OPICTURE ]
[FORMAT(from:to,from:to, ...) ]
[SKIPREC(n) MAXIN(n) MAXOUT(n) ]

334 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

[SKIPCOL(n) MAXLEN(n) MAXFIND(n) ]

[MEMBERS / MEMLIST / ML / NEWML / SUBLIST]
* [FROMKEY(key)/FROMADDRESS(add)/FROM (num)]
* [TOKEY(key)/TOADDRESS(add)/TONUMBER ]

*NOTE: Lines with an asterisk are supported for VSAM only.

Aliases
REP, REPL, REPLA, REPLAC, REPLACE

Abbreviations
FKEY for FROMKEY, FADDR for FROMADDRESS, FNUM for FROMNUMBER, TKEY for TOKEY,
TADDR for TOADDRESS, and TNUM for TONUMBER.

Defaults
memgroup, previous stringa, IGNORE, NOWRITE, STATS, NUM or previous REPLACE/
FIND/LIST format

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be scanned and updated.
Default member names, member lists, member name
ranges, and member name patterns are allowed. For more
information, see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names"
on page 417.
stringa Defines the string to be searched. It is coded as a delimited
string like +searched for+. If the string is not entered or is
null, the last string entered is used. The string can contain
one to 32 characters. If you enter the ASIS keyword, neither
string is translated to upper-case letters.
For LBLOCK, LDUMP, BLOCK, and DUMP formats, the search
and replace strings must have the same lengths.
As an alternative, enter both strings as hexadecimal strings
delimited with x’s like x0123456789xabcdefx. Each string
can contain 1 to 64 characters and that x333x1x and
x0333x01x are equivalent.

Command Reference 335

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

stringb Defines the replacement string. It is coded as a delimited

string like +replaced with+. If the string is not entered or is
null, the string is assumed to be null. The string can contain
0 to 32 characters. If you enter the ASIS keyword, neither
string is translated to upper-case letters.
For LBLOCK, LDUMP, BLOCK, and DUMP formats, the search
and replace strings must have the same lengths.
As an alternative, enter both strings as hexadecimal strings
delimited with x’s like x0123456789xabcdefx. Each string
can contain 1 to 64 characters and that x333x1x and
x0333x01x are equivalent.
NUM Examines the line number field (the last 8 bytes of a fixed-
format record or the first 8 bytes otherwise) of each logical
record. If the line number field is not numeric, switch
formatting to NONUM mode for the remainder of the
member.
For ISPF-saved members, the high-order 6 digits of the line
number field is formatted; otherwise, the low-order 6 digits
of the line number field is formatted by suppressing leading
zeroes. The line number segment is followed by a blank and
up to 249 characters of data from the logical record.
SNUM Discards the line number field (the last 8 bytes of a fixed-
format record or the first 8 bytes otherwise). Searches and
updates up to 256 bytes from a logical record.
NONUM Searches or updates up to 256 bytes from a logical record
(without regard to line numbers).
LBLOCK Formats logical records with two hexadecimal offsets
(displacement in the member and displacement in the logical
record) and segments of up to 64 characters surrounded by
asterisks. Only formatted segments that contain the search
string are updated and displayed; however, a following
segment also displays if the string spans a segment
boundary.
For load modules, only CSECT data is displayed or updated.
If you enter a name in a MODULE operand, only those CSECT
or ENTRY names that satisfy the condition are displayed or
updated. CSECT records are formatted with two hexadecimal
offsets (a module offset and a CSECT offset) and segments
of up to 64 characters surrounded by asterisks.
For VSAM records, the first field in the output is the relative
record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8 bytes of
the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer than 8 characters, a
+ is placed after the key); otherwise, it is a relative byte
address.

336 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

LDUMP Formats logical records with two hexadecimal offsets

(displacement in the member and displacement in the logical
record), segments of up to 32 characters of hexadecimal
data and up to 16 bytes of equivalent characters surrounded
by asterisks. Only formatted segments that contain the
search string are updated and displayed; however, a
following segment displays if the string spans a segment
boundary.
For load modules, only CSECT data is displayed or updated.
If you enter a name in a MODULE operand, only those CSECT
or ENTRY names that satisfy the condition are displayed or
updated. CSECT records are formatted with two hexadecimal
offsets (a module offset and a CSECT offset), segments of up
to 32 characters of hexadecimal data and up to 16 bytes of
characters surrounded by asterisks.
For VSAM records, the first field in the output is the relative
record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8 bytes of
the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer than 8 characters, a
+ is placed after the key); otherwise, it is a relative byte
address.
BLOCK Format physical records with two hexadecimal offsets
(displacement in the member and displacement in the
physical record) and segments of up to 64 characters
surrounded by asterisks.
Only formatted segments that contain the search string are
updated and displayed; however, a following segment also
displays if the string spans a segment boundary.
For VSAM records, the first field in the output is the relative
record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8 bytes of
the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer than 8 characters, a
+ is placed after the key); otherwise, it is a relative byte
address.
If control interval processing is being performed, the first
field is always the control interval relative byte address.
DUMP Formats physical records with two hexadecimal offsets
(displacement in the member and displacement in the
physical record), segments of up to 32 characters of
hexadecimal data and up to 16 bytes of equivalent
characters surrounded by asterisks.
Only formatted segments that contain the search string are
updated and displayed; however, a following segment also
displays if the string spans a segment boundary.
For VSAM records, the first field in the output is the relative
record number for a fixed or variable RRDS. Up to 8 bytes of
the key for a KSDS (if the key is longer than 8 characters, a
+ is placed after the key); otherwise, it is a relative byte
address.
If control interval processing is being performed, the first
field is always the control interval relative byte address.
CAPS Translates character string arguments to upper-case letters.
ASIS Does not translate character string arguments to upper-case
letters.
IGNORE Searches for upper- and lower-case string arguments.

Command Reference 337

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

PICTURE If specified, searches for data using matching characters and

the following picture characters:
 Use = for any character
 Use % for any alphanumeric character
 Use @ for any alphabetic character
 Use # for any numeric character
 Use $ for any special character
 Use ~ for any non-blank character (the “not” character can
also be used)
 Use . for any invalid character
 Use - for any non-numeric character
 Use < for any lower-case alphabetic character
 Use > for any upper-case alphabetic character
Replacement data can use characters and the following
special picture characters:
 Use = for any character
 Use < for lower-case translation
 Use > for upper-case translation
WORD Searches for strings preceded and followed by a non-
alphanumeric character. Use this to limit the string hits.
PREFIX Searches for strings preceded by a non-alphanumeric
character. Use this to limit the string hits.
SUFFIX Searches for strings followed by a non-alphanumeric
character. Use this to limit the string hits.
WRITE Updates the member; this is an update-in-place operation.
NOWRITE Does not update the member; this is a trial update
operation.
UPDATE Updates the member; this is an update-in-place operation.
NOUPDATE Does not update the member; this is a trial update
operation.
STATS Updates ISPF statistics or a ZAP IDR record if any member
data is changed.
NOSTATS Does not update ISPF statistics or a ZAP IDR record even if
some data is changed.
OFFSET(Hx) Specifies a 1- to 6-digit hexadecimal module offset at which
the search is to begin. This operand is only defined for load
modules and only with the LDUMP or LBLOCK output
formats.
If you enter MODULE and OFFSET keywords, the offset
applies to each module selected.

338 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

MODULE(name) Specifies a 1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits

CSECT or ENTRY names to be searched or updated. This
operand is only defined for load modules and only with the
LDUMP or LBLOCK output formats.
If you enter MODULE and OFFSET keywords, the offset
applies to each module selected. The MODULE operand has
several valid forms:
 MODULE(*) – uses the previous name entered on any
MODULE keyword
 MODULE(Fullm) – searches or updates only a CSECT or
ENTRY named FULLM
 MODULE(Partm*) – searches or updates only a CSECT or
ENTRY named PARTM...
AFTER(n) n is coded as 0 through 9999999 to specify the number of
matches to skip before performing replacements.
MAXMEMBERS(n) n is coded as 0 through 9999999 to specify the maximum
number of members to be selected by REPLACE.
DO(n) n is coded as 0 through 9999999 to specify the maximum
number of lines to output for a member.
COLS(from:to) Column range to search for the primary string (COLS is only
supported for formats NUM, SNUM, and NONUM). For
example, COLS(1:10) specifies that the string can begin in
columns 1 through 10.
AND('str2') Another string to search in addition to the primary string.
AND strings are only supported for formats NUM, SNUM, or
NONUM. REPLACE is reported for a primary string only if the
AND string is found first.
ACOLS(from:to) Column range to search for the AND string. For example,
ACOLS(1:10) specifies that the string can begin in columns 1
through 10.
ACAPS If you use an AND character string argument, it is translated
to upper-case letters.
AASIS If you use an AND character string argument, it is not
translated to upper-case letters.
AIGNORE If you use an AND character string argument, the search is
for upper- and lower-case data matching the string.

Command Reference 339

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

APICTURE If you use an AND character string argument, the search is

for data with matching characters and the following picture
characters:
 Use = for any character
 Use % for any alphanumeric character
 Use @ for any alphabetic character
 Use # for any numeric character
 Use $ for any special character
 Use ~ for any non-blank character (the “not” character can
also be used)
 Use . for any invalid character
 Use - for any non-numeric character
 Use < for any lower-case alphabetic character
 Use > for any upper-case alphabetic character
ORx('str3') Another string to search as an alternate to the primary
string. ORx can be OR2 through OR7 for a total of 8 OR
conditions. OR strings are only supported for formats NUM,
SNUM, or NONUM. REPLACE is reported for a primary string
or an OR string.
OCOLS(from:to) Column range to search for the OR string. For example,
OCOLS(1:10) specifies that the string can begin in columns 1
through 10.
OCAPS If you use an OR character string argument, it is translated
to upper-case letters.
OASIS If you use an OR character string argument, it is not
translated to upper-case letters.
OIGNORE If you use an OR character string argument, the search is for
upper- and lower-case data matching the string.
OPICTURE If you use an OR character string argument, the search is for
data with matching characters and the following picture
characters:
 Use = for any character
 Use % for any alphanumeric character
 Use @ for any alphabetic character
 Use # for any numeric character
 Use $ for any special character
 Use ~ for any non-blank character (the “not” character can
also be used)
 Use . for any invalid character
 Use - for any non-numeric character
 Use < for any lower-case alphabetic character
 Use > for any upper-case alphabetic character

340 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

FORMAT Specifies the record columns to display in the output when

(from:to,from:to, reporting a REPLACE string. FORMAT is only supported with
...) NUM, SNUM, or NONUM data. For example,
FORMAT(21:30,0,1:10) specifies that the output is formatted
with data from columns 21 through 30, a blank and data
from columns 1 through 10.
SKIPREC(n) Ignores n (coded as 0 through 9999999) logical records
(physical records for BLOCK or DUMP formats) at the
beginning of a member.
MAXIN(n) Inputs up to n (coded as 0 through 9999999) logical records
(physical records for BLOCK or DUMP formats) for a member
after satisfying any SKIPREC operand.
MAXOUT(n) Displays up to n (coded as 0 through 9999999) output lines
for a member.
MAXFIND(n) Locates and updates up to n (coded as 0 through 9999999)
strings in a member.
SKIPCOL(n) Ignores n (coded as 0 through 99999) columns at the
beginning of each logical record (physical record for BLOCK
or DUMP formats).
For NUM or SNUM output format with record format V,
SKIPCOL(0) refers to the first data position after the line
number field.
MAXLEN(n) Searches or updates up to n (coded as 0 through 99999)
characters in a logical record (physical record for BLOCK or
DUMP formats).
MEMBERS Displays the names of members that contain the find string
without changing the current member group.
MEMLIST Same as ML. Any member containing the find string is
selected for MEMLIST display after all REPLACE activity is
complete. If no members are selected, a null sublist is the
result.
ML Same as MEMLIST. Any member containing the find string is
selected for MEMLIST display after all REPLACE activity is
complete. If no members are selected, a null sublist is the
result.
NEWML Same as MEMLIST and ML except that the current MEMLIST
is reset.
SUBLIST Any member containing the find string is selected for
inclusion in a new sublist after all REPLACE activity is
complete. If no members are selected, a null sublist is the
result.
FROMKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, ky is coded as the key of the first
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be
coded as x’hexkey’; access begins at the first record whose
key Use tatches (or is greater than) the portion of the key
specified.
This parameter with TOKEY. Specify it only for an alternate
index or a key-sequenced data set.

Command Reference 341

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

FROMADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through 99999999

to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the first record
to be accessed. The RBA value must match the beginning of
a logical record (or a control interval for control interval
processing). If you specify this parameter for key-sequenced
data, the records are accessed in physical sequential order
instead of key order. Use this parameter with TOADDRESS.
FROMADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Can be specified for any VSAM data set component if control
interval processing is being used
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed
FROMNUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through
99999999 to specify the relative record number (RRN) of the
first record to be accessed. This record must be present in
the data set.
Use this parameter with TONUMBER. Specify it for a variable
or fixed relative record data set.
TOKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, ky is coded as the key of the last
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be
coded as x’hexkey’; access ends after the first record whose
key matches the portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with FROMKEY. Specify it for an alternate
index or a key-sequenced data set.
TOADDRESS(ad) For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through 99999999
to specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the last record
to be accessed. The RBA value does need not match the
beginning of a logical record (or a control interval for control
interval processing). If you specify this parameter for key-
sequenced data, the records are accessed in physical
sequential order instead of key order. Use this parameter
with FROMADDRESS.
TOADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or
linear data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Can be specified for any VSAM data set component if control
interval processing is being used
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with
spanned records if any of the spanned records are to be
accessed

342 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

TONUMBER(nm) For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through

99999999 to specify the relative record number (RRN) of the
last record to be accessed. This record need not be present
in the data set.
Use this parameter with FROMNUMBER. Specify it for a
variable or fixed relative record data set.

Remarks
If you specify the WRITE or UPDATE keyword, the data is updated in-place; otherwise,
only potential changes are listed.

Unprintable characters for 3270-type devices are translated to periods before they are
displayed.

REPLACE formats are NUM, SNUM, NONUM, LBLOCK, LDUMP, BLOCK, and DUMP. For load
modules, the NUM, SNUM, and NONUM formats are equivalent to the LDUMP format and
for VSAM data sets, the NUM, SNUM, and NONUM formats are equivalent to the LBLOCK
format.

The default format is initially NUM; however, each time a format operand is entered on a
REPLACE, FIND, or LIST subcommand, the value entered is used as the output format for
subsequent REPLACE, FIND, and LIST subcommands. Also, note the following:

1 Formats NUM, SNUM, and NONUM limit the search and update length for logical
records to 256 characters.

2 Column 72 is not searched or modified for formats NUM or SNUM if the record format
is fixed with 80 character records since this is the continuation column.

3 Formats BLOCK and DUMP apply to physical records for non-VSAM data sets (or when
control interval processing is being performed). The other formats apply to logical
records. For load modules, LBLOCK and LDUMP formats update and display only
CSECT data.

4 Formats LBLOCK, LDUMP, BLOCK, and DUMP display only the updated segments of a
record that contain the search string; however, a following segment also displays if
the string spans a segment boundary.

5 Formats LBLOCK, LDUMP, BLOCK, and DUMP require equal length search and
replacement strings.

6 Formats NUM, SNUM, and NONUM allow different length strings with string expansion
(shifting the data over to multiple blanks) and string contraction (shifting the data up
to the next blank into the replacement data). The string expansion and contraction
algorithms modify programming language (Assembler, CLIST, COBOL, FORTRAN, ISPF,
PL/I) statements correctly.

7 For VSAM DATA or INDEX components, the LIST, FIND, and REPLACE subcommands
support control interval access using the DUMP or BLOCK display formats. Instead of
accessing individual VSAM records, each GET or PUT obtains a VSAM control interval.
Control interval access is useful if a VSAM data set has logical errors. REPLACE repairs
the error; however, since only the component is opened for update, the next access of

Command Reference 343

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

the data set through the related cluster gets warning errors because of the differing
time stamps.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 -- ROW 452 TO 469 OF 473
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER004 MEM=(TAPEA -----------------------------
>----->replace m:z /pdse221a/pdse310/ sublist
PDS246I NOWRITE is in effect; no updates will be performed

** REPLACE TAPEA
001400 //ICNTL DD DSN=SER07.PDSE310.CNTL,DISP=SHR
001700 //ILOAD DD DSN=SER07.PDSE310.LOAD,DISP=SHR
PDS142I 57 lines in this member
PDS146I 2 strings found

** REPLACE TAPEXOC
002100 //IASSM DD DSN=SER07.PDSE310.ASSEMBLE,DISP=SHR
PDS142I 45 lines in this member
PDS146I 1 strings found

PDS147I 82 members searched

PDS148I 2 members found
PDS149I 3 total strings found

PDS165I Members are: TAPEA, TAPEXOC

PDS193I This group contains 2 members

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log ROW 1,000 TO 1,014 OF 1,014
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER007 MEM=PDSDECRY --------------------------
>----->repl pdsdecry x4780c1x4770c1x
PDS246I NOWRITE is in effect; no updates will be performed

** REPLACE PDSDECRY
PDS141I AT 000000 CSECT ENCRYPT LENGTH 000015E0
000180 0180 C1D9E240 5000F000 0A0612FF 4770C1A4 *ARS &.0.......Au*
0001B0 01B0 30509180 40064770 C1D248E0 400406E0 *.&j. ...AK...
0001E0 01E0 4770C1FC 48E04004 06E05810 400047F0 *..A..... ..0*

PDS141I AT 0017C8 CSECT R050A90 ENTRY DECIPH

0018A8 0118 CB2C4740 C12A4770 C13259D0 CB304770 *... A...A......*
0018B8 0128 C1324140 000247F0 C1364140 0001D237 *A.. ...0A.. ..K.*

PDS142I 7 blocks in this member

PDS146I 5 strings found
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

344 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS DATA CMDS A-M DATA CMDS N-Z DEFAULT FEATURE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log ROW 1,000 TO 1,012 OF 1,012
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.VSAM.IS.CLUSTER,VOL=SER=SER007 ----------------------------------
>----->repl 'cylx' 'cyly' block write
PDS140I BLOCK RECORD 6 LENGTH 80 RBA 00000400
000XX000 000 *000XX000 IF &CYLY = &STX() THEN - *

PDS140I BLOCK RECORD 7 LENGTH 80 RBA 00000480

000XX100 000 *000XX100 SET &CYLY = 1 *

PDS140I BLOCK RECORD 9 LENGTH 80 RBA 00000640

000XX300 000 *000XX300 SET &ZEDSMSG = &STX(CYLY NOT NUMERIC) *

PDS142I 80 blocks in this data set

PDS146I 3 strings found
PDS145I 3 blocks updated
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

REPRO Subcommand
The REPRO subcommand rebuilds members. It can also create new members based on
existing members in the data set. REPRO cannot reblock load members.

Example
REPRO mem1:mem2 maxblk(2400)

Syntax
REPRO memgroup [ADDZAP/ADDZAP(numb) ]
[ALIAS/NOALIAS ]
[CALL/NOCALL ]
[SUMMARY/LIST/NOLIST ]
[MAXBLK(size) ]
[REPLACE/NOREPLACE ]
[TO(pname) / AS(pname)]

Aliases
REPR, REPRO

Defaults
memgroup, MAXBLK(current BLKSIZE), NOREPLACE, ALIAS for load members unless AS
or TO is entered; otherwise NOALIAS.

Command Reference 345

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be rebuilt (or used as input for new
members).
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed. For more information,
see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
ADDZAP For load members only, adds a ZAP IDR record (each ZAP IDR
record contains space for 19 historical entries).
ADDZAP(numb) For load members only, adds 1 to 99 ZAP IDR records.
ALIAS Processes any associated members (aliases, apparent aliases,
and associated main members too).
NOALIAS Processes only specifically identified members.
CALL Specifies that the copy program is to be invoked.
NOCALL Specifies that the copy program is not to be invoked; member
checking and data set allocations are still performed.
SUMMARY Specifies that only summary and error messages are to be
displayed.
LIST Specifies that all messages are to be displayed.
NOLIST Specifies that no messages are to be displayed.
MAXBLK(sz) For RECFM=V or RECFM=F members only, specifies the maximum
output block size to be used when the members are
reconstructed.
REPLACE For use with AS or TO only, replaces current members in the data
set with any identically named output members.
NOREPLACE For use with AS or TO only, generates an error message and
terminates if any members in the data set will be replaced by any
identically named output members.
TO(pname) pname defines output member name prefixes. For example, with
TO(new) and the input members, AA, ABBA, and IBM04,
members named NEW, NEWA, and NEW04 are created (the
original members are not changed).
If only a single member is input and the ALIAS keyword is not
entered, the resulting member name is taken only from the AS or
TO keyword.
AS(pname) pname defines output member name prefixes. For example, with
AS(new) and the input members, AA, ABBA, and IBM04,
members named NEW, NEWA, and NEW04 are created (the
original members are not changed).
If only a single member is input and the ALIAS keyword is not
entered, the resulting member name is taken only from the AS or
TO keyword.

346 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Remarks
If you use the TO (or the equivalent AS) keyword, each new member is named in a
generic fashion. For example, if you enter TO(X12), each resulting member name is
formed by placing X12 over the first three characters of the original member name. An
exception to this rule is made when only a single member is to be created and its aliases
are not also requested. In this case, the member name is taken directly from the TO
keyword.

For load members, a null ZAP IDR record can be added when the member is rebuilt; for
non-load members, the member can be reblocked as specified by the MAXBLK keyword.

NOTE This subcommand modifies the data set. To ensure data set integrity, allocate the
data set as OLD or be aware of the data set update protection provided by the StarTool
FDM command for SHR allocations. For details, see Appendix B, "Update Protection" on
page 421.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 -- ROW 145 TO 152 OF 152
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand or a special control code:
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CLISTV,VOL=SER=STR92T MEM=BC:BC6 -------------------------
>----->repr aa* to(bc) repl
PDS051I BC was replaced; input=1; output=1
PDS051I BCAA was created; input=6; output=6
PDS051I BCC was replaced; input=44; output=44
PDS051I BC2 was created; input=1; output=1
PDS051I BC4 was created; input=34; output=34
PDS051I BC5 was created; input=1; output=1
PDS051I BC6 was created; input=90; output=90
****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

RESTORE Subcommand
The RESTORE subcommand resurrects deleted members (deleted members are physically
present in a partitioned data set until the data set is compressed). Former versions of a
changed member are also available for RESTORE. RESTORE is not supported for PDSE
data sets.

If you use the MEMLIST (or ML) operand to restore deleted members into a MEMLIST
library, several MEMLIST line commands are available to help you examine and
manipulate deleted members.

Example
RESTORE str memlist find(‘mydata’)

Syntax
RESTORE member [COUNT(number) ]
[DISPLAY/NODISPLAY ]
[FIND('any string') ]

Command Reference 347

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

[ASIS/IGNORE ]
[LIKE(xyz) ]
[MODULE({* / Fullm / Partm*)}]
[PROMPT/NOPROMPT ]
[REPEAT/NOREPEAT/MEMLIST ]
[STATS/NOSTATS ]
[TTR(start) ]

Aliases
RES, REST, RESTO, RESTOR, RESTORE

Defaults
COUNT(5), DISPLAY, PROMPT, STATS, TTR(0)

Required
member

Operands
member Specifies a name for the member to be resurrected. This member name
becomes the default member name after the member is restored.
COUNT Displays at most num informational lines from a deleted member.
(num)
DISPLAY Displays data from deleted members.
NODISPLAY Does not display data from deleted members.
FIND('any') Considers only deleted members containing the string ANY. If ANY is
not present in a deleted member, that member is not to be displayed or
resurrected.
ASIS For use with FIND, does not translate the FIND string to upper case.
IGNORE For use with FIND, searches for upper- and lower-case string
arguments.
LIKE(xyz) For load modules, bases the following attributes on their corresponding
values from member XYZ: AMODE, authorization, editable, executable,
only loadable, page aligned, reentrant, refreshable, reusable, RMODE,
and SSI. For source members, base any SSI value or ISPF statistics on
those present for member XYZ.

348 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

MODULE Specifies a 1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits candidates for
(name) restore processing. If the name parameter is not satisfied for any
CSECT or ENTRY symbols in a deleted member, that member is not to
be displayed or resurrected.The MODULE operand has several valid
forms:
 MODULE(*) – uses the previous name entered on any MODULE keyword
 MODULE(Fullm) – considers only deleted members containing a CSECT
or ENTRY called FULLM
 MODULE(Partm*) – considers only deleted members containing a
CSECT or ENTRY called PARTM...
PROMPT Requires a YES response to a StarTool FDM prompt before restoring a
deleted member.
NOPROMPT Does not prompt before restoring a deleted member.
REPEAT Restores one or more deleted members. The member name to be used
is taken from the partial member name entered filled to eight
characters by a sequential count field. For example, if you enter
RESTORE GASM REPEAT, the restored member names will be
GASM0001, GASM0002, GASM0003, ...
NOREPEAT Restores at most one member.
MEMLIST Restores deleted members into the MEMLIST. Member names are
generated from the partial member name provided and filled with a
count as for the REPEAT option. These members are not actually
restored; they are marked as *DELETED and placed in the MEMLIST so
that you can examine them with line commands DELINK, DISASM,
FIND, HISTORY, LIST, MAP, and REVIEW. Use the RESTORE line
command to restore these deleted members.
STATS For source members, creates ISPF statistics for the restored member.
NOSTATS Does not create ISPF statistics for the deleted member.
TTR(strt) Identifies the starting TTR address (in 1 to 6 hexadecimal digits) of the
deleted member. If REPEAT/MEMLIST, DISPLAY, or PROMPT are in
effect, strt is the starting TTR address for a deleted member search.
If you specify TTR(0) is specified or defaulted, the member search
begins at the first location following the directory.

Remarks
For maximum effectiveness in restoring deleted members use the FIND keyword to limit
the number of displays and prompts. In addition, for load libraries, use the MODULE
keyword to screen members by CSECT and ENTRY names. Combine these keywords with
the MEMLIST option (which forces NOPROMPT) to bring deleted members into the
MEMLIST only. Members are restored individually with the RESTORE line command.

The load attributes authorized, not editable, not executable, only loadable, page
boundary, reentrant, refreshable, and reusable cannot be determined from load module
records. These attributes can be assigned based on a model member with the LIKE
operand or they can be selectively assigned by the subcommand later.

If REPEAT/MEMLIST, DISPLAY, or PROMPT are in effect, StarTool FDM searches for deleted
members and changes the normal RESTORE behavior:

Command Reference 349

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

1 If REPEAT/MEMLIST is in effect, multiple members can be processed with a single

RESTORE subcommand.

2 If DISPLAY is in effect, each deleted member is presented to you in order.

3 If PROMPT is in effect, StarTool FDM requires that you decide what to do with each
deleted member.
 To restore the deleted member, reply with YES
 To not restore the deleted member, reply with NO. The next deleted member is then
presented to you
 To terminate the RESTORE subcommand with no further prompting, reply with CAN

If the data set is a load library, and if the member name is an imbedded external name
within the load module, then that external name is used as the entry point; otherwise, the
first CSECT in the load module is used as the entry point.

It may be possible to resurrect members that were deleted before compressing a data set
if you mark all of the data set’s space as in-use with a FIXPDS MAXSPACE command
before the restore attempt.

It may also be possible to resurrect members lost from a PDS after the directory is
overwritten by sequential output due to some sort of JCL or procedural error. The
sequential data blocks take one or more tracks followed by the end of file marker in the
disk tracks formerly occupied by the directory. To attempt recovery of PDS members
located after the overwritten tracks, type:

1 FIXPDS MAXSPACE
(to mark all allocated space in use)

2 FIXPDS INITDIR(43) ADDTRK(1)

(to reinitialize the directory and add another extent)

3 RESTORE name REPEAT NOPROMPT NODISPLAY

(to restore all deleted members)

4 VERIFY :
(to find invalid members after the previous DS1LSTAR)

5 BROWSE name
(to scan contents of members)

6 RENAME name realname

(to name needed members properly)

7 DELETE name
(to delete members not needed)

8 COMPRESS
(to clean up unused space again)

NOTE This subcommand modifies the data set. To ensure data set integrity, allocate the
data set as OLD or be aware of the data set update protection provided by the StarTool
FDM command for SHR allocations. For details, see Appendix B, "Update Protection".

350 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

RESTORE bbb memlist find('vsam') produces this sample from a source library.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL A-M LINE CMDS A-M DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M FEATURES
CONTROL N-Z LINE CMDS N-Z MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS
--------------------------- Source MEMLIST 1, Session# 2 ------ ROW 1 TO 9 OF 9
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=BBB:BBB ----------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG VER.MOD CREATED LAST MODIFIED SIZE INIT ID
A 01.00 93/04/08 93/04/12 13:21 5 5 SER07
ABLK 01.01 93/04/09 93/04/05 14:37 6 9 SER07
BBB00001 *DELETED 01.00 93/04/20 93/04/20 10:10 24 24 *DELETE
BBB00002 *DELETED 01.00 93/04/20 93/04/20 10:10 12 12 *DELETE
rest BBB00003 vsam#mem 01.00 93/04/20 93/04/20 10:10 3 3 *DELETE
BBB00004 *DELETED 01.00 93/04/20 93/04/20 10:10 25 25 *DELETE
LOADMARK 01.02 93/02/26 93/04/25 6:43 50 48 SER07
SAMPSECR 01.26 90/03/27 93/04/01 5:57 197 220 SER07
TRIAL601 01.00 93/04/14 93/04/20 15:16 123 123 SER07
****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************

RESTORE $$$$ memlist module(pdsmain) produces this sample from a load library.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL A-M LINE CMDS A-M DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M FEATURES
CONTROL N-Z LINE CMDS N-Z MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS
------------------------- Load MEMLIST 1, Session# 2 ------- ROW 1 TO 4 OF 4
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER007 MEM=$$$$:$$$$ -------------------------
CMD NAME DATA/MSG ALIASOF LEN/LKED -- UTES -- APF MODE MAIN
map $$$$0001 *DELETED 93/04/12 *DELETED
$$$$0002 *DELETED 93/04/15 *DELETED
rest $$$$0003 *DELETED 93/04/16 *DELETED
STARTOOL *REPRO* 93/04/16 RENT REUS
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

REVIEW Subcommand
The REVIEW subcommand browses data. Use the TSO REVIEW command. Any REVIEW
operands can be added after the member name. REVIEW operates independently of ISPF.

Example
REVIEW mema:memb

Syntax
REVIEW memgroup [operands]

Aliases
REV, REVI, REVIE, REVIEW

Defaults
none

Command Reference 351

Chapter 7 Commands — O to R

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be browsed.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
If the memgroup is specified as a : (for all members), the REVIEW
command is called to provide a member selection list.
operands Optional. Can include any TSO REVIEW operands.

Remarks
This interface is optional. Use it only if your installation installed the public domain
REVIEW command.

Recent versions of the REVIEW command operate in seven-color mode. REVIEW can
display VSAM data sets. In a MEMLIST, use REV as a line command to display deleted
members before they are restored.

352 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Chapter 8
Commands — S to U

SEPARATE Subcommand
The SEPARATE subcommand splits a member or data set containing members with ./
separators into their component members. ISPF statistics are maintained.

Example
SEPARATE anymemb output.data.set

Syntax
SEPARATE member dsname
[VOLUME(volser) ]
[SEPCHAR(dd) ]
[TRANSFROM(ab) ]
[TRANSTO(cd) ]
[CALL/NOCALL ]
[SUMMARY/LIST/NOLIST]
[OLD/SHR / NEW [BLK/TRK/CYL]
[DIR(num)] [SPACE sec)]]
[ROUND] [EXPDT(yyddd)/RETPD(nnnn)] [RLSE]
[STORCLAS(sclass)] [MGMTCLAS(mclass)]
[DATACLAS(dclass)] [DSNTYPE(LIBRARY/PDS)]

Aliases
SEP, SEPA, SEPAR, SEPARA, SEPARAT, SEPARATE

Defaults
SHR, SEPCHAR(./)

If NEW is specified, BLK/TRK/CYL, DIR, SPACE, ROUND, EXPDT, STORCLAS, MGMTCLAS,

DATACLAS and DSNTYPE default to values used for the input data set.

Required
member, dsname

Operands
member Identifies the member that contains the input for the
SEPARATE function.

Command Reference 353

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

dsname Identifies the output data set. Use Standard TSO syntax.
VOLUME(volser) Identifies the volume name for output data sets that are not
cataloged.
SEPCHAR(dd) Names the delimiter to be expected between members
(usually ./).
TRANSFROM(ab) Defaults to <>. Specifies a character string that is translated
to the TRANSTO string if found in column one of the input
stream.
TRANSTO(ab) Defaults to ./. Specifies a character string that is substituted
for the TRANSFROM string if found in column one of the input
stream.
CALL Invoke the copy program.
NOCALL So not invoke the copy program. Member checking and data
set allocations are still performed.
SUMMARY Display only summary and error messages.
LIST Display all messages.
NOLIST Do not display messages.
OLD Obtains exclusive use of the output data set.
SHR Allows shared use of the output data set. StarTool FDM
provides output data set protection. see Appendix B, "Update
Protection" on page 421.
NEW Creates the output data set. When you specify NEW, you
may also specify BLK/TRK/CYL, DIR, SPACE, ROUND, EXPDT
(or RETPD), RLSE, STORCLAS, MGMTCLAS, DATACLAS, and
DSNTYPE keywords.
DIR(num) The number of directory blocks for the output data set. If
DIR is not entered, the default is taken from the input data
set.
SPACE(prim,sec) The primary and secondary quantities for the output data set
in track or cylinder units.
If BLK, TRK, or CYL is not entered but SPACE is entered, the
space allocation units are assumed the same as the current
allocation.
BLK Allocates the output data set in blocks. If BLK is entered
without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken from the
current allocation and converted to equivalent block units.
TRK Allocates the output data set in tracks. If TRK is entered
without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken from the
current allocation and converted to equivalent track units.
CYL Allocates the output data set in cylinder units. If CYL is
entered without SPACE, the space allocation units are taken
from the current allocation and converted to equivalent
cylinder units.
ROUND Used with BLK to specify that the data set allocation be
rounded up to cylinder boundaries.
EXPDT(yyddd) The expiration date for the data set. On and after the
expiration date, you can delete or write over the data set.
You can also use the format EXPDT(yyyyddd).

354 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

RETPD(nnnn) The number of days (0 to 9999) that the data set be retained
by your data center.
RLSE Release any unused space in the data set after the copy
operation.
STORCLAS(sc) The storage class for the data set. Use this parameter to
identify performance and availability requirements for data
sets. Use this parameter instead of UNIT and VOLUME
keywords for SMS managed data sets to determine where
the data set is allocated. To nullify this parameter, type
STORCLAS(*).
MGMTCLAS(mc) The management class for the data set. This parameter
establishes the migration, backup and space release
characteristics for SMS managed data sets. To nullify this
parameter, type MGMTCLAS(*).
DATACLAS(dc) The data class for the data set. Use this parameter to
provide data attributes such as RECFM, KEYLEN, SPACE,
EXPDT or RETPD, DSORG, LRECL and some VSAM SHR
options for SMS managed data sets. To nullify this
parameter, type DATACLAS(*). Use DATACLAS for data sets
that are not SMS managed.
DSNTYPE(typ) Specify typ as LIBRARY for a PDSE or PDS for a partitioned
data set. A PDSE must be a SMS-managed data set.

Remarks
The SEPARATE subcommand splits apart members that were joined with a COMBINE
subcommand using an IEBUPDTE (or the default) keyword.

ISPF statistics are preserved if possible and any >< control statements in a member are
converted to ./ control statements.

COMBINE and SEPARATE are paired subcommands. To join members into a combined
member or data set, use the COMBINE subcommand. To split the members apart again,
use the SEPARATE subcommand or IEBUPDTE if the logical record length is 80.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 --- Row 547 to 557 of 557
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER001 MEM=(#MDSECT -------------------------
>------>separate download lib.pdse
PDS290I SEPARATE is in progress
PDS051I #MDSECT was replaced; input=1,657; output=1,656
PDS051I @FILEXID was replaced; input=5,853; output=5,852
PDS051I @FILEPAR was replaced; input=2,265; output=2,264
PDS051I @SERVICE was replaced; input=5,686; output=5,685
PDS051I @VERIFY was replaced; input=1,954; output=1,953
PDS051I PDS0520 was created; input=473; output=472

PDS054I Totals -- Members=6; Input=17,882; Characters=1,430,560

****************************** Bottom of data *******************************

Command Reference 355

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

SMPGEN Subcommand
The SMPGEN subcommand assists in creating SMP/E sysmods. While only ++MAC,
++MACUPD, ++MOD (with appropriate ++JCLIN), ++SRC, ++SRCUPD statements are
generated, complete SMP/E functions with an editor by using SMPGEN output as a basis
for the sysmod.

In each case, begin with a library; MOD supports source libraries (assumed to be object
code) and load libraries (assumed to be the final form of each load module). Choose one
of the primary operand types (MAC, MACUPD, MOD, SRC, or SRCUPD) and other operands
as appropriate.

To generate a generic data type, use the MAC and TYPE keywords as in following example.

Example
SMPGEN : MAC distlib(apdspan) syslmod(pdspan) relfile(3) type(panel)

Syntax
SMPGEN memgroup
MAC DISTLIB(ddname) [SYSLIB(ddname)]
[SSI(hexdata)] [TYPE(name)]
TXLIB(ddname) / RELFILE(number) / INLINE

MACUPD DISTLIB(ddname) [SYSLIB(ddname)]

MOD DISTLIB(ddname) [SYSLMOD(name) / JCLIN(member)]

LINK/COPY] [CSLIST]
TXLIB(ddname) / RELFILE(number)
/ LKLIB(ddname) / INLINE [CSECT]

SRC DISTLIB(ddname) [SYSLIB(ddname)]

[DISTMOD(ddname)] [SSI(hexdata)]
TXLIB(ddname) / RELFILE(number) / INLINE

SRCUPD DISTLIB(ddname) [SYSLIB(ddname)] [DISTMOD(ddname)]

Aliases
SM, SMP, SMPG, SMPGE, SMPGEN

Defaults
memgroup, TYPE(MAC)

Required
DISTLIB and either MAC, MACUPD, MOD, SRC, or SRCUPD

356 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

Operands
memgroup Identifies the group of members for which SMP/E control statements
are wanted.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
MAC Defines MACRO elements with ++MAC statements. Data is included
after each MAC statement if INLINE is specified; otherwise, either
TXLIB or RELFILE is required.
MACUPD Defines MACRO element updates with ++MACUPD statements. Data is
included inline after each MACUPD statement. SMP/E assumes input
data has valid IEBUPDTE sequence numbers.
MOD Defines load or object elements with ++MOD statements. In a load
library, JCLIN data is generated and a SYSLMOD operand is required.
The INLINE keyword is supported for load libraries; otherwise, enter
TXLIB, LKLIB, or RELFILE.
In an object library, specify the name of a member that contains SMP/
E JCLIN for inclusion in the generated data with the JCLIN operand.
Choose to include each object deck after the MOD statement by
specifying INLINE or you may use TXLIB, LKLIB, or RELFILE.
SRC Defines source elements with ++SRC statements. Data is included
after each SRC statement if INLINE is specified; otherwise, TXLIB or
RELFILE is required.
SRCUPD Defines source element updates with ++SRCUPD statements. Data is
included inline after each SRCUPD statement. SMP/E assumes input
data has valid IEBUPDTE sequence numbers.
DISTLIB Adds DISTLIB(dd) to each generated SMP/E control statement to
(dd) specify the DDNAME of the distribution library. The DISTLIB operand is
always required for a SMPGEN subcommand.
SYSLIB(dd) Adds SYSLIB(dd) to each generated SMP/E control statement to
specify the DDNAME of the target system library. The SYSLIB operand
is always optional for a SMPGEN subcommand.
SSI Adds SSI(hexdata) to each generated SMP/E control statement to
(hexdata) specify system status information. The SSI operand is always optional
for a SMPGEN subcommand. The SSI operand is ignored by SMP/E
unless data is included inline.
TXLIB(dd) Adds TXLIB(dd) to each generated SMP/E control statement to specify
the DDNAME where MAC, MOD or SRC elements reside.
RELFILE Adds RELFILE(num) to each generated SMP/E control statement to
(num) specify the relative number of the SMP/E relative file where MAC,
MOD, or SRC elements reside.
LKLIB(dd) Adds LKLIB(num) to each generated SMP/E control statement to
specify the DDNAME where the load module MOD elements reside.
INLINE Generates MAC, MOD, or SRC elements inline.
CSECT Use the CSECT keyword with INLINE and MOD for a load library.
++MOD statements are placed in the delinked input on CSECT
boundaries.
LINK Default for MOD. Generates linkage-editor control statements.
COPY Optional for MOD. Generates IEBCOPY control statements.

Command Reference 357

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

CSLIST Optional for MOD. Generates all CSECT names with a CSECT keyword.
SYSLMOD Adds the specified name in the generated JCLIN for each SYSLMOD
(name) statement. This operand is required for load module libraries. As an
example, if SYSLMOD(PDSLOAD) were specified, SYSLMOD
statements similar to the following are generated:
//SYSLMOD DD DISP=SHR,DSN=SYS1.PDSLOAD

JCLIN Adds the specified member contents to the generated SMP/E control
(member) statements after a ++JCLIN statement.
This operand is not allowed for load module libraries and it is optional
for object libraries—the member must be located in the same library
as your object modules.
DISTMOD Adds DISTMOD(dd) to each generated SMP/E control statement to
(dd) specify the DDNAME of the link edit distribution library for object code
produced from the assembly of source code.
TYPE Changes generated SMP/E control statements from ++MAC to
(name) ++name. For example, to generate ++PANEL statements, code
TYPE(PANEL).

Remarks
The SMPGEN subcommand assists you in preparing SMP/E SYSMODs. It creates the basic
framework of the required individual elements. You add other SMP/E control statements
to create a valid FUNCTION, APAR, PTF or USERMOD.

The SMPGEN subcommand generates JCLIN statements for load modules or MALIAS
statements for ++MAC elements.

Many valid SMP/E keywords are not supported for the different element types. Generally,
only those keywords that apply to an entire library are supported. If a specific operand is
required for a specific member, choose to change the generated statements after the
SMPGEN process with an editor. The following SMP/E keywords are not supported:

MAC ASSEM, DELETE, DISTMOD, DISTSRC, PREFIX, RMID, UMID, VERSION

MACUPD ASSEM, DISTMOD, DISTSRC, MALIAS, PREFIX, VERSION
MOD DALIAS, DELETE, LEPARM, LMOD, RMID, TALIAS, UMID, VERSION
SRC DELETE, RMID, UMID, VERSION
SRCUPD VERSION

SMPGEN operates as follows:

1 The data set directory is processed to include any aliases of the member group to be
processed.

2 Error messages are issued before any output is generated to assist you in correcting
errors.

3 ++MAC, ++MACUPD, ++MOD, ++SRC, or ++SRCUPD SMP/E statements are

generated as appropriate and some additional processing is performed depending on
the element type:
 ++MAC elements have MALIAS operands added that reflect the relationship of the
elements in the SMPGEN library. If INLINE is specified, MACROS are generated inline.

358 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

 MACUPD elements are always generated inline. Alias members are ignored by
StarTool FDM.
 MOD elements from an object library are generated inline if the INLINE keyword is in
effect. If the JCLIN operand is specified, a ++JCLIN statement is generated just
before displaying the data from the JCLIN member specified.
++MOD elements from an load library also are generated inline using a delinked
load module. The load modules are examined to generate appropriate JCLIN
statements.
For load and object libraries, ++MOD statements are not generated for alias
members since they are defined to SMP/E through the JCLIN.
 ++SRC elements are generated inline if the INLINE keyword is in effect. Alias
members are not allowed.
 ++SRCUPD elements are always generated inline. Alias members are ignored by
StarTool FDM.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log ROW 1,000 TO 1,025 OF 1,086
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.PDSE311.PANELS,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=PDSZ* ------------------------
>----->smpgen pdsz* mac distlib(panlib) type(panel) relfile(3)
++PANEL(PDSZA@C ) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZA@P ) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZABA ) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZABE ) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZAFTZ) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZAID ) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZALIA) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZALLO) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZALOC) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZAOF ) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZATB ) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZATTR) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZATU ) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZAUTH) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZAZA ) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZBROW) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .
++PANEL(PDSZCREA) DISTLIB(PANLIB) RELFILE(3) .

Command Reference 359

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ------------ ROW 15 OF 94
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.PDSE.ASMBLR,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=PDS#S* ------------------------
>----->smpgen pds#s* mac inline distlib(pdsasmb)
++MAC(PDS#SIZE) DISTLIB(PDSASMB)
.
MACRO
&MD PDS#SIZE &SPFSIZE=1000, /* SIZE OF DIALOG DISPLAY TABLE */X
&SPFMAX=2000, /* MAXIMUM LINES FOR A SUBCOMMAND */X
&SPFCKPT=250, /* LINES BETWEEN CHECKPOINTS */X
&TRPSIZE=3000 /* MAXIMUM LINES TO TRAP */
GBLA &SIZECNT
GBLC &SIZES(4)
&SIZES(1) SETC '&SPFSIZE'
&SIZES(2) SETC '&SPFMAX'
&SIZES(3) SETC '&SPFCKPT'
&SIZES(4) SETC '&TRPSIZE'
&SIZECNT SETA 4
MEND
++MAC(PDS#SOPT) DISTLIB(PDSASMB)
.
MACRO
&MD PDS#SOPT &LKEDDAT=Y, /* DEFAULT LKEDDATE IN MEMLIST? */X
&SPFTDEL=Y, /* DROP DELETED ELEMENTS-MEMLIST? */X
&SPFTOLD=Y, /* DROP RENAMED ELEMENTS-MEMLIST? */X

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ----------- ROW 87 OF 163
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=PDS9* ---------------------------
>----->smpgen pds9* mod syslmo(pdsload) distlib(apdsload) lklib(pdsload)
++MOD(PDS98 ) DISTLIB(APDSLOAD) LKLIB(PDSLOAD)
.
++MOD(PDS99A ) DISTLIB(APDSLOAD) LKLIB(PDSLOAD)
.
++MOD(PDS99HL ) DISTLIB(APDSLOAD) LKLIB(PDSLOAD)
.
++JCLIN .
//LKED EXEC PGM=IEWL,
// PARM='NCAL,MAP,LIST,LET,RENT,REUS,REFR'
//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(2048,(200,20))
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=SYS1.APDSLOAD
//SYSLMOD DD DISP=SHR,DSN=SYS1.PDSLOAD
//SYSLIN DD *
INCLUDE APDSLOAD(PDS98)
ORDER PEMMAIN(P),PEMPDSIN,PEMATTNX,PEMSTAEX,PEMALLOC,PEMEXCP
ORDER PEMMSGS,PEMPARSE,PEMPARSX,PEMOPTIO,PEMDATEX,PEMDSNX,PEMMEMBR
ORDER PEXMAIN,PEXALIAS,PEXATTR,PEXBROWS,PEXCOMPA,PEXCOMPR,PEXCONT

360 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 160 OF 200
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR806 MEM=@DIA* ----------------------------
>----->smpgen @dia* src distlib(pdselib) relfile(003)
++SRC(@DIABUG ) DISTLIB(PDSELIB) RELFILE(003)
.
++SRC(@DIACAX ) DISTLIB(PDSELIB) RELFILE(003)
.
++SRC(@DIACLN ) DISTLIB(PDSELIB) RELFILE(003)
.
++SRC(@DIAFIND) DISTLIB(PDSELIB) RELFILE(003)
.
++SRC(@DIAFUN ) DISTLIB(PDSELIB) RELFILE(003)
.
++SRC(@DIAINIT) DISTLIB(PDSELIB) RELFILE(003)
.
++SRC(@DIALALV) DISTLIB(PDSELIB) RELFILE(003)
.
++SRC(@DIALINE) DISTLIB(PDSELIB) RELFILE(003)
.
++SRC(@DIAOUT ) DISTLIB(PDSELIB) RELFILE(003)
.

SUBLIST Subcommand
The SUBLIST subcommand forms lists (or sublists) of members. When SUBLIST gains
control, it forms a new default member group using the individual member names passed
to it; each subcommand that invokes SUBLIST defines a new member sublist.

For example, if a data set contains members MEMABC, MEMXYZ, MEM33 and MEZ4,
entering the command SUBLIST MEM* changes the PDS300A message MEM= keyword to
MEM=(MEMABC. The default member group is the list of individual member names
MEMABC, MEMXYZ, MEM33 and MEZ4 instead of the rule, MEM*, that is usual with
StarTool FDM subcommands.

Example
IF amx/ noalias then(sublist)
PRINT * form(dx00) nohead
COPY * other.library alias
DELETE * alias

Syntax
SUBLIST memgroup [ALIAS/NOALIAS ]
[REVERSE ]
[EXCLUDE(mem*name) ]
[ONLYALIAS/ONLYMAIN ]
[NOBLDL ]

Command Reference 361

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

Aliases
SUBL, SUBLI, SUBLIS, SUBLIST

Defaults
memgroup, NOALIAS

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the group of members whose names are to be defined as
a list of members.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
ALIAS Also adds any associated members (aliases, apparent aliases, and
associated main members) to the sublist of members.
NOALIAS Adds only specifically identified member names to the sublist of
members.
REVERSE Inverts the member list to include members from the data set but
not in the member list.
EXCLUDE Drops members matching the combination name from the sublist.
(mem*name)
ONLYALIAS Forces ALIAS on and adds associated members (aliases, apparent
aliases, and associated main members) to the sublist of members.
Then, the main members are dropped from the sublist leaving only
aliases.
ONLYMAIN Forces ALIAS on and adds associated members (aliases, apparent
aliases, and associated main members) to the sublist of members.
Then, the alias members are dropped from the sublist leaving only
main members.
NOBLDL Specifies that the existence of each member in the current group
need not be verified with a BLDL macro.
This parameter is intended for high performance applications in
conjunction with the MEMBERS subcommand.
This keyword permits processing a list of members without
discarding members that are not present.

Remarks
The SUBLIST subcommand disregards duplicate member names.

If multiple operations are to be performed to the same list of members, they can be
organized as a single member group using the SUBLIST subcommand.

362 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

SUBLIST is useful for the THEN or ELSE keywords of the IF and FIND subcommands.
Operands are not supported after the subcommand name (in the THEN or ELSE operand).
However, if you use SUBLIST as the subcommand, a following subcommand (which uses
an * for the group name) can have any operands.

SUBLIST is also useful for the THEN or ELSE keywords of the IF and FIND subcommands
for situations where a refined sublist is being built. For example, to print all members
named A11...XM or MEZ... with ISPF statistics which were saved in the last year and do
not contain the character string NOTME, the following StarTool FDM subcommands suffice:

IF (ALL*xm,mez*) YEAR THEN(sublist)

FIND * 'notme' ELSE(sublist)
PRINT *

-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log ROW 1,000 TO 1,012 OF 1,012

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=(PDSLA@A ---------------------------
>----->if pds* last(7) then(subl)

PDS147I 1,812 members searched

PDS148I 41 members found

PDS165I Members are: PDSLA@A, PDSLA@L, PDSLC@A, PDSLC@L, PDSLCMK5, PDSLL@A,

PDSLO@A, PDSLOUX, PDSLT@A, PDSLT@L, PDSOPT31, PDSPNB6, PDSPNB7,
PDSPNC4, PDSPN18, PDSSETE, PDSSETX, PDSXCP01, PDSXCP02, PDSXCP03,
PDSXCP04, PDSXCP05, PDSXCP06, PDSXCP07, PDSXCP08, PDSXCP09, PDSXCP10,
PDSXCP11, PDSXCP12, PDSXCP13, PDSXCP14, PDSXCP15, PDSXCP16, PDSXCP17,
PDSXCP18, PDSXCP19, PDSXCP20, PDS4LAL, PDS4LCL, PDS4WOL, PDS9PAN

PDS193I This group contains 41 members

******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

SUBMIT Subcommand
The SUBMIT subcommand submits a JCL member. Use the TSO SUBMIT command.
Specify any SUBMIT operands after the member name.

Example
SUBMIT mema:memb

Syntax
SUBMIT memgroup [operands]

Aliases
SU, SUB, SUBM, SUBMI, SUBMIT

Defaults
memgroup

Command Reference 363

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be submitted for background processing.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
operands Optional. May include any desired TSO SUBMIT operands.

Remarks
This interface is optional. Use it only as an interface to the TSO Submit command.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display -------------- ROW 1 OF 6
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=STR802 MEM=PDSET* ---------------------------
>----->sub pdsback
>----->sub pdset*
PDS165I Members are: PDSETT1A, PDSETT1D, PDSETT1I, PDSETT1M, PDSETT1P,
PDSETT1S

PDS395A Should these members be submitted (Yes/No) ?

>----->y
****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

STATUS Function
The STATUS command displays the status of the ISPMODE functions associated with the
CALC, CAX, CMDTBL, CSECTS, HEX, GO, LISTA (or DDNAME), LISTC (or LISTF), LISTV,
LOG, MEMLIST, PBROWSE, PEDIT, WORKPAD, and ZAP functions.

Example
STATUS

Syntax
STATUS

Aliases
ST, STA, STAT, STATU, STATUS

364 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

Operands
No operands are supported for the STATUS command.

Remarks
The STATUS display shows the status of all current ISPMODE functions in response to a
STATUS command or a STATUS response from the END confirmation panel.

In StarTool FDM each function is available concurrently. This means that as you create
functions (log tables, MEMLIST tables, LISTA/DDNAME tables, LISTC/LISTF tables, and so
on) you can go from one to another without exiting the current function. When you select
a function, you are placed back in it automatically. For example, in the log, you are placed
at the top of the log for the last command. If, however, you had previously repositioned
the log and you select it again with no log output additions, StarTool FDM places you at
the same point again. With table panels, StarTool FDM returns you to the place at which
you left the table unless one or more line commands acted on the table; in that case,
positioning is for the last selected item.

A StarTool FDM function remains ACTIVE because the display table and related status
information is retained even if you go to a different table. Functions that have never been
selected or have been deleted are marked INACTIVE. You can activate such functions by
selecting them and supplying any information required for initialization.

The final status possible is PENDING. PENDING indicates that the associated function has
one or more incomplete line commands. If you select the function by entering its name,
you direct the first pending line command to complete. Also, the STATUS function allows
you to cancel pending line commands by function.

As noted above, one method of continuing a PENDING line command is to explicitly select
the function by name. This allows the current line command to complete and initiates the
next line command in that function. If no other line commands are pending, you will go to
the display for the selected function.

Another way to select PENDING line commands for processing is the END command.
When an END command is issued, pending functions are selected for processing using a
dynamic hierarchical structure in the order shown in the STATUS function display: LOG,
ZAP, CSECTS, MEMLIST, LISTA (or DDNAME), LISTC (or LISTF), LISTV, CAX, WORKPAD,
CALC, HEX, CMDTBL, PBROWSE, and PEDIT. If there are no pending functions and END
was issued from one of the table displays, END positions you to the log screen. If END was
issued from a log screen and no line commands are pending, StarTool FDM treats the END
as a request to exit the program. By default, StarTool FDM displays an END Confirmation
panel and continues or terminates based on your response to the END Confirmation panel
(this default can be changed in SETALL).

A final way to select PENDING line commands for processing is the PEND command. When
you issue a PEND command, pending functions are selected for processing using a
dynamic hierarchical structure in the order shown in the STATUS function display below. If
there are no pending functions, PEND has no effect.

Line commands in one function can generate processing for another function. StarTool
FDM dynamically creates a hierarchical relation between the two functions. This is best
illustrated by a line command from a MEMLIST screen whose line command output is
generated in the log. You are placed automatically in the log screen to review the output.
You may not enter additional MEMLIST commands (other than MEMLIST with no
operands) until the pending line command is completed. If you enter MEMLIST or ML with

Command Reference 365

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

no operands, MEMLIST completes its line command processing and dynamically removes
the hierarchical relationship with the log.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL CANCEL DEFAULTS FEATURES

--------------------------- StarTool Function Status -------------------------
OPTION ===>
- DSN=SER07.SMSTEST.DATA9040,VOL=SER=MVSD4B MEM=: --------------------------
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand, a menu code
or choose one of the following options:
More: +
Option Function -- Description -- ---- Status -----
8 - LOG Session log ACTIVE
ZA - ZAP Modify a CSECT INACTIVE
CS - CSECTS CSECTs of a module INACTIVE
ML - MEMLIST Member list ACTIVE
LA/DD - LISTA/DDNAME Allocation list ACTIVE
LC/LF - LISTC/LISTF Catalog/file list PENDING ACTION
LV - LISTV Volume list INACTIVE
CAX - CAX Active catalog list INACTIVE
WORKPAD - WORKPAD TSO command table INACTIVE
CALC - CALC Floating calculator INACTIVE
HEX - HEX HEX calculator INACTIVE
CM - CMDTBL ISPF command table INACTIVE
PB - PBROWSE Parallel browse INACTIVE
PE - PEDIT Parallel VSAM edit INACTIVE

Note: Functions are shown with the lowest logical function first.

SVCMAP Subcommand
The SVCMAP subcommand formats information regarding the SVC table. SVCs are
extensions to the operating system that are invoked to perform system tasks. SVCs
receive control in supervisor state and in the master storage protect key (key zero). They
have the power to alter otherwise protected storage areas or issue privileged instructions
that cannot be issued directly from problem programs.

If no SVC number is requested, a formatted list of all 256 SVCs is provided. If an SVC
number is specified, only that SVC is formatted. If the SVC is an ESR (router) the ESR
entries are all formatted unless a particular ESR entry is requested.

Type 1 SVCs cannot link to other routines and cannot issue other SVCs from within the
routine. They receive control with the local lock held and can obtain all other locks. They
reside in the system nucleus (IEANUC0x).

Type 2 SVCs can link to other routines and can issue other SVCs themselves. They require
no locks but can issue them. Like type 1 SVCs, they reside in the system nucleus.

Type 3/4 (3 or 4) SVCs can link to other routines and can issue other SVCs. They require
no locks but can issue them. They reside in the Link Pack Area (LPA) or Modified Link Pack
Area (MLPA). They can be loaded from any of the LPA libraries or alternatively, from
SYS1.SVCLIB or SYS1.LINKLIB.

Type 6 SVCs cannot link to other routines or issue other SVCs. They execute disabled,
meaning that no other program can gain control during the execution of the SVC. Locks
cannot be held on entry to the SVC. Like types 1 and 2, type 6 SVCs reside in the system
nucleus.

366 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

Four SVCs are ESR Router SVCs:

 SVC 109 contains a SVCTABLE for type 3 or 4 ESR SVCs
 SVC 116 contains a SVCTABLE for type 1 ESR SVCs
 SVC 122 contains a SVCTABLE for type 2 ESR SVCs
 SVC 137 contains a SVCTABLE for type 6 ESR SVCs

ESR SVCs are identical in format to the SVC table except for the first eight bytes. The first
3 bytes contain ESR followed by a literal 1, 2, 3, or 6 depending on which SVC type it
contains. The second 4 bytes contain a binary number indicating how many ESR SVCs it
contains.

If the module name output by SVCMAP is ???, this indicates that the module could not be
located in the nucleus, LPA or MLPA. This is usually because the SVC was dynamically
added to the SVC table by an authorized program after the system IPL. SVCMAP dumps
only the DEFAULT length of these routines since the length is unknown too.

Example
SVC 109 ESR(11) DISASM

Syntax
SVCMAP [number] [ESR(entry) ]
[DUMP ]
[DISASM ]
[CHANGE ]
[DEFAULT(size) ]
[MAXLEN(size) ]

Aliases
SV, SVC, SVCM, SVCMA, SVCMAP

Defaults
DEFAULT(256)

Required
none

Operands
number Optional. The SVC to be investigated. If no number is specified,
all 256 SVCs are listed.
ESR(entry) The ESR entry number to be investigated. If this operand is left
off on an ESR SVC, all ESR entries for the SVC are listed. This
operand only has meaning on an ESR SVC.

Command Reference 367

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

DUMP Dump the SVC module. If the module cannot be located in the
nucleus, LPA or MLPA (probably dynamically loaded), only the
DEFAULT length of the module is to be dumped.
The dump begins at the offset of the module indicated by the
address from the SVCTABLE entry. The length is calculated to be
the rest of the module regardless of other entry points.
The format of the dump is 6 or 8 bytes of storage address, 6
bytes of hexadecimal offset into the module, followed by 16
hexadecimal bytes of the module at that offset, and the
character equivalent surrounded by asterisks.
DISASM Disassemble the SVC module. If the module cannot be located in
the nucleus, LPA or MLPA (probably dynamically loaded), only
the DEFAULT length of the module is to be formatted.
The display begins at the offset of the module indicated by the
address from the SVCTABLE entry. The length is calculated to be
the rest of the module regardless of other entry points.
The format of the display is 6 or 8 bytes of storage address, 6
bytes of hexadecimal offset into the module, followed by the
operation code, reconstructed operands, the hexadecimal bytes
of the module at that offset, and the character equivalent
surrounded by asterisks.
CHANGE Invoke the FINDMOD routine to locate the SVC module in the
nucleus, LINKLIST or LPALIB concatenation and if found,
CHANGE to that data set.
DEFAULT(Sz) Format the length with DUMP or DISASM for a module that is not
found in the in-storage nucleus, LPA or MLPA. Code Sz as a
number between 8 and 99999.
MAXLEN(Mx) The maximum length to format with DUMP or DISASM. Code Mx
as a number between 8 and 99999.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ROW 576 TO 593 OF 1,076
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CLIST,VOL=SER=SER002 MEM=AD:LOG ----------------------------
>----->svc 109 esr(7) disasm
PDS093I ADDRESS MODULE LENGTH TYPE APF ESR NP AS AR LOCKS AMODE DESCRIPTION
ESR(7) 00DA5000 IGX00007 002A18 3/4 APF 31

PDS095I IGX00007 Disassembly, length=10776

DA5000 000000 BALR R15,R0 05F0 *.0*
DA5002 000002 B 28(,R15) 47F0 F01C *.00.*
DA5006 000006 OR R12,R9 16C9 *.I*
DA5008 000008 DC C'GX00007 ' C7E7F0F0F0F0F740 *GX00007 *
DA5010 000010 DC C'91170 JR' F9F1F1F7F040D1D9 *91170 JR*
DA5018 000018 DC C'M4422',X'00' D4F4F4F2F200 *M4422.*
DA501E 00001E BALR R8,R0 0580 *..*
DA5020 000020 LA R10,4095(,R8) 41A0 8FFF *....*
DA5024 000024 LR R12,R15 18CF *..*
DA5026 000026 LR R11,R1 18B1 *..*
DA5028 000028 LR R4,R0 1840 *. *

368 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log ROW 1,000 TO 1,025 OF 1,257
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.PDSE311.PANELS,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=PDSZ* ------------------------
>----->svcmap
PDS093I ADDRESS MODULE LENGTH TYPE APF ESR NP AS AR LOCKS AMODE DESCRIPTION
SVC 0 00FEE898 IECVEXCP 001EB8 1 L 24 EXCP
SVC 1 00FE22E6 IEAVEWAT 000F20 1 L 31 WAIT
SVC 2 00FF4BA0 IEAVEPST 002954 1 L 31 POST
SVC 3 01076388 IGC003 000D28 1 AR L 31 EXIT
SVC 4 011C9222 IGVVSM24 001218 1 L 31 GETMAIN
SVC 5 011C9222 IGVVSM24 001218 1 L 31 FREEMAIN
SVC 6 011EB198 CSVLINK 0001E0 2 L 31 LINK
SVC 7 011EBF60 CSVXCTL 000408 2 L 31 XCTL
SVC 8 011EB378 CSVLOAD 000188 2 L 31 LOAD
SVC 9 011EB070 CSVDELET 000128 2 L 31 DELETE
SVC 10 011C9E52 IGVVSM24 001218 1 L 31 FREEMAIN
SVC 11 0280BC48 IGC0001A 0003B8 3/4 31 TIME
SVC 12 011A95C8 CSVSYNCH 000598 2 AR L 31 SYNCH
SVC 13 0221F000 IGC0101C 015830 3/4 AS AR L 31 ABEND
SVC 14 01FD4020 IEAVTESP 001BE0 3/4 L 31 SPIE
SVC 15 0101D91A IECVPST 001C4C 1 L 31 ERREXCP
SVC 16 010F3140 IOSPURGA 001768 2 31 PURGE
SVC 17 02A49000 IGC0001G 0001C8 3/4 31 RESTORE
SVC 18 00B87818 ??? 000000 2 31 BLDL
SVC 19 00E02138 IGC0001I 00DC20 3/4 24 OPEN
SVC 20 00B8C660 ??? 000000 3/4 24 CLOSE

TSO Subcommand
Use the TSO subcommand to invoke a TSO command processor or CLIST. Specify any
operands after the name specified.

Example
TSO listc lev(sys2)

Syntax
TSO command [operands]

Aliases
T, TS, TSO

Defaults
none

Command Reference 369

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

Required
command

Operands
command CLIST or command processor to invoke. If you use the form %cnam,
CNAM is assumed to be a CLIST name.
operands Optional. Can include any operand.

Remarks
Use the TSO subcommand to invoke a TSO command processor or CLIST. Specify any
operand after the name specified.

This is the ISPF TSO command, if you enter TSO, when in ISPMODE or MEMLIST. To use
the StarTool FDM TSO subcommand, enter an alias subcommand name such as T or TS.

Your installation may have installed the TSO subcommand to obtain the equivalent of
“TSO TSOEXEC command operands”. If this is the case, invoke authorized commands with
fewer keystrokes. To determine if your installation has this option enabled, type a
CONTROL DEFAULT subcommand and look for an output line beginning “TSO calls”. A
value of TSOEXEC indicates it is enabled.

TSOEDIT Subcommand
The TSOEDIT subcommand edits a member; the TSO EDIT command is used.

Example
TSOEDIT mema:memb cntl

Syntax
TSOEDIT memgroup [ASIS ]
[OLD/NEW ]
[NONUM ]
[ASM/BASIC/CLIST/CNTL/COBOL/DATA/
FORTE/FORTG/FORTGI/FORTH/GOFORT/
IPLI/LIST/PLI/PLIF/TEXT/VSBASIC ]

Aliases
TSOE, TSOED, TSOEDI, TSOEDIT

Defaults
memgroup, EDIT type based on the data set name

370 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be edited.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
ASIS Edits the member with upper- and lower-case characters.
OLD Verifies that the member exists before calling EDIT.
NEW Verifies that the member does not exist before calling EDIT.
NONUM Edits the member without using line numbers.
ASM EDIT type is assembly.
BASIC EDIT type is BASIC.
CLIST EDIT type is CLIST.
CNTL EDIT type is CNTL.
COBOL EDIT type is COBOL.
DATA EDIT type is DATA.
FORTE EDIT type is FORTRAN level E.
FORTG EDIT type is FORTRAN level G.
FORTGI EDIT type is FORTRAN level GI.
FORTH EDIT type is FORTRAN level H
GOFORT EDIT type is GOFORT.
IPLI EDIT type is IPLI.
LIST EDIT type is LIST.
PLI EDIT type is PLI.
PLIF EDIT type is PLI (F-level).
TEXT EDIT type is TEXT.
VSBASIC EDIT type is VSBASIC.

Remarks
If you enter an EDIT type keyword, that keyword is passed to EDIT as the descriptive
qualifier; otherwise, a descriptive qualifier is chosen as follows:

1 If the low-level qualifier of the partitioned data set name is one of the valid descriptive
qualifiers for EDIT (ASM, BASIC, CLIST, CNTL, COBOL, DATA, IPLI, LIST, PLI, TEXT, or
VSBASIC), that qualifier is passed to EDIT.

Command Reference 371

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

2 If the low-level qualifier is FORT, GOFORT is passed to EDIT. Otherwise, the data type
qualifier is not a valid descriptive qualifier and the general descriptive qualifier, DATA,
is passed to EDIT.

This interface is optional. Use it only as an interface to the TSO EDIT command. To
terminate this interface, type END from the EDIT prompt.

TSOLIST Subcommand
The TSOLIST subcommand lists a member. The TSO LIST command is used. Specify any
LIST operand after the member name.

Remarks
This interface is optional. Use it only if your installation installed the public domain LIST
command.

Example
TSOLIST mema:memb

Syntax
TSOLIST memgroup [BYPASS(numtoskip) ]
[COL(begincol:endcol) ]
[HEX/X ]
[MAX(maxtolist) ]
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM ]

Aliases
TSOL, TSOLI, TSOLIS, TSOLIST

Defaults
memgroup, NUM (if a non-numeric is encountered, then NONUM)

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be listed.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".

372 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

others Optional. Can include any desired TSO LIST operands.

USAGE Subcommand
The USAGE subcommand displays statistics on the current data set. The DSNAME
subcommand is issued automatically with this subcommand.

Example
USAGE

Syntax
USAGE [ALL]

Aliases
U, US, USA, USAG, USAGE

Defaults
none

Required
none

Operands
ALL Displays data set extent information and formats the DSCB fields. Any
operand on the USAGE subcommand is sufficient to get all of the available
data.

Remarks
The statistics displayed include:
 The number of disk storage tracks allocated the number of disk storage tracks
currently in use and free
 The number of disk storage extents required for the data set
 The number of directory blocks allocated
 The number of directory blocks currently in use and free
 The number of disk storage tracks used by the directory
 The number of members in the directory
 The number of member names that are alias names

Command Reference 373

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

The USAGE command displays statistics for up to 59 volumes. Up to nine volumes are
listed in the first panel. If more volumes are allocated, the volume list shows a plus (+)
character after the eighth volume on the first panel.

Following are some sample screens of the USAGE subcommand. USAGE with no operand
returns data from the first screen and the remaining screens are added for any operand
after USAGE.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 389 OF 452
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=LOADMEM -------------------------
>----->u all
PDS200I DISP UNIT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3380 U 0 32760 2X 352 80 80 TRK 26

PDS180I Data set: CREATED EXPIRES LAST USE UPDATED LASTUSE FIRSTUSE
PDS180I 89/02/17 0/00/00 95/06/19 95/06/19 C911407 C911401T

PDS181I Extents in tracks: 272, 80

PDS182I Tracks: ALLOCATED USED FREE EXTENTS VOLUME

PDS182I 352 272 80 2 STR804

PDS183I Directory: BLOCKS USED FREE TRACKS MEMBERS ALIASES

PDS183I 80 54 26 2 329 45

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 421 OF 452
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=LOADMEM -------------------------
PDS184I EXTENT UCB LO TT-HI TT TRACKS LOW CCHH-HIGH CCHH BOUNDARY
PDS184I ------ --- ----- ----- ------ ----------- ----------- --------
PDS184I 0 46F 00.00 01.0F 272 02.F2.00.03 03.04.00.04 TRK
PDS184I 1 46F 01.10 01.5F 80 03.68.00.08 03.6D.00.0C TRK

PDS185I Format 1 DSCB at 01B9000722:

PDS185I 0 4 8 C 10 14 18 1C 20 24 28 2C 30 34 38 3C 40 44
PDS185I C911407.LINK.LOAD 101T..............C911407
PDS185I CFFFFFF4DCDD4DDCC444444444444444444444444444FFFE50A00503000000CFFFFFF4
PDS185I 3911407B3952B3614000000000000000000000000000101390A0190000020039114070

PDS185I 48 4C 50 54 58 5C 60 64 68 6C 70 74 78 7C 80 84 88
PDS185I CFFFF50A000800C07F050008800500024F0000F0000000006000600000000000000000
PDS185I 3911490A000F2001F800000200001FA301010220334041138083D0C000000000000000

374 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log# 1 -- ROW 501 TO 526 OF 559

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.VSAM.IS.CLUSTER,VOL=SER=SER007 ----------------------------------
>----->u
PDS200I DISP UNIT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY DSORG
PDS200I SHR 3380 VSAM 200 9000 1X 1 0 1 TRK VS-KSDS

PDS121I Association: DATA-----SER07.VSAM.IS.CLUSTER.DATA

PDS121I Association: INDEX----SER07.VSAM.IS.CLUSTER.INDEX
PDS121I Association: AIX------SER07.VSAM.AX.CLUSTER
PDS121I Association: CATALOG--ICFUCAT.VTSG312

PDS180I Data set: CREATED EXPIRES LAST USE UPDATED SECURITY

PDS180I 1993/01/06 **NONE** **NONE** NO READ

PDS182I Tracks: ALLOCATED USED FREE EXTENTS

PDS182I 1 1 0 1

PDS195I INDEXED SPANNED NOIMBED NOREPLICAT SHROPTNS(1,3)

PDS196I NOERASE NOWRITECHK SPEED NOREUSE UNORDERED

PDS197I Key length: 8

PDS197I Key offset: 0
PDS197I Average LRECL: 200
PDS197I Maximum LRECL: 9,000
PDS197I Creation date: 1993.006
PDS197I Buffer space: 12,288

PDS198I DATA space usage: TRACKS KILOBYTES CA's CI's PERCENT

PDS198I Allocated space: 1 40 1 10
PDS198I High used space: 1 40 1 10 100.0
PDS198I Real used space: 1 28 1 7 70.0
PDS198I INDEX space usage: TRACKS KILOBYTES CA's CI's PERCENT
PDS198I Allocated space: 1 40 1 10
PDS198I High used space: 1 4 1 1 10.0

PDS199I Records: TOTAL DELETED UPDATED INSERTED RETRIEVED EXCP'S

PDS199I 80 0 8 8 4549 182

PDS241I CI Space: FREESPACE SPLITS %SPLITS

PDS241I 10 2 20.0
PDS241I CA Space: FREESPACE SPLITS %SPLITS
PDS241I 10 0 0.0

PDS242I Attributes for DATA INDEX

PDS242I CI size: 4096 4096
PDS242I CI's per CA: 10 10
PDS242I Allocation: TRACK TRACK
PDS242I Primary: 1 1
PDS242I Secondary: 1 1

PDS243I Index: LEVELS RECORDS HI-LEVEL

PDS243I 1 1 0

PDS244I CA splits/CI CI splits/insert Inserts/read

PDS244I 0.0 25.0 10.0

Command Reference 375

Chapter 8 Commands — S to U

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 421 OF 452
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=LOADMEM -------------------------

PDS186I LOC NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION

PDS186I --- ---- ----- -----------
PDS186I 00 DS1DSNAM C911407.LINK.LOAD
PDS186I 2C DS1FMTID F1 FORMAT IDENTIFIER
PDS186I 2D DS1DSSN F0F1E35900AA DATA SET SERIAL NUMBER
PDS186I 33 DS1VOLSQ 1. VOLUME SEQUENCE NUMBER
PDS186I 35 DS1CREDT 590030 CREATION DATE
PDS186I 38 DS1EXPDT 000000 EXPIRATION DATE
PDS186I 3B DS1NOEPV 2. NUMBER OF EXTENTS ON VOLUME
PDS186I 3C DS1NOBDB 0. NUMBER OF BYTES USED IN LAST DIRECTORY BLOCK
PDS186I 3D 00 RESERVED (ONE BYTE)
PDS186I 3E DS1SYSCD C3F9F1F1F4F0F740C3F9F1F1F4
PDS186I 4B DS1REFD 5900AA DATE LAST REFERENCED
PDS186I 4E 0000008F RESERVED (FOUR BYTES)
PDS186I 52 DS1DSORG 0200 DATA SET ORGANIZATION
PDS186I 54 DS1RECFM C0 RECORD FORMAT

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 438 OF 452
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR804 MEM=LOADMEM -------------------------
PDS186I 55 DS1OPTCD 01 OPTION CODE
PDS186I 56 DS1BLKL 32,760. BLOCK LENGTH
PDS186I 58 DS1LRECL 80. LOGICAL RECORD LENGTH
PDS186I 5A DS1KEYL 0. KEY LENGTH
PDS186I 5B DS1RKP 0. RELATIVE KEY POSITION
PDS186I 5D DS1DSIND 82 DATA SET INDICATORS
PDS186I 5E DS1SCALO 80000050 SECONDARY ALLOCATION
PDS186I 62 DS1LSTAR 010F0A TTR OF LAST USED TRACK AND BLOCK ON TRACK
PDS186I 65 DS1TRBAL 9,024. BYTES REMAINING ON LAST TRACK USED
PDS186I 67 F100 RESERVED (TWO BYTES)
PDS186I 69 DS1EXT1 0100.02F20003.03040004 FIRST EXTENT DESCRIPTION
PDS186I 73 DS1EXT2 0101.03680008.036D000C SECOND EXTENT DESCRIPTION
PDS186I 7D DS1EXT3 0000.00000000.00000000 THIRD EXTENT DESCRIPTION
PDS186I 87 DS1PTRDS 0000000000 CCHHR OF ANY ASSOCIATED FORMAT 2 OR 3 DSCB

****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

376 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Chapter 9
Commands — V to Z

VERIFY Subcommand
The VERIFY subcommand validity checks data sets. For PDS or PDSE data sets, check the
entire data set by entering a : in the member name position. Check an individual member
or member group by entering its name in the member name position.

Example
VERIFY mema:memb

Syntax
VERIFY memgroup
[LOAD/NOLOAD ]
[LKED/NOLKED ]
[MAXBLK(bsize) ]
[NAME/NONAME ]
[COUNT/NOCOUNT ]
[READ/NOREAD/INPUT/NOINPUT]
[STATS/NOSTATS ]
[UPDATE/NOUPDATE ]
[MEMBERS / MEMLIST / ML / NEWML / SUBLIST ]
* [FROMKEY(key)/FROMADDRESS(add)/FROMNUMBER(num) ]
* [TOKEY(key)/TOADDRESS(add)/TONUMBER(num) ]
* [EXAMINE / NOEXAMINE / NOINDEXTEST / NODATATEST ]

*NOTE: Lines with an asterisk are supported for VSAM only.

Aliases
V, VE, VER, VERI, VERIF, VERIFY

Abbreviations
FKEY for FROMKEY, FADDR for FROMADDRESS, FNUM for FROMNUMBER, TKEY for TOKEY,
TADDR for TOADDRESS, and TNUM for TONUMBER.

Defaults
memgroup, LOAD, LKED, NAME, READ, STATS, NOUPDATE, EXAMINE

Required
none

Command Reference 377

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be validity checked. If a : is entered
in the member name position, the data set is validity checked;
otherwise, only the specified members are checked individually.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges,
and member name patterns are allowed. For more information,
see Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
LOAD For load libraries, LOAD each member.
NOLOAD Does not LOAD any members.
LKED For load libraries, checks linkage editor attributes and LINKLIST
LLA member status.
NOLKED Does not perform any linkage editor checks or LINKLIST LLA
member status.
MAXBLK(bsize) Generates messages for members with blocks larger than the
value bsize.
NAME Checks member names for validity. Valid member names are
from 1 to 8 characters long containing upper-case alphanumeric
characters; the first character cannot be numeric.
NONAME Does not check member names for validity.
COUNT Outputs a short message giving input counts.
NOCOUNT Outputs normal messages.
READ Inputs each member (or the data set).
NOREAD Does not input any data.
INPUT Inputs each member (or the data set).
NOINPUT Does not read any data.
STATS Displays normal completion statistical messages.
NOSTATS Does not display statistical messages. This checks a member or
a data set for unusual conditions.
UPDATE Tests member addition and deletion to determine if the PDS
directory has any available space and if normal PDS operations
are possible on the data set. For a VSAM data set, performs an
IDCAMS VERIFY function.
NOUPDATE Does not update the data set.
MEMBERS Displays the names of members with warning or error messages
but without changing the current member group.
MEMLIST Same as ML. Any member with warning or error messages is
selected for MEMLIST display. These messages are in the range
PDS400W through PDS999E. If no members are selected, a null
sublist is the result.
ML Same as MEMLIST. Any member with warning or error
messages is selected for MEMLIST display. These messages are
in the range PDS400W through PDS999E. If no members are
selected, a null sublist is the result.
NEWML Same as MEMLIST and ML except that the current MEMLIST is
reset.

378 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

SUBLIST Any member with warning or error messages is selected for

inclusion in a new sublist. These messages are in the range
PDS400W through PDS999E. If no members are selected, a null
sublist is the result.
FROMKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, ky is coded as the key of the first
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be coded as
x’hexkey’; access begins at the first record whose key matches
(or is greater than) the portion of the key specified. Use this
parameter with TOKEY. Specify it only specified for an alternate
index or a key-sequenced data set.
FROMADDRESS For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through 99999999 to
(ad) specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the first record to be
accessed. The RBA value must match the beginning of a logical
record. If this parameter is specified for key-sequenced data,
the records are accessed in physical sequential order instead of
key order. Use this parameter with TOADDRESS.
FROMADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or linear
data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with spanned
records if any of the spanned records are to be accessed
FROMNUMBER For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through 99999999 to
(nm) specify the relative record number (RRN) of the first record to
be accessed. This record must be present in the data set.
Use this parameter with TONUMBER. Specify it only specified for
a variable or fixed relative record data set.
TOKEY(ky) For VSAM data sets only, ky is coded as the key of the last
record to be accessed. This is a generic key and can be coded as
x’hexkey’; access ends after the first record whose key matches
the portion of the key specified.
Use this parameter with FROMKEY. Specify it only for an
alternate index or a key-sequenced data set.
TOADDRESS For VSAM data sets only, ad is coded as 0 through 99999999 to
(ad) specify the relative byte address (RBA) of the last record to be
accessed. The RBA value does need not to match the beginning
of a logical record. If this parameter is specified for key-
sequenced data, the records are accessed in physical sequential
order instead of key order. Use this parameter with
FROMADDRESS.
TOADDRESS(address)
 Can be coded only for key-sequenced, entry-sequenced or linear
data sets or DATA or INDEX components
 Cannot be specified if the data set is being accessed through a
path
 Cannot be specified for a key-sequenced data set with spanned
records if any of the spanned records are to be accessed

Command Reference 379

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

TONUMBER For VSAM data sets only, nm is coded as 0 through 99999999 to

(nm) specify the relative record number (RRN) of the last record to be
accessed. This record need not be present in the data set.
Use this parameter with FROMNUMBER. Specify it only for a
variable or fixed relative record data set.
EXAMINE For VSAM data sets only, specifies that an IDCAMS EXAMINE
with INDEXTEST and DATATEST are wanted.
NOEXAMINE For VSAM data sets only, specifies that no IDCAMS EXAMINE is
wanted.
NOINDEXTEST For VSAM data sets only, specifies that an IDCAMS EXAMINE
with NOINDEXTEST is wanted.
NODATATEST For VSAM data sets only, specifies that an IDCAMS EXAMINE
with NODATATEST is wanted.

Remarks
The VERIFY subcommand validity checks PDS or PDSE data sets in the following manner:

1 For VERIFY : UPDATE, a dummy member is added and deleted to determine if the
data set directory is full and if normal PDS functions are possible. This is the only
potential data set update performed by the VERIFY subcommand and it is not
performed on a PDSE data set.

2 The data set directory is read, member names are placed into a program table in TTR
sort order (member location order) and the following checks are performed:
 If NAME is in effect, member names are checked for validity
 If the data set is a LINKLIST library and LKED is in effect, the LLA status of members
is checked with a system BLDL
 A message is issued if the LLA status of a member cannot be determined due to a
module in a TASKLIB library or a member in a higher LINKLIST library
 A message is issued if a member directory entry and its LLA entry are not identical
(they are not synchronized)
 A message is issued if a LINKLIST member is not known to LLA
 If the data set is a load library and LKED is in effect, the following illegal editor
attribute combinations are checked:
 Modules with RENT and NOREUS attributes
 Modules with RMODEANY and AMODE24 or AMODEANY attributes
 Modules with OVLY and RENT, REUS, REFR, SCTR, RMODEANY, AMODE31, AMODE64,
or AMODEANY attributes
 Modules with TEST and NOEDIT attributes
 Modules with REUS and SCTR attributes
 If the data set is a load library and LOAD is in effect, each member is checked for
ABENDS during a LOAD operation
 Each member is checked for current usage by an ISPF EDIT session
 Member directory entries are checked for correct name order

380 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

 Each member TTR address is checked against the end of the data set

3 The program TTR table is checked for:

 Orphan members (aliases with no associated main member)
 Apparent alias members (main members whose start address matches another main
member’s start address)
 Alias load modules with incorrect directory pointers to associated main members
 Alias load modules whose RMODE entries or main AMODE entries do not match their
base module’s entries

4 If READ or INPUT is in effect, the directory and each member is read checking for:
 Permanent I/O errors
 Input block sizes exceeding the MAXBLK value (or the DCB BLKSIZE if MAXBLK is
omitted)
 BLKSIZE divided by input LRECL not integral (RECFM=F)
 Input LRECL exceeding maximum DCB LRECL (RECFM=V)
 Input LRECL less than 4 bytes (RECFM=V)
 Null members
 Directory RLD/CONTROL counts that do not match the first RLD entry

5 Informational messages regarding the data set are provided.

The VERIFY subcommand validity checks sequential or VSAM data sets in the following
manner:

1 For VSAM data sets if NOUPDATE is not specified, an IDCAMS VERIFY is performed on
the data set.

2 For a KSDS or an Alternate index if NOEXAMINE is not specified, an IDCAMS EXAMINE

is performed on the data set.

3 For a KSDS or an Alternate index if NOREAD is not specified, the data set is also read
sequentially to determine if the index is synchronized with the data.

4 Sequential data sets are checked for current usage by an ISPF EDIT session.

5 If READ or INPUT is in effect, the data set is read checking for:

 Permanent I/O errors or VSAM logical errors
 Input block sizes exceeding the MAXBLK value (or the DCB BLKSIZE if MAXBLK is
omitted)
 BLKSIZE divided by input LRECL not integral (RECFM=F)
 Input LRECL exceeding maximum DCB LRECL (RECFM=V)
 Input LRECL less than 4 bytes (RECFM=V)

Command Reference 381

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

6 Informational messages regarding the data set are provided.

>------>ch jcl.cntl
PDS200I DISP UNIT OPT RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE ALLOCTRK FREETRK SECONDARY FREEDIR
PDS200I SHR 3380 C FB 80 23440 1X 80 41 10 TRK 7

PDS300A ENTER OPTION -- DSN=JCL.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER004 MEM=

** VERIFY JOBC
PDS860E JOBC is an alias but no main member exists

** VERIFY FIX
PDS510W This is a null member

PDS006I End of data set

PDS110I 17,174 logical records were input
PDS111I 332 physical blocks were input
PDS112I 23,440 characters in the largest physical block
PDS113I 4,138 characters per average physical block
PDS114I 0 tracks could be regained by compressing this data set
PDS115I 304 members were checked

PDS130I The following is a track usage map of the data set

PDS130I DDXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXL.....................
PDS130I ....................
PDS117I 304 members counted; cumulative size is 17,174 records and 1,373,920
characters

PDS165I Members are: FIX, JOBC

PDS193I This group contains 2 members

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ------------ ROW 52 OF 70
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.SAM.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR807 MEM=(PDSWHO --------------------------
>----->verify (pdswho,pdspgm)
** VERIFY PDSWHO
PDS860E Member is an alias but no main member exists
PDS861E The alias directory entry notes the main entry name as SYSDSN

PDS111I 7 physical blocks were input

PDS112I 2,056 characters in the largest physical block
PDS113I 353 characters per average physical block

** VERIFY PDSPGM
PDS111I 162 physical blocks were input
PDS112I 6,000 characters in the largest physical block
PDS113I 2,768 characters per average physical block

PDS118I 1 members RMODE24; size is 3K

PDS119I 1 members RMODEANY; size is 436K

382 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS DATA CMDS A-M DATA CMDS N-Z DEFAULT FEATURE
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 -- ROW 168 TO 186 OF 186
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.VSAM.CSI,VOL=SER=SER004 -----------------------------------------
>----->ver
VERIFY FILE(SYS00303)

EXAMINE NAME(SER07.VSAM.CSI) INDEXTEST DATATEST ERRORLIMIT(4)

IDC01700I INDEXTEST BEGINS
IDC01724I INDEXTEST COMPLETE - NO ERRORS DETECTED
IDC01701I DATATEST BEGINS
IDC01709I DATATEST COMPLETE - NO ERRORS DETECTED
IDC01708I 14 CONTROL INTERVALS ENCOUNTERED
IDC01710I DATA COMPONENT CONTAINS 2113 RECORDS
IDC01712I MAXIMUM LENGTH DATA RECORD CONTAINS 88 BYTES
IDC01722I 95 PERCENT FREE SPACE

PDS006I End of data set

PDS111I 2,113 physical blocks were input
PDS112I 88 characters in the largest physical block
PDS113I 24 characters per average physical block

>------>Verify INPUT

PDS006I End of data set

PDS110I 12 logical records were input
PDS111I 1 physical blocks were input
PDS112I 960 characters in the largest physical block
PDS113I 960 characters per average physical block

PDS117I Cumulative size is 960 characters

VMAP Function
Use the VMAP command as a line command in LISTV for a particular volume or as a
primary command to format all extents of a volume.

Example
VMAP sysres

Syntax
VMAP volser

Aliases
VM, VMA, VMAP

Command Reference 383

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

Defaults
none

Required
volser

Operands
volser Name of the online disk volume whose extents are to be mapped.

Remarks
VMAP constructs a full volume extent map (including all free space) in disk address
(CCHH) order. The primary view for this table shows the size of each extent and the
associated DSNAME.

The alternate (reached with a LEFT or RIGHT command) view of this function represents
many statistics on each data set. The SORT, F (find), and REMOVE commands are
available for data manipulation. In addition, use the LC line command to copy an entry for
a particular data set to the LISTC/LISTF table for additional processing.

The following primary commands are supported directly for the VMAP function. For
information on ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see "Common Commands"
on page 39.

ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the VMAP table.

APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and
executes each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

DUA[L] Displays a double line view of the VMAP table.

EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on VMAP table data.
(or ET[BL])
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax
F anystring [ASIS]
[ANY/DSNAME/DO/RECFM/LRECL/BLKSIZE/
ALLOC/SEC/EXTENT/CCHH]

LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the VMAP table. PF keys 10

and 22 are normally set to LEFT.
L[OCATE] Positions to a data line in sorted tables by searching the current
sorted column for the specified data.
Syntax
LOCATE dsname/size/length/extents/alloc/cchh

NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the VMAP table.

384 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for VMAP and operand

syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the VMAP table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REM[OVE] Trims the VMAP table based on a string match.

Syntax
REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/DSNAME/DO/RECFM/LRECL/BLKSIZE/
ALLOC/SEC/EXTENT/CCHH]

RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start
location. PF keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the VMAP table. PF keys 11
and 23 are normally set to RIGHT.
SO[RT] Sorts function tables into an alternate order. SORT with no
operands sorts the table in default order, while SORT with a field
name sorts the table in that order.
Syntax SORT [CCHH/SIZE/LENGTH/EXTENTS/ALLOC]
[ASCEND/DESCEND]

X Clears the VMAP relative to the cursor position.

Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the VMAP table; this is equivalent to X ALL

The following line commands are supported in the VMAP function.

+ Provides an extension panel for command entry.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,+”>

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

B Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.

C Changes to the data set.
DIRF Tailors batch JCL to set the DIRF bit on for this volume.
INDX Tailors batch JCL to reverse the indexed VTOC status for this volume (an
OS/VTOC is switched to an indexed status and an indexed volume is
switched to an OS/VTOC).
E Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.
GO Changes to the data set using GO processing (a number is optional).
IDC Performs an IDCAMS LISTC and directs output to the log.
INFO Displays information on the data set in panel format and updates data set
information.
K Kills and clears all following line commands.
LC Copies this data set entry into the LISTC/LISTF table for further processing.
LOG Copies the line into the log.
M Provides line command selection and entry assistance.
ML Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.

Command Reference 385

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

MOD Changes to the data set and issues a MODEL command.

O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
REST Restores a data set from free space on the volume. This method requires
that the volume index be turned of. See INDX above.
Use REST to recover a data set if these two conditions are met:
 The original space allocated to the data set has not been re-used for another
data set
 If the original data was allocated with security options that erased the data
set when it was deleted, the data set does not contain the original data even
when re-allocated with the REST option.
RJCL Tailors batch JCL to restore a data set from free space on the volume using
ABSTR allocation. Use FIXPDS to change the DCB parameters after the
restore. RJCL has the same limitations on recovering data sets as were
listed under REST processing. Space allocation using ABSTR (absolute track
address) may not be possible for volumes managed by DFSMS.
S Selects line command (normally CHANGE, it is set by SETSEL).
U Changes to the data set and displays USAGE.
UT Selects the extended user line command panel.
W Adds the data set name to the WORKPAD.
WHO Checks for users of this data set with the WHOHAS subcommand.
X Drops the table line.
Z Changes to the data set and issues a COMPRESS subcommand.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported for the
VMAP function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR- t=”Block line command,==”>

CC C command. Changes data set for each line.

GG GO command. Changes to each data set using GO processing.
LL LOG command. Copies the range of lines into the log.
MM ML command. Changes and issues a MEMLIST all for each line.
OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.
SS S command. Selects each line in the range of table lines.
XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.

386 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

FUNCTIONS CTL A-M CTL N-Z LINE CMDS A-M LINE CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------- VMAP STG00C ----------- ROW 1 TO 17 OF 592
COMMAND ===> right SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command or a special control code:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD CCHH End CCHH EX# DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME -------------------
00000001 0001000E 1 *----29 SYS1.VTOCIX.STG00C_________________________
00020000 0008000E 1 *---105 *** FORMAT 4 (VTOC) EXTENT ***_____________
00090000 000A000E 1 *----30 SYS1.VVDS.VSTG00C__________________________
000B0000 000B0000 2 *-----1 UCIS033.ISPF350.ISPPROF____________________
000B0001 000B0001 1 *-----1 WTESSNT.PRD.R921.DBI.SRC___________________
000B0002 000B0003 1 *-----2 WTESSNT.OPS.MIG.LETTER.AU940488____________
000B0004 000B0004 1 *-----1 WFDFA3NT.STAR.ALL__________________________
000B0005 000B0005 1 *-----1 WFD5001.SPFTEMP1.CNTL______________________
+----------------+ 006 1 *-----1 UCIMSAVT.GL9002.GWF05.INDEX________________
| TOTAL= 301 | 007 1 *-----1 *** FREE SPACE EXTENT ***__________________
| NVSAM= 275 | 008 1 *-----1 UCIMSAVT.DC9001.LKGB01.INDEX_______________
| ADDS = 592 | 009 1 *-----1 WFDFA7NT.WILSON.YR9293_____________________
| EXT = 478 | 00A 1 *-----1 ACWCS86.PS0080S____________________________
| SPACE= 44418 | 00B 1 *-----1 WTESSNT.PRD.R921.EXP.CNT___________________
| FREE = 20931 | 00C 1 *-----1 UCIH003.EOXMBMGR.BKLSHELF__________________
+----------------+ 00D 1 *-----1 UCIS003.TRANSMIT.LOG_______________________
000B000E 000B000E 1 *-----1 *** FREE SPACE EXTENT ***__________________

When a VMAP function is invoked, the message lines have the following meanings:

TOTAL= Total number of data sets displayed.

NVSAM= Total number of non-VSAM data sets.
ADDS= Total lines in the VMAP table.
EXT= Total number of extents.
SPACE= Total number of tracks allocated on this volume.
FREE= Total allocated tracks free on this volume.

Command Reference 387

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

FUNCTIONS CTL A-M CTL N-Z LINE CMDS A-M LINE CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURE
-------------------------------- VMAP STG00C -------- ROW 114 TO 121 OF 587
COMMAND ===> exclude po not do SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command or a special control code:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD CCHH End CCHH EX# DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME -------------------
TYPE LENGTH DO RECFM LRECL BLKSI --SIZE- --FREE- USED ALLOC -SEC- RND EXT
087C000D 087D0005 1 *-----8 *** FREE SPACE EXTENT ***__________________
FRE 8
087B0006 087C0000 1 *----10 *** FREE SPACE EXTENT ***__________________
FRE 10
02D10000 02D8000E 1 *---120 ACWCS04.CN7662.DATA________________________
CYL 120 ** FB 132 31680 120T 119T 0% CYL 8 YES 1
02C90000 02D0000E 1 *---120 ACWCS04.CN7760.DATA________________________
CYL 120 ** FB 132 31680 120T 119T 0% CYL 8 YES 1
015A0000 015A000E 1 *----15 ACWCS50.FNA970.MATRIX______________________
CYL 15 PS FB 80 6160 15T 13T 13% CYL 1 YES 1
088E0000 0968000E 1 *--3285 ACWCS50.OBB.T.EXDETAIL_____________________
CYL 3285 PS FB 388 23280 3645T 0T 100% CYL 50 YES 2
0BE10000 0BF8000E 2 *---360 ACWCS50.OBB.T.EXDETAIL_____________________
CYL 360 PS FB 388 23280 3645T 0T 100% CYL 50 YES 2
0A570007 0A57000A 1 *-----4 ACWCS86.ISPF350.ISPPROF____________________
TRK 4 PO FB 80 6160 4T 0T 100% TRK 5 NO 1

FUNCTIONS CTL A-M CTL N-Z LINE CMDS A-M LINE CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------- VMAP STG00C ------------ ROW 1 TO 8 OF 194
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
EXCLUDE PROCESSING DONE, ROWS DELETE = 393
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD CCHH End CCHH EX# DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME -------------------
TYPE LENGTH DO RECFM LRECL BLKSI --SIZE- --FREE- USED ALLOC -SEC- RND EXT
000B0000 000B0000 2 *-----1 UCIS033.ISPF350.ISPPROF____________________
TRK 1 PO FB 80 6160 4T 0T 100% TRK 1 NO 3
000B0001 000B0001 1 *-----1 WTESSNT.PRD.R921.DBI.SRC___________________
TRK 1 PO FB 80 6080 1T 0T 100% TRK 2 NO 1
000B000B 000B000B 1 *-----1 WTESSNT.PRD.R921.EXP.CNT___________________
TRK 1 PO FB 80 3040 1T 0T 100% TRK 5 NO 1
000C0002 000C0005 5 *-----4 UCIMSANT.GL9002.DATA_______________________
TRK 4 PO FB 80 3120 170T 1T 99% TRK 4 NO 8
000C0006 000C0007 1 *-----2 WTESSNT.PRD.R921.IDC.CNT___________________
TRK 2 PO FB 80 3040 2T 1T 50% TRK 2 NO 1
000D0006 000D0006 1 *-----1 WTESSNT.OPS.ITS941.UTILCRD_________________
TRK 1 PO FB 80 6080 1T 0T 100% TRK 14 NO 1
000D000B 000D000C 1 *-----2 UCIO010.ISPF350.ISPPROF____________________
TRK 2 PO FB 80 6160 2T 0T 100% TRK 1 NO 1
000E0002 000E0005 4 *-----4 UCIMSANT.GL9002.DATA_______________________
TRK 4 PO FB 80 3120 170T 1T 99% TRK 4 NO 8

388 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

FUNCTIONS CTL A-M CTL N-Z LINE CMDS A-M LINE CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURE
-------------------------------- VMAP STG00C ----------- ROW 1 TO 17 OF 592
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command or a special control code:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD CCHH End CCHH EX# DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME -------------------
03E50000 05D0000E 1 *--7380 UCIMSAVT.GAP.APFM105.DATA__________________
05D10000 0716000A 1 *--4886 UCIHHCNT.HRCE0D.CUSENTDB___________________
088E0000 0968000E 1 *--3285 ACWCS50.OBB.T.EXDETAIL_____________________
09EC0001 0A560001 1 *--1591 WTESSNT.PRD.Q941.APP.LOAD__________________
0C9F0000 0D02000E 1 *--1500 WFDFA1NT.TSO.JCL___________________________
02510000 02AE0000 1 *--1396 WTESSNT.OPS.MIG.ISPFLIB____________________
0C270002 0C6E0000 3 *--1064 WFDFA1NT.PDB.STAR.NOV94____________________
0AB40000 0AEC000E 1 *---855 UCIGORNR.OREX0S.ORSEMIMO.STEP0010__________
0A600000 0A960003 2 *---814 WFDFA1NT.PDB.STAR.NOV94____________________
01A70000 01DA000E 3 *---780 WTESSNT.OPS.MIG.ISPFLIB____________________
02E7000A 031B0003 1 *---774 WFDFA8NT.MM94206.MF9306.MF9304.BA9410______
0344000A 0375000E 1 *---740 *** FREE SPACE EXTENT ***__________________
09790000 09A80007 1 *---713 WTESSNT.PRD.R921.APP.LINK__________________
0C6E0001 0C9B000E 1 *---689 WFDFA7NT.CMIS94.HIST9410.CYCLEEND.PRODROLL_
01770000 01A3000E 2 *---675 WTESSNT.OPS.MIG.ISPFLIB____________________
0AED0000 0B0E000E 1 *---510 WFDFA8NT.MM94206.MF9409.MF9404.BA9410______
02070000 02260006 1 *---472 *** FREE SPACE EXTENT ***__________________

FUNCTIONS CTL A-M CTL N-Z LINE CMDS A-M LINE CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PDSPN37 ------------------------ VMAP STG00C ----------- ROW 1 TO 17 OF 583
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command or a special control code:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
CMD CCHH End CCHH EX# DATA/MSG ---------DATA SET NAME -------------------
03E50000 05D0000E 1 *--7380 UCIMSAVT.GAP.APFM105.DATA__________________
075C0000 0774000E 2 *---375 UCIMSAVT.GAP.APFM105.DATA__________________
07750000 078D000E 3 *---375 UCIMSAVT.GAP.APFM105.DATA__________________
078E0000 07A6000E 4 *---375 UCIMSAVT.GAP.APFM105.DATA__________________
07A70000 07BF000E 5 *---375 UCIMSAVT.GAP.APFM105.DATA__________________
05D10000 0716000A 1 *--4886 UCIHHCNT.HRCE0D.CUSENTDB___________________
088E0000 0968000E 1 *--3285 ACWCS50.OBB.T.EXDETAIL_____________________
0BE10000 0BF8000E 2 *---360 ACWCS50.OBB.T.EXDETAIL_____________________
02510000 02AE0000 1 *--1396 WTESSNT.OPS.MIG.ISPFLIB____________________
01770000 01A3000E 2 *---675 WTESSNT.OPS.MIG.ISPFLIB____________________
01A70000 01DA000E 3 *---780 WTESSNT.OPS.MIG.ISPFLIB____________________
010E0008 011A000C 4 *---185 WTESSNT.OPS.MIG.ISPFLIB____________________
00A90003 00C7000C 1 *---460 WFDFA1NT.PDB.STAR.NOV94____________________
0A600000 0A960003 2 *---814 WFDFA1NT.PDB.STAR.NOV94____________________
0C270002 0C6E0000 3 *--1064 WFDFA1NT.PDB.STAR.NOV94____________________
09EC0001 0A560001 1 *--1591 WTESSNT.PRD.Q941.APP.LOAD__________________
0C9F0000 0D02000E 1 *--1500 WFDFA1NT.TSO.JCL___________________________

VPRINT Subcommand
The VPRINT (VTAM print) subcommand prints a hardcopy list of a member. Use the TSO
VPSPRINT or DSPRINT command (as generated during StarTool FDM installation). Add any
VPSPRINT/DSPRINT operand after the member name.

Command Reference 389

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

Example
VPRINT mema:memb r525

Syntax
VPRINT memgroup printer
[CLASS(c) ]
[COL(col1:col2, ...) ]
[COPIES(number) ]
[DDNAME(ddname) ]
[DIRECT(KEEP/DELETE) ]
[EJECT/NOEJECT ]
[FCB(fcbname) ]
[FOLD(width)/TRUNCATE(width) ]
[FORMS(formname) ]
[HOLD/NOHOLD ]
[LINES(linenum1:linenum2) ]
[NOEJMESS ]
[NOHEADER ]
[NUM(loc,length)/SNUM(loc,length)/NONUM ]
[PAGELEN(num) ]
[SINGLE/DOUBLE/CCHAR ]
[TERMINAL ]
[TMARGIN(num)/BMARGIN(num) ]
[TRACE ]
[WTR(wtrname) ]

Note: the above operands are for the VPSPRINT command.

Aliases
VP, VPR, VPRI, VPRIN, VPRINT

Defaults
CLASS(A), COPIES(1), NOEJECT, NOHOLD, NUM, SINGLE

Required
memgroup, printer

Operands
memgroup Identifies the members to be printed.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names".
printer Identifies the VTAM printer to print this data set.
operands Optional. Can include any TSO VPSPRINT or DSPRINT operand.

390 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

Remarks
The VPRINT (VTAM print) subcommand prints a hardcopy list of a member.

Use the TSO VPSPRINT or DSPRINT command. This choice was made during StarTool FDM
installation. To determine which program is used, type a CONTROL DEFAULT subcommand
and look for an output line beginning “VPRINT calls”.

VSAM Subcommand
The VSAM subcommand invokes the VSAM Services panel.

Syntax
VSAM

-------------------------------- VSAM Services -----------------------

OPTION ===>

VINFO - Information and Analysis, select a VSAM data set:

Data Set name ===>
VREPRO - REPRO using the above VSAM data set as input
VALLOC - Allocation of a VSAM data set
VMODEL - Allocation of a VSAM data set from model below,
If there is no model below, the VSAM data set above
will be used to initialize the information using a VINFO

Last information and analysis was for data set:

DSNAME:
TYPE:

Note: All input fields are cursor selectable for the given service.
Selecting the Data Set name will execute the VINFO service.

"I" option from 3.2 will also initialize the model as will
an INFO line command on a VSAM cluster in LISTC/LISTF

VTOC Subcommand
The VTOC subcommand displays selected data sets on a disk or set of disks. Each disk has
a volume table of contents (VTOC). This table is searched for data sets that meet the
specifications.

This interface is optional. Use it only if your installation installed the public domain VTOC
command.

Example
VTOC tso001 CONT(dsna)

Command Reference 391

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

Syntax
VTOC (volumelist) [LEVEL(dsnamestart) ]
[EXLEVEL(dsnamestart) ]
[CONTAINING(dsnamestring) ]
[ENDING(dsnameend) ]
[BREAK(breakchars) ]
[CAT ]
[TRK/CYL/KB/MB ]
[NOSORT/SORT(sortfields) ]
[NOPRINT/PRINT(printop (printitemlist)) ]
[LIMIT(keyword oper value) ]
[AND1/OR1(keyword oper value) ]
[AND2/OR2(keyword oper value) ]
[AND3/OR3(keyword oper value) ]
[CHARS(charsperline) ]
[LINES(linesperpage) ]
[NOHEADING/HEADING(text) ]
[DSNLEN(length) ]

Aliases
VT, VTO, VTOC

Defaults
List all data sets on the volumes selected; SORT, PRINT, TRK

Required
volumelist

Operands
volumelist A volume name or a list of volume names in parentheses. If you
enter the first 1 to 5 characters of a volume name, all volumes
that are mounted that start with those characters are listed. If
you specify ALL, all non-virtual volumes that are online and ready
are processed. If you specify ALV, all virtual volumes that are
online and ready are processed if they are mounted PRIVATE/
RESERVED or PRIVATE/RESIDENT.
LEVEL The high-level qualifiers to be searched. This is not prefixed by
(dsnstart) your user ID or prefix. Only data sets starting with these prefixes
are listed.
EXLEVEL The high-level qualifiers to be omitted. This is not prefixed by
(dsnstart) your user ID or prefix. Data sets starting with this prefix are not
listed.
CONTAINING A character string contained in the data set name. At least one of
(dsnstr) the strings must be in the DSNAME for the data set to be listed.
This string does not need to conform to DSNAME standards; it
can begin with a period or a number.

392 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

ENDING The ending characters of the DSNAME. The final non-blank

(dsnameend) characters of the DSNAME must be one of these strings to allow
the data set to be listed. This string must conform to DSNAME
standards.
CAT A locate is performed for each DSNAME on the volumes listed and
status is indicated. This option can take a considerable amount of
processing time.
 C - cataloged on this volume
 N - not cataloged
 W - cataloged on another volume
 E - catalog processing error
TRK Space is to be reported in track units.
CYL Space is to be reported in cylinder units.
KB Space is to be reported in kilobyte units.
MB Space is to be reported in megabyte units.
NOSORT The data sets are not sorted. They are output as they are found.
SORT Data sets are sorted into alphabetical order, based upon the sort
(sortfields) fields specified. DSNAME, VOLUME, ALLOC, USED, UNUSED, PCT,
EX, DSO, RFM, LRECL, BLKSZ, CDATE, EXPDT, and REFDT are
valid sort fields. An A or D is required after each sort field to
indicate ascending/descending sequence.
BREAK The listing contains a new header (on a new page if you use the
(breakchars) VTOCOUT DD card option) whenever the specified number of
characters differs from the preceding data set. This option
functions only with the SORT option.
CHARS The number of characters on each line of output. The default is
(charsperline) 150 for print and the line width of the terminal for TSO sessions.
You can get more information by specifying a larger number of
characters per line or you can limit the printing by setting a
smaller number of characters per line of output.
LINES Specifies the number of lines before a new title line is produced.
(linesperpage) It defaults to 60 for print and to the screen size for TSO sessions.
NOHEADING Does not produce a heading. The heading is only output if the
VTOCOUT DD statement is present.
HEADING(text) If a DD statement with a DDNAME of VTOCOUT is present, this
text is used to begin every page. Include ASA carriage control.
The default header consists of “VTOC command version 02”
followed by the command that was entered.
DSNLEN Specifies the length of the DSNAME to print. The rest of the
(length) DSNAME is truncated. The CHARS parameter also causes the
DSNAME to be truncated if the name and the preceding
information exceeds the print line.
NOPRINT Specifies that individual items are not to be listed. Use the
command to calculate totals.

Command Reference 393

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

PRINT(ptop The items to print. Ptop is the print formatting option as follows:
(ptitems))
 NEW - the ptitems is a complete list of what to print
 REP - the first ptitem is replaced with the rest of the items on the
list
 ADD - the rest of the ptitems are added after the first item on the
list
 DEL - the ptitems named are not printed
The ptitems names are the same keywords used in LIMIT, AND,
and OR functions and are also the titles as printed. These
keywords can be ALLOC, UNUSED, USED, PCT, EX, DSO, RFM,
BLKSZ, LRECL, CDATE, EXPDT, REFDT, SECT, PASS, ROUND,
CCHH, VOLUME, UNIT, DSNAME, ACTION, TYPE, RACF, or UPD.
The ADD, DEL, and REP print operations refer to the default print
list. The default list is ALLOC, UNUSED, PCT, EX, DSO, RFM,
BLKSZ, LRECL, REFDT, CDATE, VOLUME, DSNAME, EXPDT, SECQ,
SECT, ROUND, PASS, ACTION, and type. As noted under CHARS
above, only the items that fit on the print line are listed.
LIMIT(key oper The data sets to be listed. Only data sets that satisfy the relation
value) are listed.
key can be ALLOC, UNUSED, USED, PCT, EX, DSO, RFM, BLKSZ,
LRECL, CDATE, EXPDT, REFDT, SECT, PASS, ROUND, CCHH,
VOLUME, UNIT, DSNAME, ACTION, TYPE, RACF, or UPD.
oper can be EQ, NE, LE, LT, GE, or GT.
value can be a comparison value such as FB, PS, R, or a number
like 51.

394 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

keyword The name of a data set field as follows. The keywords and their
values are the same as in the VTOC output.
 ALLOC - data set allocation; number of kilobytes, tracks, cylinders,
or megabytes allocated. Default is in tracks
 UNUSED - amount of unused space in the data set. Same units as
in ALLOC
 USED - amount of space used in the data set. Same units as in
ALLOC
 PCT - percentage of space used in the data used
 EX - number of extents in the data set
 DSO - data set organization
PS = sequential
PO = partitioned
VS = VSAM
PE = PDSE data
DA = direct
IS = ISAM
U = unmoveable
 RFM - record format
F = fixed
V = variable
U = undefined
B = blocked
T = track overflow
S = spanned or standard
A = ASA carriage control
M = machine carriage control
 BLKSZ - block size for physical blocks of data
 LRECL - logical record length in bytes
 CDATE - creation date in the form YYDDD, sometimes called Julian

Command Reference 395

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

 EXPDT - expiration date in the same form. This field is rarely used
 REFDT - last use date in the same form. This date is when the data
set was last opened
 SECT - type of allocation
A = absolute track
B = blocks
T = tracks
C = cylinders
 PASS - protection indicators
N = none
T = read and write protection
W = write protection
 ROUND - space rounded up to cylinders
R = round
N = no round
 CCHH - cylinder and head address, in 4 or 8 hexadecimal digits. If
4 digits are used, only the cylinder is used for comparison;
otherwise, the cylinder and track are compared
 VOLUME - Volume serial number or disk name
 UNIT - Unit or device type
 DSNAME - Name of the data set
 ACTION - Some error indications
 TYPE - Reserved for exit usage
 RACF - RACF indicator
N = not indicated
Y = indicated
 UPD - updated since last backup
N = not updated
Y = updated
oper An operator. The list of operators is as follows:
 EQ is equal to
 NE is not equal to
 LE is less than or equal to
 LT is less than
 GE is greater than or equal to
 GT is greater than
value Gives the value of the item for comparison, such as FB, PS, R, or
a number.
AND1(key oper Data sets to be listed. Both LIMIT and this condition must be true
value) to allow the listing.
key can be ALLOC, UNUSED, USED, PCT, EX, DSO, RFM, BLKSZ,
LRECL, CDATE, EXPDT, REFDT, SECT, PASS, ROUND, CCHH,
VOLUME, UNIT, DSNAME, ACTION, TYPE, RACF, or UPD.
oper can be EQ, NE, LE, LT, GE, or GT.
value can be a comparison value such as FB, PS, R, or a number
like 51.

396 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

OR1(key oper Data sets to be listed. Either LIMIT and this condition must be
value) true to allow the listing.
key can be ALLOC, UNUSED, USED, PCT, EX, DSO, RFM, BLKSZ,
LRECL, CDATE, EXPDT, REFDT, SECT, PASS, ROUND, CCHH,
VOLUME, UNIT, DSNAME, ACTION, TYPE, RACF, or UPD.
oper can be EQ, NE, LE, LT, GE, or GT.
value can be a comparison value such as FB, PS, R, or a number
like 51.
AND2(key oper Data sets to be listed. Both the previous result and this condition
value) must be true to allow the listing.
key can be ALLOC, UNUSED, USED, PCT, EX, DSO, RFM, BLKSZ,
LRECL, CDATE, EXPDT, REFDT, SECT, PASS, ROUND, CCHH,
VOLUME, UNIT, DSNAME, ACTION, TYPE, RACF, or UPD.
oper can be EQ, NE, LE, LT, GE, or GT.
value can be a comparison value such as FB, PS, R, or a number
like 51.
OR2(key oper Data sets to be listed. Either the previous result or this condition
value) must be true to allow the listing.
key can be ALLOC, UNUSED, USED, PCT, EX, DSO, RFM, BLKSZ,
LRECL, CDATE, EXPDT, REFDT, SECT, PASS, ROUND, CCHH,
VOLUME, UNIT, DSNAME, ACTION, TYPE, RACF, or UPD.
oper can be EQ, NE, LE, LT, GE, or GT.
value can be a comparison value such as FB, PS, R, or a number
like 51.
AND3(key oper Data sets to be listed. Both the previous result and this condition
value) must be true to allow the listing.
key can be ALLOC, UNUSED, USED, PCT, EX, DSO, RFM, BLKSZ,
LRECL, CDATE, EXPDT, REFDT, SECT, PASS, ROUND, CCHH,
VOLUME, UNIT, DSNAME, ACTION, TYPE, RACF, or UPD.
oper can be EQ, NE, LE, LT, GE, or GT.
value can be a comparison value such as FB, PS, R, or a number
like 51.
OR3(key oper Data sets to be listed. Either the previous result or this condition
value) must be true to allow the listing.
key can be ALLOC, UNUSED, USED, PCT, EX, DSO, RFM, BLKSZ,
LRECL, CDATE, EXPDT, REFDT, SECT, PASS, ROUND, CCHH,
VOLUME, UNIT, DSNAME, ACTION, TYPE, RACF, or UPD.
oper can be EQ, NE, LE, LT, GE, or GT.
value can be a comparison value such as FB, PS, R, or a number
like 51.

Remarks
Following are some examples of uses for the VTOC command.
 List all data sets on VOL*** volumes:
VTOC vol
 List all data sets on all volumes:
VTOC all
 List all data sets that start with XXX on any MV**** volume:

Command Reference 397

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

VTOC mv lev(xxx)
 List all data sets that contain LIST and do not start with SYS1:
VTOC vol cont(list) exlev(sys1)
 List all recently created data sets:
VTOC vol lim(cdate gt 93001)
 List data sets with unused space:
VTOC vol lim(pct lt 50) or1(unused gt 30)
 List data sets with multiple extents:
VTOC vol lim(ex gt 1)
 List all of a user’s data sets on TSO001:
VTOC tso001 level(ser002)
 List all data sets over 100 tracks:
VTOC vol lim(alloc gt 100)
 List CLIST data sets:
VTOC vol end(clist)
 List all of the information about a user’s data sets at a 3270:
VTOC vol char(150)
 List data sets under the fixed heads:
VTOC vol lim(cc eq 0001) or1(cc eq 0002)
 Check if data sets on volume VOL*** are cataloged correctly:
VTOC vol cat print(new (alloc pct cat dsname))
 List used space instead of unused, in tracks:
VTOC vol print(rep (unused used)) trk
 List all data sets on 335*** volumes sorted by ALLOC in descending sequence,
VOLUME and DSNAME in ascending sequence:
VTOC 335 sort(alloc,d,volume,a,dsname,a)

398 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 -- ROW 112 TO 128 OF 128
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER006 MEM=(BATDELAY --------------------------
>----->vtoc ser cont(ser07.lib.)
ALLOC UNUSED PCT EX DSO RFM LRECL BLKSZ CDATE REFDT VOLUME DSNAME
379 100 2 PO FB 80 13680 93064 93197 SER006 SER07.LIB.ASM
140 97 30 4 PO FB 80 9040 89277 93207 SER007 SER07.LIB.CLIST
4 2 50 3 PO VB 255 32760 91074 93206 SER006 SER07.LIB.CLISTV
100 15 85 1 PO FB 80 13680 93076 93207 SER006 SER07.LIB.CNTL
1 100 1 PO FB 80 9040 92199 93015 SER006 SER07.LIB.EXPDT
25 100 1 PO FB 80 9040 89277 93194 SER007 SER07.LIB.FILE11
63 100 1 PO FB 80 9040 89277 93204 SER007 SER07.LIB.FILE29
203 100 2 PO U 0 32000 89277 93195 SER007 SER07.LIB.LOAD
765 225 70 3 PO FB 80 13680 93126 93207 SER006 SER07.LIB.PDSE
459 100 1 PO FB 80 13680 93126 93204 SER006 SER07.LIB.PDSE31
180 100 2 PO FB 80 13680 93180 93181 SER006 SER07.LIB.PDSE32
4 100 1 PO FB 80 9040 92265 93176 SER007 SER07.LIB.PDSINS
2 100 1 PO U 0 13030 93190 93197 SER007 SER07.LIB.STOW
10 9 10 1 PS FB 200 2000 93181 93181 SER007 SER07.LIB.TESTVS
TOTALS - 14 DATA SETS, 2335 TRKS ALLOC, 1987 TRKS USED
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

VUSE Subcommand
The VUSE (volume usage) subcommand checks disk volume statistics and usage.

Example
VUSE sysres all

Syntax
VUSE volume [SHORT/LONG/ALL]

Aliases
VU, VUS, VUSE

Defaults
SHORT

Required
volume

Command Reference 399

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

Operands
SHORT Provides basic information for a volume including free space statistics
and the current volume usage.
ALL Includes SHORT information and formats any SMS VOLUME RECORD
information and the FORMAT 4 DSCB. Same as LONG.
LONG Includes SHORT information and formats any SMS VOLUME RECORD
information and the FORMAT 4 DSCB. Same as ALL.

Remarks
The VUSE subcommand is useful for determining the amount of free space on a volume as
it displays the largest five free extents in track and cylinder units. It is also useful for
diagnosing volume errors as the FORMAT 4 DSCB can be interpreted by this subcommand.

-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log ROW 1,223 TO 1,234 OF 1,234

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.SMSLIB.PDSETEST,VOL=SER=STG005 MEM=$$$$CUST -------------------
>----->vuse stg00c
PDS082I Volume name: STG00C UNIT = 5C4 TYPE = 3390M3
PDS083I Volume status: RESIDENT PRIVATE ALLOCATED ONLINE
PDS085I Blank DSCB's: 4927 or 86%
PDS086I Free indexed VTOC VIR's: 577

PDS087I Free space: 5560 TRACKS OR 23%; 112 EXTENTS INCLUDING 342 FULL CYLIN

PDS089I LARGEST EXTENTS: #1 #2 #3 #4 #5

PDS089I CYL.TRKS 49.05 31.07 30.12 25.11 17.08
PDS089I TRACKS 740 472 462 386 263

PDS096I DEVICE MB/VOL TRACKS #CYLS TRK/CYL BYTES/TRK DSCB/TRK PDS/TRK

PDS096I 3390M3 2,838 50,085 3,339 15 56,664 50 45

400 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log ROW 1,121 TO 1,139 OF 1,222

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=WSER07.SMSLIB.PDSETEST,VOL=SER=STG005 MEM=$$$$CUST -------------------
>----->vuse stg00c all
PDS082I Volume name: STG00C UNIT = 5C4 TYPE = 3390M3
PDS083I Volume status: RESIDENT PRIVATE ALLOCATED ONLINE
PDS085I Blank DSCB's: 4927 or 86%
PDS086I Free indexed VTOC VIR's: 577

PDS087I Free space: 5560 TRACKS or 23%; 112 EXTENTS INCLUDING 342 FULL CYLIN
PDS089I LARGEST EXTENTS: #1 #2 #3 #4 #5
PDS089I CYL.TRKS 49.05 31.07 30.12 25.11 17.08
PDS089I TRACKS 740 472 462 386 263

PDS096I DEVICE MB/VOL TRACKS #CYLS TRK/CYL BYTES/TRK DSCB/TRK PDS/TRK

PDS096I 3390M3 2,838 50,085 3,339 15 56,664 50 45

PDS185I Format 4 DSCB at 0002000001

PDS185I 0 4 8 C 10 14 18 1C 20 24 28 2C 30 34 38 3C 40 44
PDS185I ............................................4......"......a......Vs..
PDS185I 00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000F000031700000080C00000EA00
PDS185I 444444444444444444444444444444444444444444444080E24FDB000F1100DC0F5200

PDS185I 48 4C 50 54 58 5C 60 64 68 6C 70 74 78 7C 80 84 88
PDS185I ......................................................................
PDS185I 0200320000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
PDS185I 00002D00000000000000000000000000000100200080E0000000000000000000000000

PDS186I LOC NAME VALUE DESCRIPTION

PDS186I --- ---- ----- -----------
PDS186I 00 DS4KEY 04040404... KEY - VTOC NAME - 44X'04'
PDS186I 2C DS4IDFMT F4 FORMAT IDENTIFIER
PDS186I DS4HPCHR 0008000E32 HIGHEST FORMAT 1 DSCB (NOT MAINTAINED)
PDS186I DS4DSREC 5,247. NUMBER OF AVAILABLE DSCB'S (NOT MAINTAINED)
PDS186I 34 DS4HCCHH 0D0B0000 CCHH OF NEXT AVAILABLE ALTERNAME TRACK
PDS186I 38 DS4NOATK 15. NUMBER OF REMAINING ALTERNATE TRACKS
PDS186I 3A DS4VTOCI 81 VTOC INDICATORS
PDS186I X'81' DS4IVTOC - THIS VOLUME HAS AN INDEXED VTOC
PDS186I 3B DS4NOEXT 1. NUMBER OF EXTENTS IN THE VTOC
PDS186I 3C DS4SMSFG 0000 SYSTEM MANAGED STORAGE INDICATORS
PDS186I 3E DS4DSCYL 3,340. NUMBER OF LOGICAL CYINDERS
PDS186I 40 DS4DSTRK 15. NUMBER OF TRACKS IN A LOGICAL CYLINDER
PDS186I 42 DS4DEVTK 58,786. DEVICE TRACK LENGTH
. . .
PDS186I 4A DS4DEVDT 50. NUMBER OF DSCB'S PER TRACK
PDS186I 4B DS4DEVDB 45. NUMBER OF DIRECTORY BLOCKS PER TRACK
PDS186I 4C DS4AMTIM 0000000000000000 VSAM TIME STAMP
PDS186I 54 DS4VSIND 00 VSAM INDICATORS
PDS186I 55 DS4VSCRA 0000 RELATIVE TRACK LOCATION OF THE CRA
PDS186I 57 DS4R2TIM 0000000000000000 VSAM VOLUME/CATALOG MATCH TIME STAMP
PDS186I 5F 0000000000 RESERVED
PDS186I 64 DS4F6PTR 0000000000 CCHHR POINTER TO FIRST FORMAT 6 DSCB OR ZERO
PDS186I 69 DS4VTOCE 0100000200 CCHHR ADDRESS OF VTOC EXTENT START
PDS186I 6E DS4VTOCE 000008000E CCHHR ADDRESS OF VTOC EXTENT END

Command Reference 401

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

If a volume is SMS-controlled, the ALL or LONG operand also formats the following SMS
VOLUME RECORD information.

PDS088I Volume record definition dump:

0000 C9C7C4E5 D3C44040 00000000 00000001 *IGDVLD ........*
0010 00094040 00000098 0006E2E3 C7F0F0C3 *.. ...q..STG00C*
0020 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 *................*
0030 00000000 00000000 C1C3E2E2 C9F0F940 *........ACSSI09 *
0040 F1F9F9F4 61F0F661 F1F7DD58 00000000 *1994/06/17......*
0050 F1F57AF3 F3404040 0004E2E3 D9C70000 *15:33 ..STRG..*
0060 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 *................*
0070 00000000 00000000 01010102 01010101 *................*
0080 00000000 00000000 00FADC08 00000A93 *...............l*
0090 0000012C 00000027 0000008B 091305E8 *...............Y*
00A0 01114928 0000C1E7 01040104 00000000 *......AX........*

PDS186I 38 VLDDUSER ACSSI09 USERID OF LAST UPDATER

PDS186I 40 VLDDDATE 1994/06/17 DATE OF LAST UPDATE
PDS186I 4A VLDTRKSZ 56,664. VOLUME R1 TRACK CAPACITY
PDS186I 50 VLDDTIME 15:33 TIME OF LAST UPDATE
PDS186I 5A VLDSTGRP STRG VOLUME STORAGE GROUP NAME
PDS186I 78 VLDSMSS 01 (VLDENBL) SMS STATUS IS ENABLED
PDS186I 79 VLDMVSS 01 (VLDONLN) MVS STATUS IS ONLINE
PDS186I 7A VLDSMSS 01 (VLDENBL) SMS STATUS IS ENABLED
PDS186I 7B VLDMVSS 02 (VLDOFFLN) MVS STATUS IS OFFLINE
PDS186I 7C VLDSMSS 01 (VLDENBL) SMS STATUS IS ENABLED
PDS186I 7D VLDMVSS 01 (VLDONLN) MVS STATUS IS ONLINE
PDS186I 7E VLDSMSS 01 (VLDENBL) SMS STATUS IS ENABLED
PDS186I 7F VLDMVSS 01 (VLDONLN) MVS STATUS IS ONLINE
PDS186I 88 VLDNUCBA 00FADC08 ADDRESS OF UCB IF KNOWN OR ZERO OTHERWISE
PDS186I 8C VLDNTCPY 2,707. TOTAL CAPACITY IN MEGABYTES
PDS186I 90 VLDNFREE 300. AMOUNT FREE IN MEGABYTES
PDS186I 94 VLDNLEXT 39. LARGEST FREE EXTENT IN MEGABYTES
PDS186I 98 VLDFLAGS 00 SMS CONVERSION FLAGS
PDS186I 9A VLDN0CNT 139. VOLUME LEVEL RESET COUNT
PDS186I A0 VLDSGST 01 STORGRP STATUS ON THIS SYSTEM
PDS186I A4 VLDNLEVL 49,639. UPDATE LEVEL FOR VOLUME
PDS186I A8 VLDCSMSS 0104010400000000 CONFIRMED SMS STATUS FOR VOLUME

WHOHAS Subcommand
The WHOHAS subcommand displays users allocated to a data set.

Example
WHOHAS ‘sys1.uads’

Syntax
WHOHAS dataset / *

Aliases
WH, WHO, WHOH, WHOHA, WHOHAS

402 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

Defaults
none

Required
dataset

Operands
dataset Identifies the data set to be checked.
* Check the currently allocated data set.

Remarks
Use WHO (short for WHOHAS) as a line command in LISTA/DDNAME, LISTC/LISTF and
WORKPAD.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log ROW 1,000 TO 1,005 OF 1,005
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=ISF.V1R3M2.ISFLPA,VOL=SER=SYSS1C MEM=IGX00011 ------------------------
>----->whohas 'sys1.uads'
PDS292I 'SYS1.UADS' is allocated as follows:
PDS292I JOBNAME SCOPE TYPE STATUS SYSTEM RESERVE
PDS292I DLE1 SYSTEM SHR USING SCU1 NO
PDS292I SSI003 SYSTEM SHR USING SCU2 NO
PDS292I SSI002 SYSTEM SHR USING SCU1 YES
PDS292I SER07 SYSTEM SHR USING SCU2 CONVERTED
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

WORKPAD Function
Use the WORKPAD command to store StarTool FDM subcommands, data set names, TSO
commands, CLISTS, and REXX execs in an ISPF table. Each individual table element can
be re-executed whenever you want.

WORKPAD tables are saved permanently. They are saved in the ISPF profile data set by
default (ISPPROF) but the DDNAME can be changed in the SETALL option. To manage
these tables, use the SAVE, ID, MERGE, NOSAVE and ERASE commands. To automatically
save these tables at program end or when a new WORKPAD table is retrieved, check the
setting of “Automatic save” in SETALL for WORKPAD.

Saved WORKPAD tables are given members names of the form PDSWP0na if the name is
one or two numeric digits; otherwise, use a name of the form @@name where name is a
1- to 6-character alphanumeric table identification name.

Example

Command Reference 403

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

WORKPAD

Syntax
WORKPAD [name] [ALTERNAT] [SETUP]

Aliases
W, WO, WOR, WORK, WORKP, WORKPA, WORKPAD

Defaults
0

Required
none

Operands
name 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters, the WORKPAD table name to
retrieve.
ALTERNAT Displays the alternate WORKPAD panel (for new WORKPADs only).
SETUP Execute each line of the WORKPAD in EXPRESS mode.

Remarks
The WORKPAD ISPF table displays in response to a WORKPAD command. When you are in
a WORKPAD display, you can delete a part of the table, find data in the table, insert
elements into the table, print a part of the table, store a part of the table in a data set,
and so on. For help with the different options available, use the HELP command, CUA
functions, or enter the O command as a primary command or as a line command.

WORKPAD is a versatile service to keep sets of commands and data set names for easy
reference. These sets are shared between groups and the installation. Sample table 99 is
supplied by SERENA and can be modified by your installation as an index to other
samples. Reserve table 0 for temporary use and table 1 for your own index. Use Table 2
for setup.

The SETUP operand on the WORKPAD command allows you to execute a series of StarTool
FDM commands without intervention. Any data set entries in this mode result in executing
a GO line command. Follow each data set entry by a MEMLIST command to build a
MEMLIST for each data set.

When you modify a WORKPAD table entry, it is not executed automatically. You can
change this default for the current session by typing MODE EXEC.

You can also change this default across sessions in SETALL.

404 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

Each WORKPAD element or line has the following four fields:

OPT Option. Specifies the program action (the line command field).
MSG/RC Message or return code. Displays program feedback messages.
TYPE Command type. Specifies the type of entry.
 * is a comment entry
 - is a TSO command, a CLIST, or a REXX exec
 D is a data set name
 P is a StarTool FDM subcommand
 T is a TSO command whose output is to be TRAPPED in the log
PDS/TSO Command field. This is where the data set name, command, or
subcommand is entered and displayed. Comments can be added after
any entry. Type /* and follow it with any data.

The alternate WORKPAD table contains additional entry fields for data sets. Enter the
volume name and a member group specification with up to 17 characters. The BB block
line command and the BR, ED, and ML line commands use the MEMBERS field from the
alternate WORKPAD table.

The following primary commands are supported for the WORKPAD function. For
information on ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see "Common Commands"
on page 39.

ADD Adds 5 blank table lines to the end of the WORKPAD table.
ALT[ERNAT] Displays an alternate view of the WORKPAD table.
APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd
COMPR[ESS] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues
a COMPRESS subcommand.
Syntax COMPRESS [LIST/NOLIST/SUMMARY]
DUA[L] Displays a double line view of the WORKPAD table.
EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on WORKPAD table data.
(or ET[BL])
ER[ASE] Deletes the WORKPAD table in memory and on disk.
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses between
individual commands.
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax
F anystring [ASIS]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[ANY/COMMAND]

FI[ND] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues
a FIND subcommand. Since the syntax entered on a FIND
subcommand is applied to each data set individually, do not
attempt to search mixed partitioned and non-partitioned data sets
with a single FIND global command.

Command Reference 405

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

Syntax
FIND memgroup 'anystring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]

GL[OBAL] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues
any StarTool FDM subcommand.
Syntax GLOBAL anysubcommand [anyoperands]

ID Changes the table ID name.

Syntax ID name

(where name is a 1- to 6-character alphanumeric name).

INS[ERT] Adds blank WORKPAD table lines.
Syntax INSERT [nn] [TOP/BOTTOM/HERE]
(where nn defaults to 5)
LE[FT] Rotates through alternate views of the WORKPAD table. PF keys 10
and 22 are normally set to LEFT.
LO[AD] Loads data set names from operating system control blocks.
Syntax LOAD APFLST/LNKLST/LPALST [RESET]

MER[GE] Merges data from a different table into the current table.
Syntax MERGE name [GROUP/SAMPLE] [RESET]
[TOP/BOTTOM/HERE]

(where name is 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters)

MODE Specifies if modified WORKPAD lines are to be automatically
executed.
Syntax MODE [EXEC/NOEXEC]

MODEL Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues
a MODEL command.
NOR[MAL] Displays the default view of the WORKPAD table.
NOS[AVE] Do not save the current WORKPAD on disk regardless of the setting
of “Automatic save” in SETALL for WORKPAD.
O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the WORKPAD function
and operand syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the WORKPAD table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REM[OVE] Trims the WORKPAD table based on a string match.

Syntax
REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[ANY/COMMAND]

REPL[ACE] Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and issues
a REPLACE subcommand. Since the syntax entered on a REPLACE
subcommand is applied to each data set individually, do not
attempt to update mixed partitioned and non-partitioned data sets
with a single REPLACE global command.

406 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

Syntax
REPLACE memgroup 'fromstring' 'tostring'
[NUM/SNUM/NONUM/LBLOCK/LDUMP/BLOCK/DUMP]
[CAPS/ASIS/IGNORE] [WORD/PREFIX/SUFFIX]
[WRITE/NOWRITE]

RESET Often used with data set tagging, clears the DATA/MSG field in all
table entries.
RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location.
PF keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
RI[GHT] Rotates through alternate views of the WORKPAD table. PF keys 11
and 23 are normally set to RIGHT.
SAM[PLE] Merges table number 99 from the installation table library (usually
ISPTLIB) into the current WORKPAD table. Table 99 is an index to
other sample WORKPAD tables. The additional sample tables can
be included by using the MERGE command.
SAVE Creates a permanent table for use in a later StarTool FDM session.
Syntax SAVE [name] [REPLACE/NOREPL]

(where name is 1- to 6-alphanumeric characters)

SEEK Global command. Changes to each data set in the table and looks
for a member.
Syntax SEEK member

SO[RT] Sorts the WORKPAD table into order based on the WORKPAD
entries.
Syntax SORT

TAG Applies the specified line command to table entries marked with
*TAG* in the DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are

maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well
as your installation.
WHO[HAS] Global command. Issues a WHOHAS subcommand for each data set
in the table.
X Clears the WORKPAD table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the WORKPAD table; this is equivalent to X ALL.

The following line commands are supported in the WORKPAD function. The DFHSM
commands are supported from the UT panel and BR, ED and ML refer to a MEMBERS
column displayed on an alternate panel that can be reached with PF10 or PF11.

+ Provides an extension panel for command entry.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,+”>

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

6 Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST all.

A After command. Copies or moves data after the marker.

Command Reference 407

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

ALT Changes to the data set and executes an alternate subcommand.

B Before command. Copies or moves data before the marker.
BR Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST for members in the
MEMBERS column.
C Copies this line.
CH Changes to the data set.
COMB Changes to the data set and invokes COMBINE.
COPY Changes to the data set and invokes COPY.
DUP Changes to the data set and invokes DUP.
ED Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST for members in the
MEMBERS column.
EXEC Executes the command, subcommand, CLIST, REXX exec, or changes to
the data set.
FIND Changes to the data set and invokes FIND.
FIX Changes to the data set and invokes FIXPDS.
HBAC HBBACK DFHSM command to back up the data set.
HBDE HBDEL DFHSM command for the data set.
HDEL HDEL DFHSM command for the data set.
HIST Changes to the data set and invokes HISTORY.
HMIG HMIG DFHSM command for the data set.
HML2 HMIG DFHSM command for the data set to LEVEL 2.
HREC HRECALL DFHSM command for the data set.
GO Changes to the data set using GO processing (a number is optional).
IF Changes to the data set and invokes IF.
IN Inserts a blank line.
K Kills and clears all following line commands.
LC Adds the data set name to the current LISTC/LISTF table.
LOG Copies the line into the log.
M Moves this line.
MAP Changes to the data set and invokes MAP.
ME Provides line command selection and entry assistance.
ML Changes to the data set and issues a MEMLIST for members in the
MEMBERS column.
MOD Changes to the data set and issues a MODEL command.
O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
PBRO Changes to the data set and invokes PBROWSE.
PEDI Changes to the data set and invokes PEDIT.
PVIE Changes to the data set and invokes PVIEW.

408 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

R Reproduces this line.

REPL Changes to the data set and invokes REPLACE.
S Selects line command (normally EXEC, it is set in SETSEL).
SEEK Changes to the data set and checks for a member.
SEPA Changes to the data set and invokes SEPARATE.
SETA Saves a StarTool FDM subcommand for repeated use by the ALT line
command.
SMPG Changes to the data set and invokes SMPGEN.
SUBL Changes to the data set and invokes SUBLIST.
TAG Marks this table entry with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.
UP Updates or views, then executes this entry.
US Changes to the data set and displays USAGE.
UT Selects the extended user line command panel.
VERI Changes to the data set and invokes VERIFY.
VIEW Views and updates but does not execute this entry.
WHO Checks for users of this data set with WHOHAS.
X Drops the table line.
Z Changes to the data set and issues a COMPRESS subcommand.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in the
WORKPAD function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
*cm ERR- t=”Block line command,==”>

AA ALT command. Changes to each data set and executes an alternate

subcommand.
BB BR command. Changes to each data set and issues a MEMLIST for the
MEMBERS specified.
CC C command. Copies this range of table entries.
EE EXEC command. Executes each entry.
GG GO command. Changes to each data set using GO processing.
LL LOG command. Copies the range of lines into the log.
MM M command. Moves this range of table entries.
OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.
RR R command. Reproduces this range of table entries.
SS S command. Selects each line in the range of table lines.
SSEE SEEK command. Changes to each data set and check for a member.
UU UP command. Updates or views then executes each entry.
VV VIEW command. Views and changes each entry but does not execute.

Command Reference 409

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.

ZZ Z command. Changes to each data set and issues COMPRESS subcommand.

FUNCTIONS CTL A-M CTL N-Z LINE CMDS A-M LINE CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURE
-------------------------- StarTool Workpad Table 0 --------- ROW 1 TO 4 OF 4
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER005 MEM=/ASM -------------------------------
OPT MSG/RC TYPE ------ PDS/TSO COMMAND or CLIST ----------------------------
---- -------- - ------------------------------------------------------------
* This whole entry is a comment.

---- -------- - ------------------------------------------------------------

P list pds99t1d /* this is a comment

---- -------- - ------------------------------------------------------------

*RC=4 T dsat lib.cntl /* this is a comment

---- -------- - ------------------------------------------------------------

D 'sys1.parmlib' /* this is a comment

---- -------- - ------------------------------------------------------------

FUNCTIONS CTL A-M CTL N-Z LINE CMDS A-M LINE CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURE
-------------------------- StarTool Workpad Table 15 -------- ROW 1 TO 4 OF 4
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LIB.CNTL,VOL=SER=SER005 MEM=/ASM -------------------------------
OPT MSG/RC TYP MEMBER VOLUME ------- DSNAME/PDS/TSO COMMAND or CLIST ------
D 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATA06'
ut *ML* D @:ABC MVSD4B 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATAPDS'
D MIGRAT 'SER07.PDS110.DOC'
*EXEC* P list pds99t1e /* this is a comment

--------------------- ut for WORKPAD user line commands --------------------

OPTION ===>
Choose one of the following for DSN type entries:
HDEL - HDEL command for data set 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATAPDS'
HMIG - HMIG command for data set 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATAPDS'

Dynamic Commands--note: < = MVSD4B,

/ = 'SER07.SMSTEST.DATAPDS'
LAST - TRP(DSAT / LAST) /* GET THE LAST REFERENCE DATE
LCLC - TRP(LISTC ENT(/) ALL)
ST__ - TRP(STARTOOL / USAGE) /* PROVIDE USAGE STATISTICS

XREF Subcommand
The XREF subcommand lists internal symbol cross references in a load module. It is
similar to the output produced by the XREF option of the linkage editor except that
references are provided by actual name used and sorted by name or by location.

410 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

Example
XREF mema:memb

Syntax
XREF memgroup [MODULE({* / Fullm / Partm*)} ]
[ENTRY(Entname) ]
[SHORT ]
[SORT/NOSORT ]
[NOSTACK ]

Aliases
XR, XRE, XREF

Defaults
memgroup, SORT

Required
none

Operands
memgroup Identifies the load members for which you want cross reference
information.
Default member names, member lists, member name ranges, and
member name patterns are allowed. For more information, see
Appendix A, "Formatting Member Names" on page 417.
MODULE A1- to 8-byte partial external name that limits CSECT and ENTRY
(name) names for XREF reporting.
The MODULE operand has several valid forms:
 MODULE(*) - uses the previous name entered on any MODULE
keyword
 MODULE(Fullm) - reports only on CSECT or ENTRY FULLM
 MODULE(Partm*) - reports only on CSECT or ENTRY PARTM...
ENTRY A 1- to 8-byte partial entry name used to limit XREF output similar to
(Entname) the MODULE keyword.
SHORT Displays only the callers of a CSECT or ENTRY point name.
SORT Output CSECT names in order of CSECT name.
NOSORT Output CSECT names in order of address or CSECT location.
NOSTACK Outputs a single data value on an output line for use with programs
that post-process XREF outputs.

Remarks

Command Reference 411

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

The XREF subcommand lists internal symbol cross references in a load module.

In the following example, the PDS441W message documents a missing weak external
reference. The missing CSECT (VTSOCMD) is referenced from PDSMAIN and PDSPCOMM.

Also, on the PDS168I message, the CSECT name and any ENTRY name referenced is
noted with a special syntax. In this example, PDSMAIN has at least one reference to
ENTRY PDS$CHA in CSECT PDSOPTIO. This information is represented by
PDSOPTIO<PDS$CHA> in the second line of the first PDS168I message.

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
--------------------------- ISPMODE Session Display ---------- ROW 563 OF 726
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=C911407.SAM.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR807 MEM=PDSE -----------------------------
>----->xref pdse nosort

** XREF PDSE
PDS441W PDS#SECI (Weak)
PDS441W VTSOCMD (Weak)
PDS166I PDS#SECI From: PDSMAIN
PDS166I VTSOCMD From: PDSMAIN, PDSPCOMM
PDS166I PDSMAIN From: PDSSTAEX, PDSAPPL, PDSOPTIO, PDSIDSPY, PDSPCOMM
PDS168I PDSMAIN To: PDS#SECI, VTSOCMD, PDSPDSIN, PDSATTNX, PDSSTAEX, PDSPARSE,
PDSIDSPY, PDSALLOC, PDSEXCP, PDSCLEAR, PDSPCOMM, PDSOPTIO<PDS$CHA>,
PDSDSNAM, PDSEXEC, PDSOPTIO<PDS$TBL>, PDSOPTIO, PDSDISPL,
PDSLIST<PDSREPLA>, PDSLIST<PDSLISTX>, PDSMSGS
PDS166I PDSPDSIN From: PDSMAIN
PDS166I PDSATTNX From: PDSMAIN
PDS166I PDSSTAEX From: PDSMAIN, PDSPCOMM, PDSIDSPY
PDS168I PDSSTAEX To: PDSMAIN, PDSALIAS, PDSPARSE, PDSIDSPY
PDS166I PDSALLOC From: PDSMAIN, PDSPCOMM

------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 1 Log# 1 ---- ROW 45 TO 64 OF 368

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Enter an ISPF command, a StarTool subcommand or a special control code:
- DSN=WSER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=STR98A MEM=PDSE420 --------------------------
>----->xref pdsexref
** XREF PDSEXREF
PDS540W CSECT ALIASES is not referenced
PDS540W CSECT COMPARED is not referenced
PDS166I PDS#DFLS From: PDSCONTR
PDS166I PDS#OPT4 From: PDSPDSIN
PDS166I PDS#SECI From: PDSCONTR, PDSPDSIN
PDS166I PDSALIAS From: PDSOPTIO, PDSSTAEX
PDS166I PDSALLOC From: PDSCOMPR, PDSFIXPD, PDSMAIN
PDS166I PDSATTRI From: PDSOPTIO
PDS166I PDSBROWS From: PDSOPTIO
PDS166I PDSCALCT From: PDSIDSPY, PDSSPACE
PDS166I PDSCHANG From: PDSFIXPD, PDSOPTIO, PDSPCOMM
PDS166I PDSCLEAR From: PDSMAIN, PDSRESTO

412 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

ZAP Function
The ZAP command modifies load modules. Make these modifications by typing over
hexadecimal or character data. ZAP is a line command supported by the CSECTS
command.

Example
zap

Syntax
zap

Aliases
z, za, zap

Defaults
none

Required
none

Operands
none

Remarks
The CSECTS ISPF table displays in response to a CSECTS command. The ZAP line
command invokes the ZAP command processor for a given CSECT in a load module. When
you are in a ZAP display you can delete a part of the table, find data in the table, print a
part of the table, or store a part of the table in a data set. For help with the different
options available, use the HELP command, CUA functions, or enter an O command as a
primary command or as a line command.

To make modifications to the ZAP table, type over the character or hexadecimal data.
After you make all changes to a CSECT, enter ZAP as a primary command to update your
on disk. Each ZAP data line has the following fields:

CMD Command. This is where line commands are entered.

MODULE- Module address. This is the offset in the current module.
ADDR
BASE-OFFSET Base offset. This is the offset in the current CSECT.
MSG Message field. This is where status messages display.

Command Reference 413

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

HEX-DATA Hexadecimal data. This is 1 to 4 columns of hexadecimal data.

CHARACTER Character data. This is 1 to 16 characters of corresponding
character data with a delimiting asterisk at either end.

The following primary commands are supported for the ZAP function. For information on
ISPMODE commands available in StarTool FDM, see “Common Commands” in Appendix 2,
"ISPF Interface Commands".

APP[LY] Applies the specified line command to all table entries and executes
each entry.
Syntax APPLY linecmd

BA[SE] Resets the base address for this CSECT (like an AMASPZAP BASE
statement).
Syntax BASE hexaddress

(1 to 6 hexadecimal digits)
BU[ILD] Outputs AMASPZAP format output without changing the data set.
AMASPZAP backout controls are also formatted as comments.
EDITT[BL] Enters an edit session on ZAP table data.
(or ET[BL])
EXPR[ESS] Executes all entered line commands without pauses between
individual commands.
F Finds a string and positions the display start location.
Syntax
F hexstring/'anystring' [ASIS/CHAR]
[FIRST/LAST/PREV] [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD]
[HALFWORD/FULLWORD]

IDR[DATA] Supplies the IDRDATA for the current ZAP.

Syntax IDRDATA idrname

L[OCATE] Positions to the address specified.

Syntax LOCATE address [BASE/ADDRESS/CSECT]

NOZ[AP] Exits the ZAP function without changing any additional data on disk.
OFF[SET] Resets the beginning offset for CSECT displays. Lower offsets are not
displayed.
Syntax OFFSET hexaddress

(1 to 6 hexadecimal digits)
O[PTIONS] Provides primary command selection for the ZAP function and
operand syntax assistance.
OUT[PUT] Outputs the ZAP table to print or a data set.
Syntax OUTPUT [=c / F(ddname)]

REM[OVE] Trims the ZAP table based on a string match.

Syntax
REMOVE anystring [PREFIX/SUFFIX/WORD] [NOT]
[HALFWORD/FULLWORD]

414 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

RF[IND] Finds a string (repeat find) and positions the display start location. PF
keys 5 and 17 are normally set to RFIND.
TAG Applies the specified line command to table entries marked with
*TAG* in the DATA/MSG field and executes each entry.
Syntax TAG linecmd

UT Selects the extended user command panel. Commands are

maintained in these panels by the StarTool FDM developers as well as
your installation. The ZAP UT panel (actually the same panel as the
log) allows dynamic primary commands with which you specify
command names and their corresponding actions.
X Clears the ZAP table relative to the cursor position.
Syntax X [ABOVE/BELOW/ALL]

XA[LL] Clears the ZAP table; this is equivalent to X ALL.

ZAP Updates data lines in *CHA (changed) status on disk permanently.

The following line commands are supported in the ZAP function:

= Repeats the previous line command.

*cm ERR- t=”Line command,=”>

DIS Disassembles a few lines starting at the current offset. Follow DI or DIS by
an even number in the range of 2 through 14 to designate at what decimal
offset the disassembly is to begin. For example, DI10.
K Kills and clears all following line commands.
LOG Copies the line into the log.
M Provides line command selection and entry assistance.
O Provides line command selection and operand syntax assistance.
TAG Marks this table entry with *TAG* in the DATA/MSG field.
UNDO Changes this data back to its original value. This does not restore data from
before a ZAP primary command.
X Drops the table line.

Block line commands are doubled letters that delimit a range of table entries for which the
same action is to be performed. The following block line commands are supported in the
ZAP function:

== = command. Repeats the previous line command for the range of lines.
LL LOG command. Copies the range of lines into the log.
OO O command. Provides line command assistance for each line.
XX X command. Drops the range of table lines.

Command Reference 415

Chapter 9 Commands — V to Z

FUNCTIONS CONTROL LINE CMDS DEFAULTS FEATURES

--------------------- ZAP Display for DSAT-DSAT ROW 78 TO 100 OF 458
COMMAND ===> build SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER007 MEM=DSA* ------------------------------
BASE = 000000 ADDRESS OFFSET = 000000
CMD MODULE BASE MSG ---------- HEX DATA --------------- -- CHARACTER --
ADDR OFFSET 0...2... 4...6... 8...A... C...E... 0...4...8...C...
0004D0 0004D0 *CHA B7CA4100 000A4780 C23249F0 C60C4770 *........B..0F...*
0004E0 0004E0 *CHA B512D507 D472C57C 4770B7CA D507D484 *[email protected]*
0004F0 0004F0 C5804770 B7CA5810 D214D21F 1000C9D8 *E.......K.K...IQ*
000500 000500 5820D210 D22B2000 D2354520 C48047F0 *..K.K...K...D..0*
000510 000510 BC7C49F0 C60A4100 00144770 C3B6D401 *[email protected].*
000520 000520 904A904A 4100001E 4770C3B6 9610D22C *.`.`......C.o.K.*
000530 000530 D205D579 D5735810 D5B05010 D5845010 *K.N`N...N.&.Nd&.*
000540 000540 D1B44121 000A5021 0000D2FD 2000D472 *J.....&...K...M.*
000550 000550 4140D235 41440001 95404000 4770B554 *. K.....n .....*
000560 000560 5040D588 47F0B5A0 41440001 95404000 *& Nh.0......n .*

FUNCTIONS CONTROL DSN CMDS MEM CMDS A-M MEM CMDS N-Z DEFAULTS FEATURES
-------------------------- ISPMODE Session# 2 Log ROW 1,008 TO 1,015 OF 1,015
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
- DSN=SER07.LINK.LOAD,VOL=SER=SER007 MEM=DSA* ------------------------------
NAME DSAT DSAT NAME DSAT DSAT
VER 0004D4 000A47F0 VER 0004D4 000A4780
REP 0004D4 000A4780 REP 0004D4 000A47F0
VER 0004D8 C3B649F0 VER 0004D8 C23249F0
REP 0004D8 C23249F0 REP 0004D8 C3B649F0
VER 0004E4 D472C578 VER 0004E4 D472C57C
REP 0004E4 D472C57C REP 0004E4 D472C578
IDRDATA BUILDTST IDRDATA BUILDTST
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************

416 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Appendix A
Formatting Member Names

StarTool FDM allows many different member name forms. Type member names in
character or hexadecimal mode for any subcommand that processes member names.

Character member names can be from 1 to 8 bytes long with no imbedded blanks,
commas, parentheses, colons, slashes, asterisks, question marks, or percent symbols.

Hexadecimal member names can contain from 1 to 16 hexadecimal digits delimited by x'
and '. X'd7c4e2c5'. PDSE are entirely equivalent; also, x'333' and x'0333' are equivalent.

Subcommands ABE, ACFCOMP, BROWSE, COMBINE, COMPDIR, COPY, DCF, DELETE,

DELINK, DIRENTRY, DISASM, DUP, EDIT, EXCLUDE, FIND, FSE, HISTORY, IF, LIST, LLA,
MAP, MEMBERS, MEMLIST, OUTCOPY, PGMDOC, PRINT, READOBJ, REPLACE, REPRO,
REVIEW, SMPGEN, SPFEDIT, SUBLIST, SUBMIT, TSOEDIT, TSOLIST, VERIFY, VPRINT, and
XREF allow additional member name specifications.

A member name range, member name pattern, or member name combination form what
is termed a member group. A simple member name, a pattern, or a combination name
can contain ? or % characters as placeholders. You can also use a member list (that is, a
parenthesized list containing member and member group specifications separated by
commas).

When a member group is being processed, the subcommand processing routine is re-
executed for each member in the group. Specifically, note the following:

Default member If no member name is specified, the last member name or

name member group entered for any of the above subcommands is
assumed.
Asterisk If you enter * in the member name position, the last member
member name name or member group entered for any of the above
subcommands is assumed.
Equal member If = is entered in the member name position, the list of members
name in the current MEMLIST table is assumed. If no MEMLIST table is
active, the current member group is assumed (as for *).
Member name Any of these subcommands can select all members in a range by
range specifying a beginning partial member name, a colon, and a
ending partial member name (either or both of the partial
names may be null).
Logic from the DISPLAY subcommand selects members. The
subcommand processes these selected members in alphabetic
order. The following specifications select the same member
names:
subcommand : and DISPLAY
subcommand part1: and DISPLAY part1
subcommand :part2 and DISPLAY x'00' part2
subcommand prt1:prt2 and DISPLAY prt1 prt2

Command Reference 417

Appendix A Formatting Member Names

Member name Any of these subcommands can select all members whose names
pattern contain pattern characters by specifying a member name
segment, a slash, and another member name segment (either,
but not both, of the member name segments can be null).
Logic from the PATTERN subcommand selects members. The
subcommand processes these selected members in alphabetic
order. The following specifications select the same member
names:
subcommand seg1/ and PATTERN seg1
subcommand /seg2 and PATTERN seg2
subcommand seg1/seg2 and PATTERN seg1 seg2

Member name Any of these subcommands can select all members whose names
combination contain a range of characters and a pattern of characters by
specifying a member name segment, an asterisk and another
member name segment (either, but not both, of the member
name segments may be null).
Logic from DISPLAY and PATTERN subcommand selects members.
The subcommand processes these selected members in
alphabetic order. The following specifications select the same
member names:
subcommand seg1* and DISPLAY seg1 seg1
subcommand *seg2 and PATTERN seg2
subcommand seg1*seg2 and DISPLAY seg1 seg1 --with-- PATTERN
seg2

Member name A simple member name, a member name pattern or a member

placeholder name combination can contain a ? or % character as a wild card
character in any position.
Logic from DISPLAY and PATTERN subcommand selects members.
The subcommand processes these selected members in
alphabetic order. The following specifications select the same
member names:
subcommand ab? and DISPLAY x'c1c20040' x'c1c2ff40'
subcommand ab?* and DISPLAY x'c1c200' x'c1c2ff'
subcommand *a?c and PATTERN a?c
subcommand /a%c and PATTERN a%c
subcommand a%c/xx and PATTERN a%c xx

418 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Appendix A Formatting Member Names

Member group The following examples each define and display a member group:
examples SUBCOMMAND MEMBERS IN THE GROUP
---------- --------------------
MEMBERS aa AA
MEMBERS (aa,bb) AA and BB
MEMBERS (aa,bb/) AA and members whose names contain BB
MEMBERS * current member group
MEMBERS current member group
MEMBERS = members in the current MEMLIST

MEMBERS : all members -- X'00' through X'FF'

MEMBERS aa: members from AA... through X'FF'
MEMBERS :bb members from X'00' through BB...
MEMBERS aa:bb members between AA... and BB...
MEMBERS (abc,d:) member ABC and those from D... through
X'FF'

MEMBERS aa/ members whose names contain AA anywhere

MEMBERS /bb members whose names contain BB anywhere
MEMBERS aa/bb members whose names contain AA and BB
MEMBERS (aa/,bb/) members whose names contain AA or BB

MEMBERS aa* members with names AA...

MEMBERS *bb members whose names contain BB anywhere
MEMBERS aa*bb members with names AA... and BB elsewhere
MEMBERS (aa*,bb/) members with names AA... or with BB
anywhere

MEMBERS aa? members with names AA. (three characters

long)
MEMBERS b?b members with names B.B (three characters
long)
MEMBERS %a*b?d members with names .A and B.D after that
MEMBERS ?a/b%d members with names .A and B.D in the name
MEMBERS (aa?,?b/) members with names AA. or with .B anywhere

Member name Subcommands MEMBERS, PATTERN, and DISPLAY allow the

displays display of member groups using the above member group
syntax; these subcommands differ as follows:
 DISPLAY – cannot modify the current member group. If no member
specification is entered, the entire member directory displays.
Member list notation cannot be used
 PATTERN – cannot modify the current member group. If no
member specification is entered, the member group last entered on
a PATTERN subcommand displays. Member list notation cannot be
used
 MEMBERS – can modify the current member group. If no member
specification is entered, the current member group displays.
MEMBERS is one of the subcommands that define a member group.
Member list notation can be used
Member name StarTool FDM supports asterisks (*) in member name matching in
matching the same manner as ISPF performs this function. StarTool FDM
also supports underscores (_) in member name matching.
 MEMBER a*test matches ATEST and A234TEST, but not ATESTX or
ATESXT.
 MEMBER a_test matches ATEST, A234TEST, and ATESTX, but not
TESTA or ATESXT.

Command Reference 419

Appendix A Formatting Member Names

420 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Appendix B
Update Protection

Several StarTool FDM subcommands can modify data sets when they are allocated as
shared.

If the data set is allocated as OLD, the STOW DCB is left open after the first data set
update. For OLD allocations, exclusive use of the data set is assured and the following
RESERVE logic does not apply.

If the data set is allocated as SHR (SHR was specifically requested or SHR was defaulted
to), StarTool FDM subcommands that update the data set such as ALIAS, (with attributes
to be changed), COMBINE, COPY, DUP, DELETE, FIXPDS, RENAME, REPRO, RESTORE,
SEPARATE, or VERIFY (for update member PDS tests) could cause data set integrity
problems if the data set is also being updated by another user.

To circumvent this problem, StarTool FDM uses the following ISPF RESERVE logic to
maintain data set integrity during data set updates.

1 Perform a RESERVE (SPFEDIT,DSNAME,E,44,SYSTEMS),UCB=ADDRESS.

2 If the data set is a load library, then a linkage editor RESERVE or ENQUE is performed
as appropriate:
 On a shared DASD volume,
RESERVE (SYSIEWLP,DSNAME,E,44,SYSTEMS),UCB=ADDRESS
 On a non-shared DASD volume,
ENQ (SYSIEWLP,DSNAME,E,44,SYSTEM)

3 The data set STOW DCB opens.

4 All data set updates are performed.

 Wherever possible, the STOW DCB is left open while an entire member group is being
processed
 For executions of StarTool FDM in batch mode, the volume reserve is maintained and
the STOW DCB is left open following the first update to the data set

5 The data set STOW DCB closes.

6 DEQs remove the RESERVEs and ENQs*cm.

Command Reference 421

Appendix B Update Protection

422 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Appendix C
Dialog Errors

StarTool FDM displays a special panel when it encounters an ISPF dialog error. This panel
formats an error message, highlights important registers, and presents recovery options.

--------------------------------- Dialog Error -------------------------------

OPTION ===>
ISPP100 PANEL 'PDSXXZXX' ERROR
PANEL NOT FOUND.
Registers:
R0 : 0000000C R1 : 000E8748 *R2 : 9005ADAA R3 : 5005459E
*R4 : 0005AD82 R5 : 00053E10 *R6 : 00163738 R7 : 00088000
*R8 : 00052E10 R9 : 00010000 R10: 00011000 R11: 00012000
R12: 0003DF88 R13: 00164738 R14: 4005ADF8 *R15: 0000000C
Service name ==> DISPLAY (this may not be padded with blanks)
First operand ==> PDSXXZXX
Options: ENTER - Continue if possible
END - Terminate (for some errors, several END's may be required)
AB - ABEND and attempt to clean up
LO - Display log table
HELP - Provide more information

TUTORIAL ------------------------- Dialog Error Help -----------------------

OPTION ===>
-------------------------------------
| Dialog Error |
-------------------------------------
StarTool has encountered an unexpected error in its dialog processing.
This type of error causes the Dialog Error panel to be displayed to document
the error and possible recovery options. When you get this type of error,
you should capture the error panel image with a PRINT command.
Normally, this type of error indicates a StarTool problem; you should report
this error to SERENA StarTool support. Call SERENA at (650) 696-1800.
The Dialog Error panel is formatted as follows:
Error message: Message identifier followed by short and long descriptions.
Error registers: Important registers are hilited as follows:
*R2 - Return address for caller of lowest level routine
*R4 - Base for lowest level routine
*R6 - Base for dialog work area
*R8 - Main base for dialog
*R15 - Return code of the failing service
Service name: This is the name of the ISPF service that failed.
First Parameter: This parameter was passed on the ISPF service call.
Options: This identifies different options for dealing with the error.
ENTER - Continue if possible; in most cases, the error can be ignored.
END - Terminate StarTool; this is the equivalent of a QUIT subcommand.
AB - ABEND; current processing will be suspending to go to line mode.
LO - Display log table; this option ignores any current processing.

Command Reference 423

Appendix C Dialog Errors

424 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Appendix D
Attention Processing

When StarTool FDM is executed as an ISPF dialog, attentions are not required since an
output loop is detected by the checkpoint processing of ISPMODE. If StarTool FDM or a
supporting TSO command is in a CPU loop (with no output), you need to interrupt the
process with an attention key or it continues indefinitely.

In general, an attention (the PA1 key) terminates the current StarTool FDM subcommand.
Two attentions in a row terminate the STARTOOL command. StarTool FDM performs
attention processing as follows:

1 A single (double for TSOEDIT) attention terminates any member group in progress
(except for the FSE subcommand).

2 An attention at a prompt for a data set terminates StarTool FDM.

3 An attention at the normal PDS300A ENTER OPTION subcommand prompt provides

another ENTER OPTION prompt; another attention at this point terminates StarTool
FDM.

4 For subcommands BROWSE, EDIT, ISPF, ISPMODE, or MEMLIST, no ENTER OPTION

prompt is provided by the StarTool FDM attention handling:
 A single attention terminates any member group in progress
 An attention during a edit or browse line command from MEMLIST terminates any
remaining line commands
 Any additional attentions are ignored by StarTool FDM
 For TSO commands invoked by ISPF with no attention handling, the first attention is
noted by StarTool FDM and terminates any member group in progress; subsequent
attentions apply only to the TSO command

5 For the COMPRESS or COPY subcommands, attentions are ignored until the attached
program terminates to protect the integrity of the target data set.

NOTE If you use IKJEFTSR authorize IEBCOPY for the compress or copy, attention
interrupts cannot be deferred; thus, do not use the attention key during a compress or
copy (a successful attention can destroy the data set).

6 For other StarTool FDM subcommands, a single (double for TSOEDIT) attention results
in a PDS300A ENTER OPTION prompt. The processing action taken at this point
depends on what is entered next:
 Another attention terminates the StarTool FDM command
 A null line causes the interrupted subcommand to continue at the point of
interruption. Any messages awaiting output at the time of the interrupt have already
been discarded.
 If you enter a subcommand and the currently executing subcommand is external to
StarTool FDM (ABE, ACFCOMP, COMPARE, DCF, EXEC, FSE, HELP, PRINT, REVIEW,

Command Reference 425

Appendix D Attention Processing

SUBMIT, TSO xxx, TSOEDIT, TSOLIST or VPRINT), the subcommand processor forcibly
detaches and the ABEND message is suppressed
 Give an entered subcommand control without delay

7 If an internal StarTool FDM subcommand is in a loop that does not involve input or
output to the terminal or input from the current data set, a single attention does not
terminate the loop:
 The first attention provides the normal PDS300A ENTER OPTION prompt.
 If you enter a subcommand at this time, StarTool FDM continues looping.
 Another attention produces the message “PDS470W The program is probably in a
loop” and StarTool FDM performs the subcommand entered at the ENTER OPTION
prompt.

426 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Appendix E
ABEND Processing

IF an ABEND in a StarTool FDM module, the StarTool ABEND panel displays:

-------------------------------- StarTool ABEND ------------------------------

OPTION ===>
PDS999E ABEND S0C1 U0000 AT +005F3E IN PROGRAM PDSPARSE
Offset of error: 00036CA6
Address of next instruction: 00046CA6
Registers:
R0 : 00000000 R1 : 00000003 R2 : 00000000 R3 : 000007AB
R4 : 00178000 R5 : 00000000 R6 : 00022230 *R7 : 00088000
*R8 : 00021230 *R9 : 00010000 R10: 00011000 R11: 0001200
R12: 0003DF88 R13: 0008933C R14: 40021C68 R15: 00046C9C
Press HELP for more information

Press the HELP key (PF1) to bring up the ABEND Help panel.

TUTORIAL ------------------------ StarTool ABEND Help ----------------------

OPTION ===>
-------------------------------------
| StarTool ABEND |
-------------------------------------
StarTool has ABENDED as indicated on the previous panel.
When an ABEND is encountered, StarTool displays the ABEND panel to document
the error and display error registers. When you get this type of error, you
should capture the error panel image with a PRINT command.
Normally, this type of error indicates a StarTool problem; you should report
this error to SERENA StarTool support. Call SERENA at (650) 696-1800.

The StarTool ABEND panel is formatted as follows:

Error message: PDS999E ABEND Sxxx Unnnn AT +hxval IN PROGRAM progm
Sxxx - the system ABEND code
Unnnn - the user ABEND code
hxval - if signed, an offset from the routine entry point; otherwise,
the address of the abending instruction.
progm - the name of the abending program if available.
Offset to error: This is the displacement from the start of the program to
the instruction that failed. This offset could be used to disassemble
the instructions at an error as in the following example:
DISASM STARTOOL OFFSET(1214C)
Address of next instruction: This is the storage address of the
instruction just after the instruction that failed.
Error registers: Important registers are hilited as follows:
*R7 - Base for the main work area
*R8 - Base for the current subroutine
*R9 - Main base for StarTool

Command Reference 427

Appendix E ABEND Processing

StarTool FDM always attempts to recover from ABENDs with its ESTAE and ESTAI recovery
routines unless CONTROL NORECOVER is in effect. StarTool FDM performs ABEND
processing as follows:

1 The StarTool FDM program uses different recovery methods depending on the
subcommand being executed. The method used performs any cleanup and
reinitialization functions required to restart StarTool FDM.
 For internal StarTool FDM subcommands, recovery is performed by writing an error
message and terminating the subcommand
 For the external subcommands BROWSE, EDIT, or ISPF, no ESTAE recovery is
attempted; normal ISPF processing is permitted
 For the other external StarTool FDM subcommands (ABE, COMPARE, COMPRESS,
COPY, DCF, EXEC, FSE, HELP, PRINT, REVIEW, SUBMIT, TSO xxx, TSOEDIT, TSOLIST,
and VPRINT), the subcommand processor is forcibly detached

2 If CONTROL NORECOVER is in effect, StarTool FDM terminates unless the

subcommand being used specifically tests for ABEND conditions (such as IF with
LOADERR or VERIFY with LOAD).

3 If CONTROL RECOVER is in effect, any ABEND dump probably is not very useful. If
you want to use TSO TEST after an ABEND, set CONTROL NORECOVER first.

4 Certain external programs reached with the TSO subcommand (such as CALL)
terminates StarTool FDM with a READY message if the program they invoke ABENDS.
If you enter a null line at this point, StarTool FDM regains control.

5 The PDS999E message identifies the name of the StarTool FDM assembly listing
involved in the error as follows:

PDSMAIN ABEND in the StarTool FDM mainline

PDS#SECI ABEND in the security interface
PDSALIAS ABEND in the subroutine assembly
PDSCBSX ABEND in the Copybook setup routine
PDSCPARS ABEND in the Copybook parse routine
PDSDECOD ABEND in the DISASM routine
PDSDELNK ABEND in the DELINK routine
PDSFCALC ABEND in the CALC routine
PDSFILE ABEND in the StarTool FDM execution interface
PDSFPARS ABEND in the StarTool FDM emulation parser
PDSIDCAM ABEND in the IDCAMS interface
PDSIDSPY ABEND in the ISPMODE dialog
PDSIPARS ABEND in the StarTool FDM parser
PDSPARSE ABEND in the PARSE interface
PDSSPACE ABEND in the service routines
PDSVTOCR ABEND in the VTOC read routine
VTSOCMD ABEND in the TSO command check

428 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Glossary

A
Alias member A member whose directory entry has an indicator value that indicates that the member
entry is an alternate name for a main member; a main member and its aliases are
associated with the same recorded data in a data set.

Apparent alias Data in a PDS that is pointed to by more than one main directory entry.
member

Associated Members with the same TTR address. For a main member, the associated members could
members be alias members or an apparent alias member; for an alias member, the associated
members could be other aliases or a main member.

B
Batch mode A mode of StarTool FDM operation. In batch mode, all user communication is performed
with PUTGET, GETLINE and PUTLINE TSO services. ISPF services are available. In this
mode of operation, StarTool FDM operates under control of the batch Terminal Monitor
Program (the TMP, or IKJEFT01).

BLDL A BPAM function that checks for the existence of members.

BPAM An acronym for Basic Partitioned Access Method; BPAM is actually very similar in use to
BSAM which is for sequential data. StarTool FDM often uses BPAM for member check
operations and always uses BPAM for directory updates and reading PDSE data sets.

BSAM An acronym for Basic Sequential Access Method; StarTool FDM uses BSAM for several
utility functions.

C
CCHHR An acronym for Cylinder, Cylinder, Head, Head, Record which is a 10-byte hexadecimal
disk address relative to the start of the volume.

Command A request for an operation. For example, STARTOOL is a command and FIXPDS is a
StarTool FDM subcommand.

Compress A process that removes deleted members from a PDS. Disk space formerly occupied by
these deleted members is made available for new members. In a PDSE data set, space
from deleted members is managed dynamically; you cannot compress a PDSE.

Command Reference 429

Glossary

D
Deleted Member data that is not pointed to by any directory entry; deleted members remain in a
member PDS until the data set is compressed. In a PDSE data set, space from deleted members is
managed dynamically; you cannot restore deleted members.

Directory A segment of a PDS that is a sequential data set with eight byte keys and 256 byte data
records containing pointers to data in the PDS member portion of the data set. For a
PDSE, PDS directory and member data is created in a virtual PDS data set.

Directory entry A logical entry in a PDS or PDSE directory that points to its associated data in the member
data; it consists of an eight character member name field and one or more three byte
relative address (TTR) fields.

DS1LSTAR A pointer in the data set control block (DSCB) that indicates the last used disk address for
a data set. This pointer is updated after a member is added to a PDS data set or after a
PDS is compressed.

E
EXCP An acronym for EXecute Channel Program. This access method is used extensively by
StarTool FDM to read an entire disk track with a single operation.

F
Function A request for an ISPF (or ISPMODE) operation. Most ISPMODE functions support their own
commands.

I
ISPMODE A mode of StarTool FDM operation. With ISPMODE, StarTool FDM operates as an ISPF
dialog and normal ISPF services (HELP, TSO, SPLIT, SWAP,...) as well as all StarTool FDM
services are available.

L
Line command A command entered on a table line in the CMD field. Line commands may be up to four
characters long.

Line mode A mode of StarTool FDM operation. In line mode, all user communication is performed
with PUTGET, GETLINE and PUTLINE TSO services. No ISPF services are available.

Load library A PDS or PDSE that has record format U and is commonly used to contain executable
modules.

430 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Glossary

M
Main member A non-alias directory entry and its associated recorded data.

Member Data in a PDS or PDSE that is pointed to by one or more directory entries. Members may
be alias or main members. Deleted members that have no associated directory entries.
For a PDSE, space from deleted members is managed dynamically; you cannot restore
deleted members or compress a PDSE.

Module A member contained in a load library. Also known as a load module or load member.

O
Orphan A member marked as an alias which does not have an associated main member.
member

P
PDS or A data set with fixed, variable or undefined format commonly used as a library for related
Partitioned types of information. Partitioned data sets contain two segments of data: a directory of
data set information and member data. This type of library is requested as DSNTYPE(PDS) in JCL
or a TSO ALLOCATE.

PDSE or An SMS managed data set logically similar to a PDS. This type of library is requested as
Partitioned DSNTYPE(LIBRARY) in JCL or on an ALLOCATE command. A PDSE can be accessed by
Data Set BPAM or BSAM access methods to obtain a virtual data set which looks like a PDS.
Extended

Primary A subcommand or command entered from the command line of a panel.

command

Q
QSAM An acronym for Queued Sequential Access Method; StarTool FDM uses QSAM for several
utility functions.

S
Source library A PDS or PDSE data set with fixed or variable format data; source libraries are used to
contain non-executable data.

StarTool FDM A multipurpose ISPF dialog and TSO command processor that manipulates data sets and
members individually or in groups.

Command Reference 431

Glossary

Subcommand A request for an operation that is within the scope of work requested by the previously
issued command. STARTOOL is a command; FIXPDS is a StarTool FDM subcommand.

T
TTR An acronym for Track, Track, Record (a 1- to 6-digit hexadecimal disk address relative to
the start of the data set); this type of address is stored in the member directory entry to
indicate the start of a member.

432 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

Index
Symbols block line commands 78
defined 53
= line commands 53 BROWSE subcommand 72
== block line commands 53

C
A
CALC function 74
ABE subcommand 53 CAX function 75
ACFCOMP subcommand 54 line commands 77
add secondary space 183 CAX table
alias members 59 catalog status 76
ALIAS subcommand 55 catalog type 76
asterisks CHANGE subcommand 78
in member name matching 419 checkpoint 267
attention processing 425 CLIST conversion 108, 141
ATTRIB subcommand 60 CMDTBL function 80
line commands 83
primary commands 82
B table entries 82
combination member name 32
binder names 65 COMBINE subcommand 85
BLK3380 subcommand 65 Command
BLK3390 subcommand 67 ? 39, 42
BLK9345 subcommand 69 ADD 42, 260, 405
Block line command ALIASCHK 39, 42, 287
AA 126, 237, 244, 254, 291, 409 ALL 39, 42, 287
BB 126, 237, 244, 254, 291, 409 ALLOCERR 39, 42
CC 84, 126, 237, 244, 254, 316, 386, 409 ALTCMD 39, 42
DD 84, 291, 316 ALTERNAT 39, 42, 123, 235, 240, 250, 260,
DDEL 244, 254, 291 268, 287, 326, 384, 405
EE 126, 237, 244, 254, 291, 409 APPLY 39, 42, 76, 82, 117, 123, 235, 240,
GG 126, 237, 244, 254, 386, 409 250, 260, 288, 295, 384, 405, 414
HH 291 BASE 43, 414
LL 78, 118, 126, 237, 244, 254, 262, 291, BATCHJCL 43, 123, 235, 268, 288
386, 409, 415 BLKSIZE 39, 43
MM 84, 126, 237, 244, 254, 291, 316, 386, BOUNDS 43, 312
409 BUILD 43, 414
OO 78, 118, 126, 237, 244, 254, 262, 291, CAN 39, 43, 268
296, 386, 409, 415 CANCEL 43, 313
PP 291 CAX 76
RR 84, 316, 409 CB 43, 313
SS 78, 119, 126, 237, 245, 254, 262, 291, CBMAP 43, 313
386, 409 CHANGE 43, 313
SSEE 126, 237, 245, 254, 409 CISIZE 39, 43
TT 291 CLOSE 43, 313
UU 126, 238, 245, 254, 409 COLS 43, 44, 268, 306
VV 291, 409 COMMENT 39, 44
XX 78, 84, 119, 126, 238, 245, 254, 262, COMPRESS 44, 123, 235, 240, 250, 405
291, 296, 386, 410, 415 CONTINUE 44, 268
ZZ 126, 238, 254, 410 COPYBOOK 44, 313

Command Reference 433

Index

CREATE 44, 313 NO 47, 269

CSECTS 117 NORMAL 40, 47, 124, 235, 241, 251, 260,
CUT 44, 313 269, 288, 326, 384, 406
DDNAME 123, 235 NOSAVE 47, 83, 241, 251, 406
DEFINE 39, 44 NOZAP 47, 414
DISPLAY 44, 313 OFFSET 47, 414
DROP 40, 44 OPTIONS 40, 47, 77, 83, 117, 242, 251, 260,
DUAL 40, 44, 123, 235, 240, 250, 260, 268, 269, 288, 295, 326, 385, 406, 414
288, 326, 384, 405 OUTPUT 40, 48, 75, 77, 83, 117, 124, 195,
Dynamic 271 235, 242, 251, 260, 269, 288, 296,
EDITLOG 40, 44, 268 314, 326, 385, 406, 414
EDITTBL 40, 44, 75, 76, 82, 117, 123, 195, PAD 48, 306, 314
235, 240, 250, 260, 268, 288, 295, PANEL 40, 48
326, 384, 405, 414 PASTE 48, 314
ELOG 40, 44, 268 PEND 40, 48, 365
END 44, 313 PREVIOUS 48, 315
EQUATE 40, 44, 288 PRIMER 40, 48
ERASE 45, 240, 250, 405 RC 41, 48
ETBL 40, 44, 75, 76, 82, 117, 123, 195, 235, RCHANGE 48, 269, 315
240, 250, 260, 268, 288, 295, 326, RECALL 41, 48
384, 405, 414 REFRESH 48, 242, 251, 260
EXPAND 40, 45 RELEASE 41, 48
EXPRESS 45, 76, 82, 117, 123, 235, 240, REMOVE 48, 75, 77, 83, 117, 124, 196, 236,
250, 260, 288, 295, 405, 414 242, 251, 260, 288, 296, 326, 385,
F 45, 75, 77, 82, 117, 124, 195, 235, 241, 406, 414
250, 260, 268, 288, 295, 326, 384, REPLACE 49, 124, 236, 242, 251, 315, 407
405, 414 RESET 49, 124, 236, 242, 251, 315, 407
FIND 45, 124, 235, 241, 250, 306, 314, 406 RFIND 41, 49, 75, 77, 83, 117, 124, 196,
GLOBAL 45, 124, 235, 241, 250, 406 236, 242, 251, 260, 269, 288, 296,
GROUP 40, 45 306, 315, 326, 385, 407, 415
HEX 45, 306, 314 RIGHT 41, 49, 124, 236, 242, 251, 260, 269,
HIDE 45, 314 288, 326, 385, 407
ID 46, 241, 250, 406 SAMPLE 49, 407
IDRDATA 46, 414 SAVE 49, 83, 242, 252, 289, 407
INDEX 40, 46 SCREEN 49, 315
INSERT 46, 83, 406 SEEK 49, 124, 236, 242, 252, 407
KEY 46, 314 SELECT 50, 289
LASTCMDS 40, 46 SET 41, 50
LEFT 40, 46, 124, 235, 241, 250, 260, 268, SETALL 41, 50
288, 326, 384, 406 SETALT 41, 50
LISTA 124, 235 SETCOLOR 41, 50
LISTC 241, 250 SETDSN 41, 50
LISTF 241, 251 SETKEYS 41, 50
LISTV 260 SETPANEL 41, 50
LISTVTOC 46, 260 SETSEEK 41, 50
LOAD 46, 241, 251, 406 SETSEL 41, 50
LOCATE 46, 77, 117, 241, 251, 260, 288, SETUSER 41, 50
295, 306, 314, 326, 384, 414 SHOW 50
MCOPY 40, 46 SORT 50, 77, 117, 242, 252, 261, 289, 296,
MENU 40, 47 315, 326, 385
MERGE 47, 241, 251, 288, 406 SPACE 50, 261
MINE 47 STATS 50, 261
MODE 47, 406 SUSPEND 41, 50
MODEL 40, 47, 124, 235, 241, 251, 406 TAG 41, 51, 77, 83, 118, 125, 236, 242, 252,
MONTH 47, 288 261, 289, 296, 407, 415
NEXT 47, 314 TODAY 41, 51, 289

434 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Index

TRANS 41, 51 E
TRAP 41, 51
User 271 EDIT subcommand 150
UT 41, 51, 77, 118, 125, 236, 242, 252, 261, EDREC subcommand 153
269, 271, 289, 296, 407, 415 ENCODE subcommand 154
VERTICAL 51, 316 END subcommand 155
WEEK 41, 51, 289 equal symbol 32
WHOHAS 51, 242, 252, 407 EXCLUDE subcommand 156
X 42, 51, 75, 77, 83, 118, 125, 196, 236, EXEC subcommand 162
243, 252, 261, 269, 289, 296, 326, extended copybook mode 312
385, 407, 415 line commands 312
XALL 42, 51, 75, 77, 83, 118, 125, 196, 236, extended copybooks
243, 252, 261, 269, 289, 296, 326, using 312
385, 407, 415
XCOPY 42, 51
XMIT 42, 51 F
YES 52, 269
ZAP 52, 415 FILTER function 165
commands 42 FIND subcommand 167
block line commands 53 abbreviations 167
defined 53 aliases 167
line commands 53 defaults 167
COMPARE subcommand 88 keywords 176
COMPDIR subcommand 89 operands 169
COMPRESS subcommand 93 remarks 175
CONDEND subcommand 95 syntax 167
CONTROL subcommand 97 FINDMOD subcommand 178
COPY subcommand 104 FIXPDS BLKSIZE and device table 185
copybook mode 312 FIXPDS subcommand 180
extended 312 FSE subcommand 189
normal 312 Function
vertical 312 CALC 74
CREATE subcommand 112 CAX 75
CSECTS function 115 CMDTBL 80
block line commands 118 CSECTS 115
line commands 118 DDNAME 122
primary commands 117 FILTER 165
GO 192
HEX 195
D ISPMODE 221
ISPXEQ 222
DCF subcommand 121 LISTA 232
DDNAME function 122 LISTC 239
DECODE subcommand 127 LISTF 248
default member names 31 LISTV 258
DELETE subcommand 128 MASK 276
deleted member 128, 266, 290, 347 MEMLIST 279
DELINK subcommand 130 NUCMAP 294
DFHSM 243, 252, 326, 385, 407 PBROWSE 303
DIRENTRY subcommand 131 PEDIT 307
DISASM subcommand 132 PROFMAN 325
DSAT subcommand 136 PVIEW 321
DSNAME subcommand 140 STATUS 364
DUP subcommand 141 VIEW 266
DVOL subcommand 148 VMAP 383
Dynamic command 271 WORKPAD 403

Command Reference 435

Index

ZAP 413 AUNC 243, 252

functions 53 B 83, 125, 236, 243, 252, 316, 408
also known as function commands 53 BASE 118
defined 53 BR 408
functions table 32 C 83, 125, 236, 243, 252, 316, 385, 408
CAT 243, 252
CH 408
G COLS 316
COMB 408
Global command COPY 125, 236, 243, 252, 408
COMPRESS 44, 123, 235, 240, 250, 405 CSEC 289
FIND 45, 124, 235, 241, 250, 406 DCAT 125, 236
GLOBAL 45, 124, 235, 241, 250, 406 DEC 289
MODEL 47, 124, 235, 241, 251, 406 DEL 83, 243, 252
REFRESH 48, 242, 251 DELI 118
REPLACE 49, 124, 236, 242, 251, 407 DIRF 261, 385
SEEK 49, 124, 236, 242, 252, 407 DIS 118, 415
WHOHAS 51, 242, 252, 407 DUP 125, 236, 243, 252, 408
Global commands 42 E 125, 237, 243, 252
GO function 192 ED 408
ENC 289
EXEC 408
H F 118
FIND 408
HELP subcommand 194 FIX 408
HEX function 195 FREE 125, 237
hexadecimal member names 31 GO 125, 237, 243, 252, 385, 408
HISTORY subcommand 196 H 118
HSM 243, 252, 326, 385, 407 HBAC 243, 252, 408
HBDE 243, 253, 408
HDEL 243, 253, 408
I HIST 408
HMIG 243, 253, 408
IBM component codes 65
HML2 243, 253, 408
IDCAMS subcommand 208
HREC 243, 253, 408
IF subcommand 211
HSM 243, 253
input buffering 98
I 83, 316
ISPF subcommand 221
IDC 77, 125, 237, 243, 253, 385
ISPMODE function 221
IF 408
ISPXEQ function 222
IN 408
INDX 261, 385
INFO 243, 253, 289, 385
K K 77, 83, 118, 125, 237, 243, 253, 261, 289,
keyword operand abbreviations 32 291, 296, 326, 385, 408, 415
L 118
LC 125, 237, 243, 253, 385, 408
L LF 261
LFEX 261
Line command LIST 261
? 312, 316 LOG 77, 83, 118, 125, 237, 243, 253, 261,
6 125, 236, 243, 252, 407 290, 291, 296, 327, 385, 408, 415
A 83, 125, 236, 243, 252, 316, 407 M 77, 83, 118, 125, 237, 243, 253, 261, 290,
ACAT 243, 252 291, 316, 385, 408, 415
ADD 261 MAP 408
ALT 408 ME 408
ATTR 289 MERG 327

436 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Index

ML 125, 237, 243, 253, 290, 385, 408 block line commands 126, 237
MOD 125, 237, 244, 253, 386, 408 line commands 125, 236
O 77, 118, 125, 237, 244, 253, 261, 290, primary cmmands 235
291, 296, 327, 386, 408, 415 primary commands 123
PAN 290 LISTC function
PBRO 408 block line commands 244
PBROWSE 244, 253 line commands 243
PEDI 408 primary commands 240
PEDIT 244, 253 LISTF function 248
PVIE 408 block line commands 254
R 83, 118, 316, 409 line commands 252
RACF 244, 253 primary commands 250
REFR 244, 253, 261 LISTGRP subcommand 257
REN 244, 253 LISTV function 258
REPL 409 block line commands 262
REST 291, 386 line commands 261
RJCL 386 primary commands 260
S 77, 118, 125, 237, 244, 253, 261, 290, LKED value
327, 386, 409 in message PDS046I 65
SEEK 125, 237, 244, 253, 409 LLA subcommand 264
SEPA 409
SETA 125, 237, 244, 253, 409
SMPG 409 M
SPAC 261
STAT 261 MAP subcommand 272
SUBL 409 MASK function 276
SWAP 290 matches
TAG 77, 83, 118, 125, 237, 244, 253, 261, character string 32
290, 296, 409, 415 key 72, 109
U 125, 237, 244, 253 string 75, 77, 83, 117
UNC 244, 253, 386 matching
UNDO 415 keys 73
UP 409 Maxspace 183
US 409 member group
UT 78, 118, 126, 237, 244, 253, 261, 290, defined 417
386, 409 member groups 31
VERI 409 member name list 32
VIEW 409 member name matching 419
VMAP 261 member name range 32
VSAM 244, 253 member names
VTOC 262 default 31
VUSE 262 hexadecimal 31
W 126, 237, 244, 253, 290, 386 members
WHO 126, 237, 244, 253, 386, 409 alias 59
X 78, 84, 118, 126, 237, 244, 253, 262, 290, MEMBERS subcommand 278
291, 296, 327, 386, 409, 415 MEMLIST function 279
XCOP 126, 237, 244, 253 modify load attributes 60
XMIT 244, 253, 290 modify source attributes 57
Z 126, 237, 244, 253, 386, 409
ZAP 118
line commands N
defined 53
linkage editor 65 NUCMAP function 294
LIST subcommand 225
LISTA function 232
LISTA/DDNAME function

Command Reference 437

Index

O LISTF function 249

LISTV function 259
Operands LLA subcommand 265
CHANGE subcommand 79 LOG function 267
operands MAP subcommand 272
ABE subcommand 54 MASK function 277
ACFCOMP subcommand 55 MEMBERS subcommand 279
ALIAS subcommand 56 MEMLIST function 281
ATTRIB subcommand (load members) 61 MEMLIST memg 30
ATTRIB subcommand (source members) 58 OUTCOPY subcommand 300
BLK3380 subcommand 66 PATTERN subcommand 303
BLK3390 subcommand 68 PBROWSE function 304
BLK9345 subcommand 70 PEDIT function 308
BROWSE subcommand 72 PGMDOC subcommand 323
CHANGE 79 PRINT subcommand 324
CMDTBL function 81 READOBJ subcommand 330
COMBINE subcommand 85 RECALL subcommand 331
COMPARE subcommand 88 RENAME subcommand 332
COMPDIR subcommand 90 REPLACE subcommand 335
COMPRESS subcommand 94 REPRO subcommand 346
CONDEND subcommand 96 RESTORE subcommand 348
CONTROL subcommand 97 REVIEW subcommand 352
COPY subcommand 105 SEPARATE subcommand 353
CREATE subcommand 113 SMPGEN subcommand 357
DCF subcommand 122 StarTool 29
DCODE subcommand 128 subcommand 30
DDNAME function 122 SUBLIST subcommand 362
DELETE subcommand 129 SUBMIT subcommand 364
DIRENTRY subcommand 131 SUP subcommand 143
DISASM subcommand 133 SVCMAP subcommand 367
DISPLAY subcommand 135 TSO subcommand 370
DLINK subcommand 130 TSOEDIT subcommand 371
DSAT subcommand 137 TSOLIST subcommand 372
DSNAME subcommand 141 USAGE subcommand 373
DVOL subcommand 149 VERIFY subcommand 378
EDIT subcommando 151 VMAP function 384
ENCODE subcommand 155 VPRINT subcommand 390
EXCLUDE subcommand 157 VTOC subcommand 392
EXEC subcommand 163 VUSE subcommand 400
FILTER function 166 WHOHAS subcommand 403
FIND subcommand 169 WORKPAD function 404
FINDMOD subcommand 179 XISPMODE 30
FIXPDS subcommnd 182 XREF subcommand 411
FSE subcommand 191 OPTIONS subcommand 299
GO function 193 OUTCOPY subcommand 300
HELP subcommand 194
HISTORY subcommand 199
IDCAMS subcommand 209 P
IF subcommand 214
ISPF subcommand 221 parallel function
ISPMODE 30 PEDIT 307
ISPXEQ cmnd 30 pattern member name 32
ISPXEQ function 223 PATTERN subcommand 302
LIST subcommand 226 PBROWSE function 303
LISTA function 233 PDS046I message 65
LISTC function 240 PDSMAN/MVS statistics 58

438 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Index

PEDIT function 307 Subcommand

block line commands 316 ABE 53
line commands 316 ACFCOMP 54
primary commands 312 ALIAS 55
PGMDOC subcommand 322 ATTRIB 57, 60
placeholder 32 BLK3380 65
primary commands BLK3390 67
defined 53 BLK9345 69
PRINT subcommand 323 BROWSE 72
profile manager function 325 CALC 74
PROFMAN function CAX 75
line commands 326 CHANGE 78
primary commands 326 CMDTBL 80
PVIEW function 321 COMBINE 85
COMPARE 88
COMPDIR 89
Q COMPRESS 93
CONDEND 95
QUIT subcommand 329 CONTROL 97
COPY 104
CREATE 112
R CSECTS 115
DCF 121
READOBJ subcommand 329 DDNAME 122
RECALL subcommand 331 DECODE 127
release space 183 DELETE 128
remarks DELINK 130
for source members 59 DIRENTRY 131
load members 63 DISASM 132
remove directory blocks 182 DSAT 136
RENAME subcommand 332 DSNAME 140
REPLACE DUP 141
considerations 343 DVOL 148
REPLACE subcommand 334 EDIT 150
Reply required 267 EDREC 153
REPRO subcommand 345 ENCODE 154
RESTORE Subcommand 347 END 155
resurrect member 347 EXCLUDE 156
REVIEW subcommand 351 EXEC 162
FILTER 165
FIND 167
S FINDMOD 178
FIXPDS 180
SCRATCH subcommand 128
FSE 189
SEPARATE subcommand 353
GO 192
session log 98
HELP 194
SHR update
HEX 195
ALIAS 57
HISTORY 196
COPY 111
IDCAMS 208
RESTORE 350
IF 211
SEPARATE 354
ISPF 221
single subcommand mode 30
ISPMODE 221
SMPGEN
ISPXEQ 222
guidelines for operation 358
LIST 225
SMPGEN subcommand 356
LISTA 232
STATUS function 364
LISTC 239

Command Reference 439

Index

LISTF 248 T
LISTGRP 257
LISTV 258 TSO subcommand 369
LLA 264 TSOEDIT subcommand 370
MAP 272 TSOLIST subcommand 372
MASK 276
MEMBERS 278
MEMLIST 279 U
NUCMAP 294
OPTIONS 299 underlines 39
OUTCOPY 300 underscores 137
PATTERN 302 in member name matching 419
PBROWSE 303 update
PEDIT 307 COPY 111
PGMDOC 322 SEPARATE 354
PRINT 323 update protection 421
PROFMAN 325 USAGE
PVIEW 321 message PDS292I 403
QUIT 329 USAGE subcommand 373
READOBJ 329
RECALL 331
RENAME 332 V
REPLACE 334
REPRO 345 VERIFY subcommand 377
RESTORE 347 vertical copybook mode 312
REVIEW 351 VIEW Function 266
SCRATCH 128 VMAP function
SEPARATE 353 block line commands 386
SMPGEN 356 line commands 385
STATUS 364 primary commands 384
SUBLIST 361 VPRINT subcommand 389
SUBMIT 363 VTOC subcommand 391
SVCMAP 366 VUSE subcommand 399
TSO 369
TSOEDIT 370
TSOLIST 372 W
USAGE 373
WHOHAS
VERIFY 377
message PDS292I 403
VIEW 266
WHOHAS subcommand 402
VMAP 383
WORKPAD function 403
VPRINT 389
block line commands 409
VTOC 391
line commands 407
VUSE 399
primary commands 405
WHOHAS 402
WORKPAD 403
XREF 410
ZAP 413
X
subcommands 32, 53 X line commands 53
defined 53 XREF subcommand 410
SUBLIST subcommand 361 XX block line commands 53
SUBMIT subcommand 363
SVCMAP subcommand 366
Z
ZAP function 413
block line commands 415

440 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1

 Index

line commands 415

primary commands 414

Command Reference 441

Index

442 Serena® StarTool® FDM 7.7.1